Philips L04
This document was uploaded by user and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this DMCA report form. Report DMCA
Overview
Download & View Philips L04 as PDF for free.
More details
- Words: 55,901
- Pages: 94
Colour Television
Chassis
L04U AA
E_14480_000.eps 120204
Contents
Page
1. Technical Specifications, Connections, and Chassis Overview 2 2. Safety and Maintenance Instructions, Warnings, and Notes 4 3. Directions for Use 6 4. Mechanical Instructions 24 5. Service Modes, Error Codes, and Faultfinding 26 6. Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms Wiring Diagram 37 Block Diagram Supply and Deflection 38 Testpoint Overview Mono Carrier 39 Block Diagram Video 40 Testpoint Overview CRT & LTI Panel 41 Block Diagram Audio/Control 42 I2C and Supply Voltage Overview 43 7. Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts Diagram Power Supply (Diagram A1) 44 Diversity Table for A1 (Power Supply) 45 Deflection (Diagram A2) 46 Diversity Table for A2 (Deflection) 47 Tuner IF (Diagram A3) 48 Hercules (Diagram A4) 49 Features & Connectivities (Diagram A5) 50 Class D - Audio Amplifier (Diagram A6) 51 Audio Amplifier (Diagram A7) 52 Rear I/O Cinch (Diagram A8) 53 Front Control (Diagram A9) 54 DVD Power Supply (Reserved) (Diagram A10)55 CRT Panel (Diagram B1) 62 ECO Scavem Panel (Diagram B2) 63 Side AV + Headphone Panel (Diagram D) 66 Top Control Panel (Diagram E) 68 Linearity & Panorama Panel (Diagram G) 69
Contents 8. 9.
10 11
Page
LTI/CTI Interface Panel (Diagram H) Front Interface Panel (Diagram J) Alignments Circuit Descriptions Abbreviation List IC Data Sheets Spare Parts List (not applicable) Revision List
70 72 73 81 91 92 93 94
71 72
PWB 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 64-65 64-65 67 68 69
© Copyright 2004 Philips Consumer Electronics B.V. Eindhoven, The Netherlands. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, or otherwise without the prior permission of Philips.
Published by BB 0462 Service PaCE
Printed in the Netherlands
Subject to modification
EN 3122 785 14430
EN 2
1.
Technical Specifications, Connections, and Chassis Overview
L04U AA
1. Technical Specifications, Connections, and Chassis Overview Note: Described specifications are valid for the whole product range. Note: Figures below can deviate slightly from the actual situation, due to different set executions.
1.1
1.2
Note: The following connector color abbreviations are used (acc. to DIN/IEC 757): Bk= Black, Bu= Blue, Gn= Green, Gy= Grey, Rd= Red, Wh= White, Ye= Yellow.
Technical Specifications 1.2.1
1.1.1
Top Control and Front / Side Connections
Reception Tuning system Color systems Sound systems Channel selections IF picture carrier Aerial input A/V Connections
1.1.2
Connections
: : : : : : :
FRONT I/O PLL NTSC BTSC 181, full cable 45.75 MHz 75 Ohm, F-type NTSC M (3.58 - 4.5)
RED IR LIGHT SENSOR LED (OPTIONAL)
Miscellaneous
TOP CONTROL Audio output: : 2x5W : 2 x 10 W Power supply: Mains voltage range Mains frequency
: 90 - 140 V_ac : 60 Hz
Ambient conditions: Temperature range Maximum humidity
: +5 to +45 deg. C : 90 % R.H.
Power consumption: Normal operation Standby
- VOLUME
+
- PROGRAM +
P
SIDE I/O
R AUDIO L VIDEO
E_14480_045.eps 170204
Figure 1-1 Top control and Front / Side connections : from 79 W (20”) : to 119 W (32”) : <1W
Audio / Video In Ye - Video (CVBS) 1 V_pp / 75 ohm Wh - Audio - L 0.2 V_rms / 10 kohm Rd - Audio - R 0.2 V_rms / 10 kohm Bk - Headphone 8 - 600 Ohm / 4 mW 1.2.2
H kq kq ot
Rear Connections
75 Ohm
MONITOR OUT
AV2 IN
AV1 IN
VIDEO
Y
V
V
L/Mono
Pb
L
L
Pr
R
R
AUDIO R
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO E_14480_047.eps 110204
Figure 1-2 Rear connections Aerial In - F-type
Coax, 75 ohm
D
Technical Specifications, Connections, and Chassis Overview kq kq kq
YUV In Bu - U Rd - V Gn - Y
jq jq jq
AV1 In Ye - Video (CVBS) 1 V_pp / 75 ohm Wh - Audio - L 0.5 V_rms / 10 kohm
1.3
jq jq
1.
EN 3
0.5 V_rms / 10 kohm
jq
AV2 In Ye - Video (CVBS) 1 V_pp / 75 ohm Wh - Audio - L 0.5 V_rms / 10 kohm Rd - Audio - R 0.5 V_rms / 10 kohm
jq jq jq
AV2 In (SVHS) 1 - Ground 2 - Ground 3 -Y 4 -C
H H jq jq
Rd - Audio - R
Monitor Out Ye - Video (CVBS) 1 V_pp / 75 ohm Wh - Audio - L 0.5 V_rms / 1 kohm Rd - Audio - R 0.5 V_rms / 1 kohm
0.7 V_pp / 75 ohm 0.7 V_pp / 75 ohm 0.7 V_pp / 75 ohm
L04U AA
GND GND 1 V_pp / 75 ohm 0.3 V_pp / 75 ohm
Chassis Overview
B1
CRT
B2
ECO SCAVEM
D
H
CRT PANEL
SIDE AV PANEL + HEADPHONE
LTT/CTI INTERFACE PANEL
MONO CARRIER
G
LINEARITY & PANORAMA PANEL
TOP CONTROL PANEL
E
FRONT INTERFACE PANEL
J
POWER SUPPLY
A1
LINE DEFLECTION
A2
TUNER IF
A3
HERCULES
A4
FEATURES & CONNECTIVITIES
A5
CLASS D AUDIO AMPLIFIER
A6
AUDIO AMPLIFIER
A7
REAR I/O CINCH
A8
FRONT CONTROL
A9
DVD POWER SUPPLY
A10 E_14480_046.eps 170204
Figure 1-3 PWB location
EN 4
2.
L04U AA
Safety and Maintenance Instructions, Warnings, and Notes
2. Safety and Maintenance Instructions, Warnings, and Notes 2.1
Safety Instructions
2.3
•
Safety regulations require that during a repair: • Due to the chassis concept, a very large part of the circuitry (incl. deflection) is 'hot'. Therefore, connect the set to the mains via an isolation transformer. • Replace safety components, indicated by the symbol h, only by components identical to the original ones. Any other component substitution (other than original type) may increase risk of fire or electrical shock hazard. • Wear safety goggles when you replace the CRT. Safety regulations require that after a repair, you must return the set in its original condition. Pay, in particular, attention to the following points: • General repair instruction: as a strict precaution, we advise you to re-solder the solder connections through which the horizontal deflection current is flowing. In particular this is valid for the: 1. Pins of the line output transformer (LOT). 2. Fly-back capacitor(s). 3. S-correction capacitor(s). 4. Line output transistor. 5. Pins of the connector with wires to the deflection coil. 6. Other components through which the deflection current flows. Note: This re-soldering is advised to prevent bad connections due to metal fatigue in solder connections, and is therefore only necessary for television sets more than two years old. • Route the wire trees and EHT cable correctly and secure them with the mounted cable clamps. • Check the insulation of the mains cord for external damage. • Check the strain relief of the mains cord for proper function, to prevent the cord from touching the CRT, hot components, or heat sinks. • Check the electrical DC resistance between the mains plug and the secondary side (only for sets that have an isolated power supply). Do this as follows: 1. Unplug the mains cord and connect a wire between the two pins of the mains plug. 2. Turn on the main power switch (keep the mains cord unplugged!). 3. Measure the resistance value between the pins of the mains plug and the metal shielding of the tuner or the aerial connection of the set. The reading should be between 4.5 MΩ and 12 MΩ. 4. Switch the TV 'off' and remove the wire between the two pins of the mains plug. • Check the cabinet for defects, to prevent the possibility of the customer touching any internal parts.
2.2
Maintenance Instructions We recommend a maintenance inspection carried out by qualified service personnel. The interval depends on the usage conditions: • When a customer uses the set under normal circumstances, for example in a living room, the recommended interval is three to five years. • When a customer uses the set in an environment with higher dust, grease, or moisture levels, for example in a kitchen, the recommended interval is one year. • The maintenance inspection includes the following actions: 1. Perform the 'general repair instruction' noted above. 2. Clean the power supply and deflection circuitry on the chassis. 3. Clean the picture tube panel and the neck of the picture tube.
Warnings In order to prevent damage to ICs and transistors, avoid all high voltage flashovers. In order to prevent damage to the picture tube, use the method shown in Fig. 2-1, to discharge the picture tube. Use a high voltage probe and a multi-meter (position V_dc). Discharge until the meter reading is 0 V (after approx. 30 s).
V
E_06532_007.eps 110204
Figure 2-1 Discharge picture tube •
•
• • •
All ICs and many other semiconductors are susceptible to electrostatic discharges (ESD, w). Careless handling during repair can reduce life drastically. Make sure that, during repair, you are connected with the same potential as the mass of the set by a wristband with resistance. Keep components and tools also at this potential. Available ESD protection equipment: – Complete kit ESD3 (small tablemat, wristband, connection box, extension cable and ground cable) 4822 310 10671. – Wristband tester 4822 344 13999. Together with the deflection unit and any multi-pole unit, flat square picture tubes form an integrated unit. The deflection and the multi-pole units are set optimally at the factory. We do not recommend adjusting this unit during repair. Be careful during measurements in the high voltage section and on the picture tube. Never replace modules or other components while the unit is 'on’. When you align the set, use plastic rather than metal tools. This will prevent any short circuits and the danger of a circuit becoming unstable.
2.4
Notes
2.4.1
General •
•
•
Measure the voltages and waveforms with regard to the chassis (= tuner) ground (H), or hot ground (I), depending on the tested area of circuitry. The voltages and waveforms shown in the diagrams are indicative. Measure them in the Service Default Mode (see chapter 5) with a color bar signal and stereo sound (L: 3 kHz, R: 1 kHz unless stated otherwise) and picture carrier at 475.25 MHz for PAL, or 61.25 MHz for NTSC (channel 3). Where necessary, measure the waveforms and voltages with (D) and without (E) aerial signal. Measure the voltages in the power supply section both in normal operation (G) and in standby (F). These values are indicated by means of the appropriate symbols.
Safety and Maintenance Instructions, Warnings, and Notes •
•
2.4.2
Schematic Notes •
•
•
• • •
2.4.3
All resistor values are in ohms and the value multiplier is often used to indicate the decimal point location (e.g. 2K2 indicates 2.2 kohm). Resistor values with no multiplier may be indicated with either an "E" or an "R" (e.g. 220E or 220R indicates 220 ohm). All capacitor values are expressed in micro-farads (µ= x 10^-6), nano-farads (n= x 10^-9), or pico-farads (p= x 10^12). Capacitor values may also use the value multiplier as the decimal point indication (e.g. 2p2 indicates 2.2 pF). An "asterisk" (*) indicates component usage varies. Refer to the diversity tables for the correct values. The correct component values are listed in the Electrical Replacement Parts List. Therefore, always check this list when there is any doubt.
Practical Service Precautions •
•
•
2.4.4
The picture tube panel has printed spark gaps. Each spark gap is connected between an electrode of the picture tube and the Aquadag coating. The semiconductors indicated in the circuit diagram and in the parts lists, are interchangeable per position with the semiconductors in the unit, irrespective of the type indication on these semiconductors.
It makes sense to avoid exposure to electrical shock. While some sources are expected to have a possible dangerous impact, others of quite high potential are of limited current and are sometimes held in less regard. Always respect voltages. While some may not be dangerous in themselves, they can cause unexpected reactions - reactions that are best avoided. Before reaching into a powered TV set, it is best to test the high voltage insulation. It is easy to do, and is a good service precaution. Before powering up the TV set with the back cover off (or on a test fixture), attach a clip lead to the CRT DAG ground and to a screwdriver blade that has a well insulated handle. After the TV is powered "on" and high voltage has developed, probe the anode lead with the blade, starting at the case of the High Voltage Transformer (flyback - IFT). Move the blade to within two inches of the connector of the CRT. If there is an arc, you found it the easy way, without getting a shock! If there is an arc to the screwdriver blade, replace the part that is causing the problem: the High Voltage Transformer or the lead (if it is removable).
Lead Free Solder This set is manufactured with lead-free production technology. This is also indicated on the PWB by the PHILIPS lead-free logo (either by a service-printing or by a sticker).
P
b
Figure 2-2 Lead-free logo This set is produced with lead-free solder alloy as well as with lead-free sub-parts. It can be considered as lead-free. Due to this fact, some rules have to be respected by the workshop during a repair: • Use only lead-free soldering tin Philips SAC305 with order code 0622 149 00106. If lead-free solder paste is required, please contact the manufacturer of your soldering equipment. • Use only adequate solder tools applicable for lead-free soldering tin.
• • • •
L04U AA
2.
EN 5
Adjust your solder tool so that a temperature around 217 220 deg. C is reached at the solder joint. Do not mix lead-free soldering tin with leaded soldering tin; this will lead to unreliable solder joints! Use only original spare parts listed in this manual. These are lead-free parts! On the website www.atyourservice.ce.philips.com you can find more information on: – Aspects of lead-free technology. – BGA (de-)soldering, heating-profiles of BGAs used in Philips sets, and others
Subject Panel No. Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . .2 Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Clock Controls Activate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Specific Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Start or Stop Time . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Closed Caption Control . . . . . . . . . .31 Demo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Factory Service Locations . . . . .36-37 Format Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . .15 QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-34 Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Remote Button Descriptions . . . .9-10 Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . .16 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
After using the AutoProgram Control, press the CH + and – buttons to scroll through all the channels stored in the television’s memory.
HELPFUL HINT
751 Round Coaxial Cable
1
AV2 in
S-VIDEO
ANT 75‰
R
AUDIO
Pr
Pb
Y
AV1 in
AV2 in
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Monitor out
VIDEO L/Mono
S-VIDEO
2
75 ⍀
Back of TV
75 ⍀
Jack Panel Back of TV
Connect the Cable TV cable or Direct Cable Connection Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm adapter) to the 751 plug on the TV. Cable signal If you have a Cable Converter coming from Cable Company Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug from the Converter to the 751 plug on the TV.
2
Round Cable 751
Pr
Pb
Y
AV1 in
2
Back of TV
R
AUDIO
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Monitor out
VIDEO L/Mono
L04U AA
Twin Lead Wire
1
1 300 to 751 Adapter
(Outdoor or Indoor)
If your Cable TV signal or Antenna signal is a round cable (75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV. If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need to attach the antenna wires to the screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter. If you have a Cable Converter Box: Connect the Cable TV signal to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on the Converter.
ANT 75‰
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
Antenna Connection our home’s signal input might come from a single (75 ohm) round cable, a Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either case the connecCombination tion to the TV is very easy. VHF/UHF Antenna
1 Y
3.
Active Control, AutoPicture, AutoSound, and Incredible Surround are trademarks of Philips Consumer Electronics Company. Copyright 2001 Philips Consumer Electronics.*Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Subject Panel No. Active Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Antenna/Cable Basic Connection . . .1 Audio/Video Connections AV1 Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Component Video Input Jacks . . . .7 Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Monitor Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . .8 S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Side AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . .5 AutoLock™ Controls Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . .27 Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . .30 TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . .24 Automatically Programming TV . .13 AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . .32 AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . .32 Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . .3 Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . .3
PANEL INDEX
EN 6 Directions for Use
3. Directions for Use
Cable Signal IN from the Cable Company
6
4 5
1 2 3
TO TV/VCR
TO TV/VCR
CABLE IN
CABLE IN
IR
IR
USB
USB
R
AUDIO
L/Mono
VIDEO
L
SPDIF
IN
Pr
Pb
Y
AV1 in
L
Y
SPDIF
Y
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO
OPTICAL SPDIF
ANT 75‰
Monitor out
R
AUDIO
Pr
Pb
Y
AV1 in
AV2 in
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Monitor out
VIDEO
L/Mono
Pr
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
OPTICAL SPDIF
VIDEO
R
AUDIO
L/Mono
AV1 in
AV2 in
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Pr
Pb
Y
S-VIDEO
Point the remote control toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating the TV with the remote.
Press the CHANNEL UP + or DOWN – button to select TV channels.
Pressing both buttons at the same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu, use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
Press the VOLUME + button to increase the sound level, or the VOLUME – button to lower the sound level.
Note: You can also press any button on the front of the TV to turn the TV ON.
o load the supplied batteries into the remote:
3. Reattach the battery lid.
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in the remote. Be sure the (+) and (-) ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the remote.
T
REMOTE CONTROL
3 4
2
1 POWER
–
CHANNEL
–
2 3
+
Remote Sensor - Sensor for activating remote control commands when the remote is used to control the TV.
VOLUME
2 3
Battery Lid
2-AA Batteries
Battery Compartment
Back of Remote
Example of Models 27PT5441/37 and 32PT5441/37
1
Standby Light Indicator - Red light will show when in the Standby Mode. Press the Power button to return the TV to it’s active state.
1
+
Example of Models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the POWER button to turn the TV ON.
3
L04U AA
ANT 75‰
Pr
VIDEO OUT
AV2 in
Pb
IN
Pb
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Monitor out
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
R
TV PASSCARD
DVD-D OUT
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
R
TV PASSCARD
DVD-D OUT
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs): This connection will be mono. 1 2 Connect the Cable Company supplied cable to the signal IN(put) plug on the back of the Cable Box. Jack Panel Back of Cable Box Using a separate round coaxial cable, connect one end to the 3 75 ⍀ OUT(put) (TO TV) plug on the back of the Cable Box. Connect the other end of the round coaxial cable to the 751 input on the back of the television. Screw it down finger tight. Round 751 Jack Panel Back of TV NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTCoaxial Cable PUT CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the cable box to CH 3 or 4. Tune the TV to the same channel and change channels at the cable box. In Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): some cases, the cable box will automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4, change channels until the picture 24 Cable Signal IN appears. from the Cable Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Company Outputs): 4 Cable Box with A/V Outputs This connection will supply Stereo sound. Connect the Cable Company supplied cable to the cable signal IN(put) plug on the back of the Cable Box. Audio Cables Video Cable Using a RCA type Video Cable, L (White) & R (Red) (Yellow) connect one end of the cable to the Video (or ANT, your cable 5 box may be labeled differently) Out jack on the cable box and the other end to the AV1 Video 6 Input on the TV. Connect one end of the Audio Left and Right Cable to the left and right Audio Out L & R Jack Panel Back of TV jacks on the cable box. Connect the other end to the AV1 Audio L & R Input jacks on the TV. NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV remote control to tune to the AV1 channel for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change channels at the cable box, not the television.
tion.
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
f your cable signal uses a cable Isteps box or decoder, follow the easy below to complete the connec-
2
Directions for Use 3. EN 7
HELPFUL HINT
With either of the VCRs (or accessory devices) ON and a prerecorded tape (CD, DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY button to view the tape on the television.
Audio and video cables are not supplied with the TV, but are available from Philips or electronics retailers.
5 6 7
S-VIDEO OUT
Pr
VIDEO OUT
7
S-VIDEO OUT
R L AUDIO OUT
7
VIDEO OUT
VCR Two (or accessory device) (Equipped with Video and Audio Output Jacks)
5
4
ANT/CABLE OUT
AV2 Connection
5
1
2
3
Back of VCR
R L AUDIO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
VCR One (or accessory device) (Equipped with Audio and Video Output Jacks)
ANT/CABLE OUT
2
Y
Pb
AV2 in
4
Audio In (Red and White)
Video In (Yellow)
S-VIDEO
3
5
3 4
2
1
Press the PLAY 䊳 button on the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
Press the AV button on the remote control to tune the TV to the side input jacks. “Front” will appear on the TV screen.
Turn the TV and the accessory device ON.
For Mono Devices: Connect one end of the audio cable from the Audio Out jack on the device to the Audio In (white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the audio cable (red and white) from the Audio Left and Right Outputs on the Camera to the Audio In (white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
Connect the video (yellow) cable from the Video output on the Camera (or accessory device) to the Video (yellow) Input located on the SIDE of the TV.
3 5
Audio Cables
Optional Headphones
1 2
VOL
4
Jack Panel of Accessory Device
S-VIDEO
R
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
Side Jack panel of TV
AUDIO VIDEO LEFT RIGHT
Video Cable
3
Front
L04U AA
4
1 2 3
AV1 Connection
R
AUDIO
L/Mono
AV1 in
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
udio and Video Side Inputs are available for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote control to tune these inputs.
5 A
3.
VIDEO
Monitor out
1
Back of TV
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for direct picture and sound connections between the TV and a VCR (or similar device) that has audio/video output jacks. Both the AV1 and AV2 Input Jack connections are shown on this page, but either one can be connected alone. Follow the easy steps below to connect your accessory device to the AV1 and AV2 IN Jacks located on the back of the TV. Connect the VIDEO (yellow) cable to the VIDEO AV1 IN (or AV2 IN) jack on the back of the TV. Connect the AUDIO (red and white) cables to the AUDIO (left and right) AV1 IN (or AV2 in) jacks on the rear of the TV. Connect the VIDEO (yellow) cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the back of the VCR (either one or two) or accessory device being used. Connect the AUDIO (red and white) cables to the AUDIO (left and right) OUT jacks on the rear of the VCR (either one or two) or accessory device being used. Turn the VCR (either one or two) or accessory device and the TV ON. Press the AV button to set the TV to its AV1or AV2 channel.
T
4
EN 8 Directions for Use
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
2
3 4
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and press the PLAY 䊳 button.
2 3
4
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO OUT
VOL
5
1
S-Video Cable
ANT/CABLE OUT
VCR or External Accessory Device (with S-Video Output)
L R AUDIO OUT
Audio Cables (Red & White)
AV2 in
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Pr
Pb
Y
AV1 in
S-VIDEO
1
HELPFUL HINT The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player or accessory digital source equipment used (for example, Y, Pb, Pr; Y, B-Y, R-Y; Y, Cr, Cb). Although abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital accessory owner’s manual for definitions and connection details.
5
3 4
2
1
back of digital signal source material, such as with DVD players. The color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the luminance (Y) signal are connected and received separately, which allows for improved color bandwidth information (not possible when using composite video or SVideo connections). Connect the Component (Y, Pb, Pr) Video OUT jacks from the DVD player (or similar device) to the (Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV. When using the Component Video Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack. Connect the red and white AUDIO CABLES to the Audio (left and right) output jacks on the rear of the accessory device to the Audio (L and R) AV1 in Input Jacks on the TV. Turn the TV and the DVD (or digital accessory device) ON. Press the AV button or the CH + or CH – buttons to scroll the available channels until CVI appears in the upper left corner of the TV screen. Insert a DVD disc into the DVD player and press the PLAY 䊳 button on the DVD Player. Component Video Cables (Green, Blue, Red)
1
Pr
Pb OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
VOL
L
5
OUT
R
2
AUDIO
AV2 in
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Pr
Pb
Y
AV1 in
Accessory Device Equipped with Component Video Outputs
COMP VIDEO
4
3
Y
R
AUDIO
L/Mono
VIDEO
Monitor out
Back of TV
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables (Red & White)
The CVI connection will be dominate over the AV1 in Video Input. When a Component Video Device is connected as described, it is best not to have a video signal connected to the AV1 in Video Input jack.
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
omponent Video inputs provide C for the highest possible color and picture resolution in the play-
7
L04U AA
5
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (S-Video) OUT jack on the back of the VCR. Then connect the other ends of the AUDIO (red and white) CABLES to the AUDIO (left and right) OUT jacks on the rear of the VCR.
Press the AV button or the CH + or CH – buttons on the remote to scroll the channels until SVHS appears in the upper left corner of the TV screen.
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the SVIDEO jack on the back of the TV. Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and white) CABLES to the AV1 in AUDIO L and R (left and right) jacks on the rear of the TV.
1
NOTE: The accessory device must have an S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to complete the connection on this page.
R
AUDIO
L/Mono
VIDEO
Monitor out
2
Back of TV
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
6 T
Directions for Use 3. EN 9
MONITOR OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
5
4
3
5
IN
OUT
VIDEO
ANTENNA IN
ANTENNA OUT
3
2
IN
L AUDIO
OUT
R
AUDIO
L/Mono
VIDEO
R
Pr
Pb
Y
AV1 in
L
AV2 in
PHONO INPUT
AUX/TV INPUT
R
4
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Monitor out
Pr
Pb
IN
R AUDIO
OUT
L
S-VIDEO
AV2 in
IN
ANTENNA IN
ANTENNA OUT
OUT
VIDEO
1
S-VIDEO
SLEEP Button Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
MUTE Button Press the mute button to eliminate the sound being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level. pressing this button for 3-4 seconds will activate the Demo Mode. (See panel 30 for more details.)
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s sound level. Press the VOL – button to decrease the TV’s sound level.
CC Button Press to activate the Closed Captioning options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button will scroll the available options on the TV screen.
MENU Button Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can be used to back out of the on-screen menu until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
AUTO SOUND Button Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from Personal (how you set the Sound Menu options), Voice (for programming with speaking only), Music (for musical type programs such as concerts), or Theatre (used when watching movies).
SMILEY Button Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf” lists. Works with all colored buttons.
AV Button Press to select an accessory signal input from the front AV Inputs.
VOL
L04U AA
2
R
AUDIO
L/Mono
Y
AV1 in
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Monitor out
VIDEO
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
QUADRASURF Buttons (Red, Green, Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store and surf up to 10 channels you choose for each colored button.
9
3.
1
T
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION: he Audio/Video (Monitor) Output jacks are great for recording with a VCR or used to connect an external audio system for better sound reproduction. AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION: Connect one end of the R(ight) and L(eft) AUDIO Back of TV (Monitor Out) jacks on the TV to the R and L audio input jacks Audio Cables on your amplifier or sound sys(Red and White) tem. Set the audio system’s volume to a normal listening level. Turn the TV and audio system ON. To adjust the volume on the audio system, you will need to change the volume at the external audio system, not the television. SECOND VCR CONNECTION: NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for SECOND VCR CONNECTION: the proper hookup of the first VCR. Back of TV Follow the instructions on how to tune to the AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape. The following steps allow you to connect a second VCR to record the program while your watching it. Connect one end of the yellow Video Audio Video Cable to the Monitor Cable Cables Out VIDEO plug. Connect the other end to the VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR. Connect one end of the red and white Audio cable from the Monitor Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the VCR. 1st VCR Turn the Second VCR ON, (refer to panel 4 for insert a VHS tape and it’s proper connection) 2nd VCR with Audio and ready to record what’s being Video Input Jacks viewed on the TV screen.
8
EN 10 Directions for Use
VOL
10
When finished, press the STATUS/EXIT button to remove the menu from the TV’s screen.
6
The Language control only makes the TV’s on-screen Menu items appear in English, Spanish, or French text. It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed Caption (CC) TV shows.
HELPFUL HINT
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button repeatedly to select English, Francais (French), or Español (Spanish).
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the Install features until the word Language is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Install menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll though the on-screen menu until the word Install is highlighted.
Press the MENU button on the remote control to show the on-screen menu.
5
3 4
1 2 2 4
1 VOL
Main Picture Sound Features Install
3 5
2 4 6
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
Installation Langue Mode synt. Progr. auto. diter progr.
OR
Instalar Idioma Sinton a Auto Programa Editar Canal
OR
Install Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
Main Picture Sound Features Install
Fran ais
Espa ol
English
Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV owners an onscreen Language option is present. With the Language control you can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be shown in English, French, or Spanish.
11 F
L04U AA
CLOCK: Press to display the “Timer” menu. Within this menu, set the time, set the TV to tune to a certain channel at a certain time once or daily.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels or to enter certain values within the onscreen menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire. The TV will pause for a second or two before changing to the chosen channel.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons Press to select channels in ascending or descending order.
3, 4, 1, and 2 Buttons Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within the on-screen menu. Also use the CURSOR 3 or CURSOR 4 to activate or deactivate the EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
STATUS/EXIT Button Press to display the current channel number. If the on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
AUTO PICTURE Button Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from Personal (how you set the Picture Menu Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports (for any sporting event), Weak Signal (used when the signal being received is not great), or Multimedia (for video games).
FROWNIE Button Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra Surf” lists for the colored buttons. Works with all colored buttons.
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel) Press to toggle between the last viewed channel and the channel presently being viewed.
POWER Button Press to turn the TV on or off.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
Directions for Use 3. EN 11
5 6
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the on-screen menu from the TV’s screen.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT button to select either Antenna, Cable, or Auto mode.
Press CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll the Install features until the words Tuner Mode is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT button to display the Install menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Install is highlighted.
1 2 4
HELPFUL HINTS
Install Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
OR
Install Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
OR
English Auto
English Cable
English Antenna
Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available. When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available. When AUTO is selected, the TV will automatically set itself to the correct mode based on the type of signal it detects when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated.
VOL
6 3
Install Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
Main Picture Sound Features Install
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to start the Auto Program scanning of channels. Auto Programming will store all available channels in the TV’s memory then tune to the lowest available channel when done. When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the menu from the TV’s screen.
6
Press CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll the Install features until the words Auto Program are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Install menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Install is highlighted.
Press the MENU button on the remote to show the onscreen menu.
5
3 4
1 2
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
1 2 4
6 3 5
Auto Program Channel
Auto Program Channel
Auto Program Channel
Install Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
Main Picture Sound Features Install
HELPFUL HINTS
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
14
13
12
Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available. When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available. When AUTO is selected, the TV will automatically set itself to the correct mode based on the type of signal it detects when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated.
VOL
2 4
Main Picture Sound Features Install
L04U AA
3 4
1 2
2 4
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
our TV can automatically set itself for local area (or Cable TV) channels. This makes it easy for you to select only the TV stations in your area when the CHANNEL (+), (–) buttons are pressed.
13 Y
3.
Press the MENU button on the remote to show the onscreen menu.
CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s important for the TV to know what type of signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna). In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
Main Picture Sound Features Install
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
he TUNER MODE control T allows you to change the TV’s input signal to either ANTENNA,
12
EN 12 Directions for Use
When finished, press the STATUS/EXIT button to remove the menu from the screen.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT 2 to toggle between On or Off. If ON is selected the channels is skipped when scrolling channels with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF is selected the channels is not skipped when scrolling channels with the CH+ or CH- buttons.
Using the CURSOR DOWN 4 button, scroll the menu to highlight the word SKIPPED.
With the Channel Edit options displayed, and Channel highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add (skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON) from the TV’s memory. You can also use the NUMBERED buttons to go directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or, you can also use the CH+ or CH- to quickly scan through the channels that have not been skipped.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Channel Edit options.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the Install features until the words Channel Edit are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Install menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll though the on-screen menu until the word Install is highlighted.
1 6 2 4 7 6 VOL
On
Off
Channel Edit Channel Skipped
12
Channel Skipped
Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
Channel Edit Channel Skipped
Channel Edit Channel Skipped
Install Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
Main Picture Sound Features Install
An “X” appearing in front of any channel will indicate that channel has skip on. When the CH + or CH - buttons are used, those channels will be skipped.
HELPFUL HINTS
2 4 9 3 5 8 6 6 8
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
DNR Control - Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to turn DNR On or Off. Dynamic Noise Reduction helps to eliminate “noise” from the picture. Contrast + Control - Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to toggle the control On or OFF. The Contrast + control helps to “sharpen” the picture quality. The black portions of the picture become richer in darkness and the whites become brighter.
8
Color Temp Control - Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to select Normal, Cool, or Warm picture preferences. (Normal will keep the whites, white; Cool will make the whites, bluish; and Warm will make the whites, reddish.)
Tint Control - Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to obtain natural skin tones.
Sharpness Control - CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to improve detail in the picture.
Picture Control - Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons until lightest parts of the picture show good detail.
Color Control - Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to add or eliminate color.
7
2 3 4 5 6
1
Brightness Control - Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons until the darkest parts of the picture are as bright as you prefer.
Contrast +
DNR
Color Temp.
Tint
Sharpness
Off
On
Off
On
Normal Warm or Cool
0
50
50
Picture
65 50
50
Color
Brightness
Picture Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint Color Temp.
PICTURE MENU CONTROLS
o adjust your TV picture controls, select a channel and use the T Picture Menu Controls listed below:
15
L04U AA
9
7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6
Press the MENU button on the remote control to show the onscreen menu.
Main Picture Sound Features Install
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to C ADD or DELETE channels from the list of channels stored in the TV’s memory.
14
Directions for Use 3. EN 13
Bass: Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to adjust the control. The control will enhance the low frequency sounds.
2
AVL: (Auto Volume Leveler) Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to turn the control On or Off. When On, AVL will level out the sound being heard when sudden changes in volume occur during commercial breaks or channel changes.
Incr. Surround: Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to select between Dolby Virtual or Stereo settings (If Stereo), or select Spatial or Mono (If Mono).
SAP: Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to toggle this control to On or Off. SAP is short for Secondary Audio Programming and is sent as a third audio channel, a SAP signal can be heard apart from the current TV program sound.Note: If SAP is not present on a selected show No SAP will appear on the screen.
Sound: Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to select between Stereo or Mono settings. Note: If Stereo is not present on a selected show and the TV is placed in the Stereo mode, the sound coming from the TV will remain in the Mono mode.
4
5
6
7
3 L
Sound
Mono or Stereo
On or Off
Dolby Virtual or Stereo
Incr. Surround
SAP
Spatial or Mono
On or Off
Incr. Surround
AVL
R
50
Bass Balance
50
Treble
Treble Bass Balance AVL Incr. Surround More...
1
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to select one of the two options 4:3 or Expand 4:3. 4:3 - Standard format for the TV. Expand 4:3 - Enlarges the picture to fill out the entire screen area, eliminating the “letter box” effect.
mat. This is the format that is shown in movie theaters. when shown on a TV screen, the image will have areas of black on top and bottom of the screen.
VOL
1
1
Expand 4:3
4:3
L04U AA
Balance: Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to adjust the level of sound coming from the left and right speakers.
Treble: Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to adjust the control. The control will enhance the high frequency sounds.
HOW TO USE THE 4:3 EXPAND FORMAT CONTROL
any times while watching M movies from a DVD player the image is shown in “letter box” for-
17
3.
1
Main Picture Sound Features Install
SOUND MENU CONTROLS
o adjust your TV sound, select and T use the Sound Menu Controls listed below:
16
EN 14 Directions for Use
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the on-screen menu from the TV’s screen.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or CURSOR LEFT 1 buttons to change the AM or PM setting.
Enter the correct time by using the Numbered buttons.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Timer menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Features menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Features is highlighted. VOL
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
HELPFUL HINTS
3 4 6
7
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Main Picture Sound Features Install
10:35 PM
10:35 AM
10:-- AM
--:-- AM
Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
Remember, be sure to press “0” and then the hour number for single digit entries. You can get to the Clock setting by pressing the Clock button on the remote control. The TV’s clock settings may be lost when the TV is unplugged or when AC power to the set is interrupted.
1 6 2 5
2
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the on-screen menu from the TV’s screen.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or CURSOR LEFT 1 buttons to change the AM or PM setting.
Enter the correct time by using the Numbered buttons.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the Timer menu until Start Time or Stop Time is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Timer menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Features menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Features is highlighted.
Press the MENU button on the remote to show the onscreen menu.
NOTE: Active Control will only appear in the menu of models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37.
NOTE: The Activate Control must be set to Once or Daily for the television to turn On or Off at the specified time. See panel 21 for more details.
6 7 8
3 4 5
1 2
the same time everyday. Follow the steps below to set the Start and Stop Time.
1 7 2 5 6
3 4 7
2 5 8
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
10:-- AM
Timer Time Start Time 10:35 PM Stop Time Channel Activate Display Timer Time Start Time Stop Time 10:35 PM Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time 10:35 AM Stop Time Channel Activate Display Timer Time Start Time Stop Time 10:35 AM Channel Activate Display
--:-- AM
Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display Timer
Main Picture Sound Features Install
HELPFUL HINTS Remember, be sure to press “0” and then the hour number for single digit entries. You can get to the Clock setting by pressing the Clock button on the remote control. The TV’s clock settings may be lost when the TV is unplugged or when AC power to the set is interrupted.
VOL
Main Picture Sound Features Install
SETTING TV TO TURN ON OR OFF USING START OR STOP CONTROLS
ou can set your TV to turn itself on or off. You can set the TV to Y turn itself On or Off once or at
19
L04U AA
NOTE: Active Control will only appear in the menu of models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37.
3 4 5 6 7
1 2
Press the MENU button on the remote to show the onscreen menu.
on the screen when the STATUS/EXIT button is pressed or if the Timer Display control is turned On.
Main Picture Sound Features Install
TV CLOCK USING THE TIMER CONTROL
our television comes with an on-screen clock. During norY mal operation, the clock appears
ETTING THE
18 S
Directions for Use 3. EN 15
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display 2
7
NOTE: Active Control will only appear in the menu of models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37.
3 4 6 6
10:-- AM
Remember, be sure to press “0” and then the hour number for single digit entries. You can get to the Clock setting by pressing the Clock button on the remote control. The TV’s clock settings may be lost when the TV is unplugged or when AC power to the set is interrupted.
VOL
7
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
HELPFUL HINTS
1 6 2 5 6
2 5
Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the on-screen menu from the TV’s screen.
NOTE: The Activate Control must be set to Once or Daily for this Channel control to take effect.
Press the Numbered buttons to enter the desired start-up channel. Or, press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or CURSOR LEFT 1 or the CH+ or CHbuttons repeatedly to enter the start-up channel you want.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the Timer menu until Channel is highlighted.
With Timer selected, press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Timer menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Features menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Features is highlighted.
Main Picture Sound Features Install
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the on-screen menu from the TV’s screen.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or CURSOR LEFT 1 buttons repeatedly to select Once, Daily, or Off.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or CURSOR DOWN 4 buttons to highlight the Activate Control.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Timer menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Timer is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Features menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Features is highlighted.
Press the MENU button on the remote to show the on-screen menu.
NOTE: Active Control will only appear in the menu of models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37.
5 6 7 8
3 4
1 2
come on Once or Daily, or turned Off through the Activate control.
1 7 2 4 6
2 4 6
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
3 5 7
8
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Main Picture Sound Features Install
OR
OR
Once
Daily
Off
10:-- AM
Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
HELPFUL HINTS Remember, before setting the Timer controls, the TV’s clock must be set to the correct time, see panel 18 for details. The TV’s clock settings may be lost when the TV is unplugged or when AC power to the set is interrupted. You can get to the Clock setting by pressing the Clock button on the remote control.
VOL
Main Picture Sound Features Install
L04U AA
3 4 5 6
1 2
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
ACTIVATE CONTROL
fter you have set the Time, Start A Time, Stop Time, and Start Channel, the timer must be set to
21
3.
Press the MENU button on the remote to show the onscreen menu.
Follow these steps to select the channel.
Main Picture Sound Features Install
TV TO STARTUP ON A SPECIFIC CHANNEL
ou can select a specific channel Y that the television will tune to when the timer turns the set On.
ETTING
20 S
EN 16 Directions for Use
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or CURSOR LEFT 1 buttons repeatedly to select On or Off.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the on-screen menu from the TV’s screen.
8
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or CURSOR DOWN 4 buttons to highlight the Display Control.
With Timer highlighted, press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Timer menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Timer is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Features menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Features is highlighted.
Press the MENU button on the remote to show the onscreen menu.
7
6
5
3 4
1 2
1 7 2 4 6 VOL
Main Picture Sound Features Install
3 5 7
8
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Main Picture Sound Features Install
OR
Off
On
10:-- AM
Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
NOTE: Active Control will only appear in the menu of models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37.
2 4 6
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
VIEW TIME USING THE DISPLAY CONTROL
fter the TV’s clock has been set, you can use your TV as a clock. The Display control allows you to permanently display the time in the upper right corner of the screen.
A
OW TO
22 H
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or CURSOR LEFT 1 buttons to toggle the Active Control On or Off. When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the on-screen menu from the TV’s screen.
6
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to repeatedly until Active Control is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Features menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Features is highlighted.
5
3 4
1 2
Press the MENU button on the remote to show the onscreen menu.
1 5 2 4 VOL
Main Picture Sound Features Install
3 5
6
Features Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
OR
Features Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
Main Picture Sound Features Install
Off
On
Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
NOTE: Active Control will only appear in the menu of models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37.
2 4
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
ACTIVE CONTROL OPTIONS
he Active Control monitors and adjusts incoming video signals to help provide the best picture quality. When you choose to turn the Active Control On, the picture sharpness and noise reduction are controlled automatically. Active Control adjusts these picture settings continuously and automatically. NOTE: Active Control is only available in models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37.
T
23
Directions for Use L04U AA 3. EN 17
TV-MA -- This program is specifically designed to be viewed by adults and therefore may be unsuitable for children under 17. This type of programming contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual situations (S), or crude indecent language (L).
TV-14 -- This program contains some material that many parents would find unsuitable for children under 14 years of age. This type of programming contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or intensely suggestive dialogue (D).
7
Access Code ----
1 VOL
2 4
Confirm Code XXXX
2 4
OffStop Time Channel Activate Display
New Code ----
Access Code XXXX
Timer Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
3 5 6 7
AutoLock Block Channel Setup Code Clear All Block All Movie Rating TV Rating
Features Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
Features Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
Features Timer Rotation AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
NOTE: Active Control will only appear in the menu of models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37.
Features Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
Features Timer Access Code AutoLock XXXX Active Control Incorrect Digi. Pic. Demo
Features Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
Timer Rotation AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
L04U AA
TV RATINGS TV-Y -- Designed for a very young audience, including children ages 2-6. TV-Y7 -- It may be appropriate for children age 7 and above who have acquired the development skills needed to distinguish between make-believe and reality. TV-G -- Suitable for most audiences, this type of programming contains little or no violence, no strong language, and little or no sexual dialogue or situations. TV-PG -- This program contains material that parents may find unsuitable for younger children. Could contain Moderate violence (V), some sexual situations (S), infrequent coarse language (L), or some suggestive dialogue (D).
1 2 3 4 5 6
the rating terms for certain programming. First, let’s start by learning how to set a personal access code: Press the MENU button on the remote to display the onscreen menu. Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons until the word Features is highlighted. Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Features menu options. Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons until the words Auto Lock™ are highlighted. Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button. The screen will read, “Access Code - - - - .” Using the NUMBERED buttons, enter 0, 7, 1, 1. “XXXX” appears on the Access Code screen as you press the numbered buttons. “Incorrect Code” will appear on the screen, and you will need to enter 0, 7, 1, 1 again. The screen will ask you to enter a “New Code.” Enter a “new” 4 digit code using the NUMBERED buttons. The screen will then ask you to CONFIRM the code you just entered. Enter your new code again. “XXXX” will appear when you enter your new code and then display the AutoLock™ menu options. Proceed to the next panel to learn more...
Main Picture Sound Features Install
SETTING UP AN ACCESS CODE
ver the next few panels you’ll O learn how to block channels and get a better understanding of
25
3.
MOVIE RATINGS G: General Audience - All ages admitted. Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages. PG: Parental Guidance Suggested This programming contains material that parents may find unsuitable for younger children. PG-13: Parents Strongly Cautioned This programming contains material that parents may find unsuitable for children under the age of 13.
gram providers, that contain program content advisories. When programmed by the viewer, a TV with AutoLock™ can respond to the content advisories and block program content that may be found objectionable (such as offensive language, violence, sexual situations, etc.). This is a great feature to censor the type of viewing children may watch. AutoLock™ offers various BLOCKING controls from which to choose: Access Code - An Access Code must be set to prevent children from unblocking questionable or censored programming set by their parents. Channel Block - After an access code has been programmed, you can block individual channels including the A/V inputs. Clear All - Allows you clear all channels being blocked from your viewing set with the Channel Block Control. Block All - Allows you to block ALL channels and A/V inputs at one time. Movie Ratings - Certain blocking options exist which will block programming based on ratings patterned by the Motion Pictures Association of America. TV Ratings - Just like the Movie Ratings, programs can be blocked from viewing using standard TV ratings set by TV broadcasters.
MOVIE RATINGS Continued R: Restricted - This is programming is specifically designed for adults. Anyone under the age of 17 should only view this programming with an accompanying parent or adult guardian. NC-17: No one under the age of 17 will be admitted. - This type of programming should be viewed by adults only. X: Adults Only - This type of programming contains one or more of the following: very graphic violence, very graphic and explicit or indecent sexual acts, very coarse and intensely suggestive language.
UNDERSTANDING AUTOLOCK CONTROLS
he AutoLock™ feature is an integrated circuit that receives and processes T data sent by broadcasters, or other pro-
24
EN 18 Directions for Use
Press the CH + or CH – button to select other channels you wish to block. Repeat steps 2-3 to block the new channel.
When finished, press the STATUS/EXIT button to remove the menu from the screen.
3
4
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and can be used to enter and create a new access code.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to turn blocking ON or OFF for that channel. When ON is selected the channel will be blocked.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons until the words Block Channel are highlighted.
2
1
VOL
1
Channel 12 Blocked By AutoLock Channel Blocking Access Code ----
Block Channel
AutoLock Block Channel Setup Code Clear All Block All Movie Rating TV Rating
BLOCK CHANNELS
fter your personal access code has been set (see previous page), you are now ready to select the channels or the A/V Inputs you want to block out or censor. Once you’ve entered your access code and the AutoLock™ features are displayed on the screen:
26 A
Enter your Access Code to view a tuned channel that is blocked with Block Channel.
2 3
1 4
On
OffStop Time Channel Activate Display
When finished, press the STATUS/EXIT button to remove the menu from the screen.
If Block All is selected, press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to turn the control On or Off. When On is selected, ALL available channels will be blocked from viewing.
If Clear All is selected, press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to clear all blocked channels. All channels will be viewable.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to select either Clear All or Block All.
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and can be used to enter and create a new access code.
3
2
1
VOL
1
Block All
AutoLock Block Channel Setup Code Clear All Block All Movie Rating TV Rating
Clear All
AutoLock Block Channel Setup Code Clear All Block All Movie Rating TV Rating
2
1 3
On
Off
Cleared
Clear ?Stop Time Channel Activate Display
BLOCK/CLEAR ALL CHANNELS AT THE SAME TIME
fter blocking specific channels there may come a time when you want to block or clear all the channels at the same time. Once you’ve entered your access code and the AutoLock™ features are displayed on the screen:
27 A
Directions for Use L04U AA 3. EN 19
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and can be used to enter and create a new access code.
When a rating level is chosen to be blocked, any higher level rating will also be blocked from viewing. (i.e.: If “R” is selected to be blocked, NC-17 and X will automatically be blocked.)
4
Use the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button on the remote to turn the rating option On or Off.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to highlight any of the Movie Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned On (which will allow blocking) or Off (which will allow viewing).
G
1 3 VOL
Movie Rating G PG PG-13 R NC-17 X
1 3
Off
2 4
On
TV-G, TV-PG, TV-14, or TVMA).
6
5
4
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to highlight any of the TV Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned On (which will allow blocking) or Off (which will allow viewing). NOTE: Some TV RATING options also have sub-ratings. The ratings of TV-Y7, TV-PG, TV-14, TV-MA can be customized to block V (violence), FV (fantasy violence), S (sexual situations), L (coarse language), or D (suggestive dialogue). Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button on the remote to turn the TV-Y or TV-G rating On or Off. Or, press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to enter the sub-menus for the TV-Y7, TVPG, TV-14 or TV-MA ratings. If the TV-Y7, TV-PG, TV-14 or TV-MA sub-menu is accessed, press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to select one of the options (Block All, V, S, L, D, or FV). Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button on the remote to turn the option ON or OFF.
3
1 2
Block All, V, S, L TV-MA
VOL
Block All, V, S, L, D TV-14
2 4 6
Block All, V, S, L, D TV-PG
1 3 5
Off
1 3 5
On Block All, FV
Off
TV-G
TV-Y7
TV-Y
TV Rating TV-Y TV-Y7 TV-G TV-PG TV-14 TV-MA
TV RATINGS
L04U AA
3
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Movie Rating options (G, PG, PG-13, R, NC17, or X).
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to highlight the words Movie Rating.
G PG PG-13 R NC-17 X
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the TV Industry ratings. Once you’ve entered your access code and the AutoLock™ features are displayed on the screen: Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to highlight the words TV Rating. Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the TV Rating options (TV-Y, TV-Y7,
T
29
3.
1 2
AutoLock Block Channel Setup Code Clear All Block All Movie Rating TV Rating
MOVIE RATINGS
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the Movie Industry ratings. Once you’ve entered your access code and the AutoLock™ features are displayed on the screen:
T
28
EN 20 Directions for Use
Note: You can also turn the Digital Picture Demo On or Off by using on-screen menu.
1
Press the MUTE button on the remote approximately 3-4 seconds. The split screen demo appears. After 20 seconds, the TV will automatically reurn to normal operation.
sharper image with more natural motion.
VOL
1
DEMO MODE
When highlighted, each feature can be turned On or Off using the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or the CURSOR LEFT 1 buttons on the remote.
ith Demo Mode On, a split screen demo W will be shown on the screen. The Demo Mode will show the right side wih show a
3 4
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to highlight the desired feature.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Blocking Options (Blocking, Unrated, or No Rating) menu. Blocking: Might be called the “master switch” for AutoLock™. When On, ALL blocking/censoring will take place. When Off, ALL blocking is disabled. Unrated: ALL unrated programs based on the Movie Ratings or Parental (TV) Guidelines can be blocked if this feature is set to On and the Blocking feature is set to OFF. No Rating: ALL programming with NO content advisory data can be blocked if set to On and the Blocking feature is set to OFF.
1 2
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons until the words Block Options are highlighted.
OFF. Once you’ve entered your access code and the AutoLock™ features are displayed on the screen:
1 3 VOL
On
No Rating
4
On
Unrated
2 4
Digi. Pic. Demo
1 3
On
Blocking
AutoLock Setup Code Clear All Block All Movie Rating TV Rating Block Options
BLOCKING OPTIONS
utoLock™ offers the viewer other blocking features as well. With these Blocking A Options, the censoring can be turned ON or
30
1 2 VOL
Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to pick the amount of time (15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes) before the TV will turn itself off.
1 2
NOTE: An on-screen count down will appear during the last minute before the TV shuts itself off. If any button is pressed during the last minute of the countdown, the Sleeptimer setting will be cancelled.
Press the SLEEP button on the remote control and the SLEEP timer display will appear on the screen.
1 2
VOL
SLEEPTIMER
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the menu from the TV’s screen.
Press the CC button repeatedly to choose from the four Closed Caption options (CC Off, CC1, CC2, CC Mute).
our TV can be set to automatically turn itself off at a given amount of time.
Y
3
1 2
Press the CC button on the remote to display the current Closed Caption setting.
Sleep 15
CC Off
CLOSED CAPTIONING
losed Captioning (CC) allows you to read the voice content of television programs on the TV screen. Designed to help the hearing impaired, this feature uses onscreen “text boxes” to show dialogue and conversations while the TV program is in progress.
31 C
Sleep off
L04U AA
Sleep 240
Sleep 180
Sleep 120
Sleep 90
Sleep 60
Sleep 45
Sleep 30
Sleep 15
3
CC Mute
CC2
CC1
CC Off
Directions for Use 3. EN 21
2
Press the AUTO SOUND button repeatedly to toggle between the four settings. (Personal, Theatre, Music, or Voice)
1
2
NOTE: The way you choose to set the Sound Menu Controls will become your Personal setting.
Press the AUTO SOUND button on the remote control. The current Auto Sound setting will appear in the middle of the screen.
he Auto Sound feature allows the listener to select between four different factory set sound options.
T
1 2
1 2 VOL
Personal
AUTO SOUND
VOL
Sports
Voice - Preset sound options for programming where heavy dialogue is present.
Music- Preset sound options for musical programming where there is little dialogue. Dynamic Ultra Bass is included in this option.
Theatre - Preset sound options for watching movies. Dynamic Ultra Bass is included in this option.
Voice
Music
Theatre
Movies - Preset picture options for watching Video Tapes, or DVDs. Sports - Preset picture options for watching sporting events. Weak Signal - Preset picture options for watching programs where the reception is not at its best. Multimedia - Preset picture options for use with video gaming.
Multimedia
Weak Signal
6
5
4
To remove a channel from one of the SURF lists; Press the COLORED Quadra Surf button until the desired channel appears. The screen will display the channel number with a colored “Smiley” face to indicate the Colored button it relates to. While the “Smiley” face channel indicator is displayed, press the FROWNIE face button. The screen will read, “Remove item? Press .” Press the FROWNIE face button again to confirm your decision to remove the channel from the Surf list. Repeat steps 4-6 to remove other channels from Surf lists.
1 2 3
2
3 4
VOL
12
12
1
5 6
12
Added!
Remove Item? - Press
12
Select List!
L04U AA
NOTE: The way you choose to set the Picture Menu Controls will become your Personal setting.
Press the AUTO PICTURE button repeatedly to select either Personal, Movies, Sports, Weak Signal, or MULTIMEDIA picture settings.
1
Movies
12
QUADRASURF
he QuadraSurf™ control allows you set up four different personal channel Surf lists using the colored buttons (on the remote control), each holding up to ten channels in its quick viewing“list.” Press the CHANNEL (+) or (–) buttons (or the NUMBER buttons) to select a channel to add to one of the SURF lists. Press the SMILEY button on the remote control to ADD the channel to one of the SURF lists. Press the corresponding COLORED (Red, Green, Yellow or Blue) button to add the channel to that button’s Surf list. (Up to ten channels per button can be stored.) Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add additional channels (up to 10) to each of the the SURF lists.
T
33
3.
Press the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control. The current Auto Picture setting will be displayed on the screen.
Personal
AUTO PICTURE
hether you’re watching a movie or a sporting event, your TV has automatic video control settings matched for your current program source or content.
32 W
EN 22 Directions for Use
4 5
3
2
1
41
12
5
56
99
1 2 3 VOL
5
35
12
Remove Item? - Press
39
10
QUADRASURF
he Quadra Surf buttons on your remote control allow you to store up to 10 channels per button (40 total). You can even program the A/V Input channels for each button making them a “source” button. Assuming channels have now been added to the four Quadra Surf lists (the four colored buttons, see the previous page), let’s review how the feature works. Press one of the pre-programmed COLORED buttons on the remote (Red, Green, Yellow or Blue). The screen will display a smiley face with the first programmed channel for that surf list. While the colored “smiley” face still appears on the screen, press the same COLORED button on the remote to tune the second channel programmed for that specific surf list. Repeatedly pressing the same COLORED button while the “smiley” face appears will tune all the programmed channels. Pressing the COLORED button again will return you to the first channel in the list. If the “smiley” face disappears from the screen and the same COLORED button is pressed, the surf channels will be displayed starting with the FIRST programmed channel again. Repeat steps 1-3 for the other three COLORED buttons (Surf lists) if desired. Any time the “smiley” face appears with the channel number, pressing the “frownie” face button will allow you to remove it from the list (see the previous page for more details).
T
34
28
22
18
TROUBLESHOOTING
TV Displays Wrong Channel or No Channels Above 13 • Repeat channel selection. • Add the desired channel numbers (using the CHANNEL EDIT control) into the TV’s memory. • Check to be sure the TUNER MODES are set to the CABLE option and run the Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
Remote Does Not Work • Check the batteries. If necessary, replace them with AA Heavy Duty (Zinc Chloride) or Alkaline batteries. • Clean the remote control and the remote control sensor window on the TV. • Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug into the outlet and push the POWER button again. • Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used. • Check to be sure the TV outlet is not on a wall switch.
No Sound • Check the VOLUME buttons. • Check the MUTE button on the remote control. • If you’re attempting to hook up auxiliary equipment, check the audio jack connections located on the front of the TV.
No Picture • Check antenna connections. Are they properly secured to the TV's ANT 751 plug? • Check the TUNER MODE control for the correct tuner setting. • Try running the Auto Program feature to find all available channels. • Press the AV button on the remote to make sure the correct signal source is selected (FRONT or Current Channel).
No Power • Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug into the outlet and push the POWER button again. • Check that the outlet is not on a wall switch. • Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
35
Directions for Use L04U AA 3. EN 23
EN 24
4.
L04U AA
Mechanical Instructions
4. Mechanical Instructions 1. Disconnect the degaussing coil [1]. 2. Release the two fixation clamps (at the mid left and mid right side of the bracket), and remove the bracket from the bottom tray, by pulling it backwards [2]. 3. Turn the chassis tray 90 degrees counter clockwise. 4. Move the panel bracket somewhat to the left and flip it 90 degrees [3], with the components towards the CRT. 5. Turn the panel bracket with the rear I/O toward the CRT. 6. Place the hook of the tray in the fixation hole of the cabinet bottom [4] and secure it.
Index of this chapter: 1. Set Disassembly 2. Service Position 3. Assy/Panel Removal 4. Set Re-assembly Note: Figures below can deviate slightly from the actual situation, due to different set executions.
4.1
Set Disassembly Warning: Be sure to disconnect the AC power from the set before opening it.
4.1.1
4.3
Assy/Panel Removal
4.3.1
Front Interface Assy/Panel Removal
Rear Cover 1. Remove all fixation screws of the rear cover (do not forget the screws that hold the rear connection panel). 2. Pull the rear cover backwards to remove it.
4.2
Service Position 1 1
Before placing the Mono Carrier in its service position, remove the Front Interface assy/panel (see paragraph “Front Interface Assy/Panel removal”) and the Side AV assy/panel (see paragraph “Side AV Assy/Panel removal”).
2
3 3 E_14480_049.eps 110204
Figure 4-2 Front interface assy/panel removal 1. Remove the complete module from the bottom plate, by pulling the two fixation clamps upward [1], while sliding the module away from the CRT [2]. Note: these clamps are difficult to access. 2. Release the two fixation clamps [3] at the side of the bracket, and lift the panel out of the bracket (it hinges at one side).
1
4.3.2
Side AV Assy/Panel Removal
2
A
E_14480_050.eps 170204
3
Figure 4-3 Side AV assy/panel removal
4
B
E_14480_048.eps 110204
Figure 4-1 Service position Mono Carrier
1. Remove the two fixation screws, and remove the complete Side AV assembly. 2. Release the two fixation clamps, and lift the panel out of the bracket.
Mechanical Instructions 4.3.3
LTI/CTI Interface Panel Removal Remove the LTI/CTI Interface panel from the Mono Carrier, by disconnecting it from connector 1212.
4.3.4
Top Control Assy/Panel Removal 1. Remove the two fixation screws. 2. Push the assy a little bit upwards, and then pull it backwards to release it from the front hinge. 3. Lift the panel from its bracket, while releasing the two fixation clamps. The panel hinges on the other side.
4.3.5
Linearity Assy/Panel Removal
2
1 1
E_14480_051.eps 110204
Figure 4-4 Linearity assy/panel removal 1. Release the two fixation clamps [1] to lift the panel out of the bracket [2].
4.4
Set Re-assembly To re-assemble the whole set, do all processes in reverse order. Note: before you mount the rear cover, perform the following checks: 1. Check whether the AC power cord is mounted correctly in its guiding brackets. 2. Check whether all cables are replaced in their original position
L04U AA
4.
EN 25
EN 26
5.
L04U AA
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
5. Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding 5.2.1
Index of this chapter: 1. Test Points 2. Service Modes 3. Problems and Solving Tips (related to CSM) 4. ComPair 5. Error Codes 6. The Blinking LED Procedure 7. Protections 8. Repair Tips
5.1
Purpose • To create a predefined setting for measurements to be made. • To override software protections. • To start the blinking LED procedure.
Test Points This chassis is equipped with test points in the service printing. In the schematics test points are identified with a rectangle box around Fxxx or Ixxx. These test points are specifically mentioned in the “Test Point Overview” as “half moons” with a dot in the center. Table 5-1 Test point overview Test point
Circuit
F508, F535, F536, F537, F552, F561, F563, F573, F664, I513, I518, I519, I524, I531, I533, I546
Power supply
Diagr. A1
F401, F412, F413, F414, F418, F452, F453, F455, Line & Frame F456, F458, F459, F460, F461, I408, I416, I417, I420, Deflection I462, I468
A2
F003, F004, I001, I002
Tuner IF
A3
F201, F203, F205, F206
Hercules
A4
F240, F241, F242
Features & Connectivities
A5
F952, F955, I951, I952
Audio Amplifier
A7
F692
Front Control
A9
F331, F332, F333, F338, F339, F341, F351, F353, F354
CRT Panel
B1
F361, F362, F381, F382
ECO Scavem
B2
Perform measurements under the following conditions: • Television set in Service Default Alignment Mode. • Video input: Color bar signal. • Audio input: 3 kHz left channel, 1 kHz right channel.
5.2
Service Default Mode (SDM)
Service Modes Service Default mode (SDM) and Service Alignment Mode (SAM) offers several features for the service technician, while the Customer Service Mode (CSM) is used for communication between the call center and the customer. This chassis also offers the option of using ComPair, a hardware interface between a computer and the TV chassis. It offers the abilities of structured troubleshooting, error code reading, and software version readout for all chassis. Minimum requirements for ComPair: a Pentium processor, a Windows OS, and a CD-ROM drive (see also paragraph "ComPair").
Specifications • Tuning frequency: 61.25 MHz (channel 3). • Color system: NTSC M. • All picture settings at 50% (brightness, color contrast, hue). • Bass, treble and balance at 50 %; volume at 25 %. • All service-unfriendly modes (if present) are disabled. The service unfriendly modes are: – Timer / Sleep timer. – Child / parental lock. – Blue mute. – Hotel / hospital mode. – Auto shut off (when no “IDENT” video signal is received for 15 minutes). – Skipping of non-favorite presets / channels. – Auto-storage of personal presets. – Auto user menu time-out. – Auto Volume Leveling (AVL). How to enter To enter SDM, use one of the following methods: • Press the following key sequence on the remote control transmitter: “062596” directly followed by the MENU button (do not allow the display to time out between entries while keying the sequence). • Short jumper wires 9252 and 9275 on the family board (see Fig. 8-1) and apply AC power. Then press the power button (remove the short after start-up). Caution: Entering SDM by shorting wires 9252 and 9275 will override the +8V-protection. Do this only for a short period. When doing this, the service-technician must know exactly what he is doing, as it could damage the television set. • Or via ComPair. After entering SDM, the following screen is visible, with SDM in the upper right corner of the screen to indicate that the television is in Service Default Alignment Mode.
00028 L4LUS1 0.12 SDM ERR 0 0 0 0 0 OP 000 057 140 032 120 128 000
Table 5-2 Software cluster overview SW Cluster SW name
UOC Type 12 NC
Features
L4LUS1
L04US1_x.y TDA12000 9352 753 88557 CC+BTSC
L4LUS1
L04US1_x.y TDA12001 9352 753 89557 CC+BTSC+CMB+DW
L4LUS1
L04US1_x.y TDA12001 9352 753 35557 CC+BTSC+CMB
U= USA (NAFTA), S= Stereo dBx, CC= Closed Caption, BTSC= Broadcast Television Systems Committee, CMB= Comb Filter, DW = Double Window E_14480_066.eps 190204
Figure 5-1 SDM menu
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding How to navigate Use one of the following methods: • When you press the MENU button on the remote control, the set will switch on the normal user menu in the SDM mode. • On the TV, press and hold the VOLUME DOWN and press the CHANNEL DOWN for a few seconds, to switch from SDM to SAM and reverse. How to exit Switch the set to STANDBY by pressing the POWER button on the remote control transmitter or the television set. If you turn the television set off by removing the AC power (i.e., unplugging the television) without using the POWER button, the television set will remain in SDM when AC power is reapplied, and the error buffer is not cleared. 5.2.2
Service Alignment Mode (SAM) Purpose • To change option settings. • To display / clear the error code buffer. • To perform alignments. Specifications • Operation hours counter (maximum five digits displayed). • Software version, Error codes, and Option settings display. • Error buffer clearing. • Option settings. • AKB switching. • Software alignments (Tuner, White Tone, Geometry & Audio). • NVM Editor. • ComPair Mode switching. How to enter To enter SAM, use one of the following methods: • Press the following key sequence on the remote control transmitter: “062596" directly followed by the OSD/ STATUS button (do not allow the display to time out between entries while keying the sequence). • Or via ComPair. After entering SAM, the following screen is visible, with SAM in the upper right corner of the screen to indicate that the television is in Service Alignment Mode.
00028 L4LUS1 0.12 ERR 0 0 0 0 0
SAM
OP 000 057 140 032 120 128 000 . Clear . Options . AKB . Tuner . White Tone . Geometry . Audio . NVM Editor . ComPair
Clear ? On
on E_14480_067.eps 190204
Figure 5-2 SAM menu
L04U AA
5.
EN 27
Menu explanation 1. LLLLL. This represents the run timer. The run timer counts normal operation hours, but does not count standby hours. 2. AAABCD-X.Y. This is the software identification of the main microprocessor: – A= the project name (L04). – B= the region: E= Europe, A= Asia Pacific, U= NAFTA, L= LATAM. – C= the software diversity: • Europe: T= 1 page TXT, F= Full TXT, V= Voice control. • LATAM and NAFTA: N= Stereo non-dBx, S= Stereo dBx. • Asian Pacific: T= TXT, N= non-TXT, C= NTSC. • ALL regions: M= mono, D= DVD, Q= Mk2. – D= the language cluster number. – X= the main software version number (updated with a major change that is incompatible with previous versions). – Y= the sub software version number (updated with a minor change that is compatible with previous versions). 3. SAM. Indication of the Service Alignment Mode. 4. Error Buffer. Shows all errors detected since the last time the buffer was erased. Five errors possible. 5. Option Bytes. Used to set the option bytes. See “Options” in the Alignments section for a detailed description. Seven codes are possible. 6. Clear. Erases the contents of the error buffer. Select the CLEAR menu item and press the MENU RIGHT key. The content of the error buffer is cleared. 7. Options. Used to set the option bits. See “Options” in the Alignments section for a detailed description. 8. AKB. Used to disable (Off) or enable (On) the “black current loop” (AKB= Auto Kine Bias). 9. Tuner. Used to align the tuner. See “Tuner” in the Alignments section for a detailed description. 10. White Tone. Used to align the white tone. See “White Tone” in the Alignments section for a detailed description. 11. Geometry. Used to align the geometry settings of the television. See “Geometry” in the Alignments section for a detailed description. 12. Audio. No audio alignment is necessary for this television set. 13. NVM Editor. Can be used to change the NVM data in the television set. See table “NVM data” further on. 14. ComPaIr. Can be used to switch on the television to In System Programming (ISP) mode, for software uploading via ComPair. Caution: When this mode is selected without ComPair connected, the TV will be blocked. Remove the AC power to reset the TV. How to navigate • In SAM, select menu items with the MENU UP/DOWN keys on the remote control transmitter. The selected item will be highlighted. When not all menu items fit on the screen, use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to display the next / previous menu items. • With the MENU LEFT/RIGHT keys, it is possible to: – Activate the selected menu item. – Change the value of the selected menu item. – Activate the selected submenu. • In SAM, when you press the MENU button twice, the set will switch to the normal user menus (with the SAM mode still active in the background). To return to the SAM menu press the MENU or STATUS/EXIT button. • When you press the MENU key in while in a submenu, you will return to the previous menu. How to store SAM settings To store the settings changed in SAM mode, leave the top level SAM menu by using the POWER button on the remote control transmitter or the television set.
EN 28
5.
L04U AA
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
How to exit Switch the set to STANDBY by pressing the POWER button on the remote control transmitter or the television set. If you turn the television set “off” by removing the AC power (i.e., unplugging the television) without using the POWER button, the television set will remain in SAM when AC power is re-applied, and the error buffer is not cleared. 5.2.3
• •
Press the MENU, STATUS/EXIT, or POWER button on the remote control transmitter. Press the POWER button on the television set.
5.3
Problems and Solving Tips Related to CSM
5.3.1
Picture Problems
Customer Service Mode (CSM) Purpose The Customer Service Mode shows error codes and information on the TV’s operation settings. The call center can instruct the customer (by telephone) to enter CSM in order to identify the status of the set. This helps the call center to diagnose problems and failures in the TV set before making a service call. The CSM is a read-only mode; therefore, modifications are not possible in this mode. How to enter To enter CSM, press the following key sequence on the remote control transmitter: “123654” (do not allow the display to time out between entries while keying the sequence). Upon entering the Customer Service Mode, the following screen will appear:
1 00028 L4LUS1 0.12 CSM 2 CODES 0 0 0 0 0 3 OP 000 057 140 032 120 128 000 4 nnXXnnnn/nnX 5 P3C-1 6 NOT TUNED 7 NTSC 8 STEREO 9 CO 50 CL 50 BR 50 HU 0 0 AVL Off BS 50
Note: The problems described below are all related to the TV settings. The procedures used to change the value (or status) of the different settings are described. Picture too dark or too bright If: • The picture improves when you have press the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter, or • The picture improves when you enter the Customer Service Mode, Then: 1. Press the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter repeatedly (if necessary) to choose PERSONAL picture mode. 2. Press the MENU button on the remote control transmitter. This brings up the normal user menu. 3. In the normal user menu, use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to highlight the PICTURE sub menu. 4. Press the MENU LEFT/RIGHT keys to enter the PICTURE sub menu. 5. Use the MENU UP/DOWN keys (if necessary) to select BRIGHTNESS. 6. Press the MENU LEFT/RIGHT keys to increase or decrease the BRIGHTNESS value. 7. Use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to select PICTURE. 8. Press the MENU LEFT/RIGHT keys to increase or decrease the PICTURE value. 9. Press the MENU button on the remote control transmitter twice to exit the user menu. 10. The new PERSONAL preference values are automatically stored. White line around picture elements and text
E_14480_068.eps 190204
Figure 5-3 CSM menu Menu explanation 1. Indication of the decimal value of the operation hours counter, Software identification of the main microprocessor (see "Service Default or Alignment Mode" for an explanation), and the service mode (CSM= Customer Service Mode). 2. Displays the last five errors detected in the error code buffer. 3. Displays the option bytes. 4. Displays the type number version of the set. 5. Reserved item for P3C call centers (AKBS stands for Advanced Knowledge Base System). 6. Indicates the television is receiving an "IDENT" signal on the selected source. If no "IDENT" signal is detected, the display will read "NOT TUNED" 7. Displays the detected Color system (e.g. PAL/NTSC). 8. Displays the detected Audio (e.g. stereo/mono). 9. Displays the picture setting information. 10. Displays the sound setting information. How to exit To exit CSM, use one of the following methods:
If: The picture improves after you have pressed the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter, Then: 1. Press the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter repeatedly (if necessary) to choose PERSONAL picture mode. 2. Press the MENU button on the remote control transmitter. This brings up the normal user menu. 3. In the normal user menu, use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to highlight the PICTURE sub menu. 4. Press the MENU LEFT/RIGHT keys to enter the PICTURE sub menu. 5. Use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to select SHARPNESS. 6. Press the MENU LEFT key to decrease the SHARPNESS value. 7. Press the MENU button on the remote control transmitter twice to exit the user menu. 8. The new PERSONAL preference value is automatically stored. Snowy picture Check CSM line 6. If this line reads “Not Tuned”, check the following: • Antenna not connected. Connect the antenna. • No antenna signal or bad antenna signal. Connect a proper antenna signal.
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding •
The tuner is faulty (in this case line 2, the Error Buffer line, will contain error number 10). Check the tuner and replace/ repair the tuner if necessary.
5.4.2
If: • The picture improves after you have pressed the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter,
Menu text not sharp enough If: • The picture improves after you have pressed the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter, Then: 1. Press the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter repeatedly (if necessary) to choose PERSONAL picture mode. 2. Press the MENU button on the remote control transmitter. This brings up the normal user menu. 3. In the normal user menu, use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to highlight the PICTURE sub menu. 4. Press the MENU LEFT/RIGHT keys to enter the PICTURE sub menu. 5. Use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to select PICTURE. 6. Press the MENU LEFT key to decrease the PICTURE value. 7. Press the MENU button on the remote control transmitter twice to exit the user menu. 8. The new PERSONAL preference value is automatically stored.
5.4.1
Introduction ComPair (Computer Aided Repair) is a service tool for Philips Consumer Electronics products. ComPair is a further development on the European DST (service remote control), which allows faster and more accurate diagnostics. ComPair has three big advantages: ComPair helps you to quickly get an understanding on how to repair the chassis in a short time by guiding you systematically through the repair procedures. ComPair allows very detailed diagnostics (on I2C level) and is therefore capable of accurately indicating problem areas. You do not have to know anything about I2C commands yourself because ComPair takes care of this. ComPair speeds up the repair time since it can automatically communicate with the chassis (when the microprocessor is working) and all repair information is directly available. When ComPair is installed together with the SearchMan electronic manual of the defective chassis, schematics and PWBs are only a mouse click away.
EN 29
Specifications
The ComPair faultfinding program is able to determine the problem of the defective television. ComPair can gather diagnostic information in two ways: • Automatic (by communication with the television): ComPair can automatically read out the contents of the entire error buffer. Diagnosis is done on I2C level. ComPair can access the I2C bus of the television. ComPair can send and receive I2C commands to the micro controller of the television. In this way, it is possible for ComPair to communicate (read and write) to devices on the I2C busses of the TV-set. • Manually (by asking questions to you): Automatic diagnosis is only possible if the micro controller of the television is working correctly and only to a certain extend. When this is not the case, ComPair will guide you through the faultfinding tree by asking you questions (e.g. Does the screen give a picture? Click on the correct answer: YES / NO) and showing you examples (e.g. Measure test-point I7 and click on the correct waveform you see on the oscilloscope). You can answer by clicking on a link (e.g. text or a waveform picture) that will bring you to the next step in the faultfinding process. By a combination of automatic diagnostics and an interactive question / answer procedure, ComPair will enable you to find most problems in a fast and effective way.
Then: 1. Press the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter repeatedly (if necessary) to choose PERSONAL picture mode. 2. Press the MENU button on the remote control transmitter. This brings up the normal user menu. 3. In the normal user menu, use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to highlight the PICTURE sub menu. 4. Press the MENU LEFT/RIGHT keys to enter the PICTURE sub menu. 5. Use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to select COLOR. 6. Press the MENU RIGHT key to increase the COLOR value. 7. Press the MENU button on the remote control transmitter twice to exit the user menu. 8. The new PERSONAL preference value is automatically stored.
ComPair
5.
ComPair consists of a Windows based faultfinding program and an interface box between PC and the (defective) product. The ComPair interface box is connected to the PC via a serial or RS232 cable. In this chassis, the ComPair interface box and the TV communicate via a bi-directional service cable via the service connector.
Black and white picture
5.4
L04U AA
Beside fault finding, ComPair provides some additional features like: • Up- or downloading of pre-sets. • Managing of pre-set lists. • Emulation of the Dealer Service Tool (DST). • If both ComPair and SearchMan (Electronic Service Manual) are installed, all the schematics and the PWBs of the set are available by clicking on the appropriate hyperlink. Example: Measure the DC-voltage on capacitor C2568 (Schematic/Panel) at the Mono-carrier. – Click on the “Panel” hyperlink to automatically show the PWB with a highlighted capacitor C2568. – Click on the “Schematic” hyperlink to automatically show the position of the highlighted capacitor. • Software downloading (as soon as this is supported by ComPair). 5.4.3
How To Connect 1. First, install the ComPair Browser software (see the Quick Reference Card for installation instructions). 2. Connect the RS232 interface cable between a free serial (COM) port of your PC and the PC connector (marked with “PC”) of the ComPair interface. 3. Connect the mains adapter to the supply connector (marked with “POWER 9V DC”) of the ComPair interface. 4. Switch the ComPair interface “off”. 5. Switch the television set “off” with the Power switch. 6. Connect the ComPair interface cable between the connector on the rear side of the ComPair interface (marked with “I2C”) and the ComPair (or Service) connector at the rear side of the TV (for its location see chapter “Service Modes, ....”). 7. Plug the mains adapter in a mains outlet, and switch the interface “on”. The green and red LEDs light up together. The red LED extinguishes after approx. 1 second while the green LED remains lit.
EN 30
5.
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
L04U AA
8. Start the ComPair program and read the “Introduction” chapter.
buffer, it is displayed at the left side and all other errors shift one position to the right. 5.5.1
TO SERVICE CONNECTOR
PC
VCR
Power 9V DC
How To Read The Error Buffer You can read the error buffer in 3 ways: • On screen via the SAM (if you have a picture). Examples: – ERROR: 0 0 0 0 0 : No errors detected – ERROR: 6 0 0 0 0 : Error code 6 is the last and only detected error – ERROR: 9 6 0 0 0 : Error code 6 was detected first and error code 9 is the last detected (newest) error • Via the blinking LED procedure (when you have no picture). See “The Blinking LED Procedure”. • Via ComPair.
I2C
E_06532_008.eps 190204
Figure 5-4 ComPair Interface connection 5.5.2 5.4.4
The error code buffer is cleared in the following cases: • By using the CLEAR command in the SAM menu: – To enter SAM, press the following key sequence on the remote control transmitter: “062596” directly followed by the OSD/STATUS button (do not allow the display to time out between entries while keying the sequence). – Make sure the menu item CLEAR is highlighted. Use the MENU UP/DOWN buttons, if necessary. – Press the MENU RIGHT button to clear the error buffer. The text on the right side of the “CLEAR” line will change from “CLEAR?” to “CLEARED” • If the contents of the error buffer have not changed for 50 hours, the error buffer resets automatically.
ComPair order codes: • ComPair Software: ST4191. • ComPair Interface Box: 4822 727 21631. • AC Adapter: T405-ND. • ComPair Quick Start Guide: ST4190. Note: If you encounter any problems, contact your local support desk.
5.5
Error Codes The error code buffer contains all errors detected since the last time the buffer was erased. The buffer is written from left to right. When an error occurs that is not yet in the error code
5.5.3
How To Clear The Error Buffer
How To Order
Note: If you exit SAM by disconnecting the AC power from the television set, the error buffer is not reset.
Error Codes In case of non-intermittent faults, write down the errors present in the error buffer and clear the error buffer before you begin the repair. This ensures that old error codes are no longer present. If possible, check the entire contents of the error buffer. In some situations, an error code is only the result of another error and not the actual cause of the problem (for example, a fault in the protection detection circuitry can also lead to a protection). Table 5-3 Error code overview Error Device 0
Error description
Check item
Diagram
Not applicable No Error
1
Not applicable X-Ray/Over-voltage protection (US only)
2411, 2412, 2413, 6404, 6411, 6412
A2
2
Not applicable High beam (BCI) protection
3404, 7405
A2
3
Not applicable Vertical guard protection
3466, 7451, 7452, 7453, 7454
A2
4
Tuner
1000, 5010, (PIP Module)
F2
5
Not applicable +5v protection
7604, 7605
A5
6
I2C bus
7200, 3207, 3214
A4
7
Not applicable -
-
8
Not applicable -
-
9
24C16
I2C error while communicating with the EEPROM
7601, 3604, 3605
A5
I2C error while communicating with 2nd tuner General I2C error
-
10
Tuner
I2C error while communicating with the PLL tuner
1000, 5001
A3
11
TDA6107/A
Black current loop instability protection
7330, 3351, CRT
B1
12
SDA9488X
I2C error while communicating with the PIP processor
7242 (PIP Module)
F1
13
Not applicable -
-
14
DVD Loader
DVD Interface module
I2C error while communicating with the DVD Interface module
DVD Loader
15
TDA9178T/N1 I2C error while communicating with LTI module
7610
H
16
TDA9887
7201
F2
17
Not applicable -
-
18
Not applicable -
-
19
TDA1200x
I2C error while communicating with SSD stereo sound decoder 7200
A4
20
TDA1200x
I2C error while communicating with video cosmic in Hercules IC 7200
A4
I2C error while communicating with PIP_Demodulator
-
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding 5.6
The Blinking LED Procedure
EN 31
NVM Editor In some cases, it can be handy if one directly can change the NVM contents. This can be done with the “NVM Editor” in SAM mode. In the next table, the default NVM values are given.
When the SDM is entered, the front LED will blink the contents of the error-buffer: • When all the error-codes are displayed, the sequence finishes with a LED blink of 1.5 seconds, • The sequence starts again.
Table 5-4 NVM default values for NAFTA-region
Protections If a fault situation is detected, an error code will be generated; and, if necessary, the television set will go into protection mode. Blinking of the red LED at a frequency of 3 Hz indicates the protection mode. In some error cases, the microprocessor does not put the set in protection mode. The error codes of the error buffer and the blinking LED procedure can be read via the Service Default Menu (SDM), or via ComPair. To get a quick diagnosis the chassis has three service modes implemented: • The Customer Service Mode (CSM). • The Service Default Mode (SDM). • The Service Alignment Mode (SAM). For a detailed mode description, see the relevant sections.
5.8
5.
Using this procedure, you can make the contents of the error buffer visible via the front LED. This is especially useful when there is no picture.
Example of error buffer: 12 9 6 0 0 After entering SDM, the following occurs: • 1 long blink of 5 seconds to start the sequence, • 12 short blinks followed by a pause of 1.5 seconds, • 9 short blinks followed by a pause of 1.5 seconds, • 6 short blinks followed by a pause of 1.5 seconds, • 1 long blink of 1.5 seconds to finish the sequence, • The sequence starts again at 12 short blinks.
5.7
5.8.1
L04U AA
Fault Finding and Repair Tips Notes: • It is assumed that the components are mounted correctly with correct values and no bad solder joints. • Before any fault finding actions, check if the correct options are set.
NAFTA Region
Address Value (dec) (hex)
EW (EW width)
19
25
PW (EW parabola width)
20
0A
HS (Horizontal shift)
21
1A
HP (Horizontal parallelogram)
22
1F
HB (Horizontal Bow)
23
1F
UCP (EW upper corner parabola)
24
1E
LCP (EW lower corner parabola)
25
28
TC (EW trapezium)
26
1A
VS (Vertical slope)
27
25
VA (Vertical amplitude)
28
1E
SC (S-Correction)
29
19
VSH (Vertical Shift)
30
1A
VX (Vertical Zoom)
31
19
VSL (Vertical scroll)
32
20
VL (Vertical linearity)
33
20
BLOR (Black level Offset - Red)
34
1D
BLOG (Black level Offset - Green)
35
13
AGC (AGC Takeover)
36
14
OIF (IF-PLL Offset)
37
26
AGC10 (AGC 10)
38
2
H60 (60 Hz Horizontal Shift)
39
9
PF_SC_PWL (Peaking Frequency, Soft Clipper, Peak White Limit)
40
0A
COR (Phase 1 time constant, Video Dependant Coring, Ratio & White stretch)
41
0C
60 Hz Vertical amplitude
42
40
YD & CL
43
58
RGB amplitude for full teletext mode
46
8
NVM_TABLE_VERSION
60
19
OPTION_TABLE_VERSION
61
8
CVI_BLOR
62
15
CVI_BLOG
63
0F
TXT Brightness
64
17
V60 offset (60Hz Vertical Amplitude)
66
FE
FOAB, CHSE
139
3
SPR, WS
140
0
VMA, SVM
141
32
NVM_SOC_SMD
142
3
CCC_Preset_Gain_Red
143
1F
CCC_Preset_Gain_Green
144
1F
CCC_Preset_Gain_Blue
145
1F
NVM_FMWS
149
3
NVM_ASD_SC1_THR
150
10
NVM_CRYSTAL_ALIGN
208
3F
Last Brightness (VID PP others)
264
2A
Last Color (VID PP others)
265
30
Last Contrast (VID PP others)
266
55
Last Sharpness (VID PP others)
267
37
Last Hue (VID PP others)
268
32
Last Colour Temperature (VID PP others)
269
1
White-D Cool Red
294
FD
White-D Cool Blue
296
5
White-D Normal Red
297
1A
White-D Normal Green
298
20
White-D Normal Blue
299
1B
White-D Warm Red
300
2
White-D Warm Blue
302
FA
Last Volume
343
14
Last Balance
344
32
Last Treble (AUD PP others)
345
32
Last Bass (AUD PP others)
346
32
EN 32 5.8.2
5.
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
L04U AA
5.8.3
Power Supply Set Not Working
One Thin Vertical Line Quick check: • Set in protection mode. • LED blinking with error “3”.
Check Power Supply Mains Switch
Bridge Rectifier circuit 6500
Deflection
One Thin Vertical Line LED Blinking
Check fusible resistor 3510 & circuit before it
Not Ok
Ok
Check DC voltage at 2505/2507
Check all connection and peripheral at Deflection Circuit in place
Not Ok
Ok
Check fusible resistor 3532
Check 7512
Check Line Transistor 7405
Check IC7511 & IC7531
Ok
Set able to start-up
No
Check other fusible resistor and capacitor in the circuit
Is VBE between 200mV to 30mV & VCB approximately 500mV
Yes
Yes
Check Horizontal Deflection Circuitry
End E_14480_057.eps 190204
Figure 5-5 Fault finding tree “Set not working” Replace transistor
Set Does Not Start Up
E_14480_059.eps 170204 Set Unable to Start
Figure 5-7 Fault finding tree “One thin vertical line” Software loaded?
No
Fuse Blown?
Yes
Yes
Change Fuse
One Thin Horizontal Line Quick check: • Set in protection mode. • LED blinking with error “2”.
Load Software Check voltage across 2552
One Horizontal Thin Line LED Blinking Is Vbatt approximately 140V
No
Check Power Supply circuit
Yes Check voltage 2562 &2563
Check all connection and peripheral at Deflection Circuit in place
No 16V
Yes
Check 3V across 2535 Yes
Check transistor (7451, 7523, 7543) at Vertical Deflection Circuitry
Check 6V across 2535
Yes
Set able to Start
No
Check Line Transistor 7405
Check Vertical Deflection Circuit
Yes
End
Replace transistor
E_14480_058.eps 170204
Figure 5-6 Fault finding tree “Set does not start up”
E_14480_060.eps 170204
Figure 5-8 Fault finding tree “One thin horizontal line”
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
L04U AA
5.
EN 33
5. If IF output is present, Tuner is working fine. If no IF output, I2C data lines may be open, check continuity of I2C lines. If I2C lines are ok, Tuner may be defect, replaced Tuner. 6. If Tuner IF is present and yet still no picture in RF mode, go to Video Processing troubleshooting section.
Blank Screen Blank Screen
No Picture, No Sound Check Vg2 (fine tune)
Ok
Not Ok
Picture appears?
No Picture, No Sound, Raster Ok
Check tuning supply voltage, pin 9 of tuner
Check AGC Voltage, pin 1 of tuner
>30V & <35V
Picture not appearing
Check Beam Current Limit (voltage is 1.8V-2V when brightness and contrast is set to the maximum
Not Ok
Check deflection circuit
Check VT Supply Section
No
Check Power Supply
Yes
Ok
Check heater voltage (measure pin 9&10 at the CRT socket)
No
Ok
Picture not appearing
AGC voltage changes with different signal strength
Check supply voltage, pin 7 of tuner
5V No
Not Ok Check video supply (2457) is approximately 180V
Ok
Yes Check AGC circuit section
Check Tuner pin 4 & 5 I2C Bus
Picture appears? Ok
No
Check other functional area
Yes
Ok End Replace Tuner E_14480_061.eps 170204
Figure 5-9 Fault finding tree “Blank screen” 5.8.4
Source Selection Set is not able to go into AV or any missing AV is encountered E.g. AV1 is available but not able to enter to AV1: Check if the option setting is correct. Set is able to go to AV, but no audio is heard. 1. Check that continuity of signal is there from the SCART/ Cinch input to the input of the Hercules. 2. If continuity is there and still no audio, check that option settings are correct. 3. If logic setting is correct and still no audio, proceed to Audio Decoder/Processor troubleshooting section. Set is able to go into AV but no video is available: 1. Check continuity from AV input to Hercules depending on the input. 2. If continuity is available and yet no video, proceed to Video Processor troubleshooting section.
5.8.5
Tuner and IF No Picture 1. Check that the Option settings are correct. 2. If correct, check that supply voltages are there. 3. If supply voltages are present, check whether picture is present in AV. 4. If picture is present in AV, check with the scope the Tuner IF output signal by manual storage to a known channel.
E_14480_062.eps 170204
Figure 5-10 Fault finding tree “No picture, no sound”
EN 34
5.
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
L04U AA
5.8.6
Picture Ok, No Sound
Below are some guidelines for troubleshooting of the Micro Controller function. Normally Micro Controller should be checked when there is a problem of startup. 1. Check that both +3.3 V_dc and +1.8 V_dc are present. 2. Check that crystal oscillator is working. 3. Check that Power Good signal is at “high” logic, normal operation. 4. Check that Hercules is not in standby mode. Pin 15 of Hercules should be 0 V_dc. 5. Make sure H-drive pulse is there. This can be checked at resistor R3239. If H-drive does not exist, remove resistor R3239 to check if there is loading.
Picture Ok, No Sound
Check IF output of tuner, pin 11
CVBS present?
No
Controller
Refer to fig. "Power Supply: Set not working"
Note: When the set shuts down after a few second after power “on”, the main cause is that Vg2 not aligned properly, try adjusting Vg2 during the few seconds of power “on”.
Yes
Check SAW filter output (pin 4&5) EU/AP/CH (QSS)- 1001 NA/LA/AP INT - 1002
Output Ok?
5.8.7
No
Video Processing No Picture When “no picture in RF”, first check if the microprocessor is functioning ok in section “Controller”. If that is ok, follow the next steps. When “no picture in AV”, first check if the video source selection is functioning ok in section “Source Selection”. If that is ok, follow the next steps.
Replace SAW filter
Yes
1. Check that normal operating conditions are met. 2. Check that there is video signal at pin 81. If no video, demodulator part of the Hercules is faulty, replace with new Hercules. 3. If video signal is available at pin 81, check pin 56, 57, and 58 for the RGB signal. 4. If signal is not available, try checking the BRIGHTNESS and/or CONTRAST control, and make sure it is not at zero. 5. If still with the correct settings and no video is available, proceed to the CRT/RGB amplifier diagram.
Check other functional area E_14480_063.eps 170204
Figure 5-11 Fault finding tree “Picture ok, no sound” Unable To Perform Tuning Unable to perform tuning
Enter SDM check optionbyte 1
Enter SDM and change to the appropriate byte
Incorrect
Correct
Check if tuner Supply Voltage pin 7
5V
No
Check Power Supply
Yes
Check I2C circuit
Replace Tuner
No
Check Tuner Supply Voltage
33V Yes
Not Ok
Check I2C at pin 4 & 5 and tuner
Not Ok
Not Ok Ok I2C Check other functional area
Tuner
For sets with TDA9178, follow steps below: 1. Put Option Byte 2 bit 4 to “0”; if video signal is not available, then check fault finding section “Controller”, Section “Source Selection”, and steps above. 2. If video is available but not correct, put Option Byte 2 bit 4 to “1”, then check if LTI panel is present. If not, put LTI panel in the main chassis (connector 1221). 3. If LTI panel is in main chassis, check cable between LTI panel and main chassis (position is 1206). If it is connected, then the LTI panel is faulty, replace it. For sets with Scavem, and Scavem does not work, follow steps below: 1. Check Scavem coil connector (position is 1361) if connected; if not, connect it. 2. If connected, check NVM “bit storage” byte 1 bit 7; if it is not “1”, set it to “1”. 3. If it is “1”, then check the data of the NVM addresses as in the next table. If the data is not correct, then set these addresses to diagram values. 4. If it still not works, track Scavem output from pin64 of Hercules to CRT panel.
Not Ok E_14480_064.eps 170204
Figure 5-12 Fault finding tree “Unable to perform tuning”
Table 5-5 NVM default values for Scavem Description
Address (dec) Address (hex) Value (hex)
SPR, WS
140
8C
00
VMA, SVM
141
8D
32
NVM_SOC_SMD
142
8E
03
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding 5.8.8
Audio Processing No Sound Picture Ok, No Sound
Tuner IF Ok
Not Ok
Check Tuner/IF
Ok
Check AUDOUTLSL & AUDOUTLSR pin at Hercules
Not Ok
Check Hercules IC
Ok
Check Audio Amplifier
Not Ok
Check Audio Power Supply
Check Power Supply
Ok
Check Audio Amplifier Circuit and loud speaker
Not Ok
Replace Audio Amplifier
Ok
Check NVM E_14480_065.eps 170204
Figure 5-13 Fault finding tree “No sound” No RF audio for QSS/Inter-Carrier stereo sets. 1. Check pin 99 and 100 for SIF signal (for QSS) or pin 104 and 105 for video with SIF (for Inter-Carrier) 2. If signal is not present, check for the QSS/FMI bit settings. Check also the NVM data. 3. If signals are present and still no audio, check the audio supply voltage +8V are present. 4. If still no audio signal at Hercules output, Hercules is faulty. No AV audio. 1. Check troubleshooting methods in section “Source Selection”. 2. Check the output of the Hercules to see if there is signal available. If no, check the normal operating condition and also the NVM data. 3. If still no audio signal at Hercules output, Hercules is faulty. Note: If there is audio signal at Hercules output and no audio at loudspeaker, proceed to Audio Amplifier troubleshooting methods. 5.8.9
Audio Amplifier No RF as well as AV audio at the loudspeaker: 1. Check that the normal operation condition of the amplifier is met. 2. If normal operation conditions are met, check the continuity from Hercules output to input of the amplifier. 3. If continuity is there and still no audio, check speaker wire connections. If still no audio, amplifier IC might be faulty.
L04U AA
5.
EN 35
EN 36
5.
L04U AA
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
E_06532_012.eps 130204
Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms
L04U AA
6.
37
6. Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms Wiring Diagram DEGAUSSING COIL
E
TOP CONTROL PANEL AQUADAG
CRT 16:9
EHT CRT
1010 3P FRAME ROTATION COIL
(component view)
YELLOW
B
CRT PANEL
RIGHT SPEAKER
ORANGE BLUE
1361 3P
5P 1351
LEFT SPEAKER
RED SCAVEM COIL
1332
7P
1352
B
CRT SOCKET
RED BLACK
BLACK RED
CRT PANEL 1381 3P
J
FRONT INTERFACE Warning: Some models have tact switch.
6P
1693
6P 1504
1252
1505
2P
MAINS CORD
7P
2P
2P
LEFT (WHITE)
1254
RIGHT (RED)
5P
CVBS (YELLOW)
MAIN CHASSIS
1278 4P
3P
A
5P 1280
1279
G
(track view) 3P
1404
1204 2P
1215 7P
1214
H
LTI/ CTI
1464 2P
1221 7P
H
LINEARITY& PANORAMA
1462 3P
1206
LTI/CTI INTERFACE
1461 5401
1212
1401
7P
5P
1207
1451 2P LOT
TUNER
1212
12P
1206 12P
to SUB WOOFER (OPTONAL)
3P
1682
7P
HEADPHONE
1211
1212
2P
SIDE I/O PANEL
2P
D
MAINS SWITCH
1693
1005 3P COMPAIR CONNECTOR
E_14480_021.eps 200204
Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms
L04U AA
6.
38
Block Diagram Supply and Deflection SUPPLY AND DEFLECTION G
SUPPLY
J
FRONT INTERFACE 1231
1211 1
LINEARITY & PANORAMA 7460 ACTIVATING CIRCUIT
ONLY FOR: 28"WSRF LA/NA 32" WSRF LA/NA 28" WS-SF LA
7462
1212 1
2
2464 2467
2466
2 1404 4
MAINS SWITCH (not USA)
1461 4 LINEARITY AND PANORAMA CORRECTION
1
1 HOR. DEFL. COIL
2474 2475
1462 1 TO 1221
A5
2
CONNECTIONS
3
1463
+9V
7463 I2SD/1
DEFLECTION
4
2
1
ENERGIZING CIRCUIT (optional)
t
V_DG
7200-H (SYNC)
112
EHTinfo
3 3507
A2
7541
2240
Degaussing Coil
1505
1503
113
A2 LINE + FRAME DEFLECTION
A2 Vguard
A4 HERCULES 1504
3232
A1 POWER SUPPLY
Vbatt
+6VA
LINE
116
7408 1506
5500 : 5502
1500
VERTICAL GUARD DETECTOR
VIDEO IDENT
6500 AC
F508
T4E
6401
2505
DC
5402 5520
MAIN SUPPLY
9
17
8
18
DRIVER
7512 11
I511
3514
I519
2 2511 6
SENSE
Vcc
9
DEMAG
5552
G
5
5562 6563
3
7514
10
6571
5561 6562
3517
7571
1
108
EW_DRIVE
7410
HOR. DEFL. COIL
3410
BCL
A4 1454
6
7406
6452 6483
6484
6453
3458 3484 3485
I573
6456
8
1452
+9V 3457
9
2456
6566
POWER-DOWN A4 2x
I533
2564
5
6533 10
2534
X-RAY PROTECTION
EHTo
FRAME
1 3538
8
+3V +6VA +6VA
6676
2535 6536
6
AUX
5537
2536
2
+6V
VERTICAL SYNC SEPARATOR
VERTICAL DIVIDER
VERTICAL SAWTHOOTH
VERTICAL OUTPUT + GEOMETRY
106 107
VDRA
3474 F461
7455
7456
G I548 7536
FILAMENT
F458
3466
7453
Vaux
D
4
Vguard
A4
3465 7454
6537
1401 5
EHTb
7451
VDRB
VIDEO/SUPPLY
1491 1
3
TO 1351
2
CRT
1
Vbatt
7452
7535
3531
6459
3462
F460
F537
S
3534
3455
3565
F536
12
6532
97
+9V
6535
9
I531
A2
6454 6455
F564
14
CONTROL IC
7561 6565
VIDEO/SUPPLY F455
FILAMENT
7
EHTinfo 6564
F453
7411
3532
4
F452
-12V
5
A4
A4
2403
3440 I417
EHTb EHTb + EHTinfo + EHTinfo BCL PROC.
6481 3481
7484
Stdby_Con
STANDBY CIRCUIT
3451
3442
10 2
Vbatt
7573
2
5531
11
E/W + GEOMETRY
1404 1
3576
+3V3 7515 TCET1103
+8V
3420
REFERENCE CIRCUIT
1532 1A
7531 TEA1620
SOURCE
A5
SANDCASTLE GENERATOR
3575
6512
REG
MAIN SYNC SEPARATOR
LINE OUTPUT CIRCUIT + E/W 3497 CORR.
E/W
SANDCASTLE +8V
3571
11
STANDBY SUPPLY
6
+Vbatt
FOCUS VG2
7207
INTF_Y GREEN_IN 56
6573
3530
OR
63
+6VA
3
DRAIN
HDRIVE
62
-Vaudio F561
A5
3518
Vcc
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT
1543
14
4
3
PHI 2 DETECTOR
+Vaudio
S
3532
13
I516
D
6511
3519
HORIZONTAL OSC.
FRAME_FB
F418
3516 7
PHI 1 DETECTOR
Vbatt
A1
B1
HD
2
CONTROL IC CTRL
4
3513 14
DRAIN
F552
7401 : 7403 3411 7480 : 7483 POWER-DOWN
TO CRT
1
F563
I513
7511 TEA1506T
5551 6551
EHT
3
7405 BU4508DX
7404
MAINS SWITCH (not USA)
I433
5445
6486
-9V
F414
1505
7532
TO RGB PROC.
3498
OR
R.G.B. BLANKING
F402
F412
HD
2 VER. DEFL. COIL
3463
3401
VT_SUPPLY
F459
-12V
F401
3461
A4
FRAME_FB 3471
For IDTV only
HOT GROUND
COLD GROUND
E_14480_024.eps 190204
B1
Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms
L04U AA
6.
39
Testpoint Overview Mono Carrier F001 F002 F003 F004 F005 F006 F007 F008 F009 F010 F011
A8 A7 A7 A7 A8 A6 A8 A8 B4 A7 A8
F101 F102 F103 F104 F105 F106 F107 F108 F109 F110 F111
B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 C8 B8
F112 F113 F115 F116 F117 F119 F120 F121 F122 F123 F138
C8 C8 C7 C7 C7 A8 A8 A8 B8 B8 B7
F200 F201 F202 F203 F204 F205 F206 F207 F208 F209 F210
B4 C5 B5 B5 C5 C5 C6 B5 B6 A5 A4
F211 F212 F213 F214 F215 F216 F217 F218 F219 F220 F221
A4 A5 A5 B5 B6 C6 C6 C6 B7 B7 B7
F222 F223 F224 F225 F226 F227 F228 F229 F230 F232 F233
C7 B7 C6 C6 B6 A4 C5 C5 B5 B5 B5
F237 F238 F239 F240 F241 F242 F243 F244 F245 F247 F248
B5 B4 B5 C5 C6 C6 C6 B5 C6 A6 A6
F249 F250 F251 F270 F401 F402 F404 F407 F412 F414 F415
A7 C6 B5 B5 C4 D6 D6 D6 C6 E7 E6
F416 F417 F418 F419 F420 F451 F452 F453 F454 F455 F456
E6 E5 D6 D6 D7 C8 C7 D7 C7 D7 E7
F457 F458 F459 F460 F461 F462 F463 F464 F465 F466 F500
E7 C7 C7 C7 C7 E7 D8 E5 E5 E8 C2
F501 F502 F503 F504 F505 F506 F507 F508 F509 F510 F535
D2 D2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E3 E4 D5 C4
F536 F537 F541 F542 F551 F552 F561 F562 F563 F564 F573
C5 C3 C3 C3 C5 D5 C4 D4 C4 C5 C5
F581 F582 F583 F682 F683 F685 F691 F692 F693 F694 F695
B3 B4 C4 B1 B1 B1 C1 D1 E1 C1 C1
F696 F697 F698 F699 F901 F903 F904 F905 F910 F911 F950
D1 E1 C1 D1 B3 B2 B1 B2 B3 B3 B3
F951 F952 F953 F955 I001 I002 I003 I004 I005 I006 I007
B3 A3 A3 A3 A8 A8 A7 A7 A5 A5 A7
I008 I009 I010 I011 I012 I013 I014 I015 I016 I017 I104
A5 A5 A5 A7 A7 A6 A8 A8 A7 B5 B8
I105 I106 I107 I108 I109 I110 I111 I112 I113 I114 I115
B7 B7 B8 B7 B7 B7 B8 B7 C8 B8 C8
I116 I117 I118 I119 I120 I201 I203 I204 I205 I206 I207
B7 B8 A7 A7 B7 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 B6
I208 I209 I210 I211 I212 I213 I214 I215 I216 I217 I218
C5 B6 B6 C6 B6 A5 A5 A6 B6 B7 B6
I219 I222 I223 I224 I225 I226 I227 I228 I229 I230 I231
B6 B5 B5 B4 B5 C6 A5 B5 C5 B5 B5
I232 I233 I234 I235 I236 I240 I241 I401 I402 I403 I404
A7 B7 A4 B5 B5 A4 A4 E7 E6 E7 E7
I405 I406 I407 I409 I410 I412 I413 I414 I415 I416 I417
E7 E7 E7 E8 E6 E6 C6 D6 C6 C5 D5
I418 I419 I421 I422 I423 I424 I425 I426 I427 I428 I429
D6 C6 D7 D7 D5 E8 C6 D7 D5 D6 E8
I430 I431 I432 I433 I434 I443 I444 I445 I446 I448 I449
E6 C7 D6 E6 C5 E7 E7 E7 C5 E7 D8
I451 I452 I453 I455 I456 I457 I458 I459 I460 I461 I462
D7 E8 D7 D7 D8 D7 D7 D7 C8 C8 C8
I463 I464 I465 I466 I467 I468 I469 I470 I471 I472 I473
SERVICE TEST POINT
3139 123 5673.1
E_14480_029.eps 200204
D8 C8 E7 D7 E8 D7 E8 D8 C8 C7 E5
I474 I475 I501 I502 I503 I504 I505 I506 I507 I511 I513 I514 I515 I516 I517 I518 I519 I520 I521 I523 I524 I527 I529 I531 I532 I533 I535 I536 I537 I538 I539 I540 I541 I542 I543 I544 I545 I546 I547 I548 I551 I552 I553 I554 I555 I556 I557 I561 I562 I565 I571 I572 I573 I574 I575 I576 I577 I578 I579 I582 I583 I584 I585 I586 I587 I588 I681 I682 I683 I686 I687 I688 I689 I691 I693 I909 I910 I911 I913 I914 I915 I916 I918 I919 I920 I921 I922 I924 I925 I926 I927 I928 I930 I934 I935 I936 I937 I938 I939 I940
E6 D8 E3 E3 E2 E2 D1 E3 D3 E5 E5 D4 E4 E4 E4 E5 E5 E5 E4 E5 E5 E5 D3 D3 D3 D3 D3 D3 C4 C3 D3 D4 D4 C3 C2 D3 C3 C3 C3 C3 D5 D5 D3 D4 D4 D4 D3 D4 D4 C4 D5 C5 D5 D5 D5 D5 D5 D5 D4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 C4 B4 E1 B1 B1 C1 D1 C1 D1 E1 D1 B3 C3 C3 C3 C2 C3 C2 C3 C2 B3 C2 C2 B3 B3 B2 C2 B1 B2 B2 B1 B2 C2 B2 B2 B2
I941 I942 I943 I944 I945 I946 I948 I951 I952 I953 I954 I955 I956 I957 I958
B2 C3 B2 C3 C2 B3 B3 B3 A3 A3 A3 B3 A3 A3 B4
Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms
L04U AA
6.
40
Block Diagram Video VIDEO H
LTI/CTI
7611 TDA8601T
INTF_Y_OUT 2
1214
N.C.
1
INTF_Y
3
INTF_U_OUT 3 INTF_Pb 7
6
INTF_V_OUT 4 INTF_Pr 8
5
CLAMP
3-STATE
CLAMP CLAMP
3-STATE
CLAMP
12
1212 6
11
8
YIN
YOUT
LTI/C+I PROC.
UIN
UOUT VOUT
CLAMP
3-STATE
CLAMP
15 3-STATE
14 5
10
9
19
Y_2
4
4
INTF_Y/GREEN_IN
17
Pb_2
6
6
INTF_Pb/BLUE_IN
16
Pr_2
8
8
INTF_Pr/RED_IN
INTF_FBL
9
13 SC 1
16
INTF_FBL
9
PULSE FORMER INTF_FBL
1
CONN.
1212
ERR 15
VIN
1216
N.C.
A5
7610 TDA9178T
7630 7635
SANDCASTLE
10
SANDCASTLE 10
A5
INTF_V-OUT
(RGB/YPrPb/YUV 7200-C INPUT SWITCHING)
51 50 49
1
1
3
SCL
SCL
3
3
SCL
INTF_BBL
6
6
INTF_BBL
53
54
57 58 59
55
7200-B (CVBS I/O + FILTERS + COLOUR DECODING)
7200-A (IF)
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROC. - 4:3 LINEAR/NON-LINEAR SCALING - DOUBLE WINDOW PROC.
TUNER IF
7003
6, 7
VT
F002
ERR FM-RADIO FM 10 10 TUNER
FM
1002 1003 F004
+ IF 11 TV TUNER
TV
5 3001
PHASE DISC
9
4
24
VIF_2
25
RF
31
VIDEO IF
RGB2/ RGB3 SELECTION ADC
I001
TUNER IF AGC
Yint INPUT SWITCH
DAC
1004 SIF1
29
SIF2
30
AUDIO IF QSS/AM
COMB FILTER &TRAP SWITCH
SC2_CHROMA_IN 70
AM SOUND DET.
SIDE_CHROMA_IN 77
FM/QSS
Uint CHROMA/CVBS
C
TO AUDIO PART AM
Yint
PAL, NTSC SECAM DECODER
YUV TO DVD
DVD TO YUV
Yint
Y
Uint
Pr
Vint
Pb
Vint SC1_FBL
52 INSSW3 SELECTION LOGIC
N.C.
See block diagram AUDIO
RGB TO DVD
CVBS/Y
PLL
SOUND MIXER
DVD TO DVD
SC2_Y/CVBS_IN 71 SIDE_Y/CVBS_IN 78 CVBS1
FILTER SELECTION
INTF_CVBS_OUT N.C.
SC1_CVBS_IN 74
SOUND TRAP
VIDEO DEMOD
AGC 1
7001
65
PLL VIF_1
A4 SCL
A4 SEL-LLPIM
SW_SC2_CVBS 81
I002
A4 SDA 3000
VCO
OUTPUT SWITCH
VIDEO IDENT
YUV RGB DVD
DINT
1000
86 N.C.
SWITCH
YUV
+5VS
YPrPb2/ YPrPb3 SELECTION
SSIF
6001 BZX79-C33
5001
RGB
A2 VT_SUPPLY
9003
DVD
9002 +5V
SDA
INTF_Pr/RED_IN
3
SDA
INTF_Pb/BLUE_IN
3
1206
SDA
INTF_Y/GREE_IN
INTF_V_OUT
N.C.
1206
1
INTF_Y_OUT
2
SC1_RED_IN
2
See block diagram AUDIO
A4 HERCULES
A3
INTF_U_OUT
SC1_GREEN_IN
TO AUDIO PART
1
SC1_BLUE_IN
SSIF
1215
1212
1
INTF_U-OUT
1212 INTF_Y_OUT
SC1_FBL
A8 REAR I/O CINCH
B1 CRT
B2 SCAVEM
SC2_Y/CVBS_IN
2
FILAMENT
3
1381 1
SC2_CHROMA_IN
SVHS 1
4
ROT
ROTATION OUTPUT
5
2
ROTATION COIL (OPTIONAL)
AV1 SC1_CVBS_IN
V
AV2
FILAMENT VSVM
V 1361 1
YUV INPUT SC1_GREEN_IN
Y
A4 HERCULES
SC1_BLUE_IN
U
SC1_RED_IN
V
A5
SVM
A5
SCAVEM OUTPUT
2
SCAVEM COIL (OPTIONAL)
7200-E (RGB PROCESSING + CATHODE CALIBRATION)
7200-D (YUV PROCESSING)
7606 7607
MONITOR OUTPUT
FROM µP PART
SW_SC2_CVBS
SC2_CVBS_OUT
V
F240
1204
R
7
7
6
6
SIDE_CHROMA_IN
WHITE/BLACK STRETCH GAMMA COR.
Y Pr
2
Pb
3
C
SVHS 1
5
5
RGB ADDER
G B
PEAKING
CLAMP + MUTE
BLUE STRETCH & CONTRAST
OSD INSERTION
BRIGHTNESS + PEAK WHITE LIM.
CATHODE CALIBRATION
OUTPUT STAGE
43 44
3226 3227 3228
BOUT
1
7330
1 B
3 V11
GOUT
2
2 G
ROUT
3
3 R
IBLACK
SIDE_Y/CVBS_IN
V13
1331
4
4
5
5
6
6
SVM
7
7
ROT
V16
1332
7 B 3332
1
9 G 3334
2
8 R
3336
V15
V14
AQUADAG
11 6
B
8
G
10 9
4 5
45 SVM
SCAVEM PROC.
SATURATION
MATRIX
G_Y
VSVM FILAMENT V14
B_Y 64
5352
+200V
46 7308 BCL
A2
EHT-b 3351
ROT
TINT CONTROL SKINTONE
5 7 1
5 25kV
BEAM CURRENT LIM.
R_Y
VIDEO IN
V12
BC_INFO
CRT
R
A4
EHT
Y
1207
42
VG2 FOCUS DEFLECTION
1252
+200VA
F242
FBL
B_OSD
A5 CONNECTION
SIDE AV
G_OSD
R_OSD
F241
D
A2 FROM DEFLECTION
+200VA 2351
1351
1 1351 2 3
4
to 1401 A2 DEFLECTION
5
E_14480_027.eps 200204
Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms
L04U AA
6.
41
Testpoint Overview CRT & LTI Panel F331 F332 F333 F334 F335 F336 F338 F339 F340 F341 F351 F352 F353 F354 F356 F360 F361 F362 F381 F382 I330 I331 I332 I333 I334 I335 I336 I337 I351 I353 I355 I357 I360 I361 I362 I363 I364 I365 I366 I367 I368 I369 I370 I371 I372 I373 I374 I375 I381 I383 I384 I385 I386 I387
CRT
3139 123 5674.1
LTI
3139 123 5740.1
1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1626 1627 1628 1633
A2 A2 A1 A2 A1 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A1 A2 A2 A1 A1 A2
E_14480_069.eps 200204
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A2 A2 A1 A1 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms
L04U AA
6.
42
Block Diagram Audio/Control AUDIO A3 TUNER IF
A4 HERCULES
A8 REAR I/O CINCH SUBWOOFER (optional)
7200-A (IF)
7003 9002
A2 VT_SUPPLY
+5V 9003
1000
6, 7
2 FM
PHASE DISC
+ 11 TV TUNER IF
VIF_1
24
VIF_2
25
N.C. RF
31
I001
PLL
TUNER IF AGC
A4 SCL 1004 7001 FILTER SELECTION
A4 SEL-LLPIM
AMPLI + MUTE
AUDIO SOURCE SELECTION
ADC
DIGITAL SOUND PROCESSING
AUDIO SELECT
DAC
SCART CINCH OUTPUT
92
SC1_R_OUT
93
SC1_L_OUT
SIF1
29
SIF2
30
AUDIO IF QSS/AM
(optional)
7103
1228 1
3161
N.C.
2 3
AM
To VIDEO PART see block diagram VIDEO
VIDEO DEMOD
I002
A4 SDA 3000
VIDEO IF
AGC 1
4
FM DEM.
96
PLL
1002 1003 F004
TV
3001
FM/QSS SSIF
VCO
F002
ERR FM-RADIO FM 10 10 TUNER
5
3164
9 VT
SPDIF
DIGITAL PART
SSIF
6001 BZX79-C33
5001
+5VS
7200-F (AUDIO)
SOUND MIXER
FM/QSS
AM SOUND DET.
AM
INTF_R_IN
75
INTF_L_IN
76
SC2_R_IN
72
SC2_L_IN
73
SIDE_R_IN
79
SIDE_L_IN
80
SC1_R_IN
94
SC1_L_IN
95
DIGITAL STEREO SOUND DECODER
AUDIO SELECT
HP OUTPUT
66
SC2_R_OUT
67
SC2_L_OUT
MONITOR OUT L
ERR 19
LS OUTPUT
68
MAIN_OUTR
69
MAIN_OUTL
R 7140 MUTING
A8 REAR I/O CINCH A7 AUDIO AMPLIFIER
AV1 L
7990 TDA2616Q
SC1_R_IN
R
F952
I952
SC2_L_IN
L
MAIN_OUTR
MUTE
MUTING
A4 POWER_DOWN
4
1
AV2
1281 5
L 8 Ohm/15W
F955
9
6
2
R 8 Ohm/15W
SC2_R_IN
R
2
D
A4 Stby_Con
7
I951
MAIN_OUTL
A5
7993, 7994
V AUDIO+1
SC1_L_IN
A5 CONNECTIVITIES
SIDE AV 1252
L R
-V AUDIO
1207
3
3
SIDE_L_IN
1
1
SIDE_R_IN
A4 VOL_MUTE
VOLUME + MUTE
D
5
7991 7992
1280
1254
1
SIDE AV
1278
5
1
2
2
L 8 Ohm/15W
7991 OR 2
R 8 Ohm/15W
CONTROL E
A4 HERCULES (CONTROL)
TOP CONTROL
LOCAL KEYBOARD
+3.3V
7200-G (Control) TDA12001H1 1682 2
INTERFACE J1 FRONT (PARTLY)
A9
6692 TSOP1836 IR 6691 +3.3V
IR
4
4
LED
5
5
KEYBOARD
6
6
LIGHT_SENSOR
9
IR
32
LED
30
LIGHT-SENSOR
14
LIGHT_SENSOR
+3.3V
+ 3202
IIC BUS TRANSCEIVER
20 21
3207
3204
7
EEPROM 8 (NVM) 6 ERR 5 9
3605
3604
SDA
3214
see IIC DIAGRAM
SCL
+ OR
A1
POWER_DOWN 31
ON/OFF USA only
WRITE_PROTECT
I/O PORTS
LED
KEYBOARD
22
PWRDOWN 31
?
KEY_PROTN
FRONT CONTROL
1693 3
1693 3
A5 FEATURES
1010 2
6693
PWM OUTPUTS
18
VOL_MUTE
+
15
Stdby_Con
A7 A1 A7
CPU LIGHT_SENSOR
6693
+ 6692 TSOP1836
TELETEXT (close caption)
F692
1
IR
OR
7205
17
ROT
16
SEL_LLPIM
23
I2SD/1
24
Reset__5V
25
SEL_SC2_INTF
B2 A3
6691 +3.3V
LOCAL KEYBOARD + ON/OFF (USA only)
+
LED
ROM RAM 119
KEYBOARD
1205 24MHz
ERR 20
A5 G A5 A5
SERVICE DUMPER
9275 9252
SDM
118
E_14480_025.eps 190204
Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms
L04U AA
6.
43
I2C and Supply Voltage Overview SUPPLY LINES DIAGRAM A2 LINE + FRAME DEFLECTION
A1 POWER SUPPLY 3 2
4
1503
7541 ENERGIZING CIRCUIT (optional)
1
B1 CRT
V_DG
Vbatt
5445 5402
17
8
18
4
14
5
SUPPLY PRIMARY SIDE
5551 6551
5552
10
A4
Vbatt
A7 AUDIO_AMPLIFIER 5562 6563
1543
-Vaudio
13
3
7405
EHT
+Vaudio
7990 TDA2616Q
7
Vaudio+1
LINE OUTPUT CIRCUIT + E/W CORR.
AUDIO OUTPUT
1401 1
VIDEO SUPPLY FILAMENT
+5V VSVM
2
2
+200V
3
3
FILAMENT
4
4
5
5
A4
EW_DRIVE
9002
+5V
To 3405, 3463, 3475 on
10
HOR. DEFL. COIL
A2
BCL 1454
5001
To TUNER Pin 6.7
+200V
FILAMENT 3351
VT_SUPPLY
+200A
To TUNER Pin 9 6001 -/C33
FOCUS VG2
2
6
2
6484
B1
1404 1
6571
5561 6562
Vbatt
6483
FILAMENT
1351 1
HDRIVE
5
-Vaudio
TO CRT
1
7404
5520
A3 TUNER IF
VSVM
V_DG
3
9
B2 SCAVEM
+Vbatt
A5 FEATURES & CONNECTIVITIES
A8 REAR I/O CINCH
6452 -12V
Vbutter
Vbutter
+6VA 1221
3571
12
7571
A6 CLASS D
3575
3
1
4
3401
3576
7573 STANDBY CIRCUIT
2
1903
+Vaudio
7
VT_SUPPLY
6456
1452
+9V
9910
3457
9
2456
V_DG 3455
4
2564
10
6459
To VERTICAL DEFLECTION
3610
1
8
+8V
6
+3V
+3V (N.C.)
+3V
+3V
+6V
+6V
3210
2X +6V
G
LINEARITY & PANORAMA
1
4604
+9V
+6VS
Vaux
7603 L78L33ACZ
D 7535
7200
HERCULES PWM1
115
1
DECDIG
3
3206
A1 A1
Stdby_Con
15
1X 16
POWER_DOWN
31
1212 12
3610
6610
9613 +8V
+5V +5V
7203
3208
LTI/CTI
+3.3V
+1.8V_B
only used in sets with DVD
H
+3.3V
7201-2
3209
COLD GROUND
+6V
1462
7204
G 7536
HOT GROUND
1X
+1.8V_A
3211 S
FRONT INTERFACE
1693
Vbuffer 1X
2X 6537
J
1X
2536
2
1
Vbuffer
2X
1693
+8V
9605
+6VA 5537
To 3-6692 (IR_REC) 6694 -/C5V1
6610
+3V
6536
To LED
+9VA_1
+6VA
6676
3693
3639
A4 HERCULES 2535
3690
+9VA
+6VA
A4
3565
6535
+5V
+9V
2X
5
A9 FRONT CONTROL
12
VT_SUPPLY
POWER-DOWN
6566
+9V
6454
+6VA (To 3445) 6565
+9V
6455
3532
6564
A2
4611
* see diversity table 6573
5531
+9V
9911 *
A4
7561
1212 To 6403, 3480, 3420, b-7401, c-7403 on
3485
Vaudio+1
1
+9V
FILAMENT
8
STDBY_CON
VIDEO SUPPLY
3484
(RESERVED)
+3V3 7515 TCET1103
6453
5
To 6407 on A2
AUDIO AMP
REFERENCE CIRCUIT
3458
7605
2X 1X
3608 3295 7201-1
+5V
VT_SUPPLY 3606
+5V 7210
6207 +3.3V
D
G S
+3.3V
7209
7604
RESET +5V D
3607
A4
G
3609
S
2204
+Vbutter
+Vbutter
+6V
+6V
3217 7202
+8V
+8V
I2C BUS INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM A4 HERCULES
+3.3V
PIP MODULE (optional) A5 FEATURES & CONNECTIONS
+3.3V
A3 TUNER IF
A5
H
F1 PIP POWER SUPPLY
LTI/CTI
F2
ERROR CODE LIST
TUNER IF
ERR 6
3202
PART OF VIDEOPROCESSER (HERCULES)
3204 1206
7200 20 SET PROCESSOR 21
6210
1214
SDA
SDA
1
1
1
1
SCL
SCL
3
3
3
3
3605
6211
5
3601
ERR 19,20
1215
3214
+3.3V
22
1206
3207
WRITE_PROTECT
7
3604
6
3001
5
3000
3616
4
7601 PCF8511 EEPROM (NVM)
1000 TUNER
ERR 9
ERR 10
14 1005 1 2 For COMPAIR only
3617
11
3244
5
3243
6
3002
5
3001
4
3207
10
7610 TDA9178T LTI/CTI PROC.
7242 SDA9488X PIP PROC.
1000 UV1316 TUNER PIP
7201 TDA9887 PIP IF DEMO.
ERR 15
ERR 12
ERR 4
ERR 16
3
3206
Error 0 1
Device Not applicable Not applicable
2
Not applicable
Error description No Error X-Ray/Over -voltage protection (US only) High beam (BCI) protection
3
Not applicable
Vert ical guard protection
5
Not applicable
+5v protection
6 9
I2C bus 24C16
10
Tuner
11
TDA6107/A
15
TDA9178T/N1
19
TDA1200x
20
TDA1200x
11
Check item
Diagram
2411, 2412, 2413, 6404, 6411, 6412 3404, 7405
A2
3466, 7451, 7452, 7453, 7454 7604, 7605
A5
General I2C error I2C error while communicating with the EEPROM
7200, 3207, 3214 7601, 3604, 3605
A4 A5
I2C error while communicating with the PLL tuner Black current loop instability protection I2C error while communicatin g with LTI module I2C error while communicating with SSD stereo sound decoder
1000, 5001
A3
7330, 3351, CRT
B1
I2C error while communicating with video cosmic in Hercules IC
A2
A2
7610
H
7200
A4
7200
A4
E_14480_026.eps 190204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
44
7. Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts Mono Carrier: Power Supply 1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
POWER SUPPLY 1503 LKS1AF 4
F542
"$"
1 F508
6500
4
3
2507
2505
2n2
RES
AUDIO_GND2
5513
I571
6572
I575
7513 TCET1103(G) 2573
10n
3563
6564
220R
BAS316
+
REG
2V7
10X +
+
11 AUX
I536
3538
POWER-UP RESET
U
2.5V
100p
2K2 2549
3537
4n7
2533
100K
3531
10n
2544
GND
4
SGND
4R7 I540 2
1u0 4535
BAS316
6536
+6VA
470P
SS22220-03
470p
6537
I539
10n 9512
STPS10L60D
2543
2540
2n2
+6V 2548
9537 RES
1u0 Vaux_GND F537
4536
Vaux
10
HOT
1n
COLD
I547
Vaux_GND 2m2 16V
1
+3V F536
RES
2539
Vaux_GND
5537
SB180
RES
5536
E
100n
1u0 Vaux_GND
RES
2535
8 Vaux_GND 9
I538
2566 2547
9536
4537 6576
3532
3
5535
A2, A4(3x)
7535
SI2307DS
F
I548 I546
*
B A4
3535 I545 1K0
7536 PDTC143ZT Vaux_GND
Vaux_GND
For IDTV Only
3536
1545 Provision For Lightning Protection
0V3
FOR MAINS 120V AC 170V (177V) 220V AC 309V (317V) ..V.. Normal Operation (..V..) Standy Mode "$"
2545
2546
For IDTV Only
SOURCE 0V
3542
I529
12 I532 1R8 (Basic) 2R2 (IDTV)
1.8
6
BLANK
F
0V3
I531
68p
PROT LOGIC
I544
Vaux_GND 7
4
1u0
SB160
68K
2534
LOW FREQ
8K2
470p 3533
2531
THERMAL SHTDWN
OSC
6540
6
I537
POWER_DOWN
BAS316
I565
6535
5534
5531
3V3 F564
-17V7
3565
RES
1m0 6.3V 2536
5532
3539 3R3
RC
1V
33P
9532
+
STOP
T315MA
2550
-8V3
PWM
I535 5
DRAIN 14
VALLEY
LOGIC
470P
4534 RES
* *
F535
6566
6565
Vaux_GND
2537
3 VCC
5
1532
For IDTV Only
BZX384-B6V8
6533 3530
I533
SUPPLY
BZX384-B3V9
6531
BZX384-C15 I556 I557 6534
BAV21WS 100R
TEA1620 (Basic)
7531 TEA1623 (IDTV)
220R
100n
2512
7532
33u 3534
*
3V8
5533
13V
I554
330p 6532
10u 2530
3527
*
I555
*
6538
3528
2528
*
*
2532
I541
I553
F
1K2
3512
3K3
8V2
7561 PDTC143ZT
3518
15K
3519
6512
BAT54 COL
I527
D
*
2538
E
3572
2562
6V2
1K5
BZX384-B6V2
2 8V2
3577
I578
I577
9V3
6573
1
5V 3
2518
1u0
4
BZX79-C9V1
2515
1n5
470p
15V6
I523
470p
OVER POWER PROTECTION
*
6V8
220n
I519 100n
I521
BC547B
I561
470P
A4
7V6 7571
2570
3511 4R7 F510
11 2V2
330K 2513
MAXIMUM ON-TIME PROTECTION
I518 2519
OUTPUT DRIVER
1K0
47K 2516
1N5062 3520
Driver
3515
3522
9 0V
Stdby_Con
10n
10
2572
9
F573
82K
AUDIO_GND1
7573 PDTC114ET
I576
15n 3575
11
470R
C
+6VA
4K7
8
2K2 2571
I573
A2
I574
3579
3578
12
K
I572
3571
3576
3K3
*
*
A1
100n
14
5511
3524
2514
7 0V
I520
G
15
5
* AUDIO_GND2
13
100p
CURRENT SENSING
POWER-ON RESET
BURST DETECTOR
1n0
RGP10D 2517
Sense
CIRCUIT
0V 6511
I516
D 295V S 0V
4 I515
6571 BAV70
2564
100n
RES
CONTROL
* INPUT CONTROL CIRCUIT
7512
I524
LOGIC
OVER TEMPERATURE PROTECTIOM
Ctrl
Demag
3514
START-UP CURRENT SOURCE
B +16V
1n
9513 RES
HVS
VOLTAGE CONTRLLED OSCILLATOR
FREQUENCY CONTROL
6
* 2V3 G
-16V
F561
3574
Gnd
3529
(For Lightning Protection)
I513 14 297V
VALLEY
TO 1013 OF
D
Drain
CURRENT SOURCE
3517
2511
3M3
1510
START-UP
SUPPLY MANAGEMENT
*
AUDIO_GND1
2561
17
*
22u 50V
3
Vcc
6562
2
16
3521
3M3
3500 3501
1n5
2 15V5
-Vaudio
F562
*
0V
2V3
*
9514
+Vaudio
2K2
7514 BC847B
1507 For 70W Subwoofer
7511 TEA1506T/N1 I511
I562
5561
3
DSP
F563
2565
5512
I514
3513
3503
I517
I505
3M3 2509
3506
C
For Lightning Protection
*
F504
1542 For Heatsink
18
BAS316
9508
*
6575
*
1509
For DVD
1R
* 1n
3516 0R1
I504
3502
3 9504
2
1508
* *
6563
2542
F509
47K 6514
F507 MAINS SWITCH
2
I579
5562
*
F551
140V
I502
-T 4R7 I507 9511 RES
2 3 DMF-2405 9503 RES
3510
F505
4
*
Vbatt
1535 3 2 1
1543
Vaux_GND
3
9505 RES 2508
3
5500
2502
1
1
9502
1
1
* *
1M5
4
*
2
9501 RES 5501 4
1
9500 For ITV only
2
3504
1505
V
B
1506 6 5
470n 3505
* *
9507
F506
2500
I503
T4E.250V
F503
2504
* 1 4 DMF-2810
1500
1n
15K
5503
5552 27u
Vaux_GND
2m2 10V
2
A
Vaux_GND
AUDIO_GND1
F552
3573
+t RES
2
* 2551 2552
33n
AUDIO_GND2
6551
I551
2563
2503
470R
9509
100u 160V
2506
3509
2541
7541 BC857B
I552
5551
F541
I501
9506
47u 25V
3508
Audio_Gnd
16V4
2n2
*
*
9510
BZX384-C12
16V4
5502
3507 I506
I542
47K 6541
3541
1 2
1
4
*
1502 PFC5000
2553 180P
+t
5
+t 1501 PFC5000
11
I543
8
RES
2501
F501
1
1
Rp
3523
Rs
3
3
F502
2
F500
2
A
10
V_DG
DEGAUSSING COIL
1504
9
NC
G
1 2 7 9 10 13 15 16
8
HOT GROUND COLD GROUND
E_14480_006.eps 200204
3139 123 5673.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1500 B2 1501 A2 1502 A3 1503 A7 1504 A1 1505 B1 1506 B1 1507 C4 1508 C1 1509 C1 1510 D1 1532 E6 1535 A10 1542 B7 1543 B10 1545 G6 2500 B3 2501 A3 2502 B4 2503 A6 2504 B6 2505 B6 2506 A5 2507 B6 2508 B4 2509 C1 2511 D1 2512 E2 2513 E5 2514 D6 2515 D6 2516 D5 2517 E2 2518 E6 2519 D5 2528 F1 2530 F2 2531 F3 2532 F2 2533 G3 2534 F5 2535 F9 2536 F9 2537 F8 2538 E8 2539 F8 2540 F8 2541 A7 2542 B7 2543 F6 2544 G2 2545 F6 2546 F6 2547 E10 2548 F10 2549 G3 2550 F6 2551 A8 2552 A9 2553 A10 2561 C8 2562 C9 2563 B9 2564 E9 2565 B8 2566 E10 2570 D7 2571 C9 2572 D10 2573 E7 3500 C1 3501 C1 3502 C3 3503 C4 3504 B3 3505 B3 3506 C1 3507 A3 3508 A5 3509 A3 3510 B5 3511 D6 3512 E2 3513 C6 3514 D5 3515 D5 3516 D5 3517 E4 3518 E4 3519 F1 3520 D6 3521 C6 3522 D5 3523 A3 3524 C5 3527 F2 3528 F1 3529 D1 3530 F3 3531 G2 3532 E6 3533 F3 3534 F2 3535 F9 3536 F10 3537 G3 3538 G5 3539 G5 3541 A7 3542 F6 3563 E8 3565 E9 3571 C8 3572 C10 3573 D9 3574 D9 3575 D9 3576 D9 3577 D8
3578 C8 3579 C9 4534 E8 4535 F8 4536 F9 4537 E9 5500 B4 5501 B3 5502 A5 5503 B5 5511 C6 5512 B7 5513 E5 5531 E7 5532 F5 5533 F2 5534 E8 5535 F8 5536 E9 5537 F9 5551 A8 5552 A10 5561 B8 5562 B8 6500 A6 6511 E1 6512 E1 6514 C6 6531 F2 6532 F2 6533 E3 6534 F3 6535 E8 6536 F8 6537 F8 6538 F1 6540 F6 6541 A8 6551 A8 6562 B8 6563 B8 6564 E9 6565 E9 6566 E10 6571 C10 6572 D8 6573 D7 6575 D6 6576 E8 7511 C2 7512 C5 7513 E7 7514 C5 7531 E3 7532 F2 7535 F9 7536 G10 7541 A7 7561 D10 7571 D9 7573 C9 9500 B2 9501 B3 9502 B4 9503 B3 9504 B4 9505 B5 9506 A5 9507 B2 9508 C2 9509 A10 9510 A9 9511 B5 9512 F6 9513 C8 9514 B10 9532 F5 9536 E9 9537 F9 F500 A1 F501 A1 F502 A5 F503 B2 F504 C2 F505 B2 F506 B3 F507 B3 F508 B6 F509 B6 F510 D6 F535 E10 F536 E10 F537 F10 F541 A7 F542 A7 F551 B10 F552 A9 F561 B10 F562 B9 F563 B10 F564 D11 F573 C10 I501 A6 I502 B6 I503 B1 I504 C1 I505 C1 I506 A5 I507 B5 I511 C2 I513 C5 I514 C6 I515 C6 I516 C6 I517 C5 I518 D5 I519 D5 I520 E4 I521 D6
I523 D6 I524 C6 I527 E2 I529 F6 I531 G3 I532 F5 I533 E5 I535 E6 I536 G2 I537 E8 I538 F8 I539 F8 I540 F7 I541 F1 I542 A7 I543 A7 I544 F6 I545 G9 I546 F10 I547 F9 I548 F10 I551 A8 I552 A8 I553 F1 I554 F1 I555 F1 I556 F3 I557 F3 I561 D8 I562 B8 I565 E9 I571 D8 I572 C8 I573 C8 I574 C9 I575 D7 I576 C9 I577 D8 I578 D9 I579 B8
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
45
Mono Carrier: Diversity Table for A1 (Power Supply)
1
2
3
DIVERSITY TABLE FOR MAIN RANGE
B
C
D
E
32RF
FR
VBATT
130V
130V
26WSRF 30WSRF 32FSQ 143V
AUDIO OUTPUT 1508
2X5W 2X10W ---
2X5W 2X10W ---
2X5W 2X10W ---
1510
---
---
SET
200V 470U 200V 470U ----------------250V 1N5 250V 1N5 ----1MA/423V 1MA/423V ------144V 3R ----100R 100R 0R18 0R18 --------------145V 1R5 15K 15K 150K 150K --------SS40310-01 SS40310-01 GBU4JL GBU6JL ----STTH8L06D BYV29X-500 UDZS9.1B UDZS9.1B FQPF9N50 FQPF9N50 ----JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP
2505 2506 2508 2509 2528 2542 2570 3505 3506 3507 3508 3514 3520 3527 3528 3529 3523 3565 3574 5500 5502 5512 6500 6538 6551 6565 7512 7532 9502 9504 9506
6
LATAM / AP
LR 27RF 27FSQ
5
7
8
9
10
POWER SUPPLY
NAFTA
REGION
A
4
21RF 130V 2X10W
WIRE SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK --WIRE SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 200V 470U 400V 330U ------275V 100N --250V 1N5 470N --250V 1N5 250V 1N --250V 470P 1MA/423V 1MA/612V --3M3 --144V 3R ----100R 47R 0R18 0R33 --47K --1M --2M2 --276V 4R5 15K 18K 150K 33K --10MH 2A ----SS40312-01 SS42315-01 GBU4JL GBU6JL BAS316 --BYV29X-500 STTH8L06D UDZS9.1B UDZS7.5B FQPF9N50 FQPF7N80 --BC857B --JMP --JMP JMP JMP
25RF 29FSQ
29RF
29RF
28WSSF
28WSRF 32WSRF
130V
130V
130V
143V
143V
2X5W 2X5W 2X10W 2X5W 2X10W 2X10W WIRE SIN WIRE SIN WIRE SIN WIRE SIN WIRE SIN 180 SIN 180 SIN 180 SIN 180 SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK 18ST BK 18ST BK 18ST BK 18ST BK WIRE SIN WIRE SIN WIRE SIN WIRE SIN WIRE SIN 400 SIN 400 SIN 400 SIN 400 SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 18ST BK 18ST BK 18ST BK 18ST BK 400V 330U 400V 330U 400V 330U 400V 330U 400V 330U ----------275V 100N 275V 100N 275V 100N 275V 100N 275V 100N 250V 1N5 250V 1N5 250V 1N5 250V 1N5 250V 1N5 470N 470N 470N 470N 470N 250V 1N 250V 1N 250V 1N 250V 1N 250V 1N 250V 470P 250V 470P 250V 470P 250V 470P 250V 470P 1MA/612V 1MA/612V 1MA/612V 1MA/612V 1MA/612V 3M3 3M3 3M3 3M3 3M3 --------------------47R 47R 47R 47R 47R 0R33 0R33 0R22 0R33 0R22 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 2M2 2M2 2M2 2M2 2M2 276V 4R5 276V4R5 276V 4R5 276V 4R5 276V 4R5 18K 18K 18K 18K 18K 150K 150K 150K 33K 33K 10MH 2A 10MH 2A 10MH 2A 10MH 2A 10MH 2A ----------SS42315-01 SS42315-01 SS49309-01 SS42316-01 SS49308-01 GBU4JL GBU6JL GBU6JL GBU6JL GBU6JL BAS316 BAS316 BAS316 BAS316 BAS316 BYV29X-500 STTH8L06D STTH8L06D STTH8L06D STTH8L06D UDZS7.5B UDZS7.5B UDZS7.5B UDZS7.5B UDZS7.5B STP10NK8OZFP STP10NK8OZFP STP10NK8OZFP STP10NK8OZFP STP10NK8OZFP BC857B BC857B BC857B BC857B BC857B --------------------JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP
21/25RF 130V 2X10W WIRE SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK WIRE SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 450V 220U --275V 100N 250V 1N5 470N 250V 1N 250V 470P 1MA/612V 3M3 ----47R 0R33 47K 1M 2M2 276V 4R5 15K 150K 20MH 1A5 --SS42315-01 GBU4JL BAS316 STTH8L06D UDZS10B FQPF7N80 BC857B ----JMP
CHINA
INDIA
HR
HR
29RF
34RF
130V
130V
2X10W 2X5W 2X10W WIRE SIN WIRE SIN 180 SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK 18ST BK WIRE SIN WIRE SIN 400 SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 18ST BK 450V 220U 450V 220U 400V 33N 400V 33N 275V 100N 275V 100N 250V 1N5 250V 1N5 470N 470N 250V 1N 250V 1N 250V 470P 250V 470P 1MA/612V 1MA/612V 3M3 3M3 ----470R 470R 47R 47R 0R33 0R33 47K 47K 1M 1M 2M2 2M2 276V 4R5 276V 4R5 15K 15K 150K 150K 20MH 1A5 20MH 1A5 65MH 65MH SS42315-01 SS42315-01 GBU4JL BYV29X-500 BAS316 BAS316 STTH8L06D GBU4JL UDZS10B UDZS10B FQPF7N80 FQPF7N80 BC857B BC857B -------------
21/29RF
EUROPE HR
21/29RF 29FSQ
21RF
29RF 28WSSF
29RF
24WR 25/28BLD
130V
130V
130V
130V
130V
143V
2X5W 2X10+20W WIRE SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK WIRE SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 450V 220U ----250V 1N5 470N 250V 1N 250V 470P 1MA/612V 3M3 ----47R 0R33 47K 1M 2M2 276V 4R5 15K 150K ----SS42315-01 GBU4JL BAS316 STTH8L06D UDZS10B FQPF7N80 BC857B JMP JMP JMP
2X15W
2X5W 2X10W WIRE SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK WIRE SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 400V 220U --275V 100N 250V 1N5 470N 250V 1N 250V 470P 1MA/612V 3M3 ----47R 0R33 47K 1M 2M2 276V 4R5 15K 150K 20MH 1A5 --SS42315-01 GBU4JL BAS316 STTH8L06D UDZS10B FQPF7N80 BC857B ----JMP
2X5W WIRE SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK WIRE SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 400V 220U --275V 100N 250V 1N5 470N 250V 1N 250V 470P 1MA/612V 3M3 ----47R 0R33 47K 1M 2M2 276V 4R5 15K 150K 20MH 1A5 --SS42315-01 GBU4JL BAS316 STTH8L06D UDZS10B FQPF7N80 BC857B ----JMP
2X10W WIRE SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK WIRE SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 400V 220U 400V 33N 275V 100N 250V 1N5 470N 250V 1N 250V 470P 1MA/612V 3M3 --470R 47R 0R33 47K 1M 2M2 276V 4R5 15K 150K 20MH 1A5 65MH SS42315-01 GBU4JL BAS316 STTH8L06D UDZS10B FQPF7N80 BC857B -------
2X5W 2X10W WIRE SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK WIRE SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 400V 220U --275V 100N 250V 1N5 470N 250V 1N 250V 470P 1MA/612V 3M3 ----47R 0R33 47K 1M 2M2 276V 4R5 15K 33K 20MH 1A5 --SS42316-01 GBU4JL BAS316 STTH8L06D UDZS10B FQPF7N80 BC857B ----JMP
WIRE SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK WIRE SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 450V 220U ----250V 1N5 470N 250V 1N 250V 470P 1MA/612V 3M3 ----47R 0R33 47K 1M 2M2 276V 4R5 15K 150K ----SS42317-01 GBU4JL BAS316 STTH8L06D UDZS10B FQPF7N80 BC857B JMP JMP JMP
28WSRF
32WSRF
143V
143V
2X5W 2X5W 2X10W 2X10W WIRE SIN WIRE SIN 180 SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK 18ST BK WIRE SIN WIRE SIN 400 SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 18ST BK 400V 220U 400V 220U 400V 33N 400V 33N 275V 100N 275V 100N 250V 1N5 250V 1N5 470N 470N 250V 1N 250V 1N 250V 470P 250V 470P 1MA/612V 1MA/612V 3M3 3M3 ----470R 470R 47R 47R 0R33 0R33 47K 47K 1M 1M 2M2 2M2 276V 4R5 276V 4R5 15K 15K 33K 33K 20MH 1A5 20MH 1A5 65MH 38MH SS42316-01 SS42316-01 GBU4JL GBU4JL BAS316 BAS316 STTH8L06D BYV29X-500 UDZS10B UDZS10B FQPF7N80 FQPF7N80 BC857B BC857B -------------
AUDIO 2X5W 2X10W 2X10+20W 2X15W OUTPUT ----2A 250V 2A250V 1543 25V 1000uF 25V 2200uF 25V 2200uF 25V 2200uF 2562 25V 1000uF 25V 2200uF 25V 2200uF 25V 2200uF 2563 220R 680R 3571 220R 220R 220R 3572 220R 220R 470R SB360 6562 SB360 SB360 SB380 SB360 6563 SB360 SB360 SB380 ----JMP 9514 JMP
E_14480_019.eps 190204
3139 123 5673.1
2
B
C
D
E
REGION NAFTA ROW --1506 Main Switch --9507 JMP --9508 JMP
1
A
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
46
Mono Carrier: Deflection
4
5
6
7
8 +9V
I443
3488
I445
3487 F402 +9V 47u F414
F415
3492 RES
RES
I457
1R MRT 6453
3463
-12V4 I468
BAS316 I463
1K0
4K7
3498
1453 RES
7484 BC847B
56n
1V3 I434 0V2
2428
2425
1V7
10K
RES 3483
3K3 3494
3482
*
BAV21WS
*6483
100n 3481
RES 2480
3n3 2484
RGP10D
6454
* 3474
15K
A4 1u0
22u 100V 2470
24V 2465
2460
Vguard
3437
-0V8
E
2K0
7454 BC847B
I471 2464 470p
7453 BD136 3470
-1V9
-11V8
7452 BF422
22R 2469 220n
-12V4
1R 3467
0V5
-1V1
F458 1
I472
-1V6
4437
1451
2 -12V4
VERTICAL DEFLECTION COIL
F
F459
3461
Frame_FB A2 3471
3R3
2K2
6488 BAS316
3V6
RES
3495
G
1K5
3V3
7451 BD135
-0V6
I464
F461
8K2
FRAME DEFLECTION
3427
I425 I417
D
G
I426 6489 BZX384-C33
820K
470R 3440
3420 7410 BC857B
RGP10D
-12V
I461
7411 BC857B I421
9451
3475
F457
3464
6458
7455 BC857B -12V4
0V8 7456 BC857B 3469
-12V VDRB A4
330R
I422
I431
5451
I462
3468
F460 2K2
100K
VDRA A4
I415
Vbatt
F456
330R 2463 50V 100u 6457
0V8
+9V
2V8
1u0 16V
3493
*
3466
1n
2462
2K2
3462
1n
2461
9407
*
1K0
1n0 3436
2487
100K
2457
9417
2418
15K
9402 1
CI-15 3 SC21329
3460 470R
10n
3418 100R
2490
RGP10D
1R MRT
1V4
7406 KTC2800
6455
2456 47n I456
1452
I467
I460
*
3428 2R2
EW_DRIVE A4
3446
2482
F
4u7 2458
4R7 5406
2
1R0
0V6
F466 F455
4R7
3465
4
I416 27V6
3431
100p
3457
6456
I470 3425
3499
820K
2488
*
470p
35m
BAV21WS
3497
BAV21WS
6484 BAV21WS
F454
6459
1R0
8
*
1 Vbatt
EW DRIVE
E_14480_007.eps 200204
3139 123 5673.1
1
2
3
4
C
+9V
*
I423
VideoSupply 200V
1N4148
2459
2
5405
6408
F453
16V 470u
16V 470u
6481
RGP15G
5403 I427
2455
Filament 3455
I475
I428
*
F452
4R7
3485
I458 12
5408
6407
3458
I466
*
I459
*
2454
RGP10D
3484 7
9401
BY228-1500
6491
*
I412
2419
*
A2 F463
-12V
9
2492
*
*
I449 BZX79-B5V1 EHTb
11
I473 2416
A
6410 RGP10D
BYV29X-500 2412
6412
DMV1500M
6411
*
*
BYV29X-500 2413
1n
2408
F407
*
AK
6404
A4
1 0V7
2411
I413
HDRIVE
I455
B
6480
3486
470u 16V
33n F419
3 4V5
7404 SI2306DS
1u0
6K8
6K8 6452 I453
2468
10n
2489
0V
K
2
D
I430
100n
RES 2414
0V
5
I414
17V1
3443
RGP10D
3 PSD10-204B 6 2410
*
F418
5402 1
1K0
100n
6
6K8 1454
5
3417
I418
126V
RGP10D
2409
3404
68V
3414
2420
7405 BU4508DX
680K
33R
1V
47R
RGP10D
2403
6442
6406
6441
6486
I419
2415
I465
2u2 100V
3416
3489
I410
10
F465
-2V2 680K 3415
of CRT PANEL
3442 F464
3430 3441
To
A4 A4
3478
6K8
1404
2486 100p
BZX384-C12
VG2
1
BCL
7481 BC857B 18V1
BAS316
3410 3R3
33n
I406
FOCUS
1 4
2K2 6450
I452
F417
2417
6V
2402
6443
7408 BC847B A4
I409
3409 1K8
3K3
F412
1470
I448
3
BAS316
68R
3406
4u7 50V
2401
OR To 1404 of
3405 -12V +6VA
TO 1382 of
TO PICTURE TUBE
F416
COIL
I405
I404
1K0
3445
EHT
*
I401
3407
A2
*
*
220p
3403
390R
Frame_FB
EHTinfo
F462
3476
RES
DEFLECTION I407
8K2
2451
BC847B
1401
* 5450
3453
HORIZONTAL
LOT
6451
680p
I469
680K
3454
BZX384-C4V7 2453
I474 5401
2405
A2
7403
I403
7402 BC847B
5
56K
F451
2406
BYD33V
L.LIN
680K
1n 2KV
EHTb
E
4492
2491
3477
220R
1K0 3412
I402
3 F404 4
BAV21 6403
*
A
47n
I429
0V
3473
Filament
+9V
6401
*
A1
15n
I433
22R
POWER_DOWN
2483
6V2 I424
56K
I451
3472
3411
15n
220R 3434
3432 I432
3452
7483 2V6 BC857B
10u 50V 3491
220R
2
2427
33R
0V5
6482
BZX384-C6V8
1V7
220R 2467
68K
7401 BUH2M20AP
3451
2481
I444
0V
3433
9410 2404
+9V
CRT PANEL 1
3401
VideoSupply
HD
7480 BC857B
7V9
3R3
To 1351 of
F401
C
F420
RES
Vbatt
VT_Supply
B
10K
I446 22K
(For A80ERF042X14 Tube Only) 5410
A
10
7482 PDTA114ET
LINE + FRAME DEFLECTIONFrom LOT 5450 1402
9 3490
3
2K2
2
3480
1
5
6
7
8
9
10
1401 B2 1402 A3 1404 B5 1451 F9 1452 D8 1453 G2 1454 C8 1470 B8 2401 B3 2402 C4 2403 C4 2404 A4 2405 B4 2406 A5 2408 D2 2409 C2 2410 D2 2411 D4 2412 D4 2413 D4 2414 D1 2415 C5 2416 D5 2417 C5 2418 C6 2419 D5 2420 D1 2425 G4 2427 A5 2428 G4 2451 B8 2453 B8 2454 C9 2455 C9 2456 D9 2457 C8 2458 C9 2459 D7 2460 D8 2461 E6 2462 E7 2463 E8 2464 F8 2465 E9 2467 F9 2468 E8 2469 F8 2470 E9 2480 C9 2481 A8 2482 F3 2483 A9 2484 C9 2486 C3 2487 E4 2488 E3 2489 C3 2490 D9 2491 A9 2492 D5 3401 A2 3403 B2 3404 C5 3405 B2 3406 B3 3407 B3 3409 B4 3410 B4 3411 A4 3412 B5 3414 C1 3415 C2 3416 C4 3417 C5 3418 F2 3420 G2 3425 E4 3427 G5 3428 F5 3430 C4 3431 F4 3432 A5 3433 A6 3434 A6 3436 E4 3437 E9 3440 G3 3441 C2 3442 B8 3443 B8 3445 C1 3446 F3 3451 A6 3452 A7 3453 B7 3454 A8 3455 D7 3457 D8 3458 C8 3460 F6 3461 F7 3462 E7 3463 F7 3464 E8 3465 E7 3466 E9 3467 E9 3468 F9 3469 F7 3470 F8 3471 F9 3472 F9 3473 A8 3474 E10 3475 D10 3476 A9 3477 A8 3478 B9 3480 A7 3481 C9 3482 B9 3483 B10 3484 C8 3485 D8 3486 B9 3487 A8 3488 A7 3489 C1 3490 A8 3491 A8 3492 A9 3493 B8 3494 B9 3495 G2 3497 E3 3498 G2 3499 E1 4437 E9 4492 A9 5401 B6 5402 C3 5403 E4 5405 E4 5406 E5 5408 E6 5410 A5 5450 B6
5451 D10 6401 A4 6403 C1 6404 D4 6406 C5 6407 E2 6408 E3 6410 D5 6411 D4 6412 D4 6441 C3 6442 C3 6443 C2 6450 B9 6451 B8 6452 C8 6453 C8 6454 D9 6455 D9 6456 D7 6457 E7 6458 E8 6459 D8 6480 B9 6481 C8 6482 A10 6483 C9 6484 C10 6486 C1 6488 G5 6489 G5 6491 D5 7401 A3 7402 B3 7403 B4 7404 D2 7405 C4 7406 F3 7408 C2 7410 G2 7411 F3 7451 E9 7452 F8 7453 F8 7454 E8 7455 E6 7456 E7 7480 A7 7481 B9 7482 A9 7483 A8 7484 G3 9401 D5 9402 D6 9407 E6 9410 A5 9417 C6 9451 D10 F401 A1 F402 A1 F404 B2 F407 D3 F412 C1 F414 A5 F415 A5 F416 B6 F417 B6 F418 C4 F419 C4 F420 A5 F451 A9 F452 C10 F453 C10 F454 C8 F455 D9 F456 D10 F457 E8 F458 F9 F459 F9 F460 F6 F461 F6 F462 A9 F463 C9 F464 C6 F465 C6 F466 D9 I401 B2 I402 A3 I403 B3 I404 B3 I405 B3 I406 C3 I407 B4 I409 B4 I410 C5 I412 D5 I413 D2 I414 C3 I415 F3 I416 E3 I417 G2 I418 C3 I419 C1 I421 G4 I422 F5 I423 E4 I424 A8 I425 G2 I426 G5 I427 E2 I428 D5 I429 A9 I430 C5 I431 G3 I432 A5 I433 A4 I434 G2 I443 A7 I444 A7 I445 A8 I446 A9 I448 B7 I449 B9 I451 A7 I452 B8 I453 C8 I455 C7 I456 D9 I457 C7 I458 D7 I459 D7 I460 E7 I461 E8 I462 D9 I463 F7 I464 F8 I465 B7 I466 C8 I467 D8 I468 F7 I469 A8 I470 E7 I471 E8 I472 F9 I473 D5 I474 A5 I475 D7
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
47
Mono Carrier: Diversity Table for A2 (Deflection)
1
2
DIVERSITY TABLE FOR
A
B
C
D
Region
F
G
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
DEFLECTION
NAFTA
LATAM
AP
CHINA
INDIA
Tube
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
SMGK
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
SMGK
CPT
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
CPD
LPD
SMGK
Size
27 V
28 WR
29 RF
32 V
32 V RF
32 WR
25 RF
25 RF
27V
28WS
28WR
32WR
29RF
21RF
25RF
29RF
32WR
34RF
25RF
21RF
29RF
34RF
21RF
29RF
29FSQ
2.2nF 1.5nF 680pF 330pF 1.2nF 470pF 1.2nF 12nF 13nF 15nF 15nF 12nF 13nF 15nF 18nF 33nF 39nF 33nF 120nF 15nF 33nF 4n7 3n3 270nF 330nF 470nF 390nF 390nF 2u2 2u2 430nF 2u2 390nF 2u2 10nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 150nF 180nF 150nF 180nF 180nF 150nF 100nF 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 2n2 1n5 1n5 1n5 1n5 1n5 47n 47n 560K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 8K2 5% 8K2 5% 10K 5% 8K2 5% 8K2 5% 8K2 5% 8K2 5% 2R2 1W 5% 1R 1W 5% 1R 1W 5% 0R33 1W 5% 3R3 1W 5% 1R 1W 5% 6R8 1W 5% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 10K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 68K 1% 82K 1% 68K 1% 68K 1% 75K 1% 68K 1% 82K 1% 18K 5% 15K 5% 18K 5% 6K8 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 6K8 5% 33K 5% 22K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 22K 5% 33K 5% 22K 5% 120R 5% 120R 5% 120R 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 120R 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 150R 5% 150R 5% 150R 5% 150R 5% 1R8 1% 2R2 1% 2R4 1% 2R7 1% 2R4 1% 2R2 1% 3R3 1% 2R2 1% 2R7 1% 2R4 1% 3R3 1% 2R4 1% 2R 1% 820K 5% 820K 5% 680K 5% 390K 5% 820K 5% 820K 5% 680K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 12K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 4R7 5% 5R6 5% 5R6 5% 10R 5% 2R7 5% 5R6 5% 22K 1% 22K 1% 22K 1% 2K4 1% 22K 1% 22K 1% 56K 1% 56K 1% 56K 1% 5K6 1% 56K 1% 56K 1% 100K 5% 100K 5% 82K 5% 100K 5% 68K 5% 82K 5% 100K 5% 150K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 100K 5% 180K 5% 680K- 5% 680K- 5% 330K- 5% 680K- 5% 680K- 5% 680K- 5% 680K- 5% 33uH 42uH 25uH 33uH 42uH 50uH 33uH SC2132 9-00B CU15 CU15 SC2132 9-00B CU15 CU15 JF0501-21835B JF0501-85021B JF0501-21836B JF0501-21140B JF0101-85020B JF0101-85021B JF0501-21835B 27uH 10% 27uH 10% JMP JMP JMP 33uH 10% 33uH 10% DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M BY229X-800 BY229X-800 BY359X-1500 BY359X-1500 BU4508DX BU2725DX BU2725DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU2725DX JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP -
2411 2412 2413 2416 2418 2419 2425 2451 2457 2487 2490 3224 3295 3414 3431 3451 3452 3453 3467 3468 3471 3472 3473 3474 3481 3482 3483 3491 3494 3499 5401 5408 5450 5451 6404 6411 6412 7405 9407 9417
Region
E
3
680nF 15nF 33nF 360nF 2u2 33nF 100nF 4u7 1n5 680K 5% 8K2 5% 1R 1W 5% 82K 1% 68K 1% 18K 5% 33K 5% 120R 5% 150R 5% 2R4 1% 2R4 1% 820K 5% 15K 5% 100K 5% 680K- 5% 37uH CU15 JF0501-2153B 27uH 10% DVM1500M BU4508DX JMP -
1.5nF 330pF 470pF 1.2nF 1.2nF 220pF 680nF 1.2nF 330pF 15nF 12nF 15nF 13nF 13nF 15nF 13nF 8n2 15nF 120nF 18nF 15nF 68nF 33nF 33nF 18nF 18nF 39nF 3n3 2n2 3n3 390nF 330nF 220nF 360nF 330nF 470nF 390nF 430nF 2u2 2u2 2u2 430nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 150nF 120nF 150nF 180nF 100nF 120nF 120nF 220nF 180nF 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 3n3 1n5 1n5 1n5 1nF 1n5 1nF 1n5 47n 680K 5% 680K 5% 560K 5% 1M 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 10K 5% 8K2 5% 8K2 5% 8K2 5% 2K7 5% 8K2 5% 10K 5% 8K2 5% 8K2 5% 1R 1W 5% 4R7 1W 5% 2R2 1W 5% 6R8 1W 5% 0R33 1W 5% 1R 1W 5% 1R 1W 5% 6R8 1W 5% 10R 1W 5% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 68K 1% 120K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 68K 1% 82K 1% 68K 1% 68K 1% 82K 1% 18K 5% 27K 5% 15K 5% 6K8 5% 15K 5% 18K 5% 18K 5% 15K 5% 6K8 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 22K 5% 22K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 22K 5% 120R 5% 220R 5% 120R 5% 220R 5% 120R 5% 220R 5% 120R 5% 120R 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 150R 5% 220R 5% 1R8 1% 1R8 1% 2R2 1% 2R7 1% 2R2 1% 2R4 1% 2R4 1% 1R8 1% 3R3 1% 3R3 1% 2R4 1% 3R3 1% 2R2 1% 3R9 1% 2R4 1% 2R4 1% 3R3 1% 680K 5% 820K 5% 1M 5% 390K 5% 1M 5% 390K 5% 820K 5% 680K 5% 820K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 12K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 5R6 5% 5R6 5% 4R7 5% 4R7 5% 22K 1% 22K 1% 22K 1% 22K 1% 56K 1% 56K 1% 56K 1% 56K 1% 100K 5% 82K 5% 82K- 5% 100K 5% 82K 5% 82K 5% 100K 5% 82K 5% 82K 5% 180K 5% 680K 5% 680K 1% 680K- 5% 680K- 5% 680K- 5% 680K- 5% 680K- 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 50uH 16uH 42uH 42uH 25uH 82uH 37uH 33uH 42uH CU15 CU15 SC2132 9-00B SC2132 9-00B SC2132 9-00B SC2132 9-00B CU15 JF0501-21835B JF0501-21133B JF0501-85021B JF0101-85021B JF0501-2136B JF0501-2135B JF0501-2135B JF0501-2136B JF0101-85021B JMP 27uH 10% 68uH 5% 27uH 10% 39uH 10% JMP 27uH 10% 27uH 10% 0.58mm COL DVM1500M DMV1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M BY229X-80 BY229X-80 BY229X-800 BY229X-800 BY359X-1500 BY359X-1500 BY359X-1500 BY359X-1500 BU4508DX BU4508DX BU2725DX BU2725DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU2725DX BU4508DX JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP
680nF 220pF 1.2nF 1nF 220pF 1.2nF 680pF 1nF 12nF 15nF 8n2 15nF 12nF 8n2 15nF 13nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 68nF 33nF 39nF 68nF 3n3 3n3 270nF 330nF 300nF 220nF 330nF 390nF 300nF 360nF 2u2 2u2 2u2 2u2 2u2 2u2 10nF 33nF 33nF 10nF 33nF 33nF 220nF 270nF 120nF 220nF 220nF 270nF 120nF 220nF 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 3n3 1n5 1nF 1nF 3n3 1nF 1nF 1nF 680K 5% 1M 5% 1M 5% 680K 5% 1M 5% 1M 5% 680K 5% 1M 5% 8K2 5% 10K 5% 7K5 1% 2K7 5% 10K 5% 8K2 5% 7K5 1% 8K2 5% 6R8 1W 5% 1R 1W 5% 4R7 1W 5% 1R 1W 5% 6R8 1W 5% 10R 1W 5% 1R 1W 5% 4R7 1W 5% 10K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 10K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 68K 1% 68K 1% 68K 1% 68K 1% 68K 1% 82K 1% 68K 1% 56K 1% 18K 5% 18K 5% 18K 5% 15K 5% 18K 5% 18K 5% 15K 5% 18K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 150R 5% 120R 5% 220R 5% 120R 5% 150R 5% 220R 5% 120R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 150R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 2R4 1% 2R2 1% 2R4 1% 2R2 1% 2R2 1% 2R4 1% 3R9 1% 2R2 1% 2R2 1% 2R4 1% 4R7 1% 2R4 1% 2R2 1% 3R9 1% 2R4 1% 2R2 1% 430K 5% 820K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 430K 5% 390K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 82K 5% 82K 5% 82K 5% 56K 5% 82K 5% 100K- 5% 56K 5% 82K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K 5% 42uH 82uH 33uH 42uH 82uH 33uH 33uH CU15 CU15 CU15 CU15 CU15 CU15 37uH JF0501-2601B JF0501-2135B JF0501-2135B JF0501-2136B JF0501-2601B JF0501-2135B JF0501-2136B JF0501-2133B 22uH 27uH 10% 68uH 5% 27uH 10% 22uH 68uH 5% 27uH 10% 22uH 10% DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M BU4508DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU4508DX JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP -
B
C
D
EUROPE
Tube
LPD
LPD
Size
21RF
24 WR
2411 2412 2413 2416 2418 2419 2425 2451 2457 2487 2490 3224 3295 3414 3431 3451 3452 3453 3467 3468 3471 3472 3473 3474 3481 3482 3483 3491 3494 3499 5401 5408 5450 5451 6404 6411 6412 7405 9407 9417
470pF 8n2 33nF 470nF 2u2 33nF 220nF 4u7 1nF 47n 1M 5% 8K2 5% 4R7 1W 82K 1% 68K 1% 18K 5% 22K 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 3R3 1% 3R3 1% 470K 5% 15K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K- 5% 82uH CU15 1342.0033CY 22uH 10% DVM1500M BU4508DX JMP -
1n2 13nF 15nF 2n2 470nF 33nF 220nF 4u7 1nF 1M 5% 8K2 5% 4R7 1W 82K 1% 56K 1% 18K 5% 22K 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 3R3 5% 3R3 1% 470K 5% 15K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K- 5% 37uH SC21329-00B 1342.0048B 22uH 10% BY229X-800 BY359X-1500 BU2725DX JMP
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
25 I
28 I
29 RF
28 WR
28 WS
32 WR
470pF 9n1 18nF 390nF 470nF 33nF 220nF 4u7 1nF 1M 5% 8K2 5% 10R 1W 5% 82K 1% 120K 5% 18K 5% 33K 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 1R5 1% 2R2 1% 680K 5% 15K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K- 5% 50uH SC21329-00B 1342.0048B 27uH 10% BY229X-800 BY359X-1500 BU2725DX -
470pF 9n1 18nF 390nF 470nF 33nF 220nF 4u7 1nF 1M 5% 8K2 5% 10R 1W 5% 82K 1% 120K 5% 18K 5% 33K 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 1R5 1% 2R2 1% 680K 5% 15K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K- 5% 50uH SC21329-00B 1342.0048B 27uH 10% BY229X-800 BY359X-1500 BU2725DX -
1nF 13nF 33nF 360nF 2u2 33nF 220nF 4u7 1nF 1M 5% 8K2 5% 2R2 1W 82K 1% 68K 1% 18K 5% 33K 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 2R2 1% 2R2 1% 680K 5% 15K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K- 5% 25uH CU15 1362.0016AB 39uH 10% DVM1500M BU4508DX JMP -
680pF 11nF 15nF 4n7 430nF 33nF 220nF 4u7 1nF 1M 5% 8K2 5% 3R3 1W 82K 1% 68K 1% 18K 5% 22K 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 1R5 1% 6R8 1% 470K 5% 15K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K- 5% 50uH SC21329-00B 1362-0015AB 0.588 COL BY229X-800 BY359X-1500 BU2725DX JMP
680pF 11nF 15nF 2n2 470nF 33nF 220nF 4u7 1nF 1M 5% 8K2 5% 4R7 1W 82K 1% 68K 1% 18K 5% 22K 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 3R3 1% 3R3 1% 470K 5% 15K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K- 5% 25uH SC21329-00B 1342.0042CY 22uH 10% BY229X-800 BY359X-1500 BU4508DX JMP
680pF 11nF 15nF 4n7 430nF 33nF 220nF 4u7 1nF 1M 5% 8K2 5% 3R3 1W 68K 1% 18K 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 1R5 1% 6R8 1% 470K 5% 15K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 25uH SC21329-00B 1362-0015AB 33uH 10% BY229X-800 BY359X-1500 BU2725DX JMP
E
F
G
3139 123 5673.1
1
A
E_14480_020.eps 190204
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
48
Mono Carrier: Tuner IF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TUNER IF +5V +5VS Vbuffer
2 I016
4000
7
ADC
2004
+5
5
8
6006
1K5
for ATSC
F009
2016
*
*
I007
F010
SSIF
*
1V1
* *
I008
*
*
C
I012
0V3
1002
1
A4
*
7003
2013
2014
3018
* I006
5V
I003
I005
3006
1012
*
5V
* 3008
3009
F011
I017
*
I004
*
4
VIF1
0V
A4 3007
SEL_LLP|M
*
3014
2008
4006
4010 RES 3010
6004 0V
VIF2
5
A4
D
3
IFGND
AP LNA CH LNA AP Splitter UV1356A/A I G-3 TEDE9-703A UV1356A/A I G-3 50V 22P 50V 22P 50V 22P 100u 68u 100u ------------------------------------------------------0U39 0U47 0U39 -------
I009 2
*
GND_28
IFGND
*
10
1
*
2
4004
4002
E
* *
+5V
* NA/LA/AP NTSC EU Normal EU FM Radio EU Splitter UV1316E/A I-4 UR1316/A I-3 TEDE9-703A TEDH9-305A 50V 22P --50V 22P 50V 22P 68u 68u 68u 100u ----16V 100N ------25V 1N ----25V 1N --------25V 1N ------330R ----820R --------100K ----560R ------150K ----0U47 0U47 0U39 0U47 ------BFS20
*
B
RF_AGC A4
*
1 2 3
D ITEM 1000 2002 2008 2009 2013 2014 2016 3010 3014 3016 3018 3019 5002 7003
*
F006
100R
2009
RES 2002
2001 1005
7001 PDTC124ET A4
4003 5002
2003
*
I002
3001
3005
I011
RES
For Compair only
C
* *
3002
3016
A4
100n
I001
3000
4001 I015 F008
(optional)
6003
RES
SDA
220R
FOR DVD ONLY
BAS316 6002
3019
A4
SDA
4
4005 RES
1 2 3
I013
RES
I014 F007
F004
3004
SCL
SCL
4.9V
3
4.3V
AS
POWER SUPPLY
F003
11
15
1011
B
10
3003
MT
F002
34V5
2007
FOR EMC ONLY
9
2005
14
4.3V
TO 0282 OF
NC
VT_Supply
47n
TV TUNER
13
3020 BZX79-B8V2
1010
A
1004
5001
470u
6
12
2006
F005
BZX79-C33
FOR ITV ONLY
6001 10u 50V
A
F001
1
9002
*
1000
SWI
O1
4 (For Lightning Protection)
IN ING GND
GND_28
* *
TO 1510 OF 1013
1003
3
O2
5
for EMC
4013 GND_28
8
GND_28
E
1001
IFGND
1
SIF2
4
F
EU-QSS K9656M K3953M --50V 10N 10K 10K 2K2 6K8 2K2 JMP ------JMP --BAS316 1SS356 PDTC124ET
NA/LA/AP INT AP QSS CH QSS --K9352M K9362M --K7257M M1971M K6274M ------50V 10N 50V 10N ------10K --10K 2K2 --2K2 6K8 6K8 --2K2 2K2 ----JMP JMP ----JMP --JMP --JMP JMP JMP ------JMP JMP ----------1SS356 1SS356 --PDTC124ET PDTC124ET
2
SIF1
5
A4 4012
ITEM 1001 1002 1003 2003 3002 3006 3007 3008 3009 4002 4003 4004 4006 4011 4012 6002 6004 7001
4011
1u8
I010
*
5003
A4
*
3
GND_28
F
IFGND
G
G
E_14480_008.eps 200204
3139 123 5673.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1000 A4 1001 E8 1002 D8 1003 D8 1004 A10 1005 C3 1010 A3 1011 B3 1012 C10 1013 D10 2001 C4 2002 C4 2003 B5 2004 B6 2005 B6 2006 A6 2007 A7 2008 B6 2009 C9 2013 C9 2014 C8 2016 C9 3000 B4 3001 B4 3002 B7 3003 A7 3004 B7 3005 B8 3006 D4 3007 D7 3008 D7 3009 C5 3010 C8 3014 C9 3016 C9 3018 C9 3019 C9 3020 A9 4000 B4 4001 B4 4002 E8 4003 B6 4004 E8 4005 A8 4006 B7 4010 C8 4011 E8 4012 F8 4013 E9 5001 A8 5002 B6 5003 E9 6001 B6 6002 B7 6003 B7 6004 C5 6006 A9 7001 D4 7003 C9 9002 A8 F001 A5 F002 A5 F003 A5 F004 B5 F005 A4 F006 B9 F007 B3 F008 B3 F009 D3 F010 C10 F011 C3 I001 B4 I002 B4 I003 C8 I004 C9 I005 D4 I006 D6 I007 C9 I008 D7 I009 D8 I010 E8 I011 B7 I012 C9 I013 A9 I014 B3 I015 B3 I016 A6 I017 D3
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
49
Mono Carrier: Hercules
1
Vaux_GND
2
3
A5
A5
A9
INTF_U_OUT
INTF_V_OUT
KEY_protn
BAS316 3234
1n0
2282
4
5
100R
3233
A5
100u 10V
2V 7209 BSH103 GND_1 I204
6201
BAS316
7203 2V9 GND_1 I201 BC327-25 7201-2 7201-1 IMX1 3 IMX1 2V 2 5 2V 2V6
4
2V
2V6
E 1R0
3210
27K
3211
F200 1R0
3208
3209
GND_1
22n 3203 150K
for ITV only
1u0
2277
*
-1V
27K
5214 100n 2217
2214 2269 39p
7204 BC327-25 2V8 6 2V 2V 12V
I224 +1.8V_A I225 F209
5K6
+1.8V_B
3296
F
GND12
4u7 10V
220n 2290
2227
5K6
GND12
4u7
39p
A5
E
7202
BAS316
6207
+3.3V
3206
2226
3225
2268 INTF_Y_OUT
100R
2258
100n 100n
INTF_Y|GREEN_IN 100n 2243
A5
D
+3.3V
+3V
2V6 7210 BSH103
SERVICE JUMPER 9275 9252
GND12 GND_1
GND_1
A5
A5
A5
A3 A3
A3 A3 A5 A4
A5
+3.3V
#$%#
SC1_FBL
c209
c208
c207
GND1 GND2 GND3 GND12 GND_28 GND68 GND89 GND92 GND95 GND121GND125
GND2
A1,A5
D
5V
GND_1
GND_28
HC49U 24MHZ576
1u0 2246
100n INTF_Pr|RED_IN 2247
15K
*
1K0
GND92 GND3 GND2 GND1
3285
37 0V0 GNDA 48 0V0 GND3 89 0V0 GND2 111 0V0 GND1
1205
GND1 INTF_Pb|BLUE_IN
150n 2278
2251 220n 5213
2229
VIF1 VIF2
100R 6208 BAS316
+5V
#%#&
c211
100R
A5
A5
INTF_FBL
SVM 3290
BZX384-C27
3245
220R 6205
220n
*4211
*4214
I208
I203
GND89 100n
47u 25V 2223
I212 2218
3241 GND1
1M0
3217
GND12
B C
100R
3205
101 0V0
C A5
A
100R 3266
GND95
105 0V0 104 0V0 121 0V0 123 3V3 120 3V3 124 3V3 122 1V6 38 0V0 40 3V3 39 4V0 103 1V6 119 1V6 118 1V5 58 1V5 59 1V5 57 2V0 56
116 39K
0V5 2V0
0V3 100 0V3 99 GND1
GND2
15K
4K7 3279
2204
GND1
c206
I235
3265 100R
0V0
GND95
GND_1
4K7 3282 3283 4K7
3263 100R
117 0V0
GNDIF
I222 F270
100R 3264
2242
10n
2236
12K 1u5 3224
I206
SIF1 SIF2 VD c200 F204 3230 Vguard
I213
2263
2235 GND1 3232
A2 c204
9203
4210
c203
9202
+3.3V
4K7
A8
EHTinfo
10K 3295
3251
SIDE_Y|CVBS_IN
SC2_Y|CVBS_IN A8
+8V
3281 3280 4K7
3262
F202
0V0
B
1K0
GND121
2V5 90
0V3 1V2 1V2 5V0 1V7 VSSP2 128 0V0
VSSADC 34
GND89
OR To 1280 of
+3.3V
VSSCOMB 61 0V0 GND68 127 VSSC4 0V0 GND125 VSSC3 4 0V0 VSSC2 28 0V0 VSSC1|P 8 GND121
3247 100n 390R 2239 220n 2266 2u2 GND2
100R 6n8
3231 100n 100R
GND1
GND2
I205
c210
9205
100R
ROT
22K
3246
I216
3201
3287
64 54 106 107 53 55
0V5 13 0V0 10 0V0 9 3V3 14
2V0
3V2 17 0V0 16 3V4 15 0V0 7 0V0 6 0V0 18
31
30 3 22 2 1 21 20
24 25 26 27 32
3V3 3V9 0V0 3V3 3V3 3V3 2V1 2V2
0V0 0V0 0V0 0V0 5V5
0V0 23 I215
33K 33K
2240
3244
3297 3243
TOP CONTROL PANEL
SIDE AV PANEL+HP PANEL(FL13)
I236
I214
To 1010 or 1682 of 1682 1 2 3
I209
100R
GND92
A
KEY_protn
1K0
100n
11
GND1
3242
100R
10u 50V 2275
2u2 2241
22n
GND1 +5V 100p
2260 100n
1n0
*
100R 9262
3274
2285
GND2
* SC1_CVBS_IN A8
INTF_L_IN INTF_R_IN SC2_L_IN SC2_R_IN SIDE_L_IN SIDE_R_IN SC1_L_IN SC1_R_IN
SIDE_CHROMA_IN A5
22K 2259
3259
100R
2245 1n0
for EMC
3139 123 5673.1
7205 1V BC847B
5n6
1n0 2222
10n 2248
GND1
2252
3n3
GND2
*
13V
1V7
6202
A5
A2
A2
*
VDRB
3271 220R
3293 56K
100R 3235
3237
3292
1230 2257
for ITV only SC2_STATUS|ITV_MSG
10K
LIGHT_SENSOR SC1_STATUS
1234
100R
3212
+3.3V 3284 4K7
for ITV only
BZX384-C5V6 6210
4213 VDRA
A5 A8 A8
A1 A3 A1,A3:A7 BAS316 6209 SEL_LLP|M Stdby_Con 3252
SDA VOL_MUTE
*4219
3219 100R
10R 3207
GND121
A7
POWER_DOWN
A3,A5 10R 6211
BZX384-C5V6
3204 3214
100R
3218 10R
3216
A3,A5 +3.3V
POWER_DOWN LED WRITE_PROTECT SCL 3K3 3202 3K3
3215 1u0
100p 2280
2279 100R
GND121
A9
A1 A9 A5 +3.3V
IR 4K7
I2SCLK I2SWS 4K7
3261 100R 3269
3260
5K6
GND_1 3223
9204 62 1V3 81 1V4
63 0V8
108 3V5
86 3V8
2244
2230 100p 2256
100n 2287
2261 100p 3275
100R 9215
GND2
2283 10n
2255
*
100R 9257
3270
A5 A5
A5 A5 A5 A5 GND1 33n SW_SC2_CVBS I2SD|1 Reset_+5V SEL_SC2_INTF
2221 4u7
F205
3236
100R
100R
3267
9201
EW_DRIVE
SC1_CVBS_OUT
A8 A2
A5 ITV_V1OUT 100R
for ITV only 3268
100R 100R
85 4V4
2V3 2V4 2V4 0V0 42 43 44 65
83 76 75 73 72 80 79 95 94 49 100p GND2
10n 2284
2262 100p
2237
2286 100n
100n 3278
*9265
100R
*
SC2_CHROMA_IN A8
A8
+5V
7200 TDA12001H1
GND2 2254
c205
Vaux_GND
3294
!'( ) c201
H
I217
100R
220n
220n 2208
2207
A5 A5 A2
4212
100R 9261 GND2
2232
+6V
A8
IFGND
SC1_RED_IN
C Iblack BCL
4209
A8
SC1_BLUE_IN
A1
+3V
1V9 2V2 2V2 2V2 2V2 2V2 2V2 2V2 2V2 1V3
560p 100n
2231 100R
GND3 3276
100u 16V 100R
3277
1683TO 1282 OF
3288
220n 2203 GND121
A4 POWER DOWN
*9266
2264
390R
5201 2206
Vguard
GND3
c202
I226 5295
220n
+1.8V_B
F203
A2
I211
2u2 GND2
1K0
BAS316
GND3
2267 2213
100n
180R
220n
3229
I207
AGCOUT AUDOUTHPL AUDOUTHPR AUDOUTLSL AUDOUTLSR AUDOUTSL AUDOUTSR AVL SWO SSIF REFO REFIN BO GO RO CVBSO PIP DVBO FMRO DVBO IFVO FMRO EWD AVL FBISO CSY HOUT IFVO SVO CVBSI I2SDI1 O I2SDO1 I2SDO2 I2SCLK I2SWS INT0 P0<0:5> INT1 T0 INT2 T1 RX TX SCL SDA P1<0:7> TPWM PWM0 PWM1 PWM2 PWM3 PWM4 P2<0:5> ADC0 ADC1 ADC2 ADC3 P3<0:3> QSSO AMOUT AUDEEM SVM UOUT VDRA VDRB VOUT YOUT
VCC8V
GND92
SC1_GREEN_IN
100n 3221
220n
6203
A2
G
VDDA_1.8
220n GND95 2225
2211 GND89
3220
2273
100u 10V 2272
+3.3V
To 1729 Of
Vguard
VDDA1
5216
GND2
F
7V0
1V4
10
+3.3V
VSSA1
2274
84 2216
Rear I/O Scart 1684
36 2V0
220n
E
3V3
5206
+1.8V_A 2212
41
*
A5
+3.3V
120R
3254
GND92
220n 5215
125 VDDA3_3.3 35 VDDA2_3.3
3V3 2215 3V3 220n
2210
VDDADC_1.8
A5 A5 A8 A8 A5 A5 A8 A8
SS14
F207 +1.8V_B GND125
7208 13V
9
I228
1V4 78 2V3 109 2V8 115 2V3 91 2V0 11 1V7 97 0V0 52 2V0 102 2V3 112 4V0 113 2V0 88 2V3 110 1V5 87
5205
1V5 71
220n +3.3V
VDDC4 VDDC3 VDDC2 VDDC1
3V4 46 3V2 45 1V6 70 1V6 77 1V4 74
100n 5203
2205
*
VDDCOMB
4u7 50V
GND68
2V0 126 5 2V0 2V0 29 12 2V0 2V0 33
+5V
8
VDDP_3.3
1V3 51
100u 25V 2249
5207
F201
60
1V3 50
GND68
5V0
VIDEO SIGNAL PROCESSOR
+1.8V_A
(+8V)
Vbuffer
GND1 220n
100u 10V
2250
19
Φ
5210 +5V
6204
2238
7
AGC2SIF AUDIOIN2L AUDIOIN2R AUDIOIN3L AUDIOIN3R AUDIOIN4L AUDIOIN4R AUDIOIN5L AUDIOIN5R B PBIN3 G YIN3 R PRIN3 BCLIN BLKIN C2 C3 C4 CVBS2 Y2 CVBS3 Y3 CVBS4 Y4 DECBG DECDIG DECSDEM DECV1V8 EHTO INSSW3 IREF PH1LF PH2LF PLLIF SECPLL SIFAGC DVBAGC SIFIN1 DVBIN1 SIFIN2 DVBIN2 VGUARD SWIO VIFIN1 VIFIN2 VREF_NEG_HPL+HPR VREF_NEG_LSL+HPL VREF_POS_HPR VREF_POS_LSL VREF_POS_LSR+HPR VREFAD VREFAD_NEG VREFAD_POS VSC XTALIN XTALOUT UIN VIN YIN YSYNC
5209 2224
GND121
3V3 47 5V1 VP3 82 5V1 VP2 5V1 114 VP1
100n
+5V
5211
220n
100u 10V
GND1
D
2209
4V5 3V8 3V6 3V3 3V3 3V6 3V6 0V0
GND3
2234 100u 25V 2233
98 67 66 69 68 93 92 96
100n 2265 GND2
+3.3V
+5V
2276
C
5202
I210
3253
5208
6
3289
5212 +5V
*9260
Bout Gout Rout INTF_CVBS_OUT INTCO 100R 3227
I218
10n
GND2
2270 GND2 100n
2253
100n
2271
1 2 3
3228
3226
100R
680R
3222
1208
5217
A5 A5 A5 A5 A5
A3 SSIF
A8
5
100R
SC1_R_OUT
A8 SC1_L_OUT 3255 2289 1n0
100R
3248 100R
3257 100R
3256 100R
A8
RF_AGC
MAIN_OUTL
MAIN_OUTR
A8
A8
100R 3249
3258 2K2
for ITV only
3239
100R
22K
1K0 3240
3238
F206
1K0
3291 3250
I219 820R
3272
0v7
GND68
1n0
+5V
7207 BC847B
1K0
3273
B
SC2_L_OUT
A2
A2 HD
+5V 0v6
2288
F208 HDRIVE
HD_PIP
SANDCASTLE
A5
A
A5
HERCULES
4 A3
3 A8
2
SC2_R_OUT
1
6
! "
E_14480_009.eps 200204
7
8
9
10
11
G
H
1205 E8 1208 B2 1230 B7 1234 B7 1682 B10 1683 G1 1684 F1 2203 F2 2204 E10 2205 D2 2206 F1 2207 H1 2208 H1 2209 C3 2210 D2 2211 E2 2212 E2 2213 E3 2214 E9 2215 D2 2216 E2 2217 E9 2218 F7 2221 A5 2222 B8 2223 F7 2224 C2 2225 E2 2226 F9 2227 F9 2229 F7 2230 F4 2231 F2 2232 F2 2233 C2 2234 C2 2235 F6 2236 G6 2237 F3 2238 C2 2239 F6 2240 G5 2241 F5 2242 F8 2243 F8 2244 F5 2245 B8 2246 F7 2247 F7 2248 B8 2249 D2 2250 D2 2251 F7 2252 B8 2253 B3 2254 F5 2255 G3 2256 F4 2257 B7 2258 F8 2259 B8 2260 F4 2261 F4 2262 F3 2263 F6 2264 F2 2265 C2 2266 F6 2267 E3 2268 F8 2269 F8 2270 B4 2271 B4 2272 E1 2273 E1 2274 F5 2275 F5 2276 C2 2277 D10 2278 F7 2279 B6 2280 B6 2282 C9 2283 F4 2284 F3 2285 G5 2286 F3 2287 F4 2288 A2 2289 B3 2290 F9 3201 B9 3202 B6 3203 E9 3204 B6 3205 D9
3206 F9 3207 B7 3208 E10 3209 E10 3210 E11 3211 E11 3212 B7 3214 B6 3215 B6 3216 B6 3217 D9 3218 B6 3219 B7 3220 E1 3221 F1 3222 A4 3223 B5 3224 G6 3225 F8 3226 B4 3227 C4 3228 B4 3229 E2 3230 F6 3231 F5 3232 F5 3233 B10 3234 A9 3235 A8 3236 B5 3237 A8 3238 B2 3239 B2 3240 B2 3241 F6 3242 B8 3243 G5 3244 F5 3245 B9 3246 A8 3247 F6 3248 B3 3249 B3 3250 B2 3251 G5 3252 A7 3253 C5 3254 E1 3255 A3 3256 B4 3257 B3 3258 B3 3259 B8 3260 B5 3261 B5 3262 C10 3263 C9 3264 C10 3265 D9 3266 D10 3267 B5 3268 B4 3269 B5 3270 G3 3271 A7 3272 B1 3273 B1 3274 G4 3275 G4 3276 G2 3277 G2 3278 G2 3279 C10 3280 C10 3281 B10 3282 C10 3283 C10 3284 B7 3285 D9 3287 B9 3288 G2 3289 C4 3290 A9 3291 B2 3292 A8 3293 A7 3294 A9 3295 G5 3296 F9 3297 G5 4209 G1 4210 H3 4211 B9 4212 H1 4213 A8 4214 A9
4219 B6 5201 F1 5202 C3 5203 D2 5205 D2 5206 E2 5207 D2 5208 C2 5209 C2 5210 D2 5211 E1 5212 C2 5213 F7 5214 E9 5215 E2 5216 E2 5217 B5 5295 F1 6201 E10 6202 B9 6203 E1 6204 D1 6205 B9 6207 E9 6208 G6 6209 A7 6210 B7 6211 B6 7200 D6 7201-1 E10 7201-2 E10 7202 D10 7203 E10 7204 E11 7205 B9 7207 B1 7208 A8 7209 F9 7210 F10 9201 B4 9202 H2 9203 H4 9204 B5 9205 H2 9215 G4 9252 G11 9257 G3 9260 B5 9261 G3 9262 G4 9265 G2 9266 G2 9275 G11 F200 E10 F201 D2 F202 C9 F203 F2 F204 F6 F205 B5 F206 B2 F207 D2 F208 B2 F209 F11 F270 C9 I201 E10 I203 E7 I204 F9 I205 G5 I206 G5 I207 A8 I208 A8 I209 B9 I210 C2 I211 E4 I212 E7 I213 F6 I214 F6 I215 E5 I216 B8 I217 A9 I218 C1 I219 B1 I222 C9 I224 F11 I225 F11 I226 E1 I228 B9 I235 C9 I236 B9 c200 F6 c201 H4 c202 H4 c203 H5 c204 H5 c205 H5 c206 H5
c207 H6 c208 H6 c209 H6 c210 H5 c211 H6
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
50
Mono Carrier: Features & Connectivities
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A4
100R
F250 3619
+3.3V GND_1
6
100R
5
3605
A4
SDA
A4
+8V 100u 10V
9605
I232
A4
Vbuffer
INTF_CVBS_IN A4
A4 F244
6V
68K
I223
100u 10V
SW_SC2_CVBS A4
9235 RES 5602
22u 50V 2615
3614
A4
VD
A4
HD_PIP
4u7
100R
100n
47K
A4
ITV_V1OUT
SIDE_L_IN
A4 Stdby_Con
3V3
7607 BC847B
GND_1
Reset_+5V
9603
MUTING 1240
A7
5601 2630
F
TO 1138 OF
(FOR CINCH)
/
GND_1
3622
F227
100K
1 2 3 4 5 6
TO 1763 & 1764 OF
+6V
3623 100K
22K
3631
33p
2622
1K0
A8
A4
9612
A4
SIDE_CHROMA_IN A4
9280 for ITV only
1213
3626
F228
3625 10R
F229
10R 3628
F232
1221 1 2 3
E
F249
A4
1241
1n0
F248
A4 I2SCLK F251 A4 I2SD|1 I231
4601 4607
+3.3V +3V +5V For ITV Only 1243
I2SD|1
SIDE_Y|CVBS_IN A4
I2SWS I229
+9V
(FOR SCART)
F247
D
1220
+9VA_1 For ITV 1242 Only
GND_1 GND_1 GND_1
A4
F220
A4
3V2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SIDE_R_IN 9607 4606
4u7 7606 BC847B
ROT A4
F223
7V
SC2_CVBS_OUT
C
F245
SVM A4
4605 RES F222
+6VS
I233
3634
2623 I234 3609
3635
2631
+5V
GND_1 GND_1
F221
INTF_L_IN
A4 INTF_CVBS_OUT
AK K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1207
A4
470R
27K
2u2 3607
2625
E
7602 PDTC124ET
5V4 7604 BC847B 0V5
6602 BAV99 A
4u7
SEL_SC2_INTF
5V F213
F219
INTF_R_IN
A2 INTF_CVBS_IN
2617
27K
3608 5V
7605 BC327-25
100n 2624
I241
I227
3606
D
150K
+6V
F243
Iblack
2614
3637
GND_1 GND_1
VT_Supply
F242
A4
Vbuffer
3636
BAS316
100n 2621
100R
Rout
1204 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1219 A4
F212
6610
F241
To 1252 of
4612
47R
I240
2620
4610 RES 3610
Gout A4
for EMC GND3
F215
C
F240
A4
For ITV Only 1245
A4 INTF_FBL A4 SANDCASTLE
100R
1
Bout
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10R
I2S RES
2601
7 4 3 2
B
100n
100R
4602
SCL
2613
27p
3V3 F214
A4
22R
3604
SEL_SC2_INTF A4
27p 2629
WRITE_PROTECT
F237
A A4
4609
+9VA_1
EEPROM
+9VA
14 16
F238
B A4
9604 RES 3603
8
1n0
9639 RES 3639
7601 PCF85116
4K7
3601
4611
+9V
+9V
F233
27p 2628
B
F218
C A4
27p 2627
GND_1
F239
A4
2626
47u 16V
D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A
CRT PANEL
INTF_Pr|RED_IN
3618 100R
1206
To 1331 of
INTF_Pb|BLUE_IN A4
F217
FOR ITV ONLY
2611
COM GND 2
100R 3617
A4
+3.3V
F216
To 1219 of FOR ITV
I230
3 OUT
3616
To 1462 of
OUT
INTF_Y|GREEN_IN
75R
1 IN IN
4604
A4
75R 3621
F211 +6V
F226
INTF_Y_OUT
7603 L78L33ACZ
3620 75R
F210 +6VS
F230
E A4
To 1206 of
F225
INTF_U_OUT A4
To 1212 of
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15
LT1/CT1 INTERFACE PANEL
1212 F224
INTF_V_OUT A4
AV PANEL
A
LT1/CT1 INTERFACE PANEL
FEATURES & CONNECTIVITIES
LIGHT_SENSOR A4 C A4 Stdby_Con A4
F
4630
1213 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MTV
ITV
1206 A B C D E
I2SWS ITV DATA OUT/SDA I2SCLK ITV DATAIN I2SDI1 ITV CLOCK GND GND ITV SCL Light sensor C ITV POR 1 Stdby-con Stdby-con
PCMCIA iDTV USB DVD Power On Power On Power On Power On Bus Request Bus Request Bus Request Bus Request Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx Tx
G
G
3139 123 5673.1
E_14480_010.eps 190204
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1204 B9 1206 A9 1207 D9 1212 A7 1213 E9 1219 C8 1220 E8 1221 F8 1240 F4 1241 F7 1242 E6 1243 F7 1245 C7 2601 C4 2611 B2 2613 B9 2614 D5 2615 E4 2617 D6 2620 C2 2621 C2 2622 E5 2623 E2 2624 E2 2625 E1 2626 D8 2627 D9 2628 D9 2629 D9 2630 F2 2631 E4 3601 B4 3603 B7 3604 C5 3605 C5 3606 D1 3607 E1 3608 D2 3609 E2 3610 C1 3614 E4 3616 B6 3617 B6 3618 B6 3619 B6 3620 B6 3621 B6 3622 E7 3623 E7 3625 E9 3626 E9 3628 E9 3631 E6 3634 E5 3635 D5 3636 D5 3637 D5 3639 C2 4601 E7 4602 B6 4604 B1 4605 D7 4606 D7 4607 E7 4609 D9 4610 C1 4611 B1 4612 C2 4630 F2 5601 F2 5602 E5 6602 E1 6610 C2 7601 B5 7602 D5 7603 A2 7604 D2 7605 D2 7606 E5 7607 E6 9235 E5 9280 F7 9603 F1 9604 B7 9605 C3 9607 D7 9612 E7
9639 B2 F210 A1 F211 B1 F212 C2 F213 D2 F214 C4 F215 C4 F216 B6 F217 B6 F218 B6 F219 C7 F220 D7 F221 C7 F222 D7 F223 D7 F224 A6 F225 A6 F226 A6 F227 E7 F228 E9 F229 E9 F230 A9 F232 E9 F233 B9 F237 B9 F238 B9 F239 A9 F240 B9 F241 B9 F242 C9 F243 C9 F244 C9 F245 C9 F247 D9 F248 E9 F249 E9 F250 B7 F251 E8 I223 D5 I227 D1 I229 E8 I230 B3 I231 E8 I232 C3 I233 E5 I234 E2 I240 C2 I241 D1
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
51
Mono Carrier: Class D - Audio Amplifier
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CLASS D - AUDIO AMP (RESERVED) 3975 +9VB
Vaudio+
47n 2950
3
6905
Audio_Gnd 22u 2947
-V
1
-Vaudio 2
3 P0102DA
I926
RES 9914
5910
Vaudio47n
I914
100K
+Vaudio
Vaudio+
Vaudio-
VSS1
VSS2
35V 470u 2946
39K
680p
10K
15n 3956
220n 2982
Vaudio+ 680p
4912 5912
D
2970
4R7
Vaudio+
Audio_Gnd
680p
5 4 3 2 1
I943
I939
5902
I940
Audio_Gnd
BZX384-C27
I946
5908
3957 Vaudio+
33u
33u 2981
150K
F903 F905
Vaudio-
3971
6904 -V
Audio_Gnd
2971
47n
560p 3937
Audio_Gnd
I938
11
Vaudio-
-Vaudio
Vaudio+
39K 10K
OUT2
2945
2936
1902 2954
3945
I918
2953
12 10V5 I937
1u0
SW2 REL2 EN2
I945
-15V6
Vaudio680p
4R7
10K
BOOT2
2955
I936
C
F904
15n 3972
-2V8
-2V8
POWERUP
3953
-2V8
17 16 14
3
Audio_Gnd
33u
220n 2983
DIAG
220n 5907
I935
220n 2957
STAB
5901 33u
3955
10
7903 BC847B
-9V1
5911
Audio_Gnd
220n 2974
15
I934
220n
-8V8
4911
1u0 7
Audio_Gnd
220n 2980
2952
10V7
2973
BOOT1
6
2984
2958
SW1 REL1 EN1
8
47K
3946
BAS316
9
4910 Audio_Gnd
I919 I922
47K
-2V8 I921
39K
3948
1 2 4
B
-V
VDD2
OUT1
4K7
2K2
22K
3974
-15V6
3943
3961
-2V7
3947 Audio_Gnd
6901
-9V1
100n
1V5
4K7
D
Vaux_GND
Audio_Gnd
Vaux_GND
39K
I915 470R
I920
3962
1V6
Φ
CLASS-D AMPLIFIER
22u 2942
3949
7904 BC857B
3K9
3959
VDD1
3952
5
7902 TDA8925J
2960
F901
VT_Supply BAS316
13
Vaudio-
VOL_MUTE A4
6903
9915
Audio_Gnd
C
I944
I927
RES 4913 2978
470u 35V 2948
3935
2K7
120p
7901-1 LM393N
220n 2972
B
1u0 3933
I913
47K
4K7 2933
4
3934
2932
3932
3960 100K 10p
220p
3965 10K
5914
2
I942
I930
25V 47u
47n 2949
I916
1 -9V1
I911
I924
V_DG 7906 BC327-25
2963
10K
2934
100n
Audio_Gnd
8 I910
2K2
1n0 3930
I909
3942
2930
MAIN_OUTL A4
+Vaudio 2961
22K
1u
9910
3964
2977
Audio_Gnd 2928
A
Vaudio+ Vaudio+1
RES
47n
I941
Vaudio-
9913 5913
VALUE MRT
BAV99 2K2
2951
9911
Vaudio3958
150K
10K
3973
A
6906
I928
1903
*
Vaudio+
560p 3931
50 22u 2979
2931
*
Audio_Gnd 2929
E
2935
MAIN_OUTR A4
I925
100n
2939
1n0 3936
7
10K
F
For SUB Woofer And For ITV
1222 1 2 3 4 5 6
1u0 3939
120p Audio_Gnd
F910
2K7
E
-9V1
4
7901-2 LM393N
47K
4K7 2938
3940
2937
Audio_Gnd
6
220p 3938
Audio_Gnd
Audio_Gnd
8 5
-V
3941 I948
100K
F911
F
Vaudio+ Audio_Gnd
3975
ROW Europe 100R, 2W 150R, 2W
9911 1903
AMP-ST-5W-GL JMP ---
AMP-ST-10W+20W-GL --FUSE RAD LT 2A 250V IEC
AMP-ST-15W/20W-GL --FUSE RAD LT 2A 250V IEC
AMP-ST-5W-NO.SAV-EU JMP ---
AMP-ST-10W-GL AMP-ST-5W-NO.SAV-ITV-EU JMP JMP -----
AMP-ST-5W-ITV-GL AMP-ST-5W-EU AMP-ST-10W-EU JMP JMP JMP -------
AMP-ST-5W-ITV-EU JMP ---
4914
4916
4915
4917 Audio_Gnd
E_14480_011.eps 200204
3139 123 5673.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1222 F1 1902 C9 1903 A7 2928 A2 2929 E2 2930 A2 2931 A2 2932 B2 2933 B2 2934 B2 2935 E2 2936 D2 2937 E2 2938 F2 2939 E2 2942 C4 2945 D5 2946 D5 2947 B5 2948 B5 2949 A5 2950 A5 2951 A5 2952 C6 2953 C6 2954 D7 2955 C7 2957 C8 2958 C8 2960 B4 2961 A5 2963 B6 2970 D7 2971 D7 2972 E7 2973 E8 2974 E8 2977 A4 2978 B7 2979 B8 2980 C8 2981 E7 2982 C8 2983 E8 2984 C8 3930 A2 3931 A2 3932 B2 3933 B2 3934 B3 3935 B3 3936 E2 3937 D2 3938 E2 3939 F2 3940 E3 3941 F3 3942 B4 3943 C4 3945 E9 3946 D2 3947 C3 3948 D2 3949 C3 3952 C6 3953 D6 3955 C7 3956 C8 3957 D9 3958 A5 3959 C3 3960 A5 3961 C3 3962 C2 3964 A8 3965 A8 3971 D7 3972 E8 3973 A3 3974 C4 3975 A7 4910 B9
4911 C7 4912 D7 4913 B7 4914 F8 4915 F8 4916 F8 4917 F8 5901 C7 5902 D7 5907 C8 5908 D8 5910 B7 5911 C7 5912 D7 5913 A8 5914 B7 6901 D2 6903 A9 6904 D3 6905 B5 6906 A6 7901-1 B3 7901-2 E3 7902 B5 7903 D3 7904 C2 7906 A8 9910 A7 9911 A7 9913 A8 9914 B7 9915 B7 F901 C2 F903 D9 F904 C9 F905 D9 F910 F1 F911 F1 I909 A2 I910 A3 I911 A3 I913 B2 I914 B3 I915 C3 I916 A4 I918 D3 I919 C4 I920 C2 I921 C4 I922 C4 I924 A5 I925 E2 I926 A8 I927 B8 I928 A5 I930 A6 I934 C6 I935 C7 I936 C7 I937 C6 I938 D6 I939 D7 I940 D7 I941 A3 I942 A8 I943 D7 I944 A9 I945 D4 I946 D9 I948 F3
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
52
Mono Carrier: Audio Amplifier
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AUDIO_AMPLIFIER
A
A
100n
2986
100n
2987
Vaudio+1
2985 RES 3985 1K0
7990 TDA2616Q +16V 7
I951
2989 220n
4
MAIN_OUTR
3 I954
F952
F955
I952
2992
1281
1280
3989 10R
22n
RES 3991
F951
I956
47n
2994
2991
B
AmpOutL
1
2996
4K7
3988
B
1n0
A4
I953
2990
F950
MAIN_OUTL
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
8 ohm / 15W
8 ohm / 15W
F953 Audio_Gnd
9 6
1n0
4K7
3992
220n
AmpOutR 2995
8
I957
+16V 2
I958
3996 3997
820K 120K
1282
POWER DOWN
4u7 3999
TO 1683 OF
47K
100n
3995 2988
I955
C
Audio_Gnd
0V7
A4
D
16V
-16V 5
68K
VOL_MUTE
7992 BC847B
2916
68K
4u7
7991 BC847B
3994 Vaudio+1
10R 2997
22n
C
Audio_Gnd
3993
47n
1K0
2993
A4
-Vaudio
7993 BC847B
D
I959
6990
E
4u7 2915
4u7 2914
4u7 2913
4u7 2912
2911
BAS316
E
Stdby_Con
3998
A4
7994 BC847B
10K
MUTING A5
E_14480_012.eps 200204
3139 123 5673.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1280 B9 1281 B9 1282 D3 2911 D3 2912 D3 2913 D4 2914 D4 2915 D4 2916 C6 2985 B4 2986 A7 2987 A7 2988 C7 2989 B5 2990 B5 2991 B4 2992 B5 2993 C5 2994 B7 2995 C7 2996 B8 2997 C8 3985 B4 3988 B5 3989 B8 3991 B4 3992 C5 3993 C8 3994 C4 3995 C6 3996 D5 3997 D4 3998 E3 3999 D4 6990 D3 7990 B6 7991 C6 7992 C5 7993 D5 7994 E3 F950 B4 F951 B4 F952 B8 F953 C9 F955 B8 I951 B6 I952 B6 I953 B5 I954 B5 I955 C6 I956 B8 I957 C8 I958 D4 I959 D4
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
53
Mono Carrier: Rear I/O Cinch
1
2
3
4
5
REAR I/O CINCH
6
7
8
9
1 2 3
1236
ITV RES
3101
SC2_CVBS_OUT A5
68R
7104-2 IMX1
6
7104-1 IMX1 5
2
4
1
MUTING
1229
6 1 2 3 4 5
3135
C
4116
75R
4136
1113
F112
For ITV F113
9138
RES
6132
RES
1110
3138
75R
For ITV
SC2_Y|CVBS_IN A4
*
1267
3130
3129
75R
75R
4130
AV2 15
1265
I117
10K
1K0
2163
47p 100n
2
1237
1
4117
1
2157
10K
F
2 A4
F138
SC2_STATUS|ITV_MSG
3 6
7
E_14480_014.eps 200204
3139 123 5673.1
2
3
4
5
E
Sub Woofer
F120
SC1_FBL
1266
SPDIF
I118
2K2
3164 1262 8 9
3166
3156
3161
SC2_L_OUT A4
47n
A4
F119
7103 BC847B
SC1_R_IN
for ITV only For ITV
390p 1111
4115
1228 1 2 3
22R
2159
2u2 50V
F121
3162
47n
2125
390p 1112 I119
2158
3126
330p
390p
2136 2137
330p
150R
A4
SC2_R_OUT
CN-R1 I-ITV-LA ----------------JMP -----
16
SC1_L_IN I109
D
V
F111
Vbuffer
I112
R
47K 1153
47K
2u2 50V
14
13
3157
2123
A4
ITEM CN-R1 I/1 O/YUV-GL CN-R2 I/1 O/YUV-GL CN-R2 I/1 O-GL CN-R1 I/1 O-GL CN-R1 I/1 O/YUV-SY-ITV-GL --4101 --JMP --JMP 4102 --JMP JMP --JMP 4103 --JMP JMP --JMP 4109 --JMP ------4110 --JMP --------4111 --JMP ----4130 ----JMP ----9112 JMP JMP --JMP --9113 JMP JMP JMP --JMP JMP JMP --9114 JMP --JMP JMP --9116 JMP ---
4104 RES
330p
2131
3132
47K
2133
I120 50V 2u2
9101
F110
3133 47K
A4
150R
1224
L
3131
I114 3134
75R
4113
2134
I113
4144
3124
330p
2122
50V 2u2
SC2_R_IN
*
3125 150R
2127
1109
75R
3121 4110
6106
BZX284-C6V8
*
F109
A4
I110
330R 9113
I111
2124
F123
A4
SC1_CVBS_IN
3123 150R
2132
I116
SC2_L_IN
4111
9
* 390p
1108
R
4105 RES
F108
2126
1107 11
10
3168
3115
*9116 3122
L
SC1_RED_IN A4
RES
F107
AV1
I106
3116
4108 1106
D
12
3167
RES
3113
1105
*
9114
F122 F106
1223-3
A4
RES
47K
8
RES
Y
I105 SC1_BLUE_IN
3114
4107 F105
5
1
1137
1264
V
F
3136 RES
A4
RES
*9112
I115
A4
75R
SC2_CHROMA_IN I104 SC1_GREEN_IN 3169
RES
3111
4109
1104
7
6
V
for ITV
F116
10u
3112
U
E
SC2_R_OUT A4
1263
F104
1223-2
B
for ITV
For ITV
4106
YUV INPUT
SC2_L_OUT A4
10u 4112
220K 220K
2108
1103 4103
I107
* * *
C
F117
2106
150R
4102
4101
I108
3105
F103
330p 3106
4
390p
2107
1102 1
V
390p
B
150R
330p 3104
2
R
2105
3103
F102
2103
L
1138
A5
3 2 1
From 1240 OF
3
2104
1223-1
F115
MONITOR OUTPUT
A
3
1227
1101
A
1 2 3
F101
6
7
8
9
1101 A3 1102 B3 1103 B3 1104 C3 1105 C3 1106 D3 1107 E3 1108 E3 1109 F3 1110 C8 1111 D8 1112 E8 1113 C8 1137 B9 1138 A3 1153 F9 1223-1 B2 1223-2 C2 1223-3 E2 1227 B6 1228 E9 1229 B8 1236 A4 1237 F9 1262 F6 1263 C5 1264 C5 1265 D5 1266 F5 1267 D5 2103 B4 2104 B4 2105 B5 2106 B5 2107 B3 2108 B3 2122 E4 2123 E5 2124 F4 2125 E5 2126 E3 2127 F3 2131 D7 2132 D7 2133 E7 2134 D7 2136 D8 2137 E8 2157 F9 2158 F7 2159 F8 2163 E9 3101 A3 3103 B4 3104 B4 3105 B4 3106 B4 3111 C4 3112 C4 3113 C4 3114 C4 3115 D4 3116 D4 3121 E4 3122 D4 3123 E3 3124 E5 3125 E3 3126 F5 3129 C9 3130 C9 3131 D8 3132 D7 3133 D8 3134 E7 3135 C7 3136 C7 3138 C7 3156 F8 3157 E8 3161 E7 3162 E9
3164 F7 3166 E7 3167 C5 3168 D5 3169 C5 4101 C2 4102 C3 4103 C2 4104 D8 4105 E3 4106 C3 4107 C3 4108 D3 4109 C3 4110 E3 4111 E3 4112 B5 4113 D6 4115 E6 4116 C9 4117 F9 4130 C9 4136 C7 4144 E6 6106 E3 6132 C8 7103 E8 7104-1 A4 7104-2 A4 9101 D6 9112 C4 9113 E4 9114 C4 9116 D4 9138 C7 F101 A3 F102 B3 F103 B3 F104 C2 F105 C2 F106 D2 F107 D2 F108 E2 F109 E2 F110 D8 F111 D8 F112 C8 F113 C8 F115 B7 F116 B5 F117 B5 F119 E9 F120 F9 F121 E9 F122 D2 F123 E2 F138 F6 I104 C5 I105 C5 I106 D5 I107 B4 I108 B4 I109 E5 I110 D5 I111 E5 I112 E5 I113 D7 I114 D7 I115 C7 I116 D6 I117 E7 I118 E8 I119 E8 I120 D6
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
54
Mono Carrier: Front Control
1
2
3
4
FRONT CONTROL
1602
3681
820R
1K8
3687
3686
390R
150R 1603
A
I686
volume-
USA
F683
I683
channel-
1604
channel+
DVD Eject
POWER
1606
I682
volume+
I688
I681
TS
3685
1K2
3684
9683
RES
A
3683
F682
RES
KEY_PROTN
3689
A4,A9
1601
1600
F685
B
B
STANDBY LED 6691 F693 1 2
*
I689
330R 3693
*
A4
3
IR_OUT
F692
4691
6692 TSOP1836
1 F699 2
IR LED_OUT
D
GND
D
for ITV only
F695
1692
BPW46
6693
4694
OUT
IR RECEIVER
For Engg Purpose Only F694
VS
BZX384-C5V1
3694 F691
IR
C
I693
100u 6694
3692
C
3691
220R
4692 F696
2691
LED
A4
4695 RES
4K7
RES
3690
I691
3695
220R
+6V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7691 BC847B
680K
47n 3696
2692
I687
*
4693
F697
1693 1 2 3 4 5 6
To 1693 of
1600 A4 1601 A4 1602 A4 1603 B3 1604 B3 1606 B2 1692 D4 1693 D4 2691 C4 2692 E2 3681 A4 3683 A2 3684 A2 3685 A3 3686 A3 3687 A4 3689 A2 3690 C4 3691 C3 3692 C2 3693 C4 3694 C3 3695 B2 3696 E2 3697 E3 4691 D2 4692 C2 4693 E3 4694 D1 4695 B3 6691 C3 6692 C4 6693 D2 6694 C4 7691 D3 9683 A2 F682 A2 F683 A4 F685 B4 F691 D2 F692 D3 F693 C2 F694 D1 F695 D2 F696 C1 F697 D4 F698 E3 F699 D3 I681 A2 I682 A3 I683 A3 I686 A4 I687 D2 I688 A3 I689 C4 I691 B3 I693 C3
3697
E
10K
F698
E
LIGHT_SENSOR A4 KEY_PROTN A9
ITEM NO. 6691
NAFTA
EU
LATAM
AP
4693
SETS WITH LIGHT_SENSOR JMP
LTL-10234WHCR LTL-10234WHCR LTL-10224WHCR LTL-10224WHCR (RED) (RED) (GREEN) (GREEN) E_14480_015.eps 200204
3139 123 5673.1
1
2
3
4
E_06532_012.eps 130204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
55
Mono Carrier: DVD Power Supply
1
2
3
4
5
6
DVD POWER SUPPLY (RESERVED) Vaux
1582
A
ITV only
4 3 2 1
A
ITV only
22K
3584 2K7
I588 3 OSC
I582
8K2
3582
100n
2584
2n2
B 4K7
3583
1n0
2587
I584
6
SB340
1
6581
GND BOOT
7
100n
COMP
2583
F583
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 SS_INH
Vaux_GND
2586
Vaux_GND
F582
47u
I583 Vaux_GND
F581
Vaux_GND +5V
5581
OUT 4
1m0 16V
B
FB 8
VCC
2588
220n 3581
2582
100u 25V
2581
100R
3585
5
I587
DVD/IDTV
1581
7581 L4978
Vaux
Vaux_GND
Vaux_GND
Vaux_GND
Vaux_GND
4581 7582 L78L08ACZ OUT COM 2
3
C
Vaux_GND 2u2
2u2
IN
2590
1
+9VB
Vaux_GND
22n
Vaux_GND +9VA
2589
C
2585
I585
MainSupplyGnd MainSupplyGnd MainSupplyGnd E_14480_016.eps 200204
3139 123 5673.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1581 A6 1582 A6 2581 B1 2582 B2 2583 C2 2584 C2 2585 C3 2586 B3 2587 B4 2588 B5 2589 C1 2590 C2 3581 B2 3582 C3 3583 B5 3584 B5 3585 B1 4581 C2 5581 B4 6581 B4 7581 A3 7582 C2 F581 B6 F582 B6 F583 B6 I582 B2 I583 B2 I584 B3 I585 C3 I587 B4 I588 B4
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
56
Layout Mono Carrier: (Top Side) 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1010 1011 1012 1013 1137 1138 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208
E8 E6 E5 E5 E7 E8 E7 E7 E6 E8 C8 E7 C6 D5 D5 E7 D7
1212 1213 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1227 1228 1229 1234 1236 1237 1240 1241 1262 1280
C6 C5 C7 E4 C5 D3 D8 C7 E8 C8 D5 D7 E8 D4 D5 D7 E3
1281 1401 1402 1404 1451 1452 1453 1454 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508
3139 123 5673.1
E3 C7 A6 A5 C7 A8 B5 B7 A2 A2 B2 C3 C2 A2 A2 C2 A2
1509 1510 1532 1535 1542 1543 1545 1581 1582 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1606 1682 1692
C2 B1 B3 C5 C4 C4 C4 D4 C3 C1 C1 D1 D1 C1 A1 D4 C1
1693 1902 1903 2006 2008 2105 2106 2123 2125 2132 2134 2203 2217 2218 2224 2230 2234
C1 D2 D3 E7 E8 D7 D7 D7 D7 C7 C8 D5 E5 D6 E5 D6 D6
2240 2250 2251 2265 2273 2275 2401 2404 2405 2406 2411 2412 2413 2415 2416 2417 2418
E5 D6 E5 E6 E6 E6 A7 B6 A6 A6 B6 A6 B6 A5 B6 A6 A5
2419 2427 2451 2454 2455 2457 2458 2459 2460 2463 2465 2467 2481 2484 2486 2500 2501
B6 B6 A8 A8 A8 C7 C7 A8 A7 C8 C8 C7 A7 A8 B6 A2 C2
2502 2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 2511 2514 2528 2534 2535 2536 2537 2539 2540
C2 A4 A4 A4 A3 A3 C2 C1 A5 A4 B4 B3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3
2541 2542 2543 2545 2546 2551 2552 2561 2562 2563 2565 2570 2581 2588 2611 2621 2624
C3 B4 B3 B3 B3 B5 C5 C4 B4 C4 C4 B4 C4 C4 E4 E5 E5
2691 2945 2948 2949 2960 2961 2978 3020 3101 3103 3105 3112 3114 3116 3122 3123 3125
B1 D2 D2 D2 D2 D1 C3 E7 D8 D8 D8 D8 D8 D8 D8 D8 D8
3131 3133 3138 3157 3167 3201 3215 3224 3230 3231 3234 3239 3241 3246 3249 3252 3258
C8 D8 D8 E8 D7 D5 D5 E5 D4 D6 C6 C7 E5 D5 D7 D5 D7
3260 3270 3274 3275 3276 3277 3278 3291 3401 3403 3406 3407 3410 3411 3412 3414 3415
D5 D7 D7 E7 C7 C7 D7 D7 C6 A7 A7 A7 A8 A6 A6 C6 B6
3417 3418 3425 3430 3431 3432 3433 3434 3440 3441 3442 3443 3451 3454 3455 3457 3458
A6 C5 C5 B6 C6 B7 B6 B6 C5 B6 A7 A7 B6 A8 B8 B8 B7
3460 3461 3466 3467 3468 3470 3471 3472 3482 3483 3484 3485 3497 3500 3501 3502 3503
B7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C8 C7 C7 B8 B8 B8 B8 C5 B1 B1 A1 B1
3504 3505 3506 3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 3513 3514 3515 3516 3519 3520 3521 3523 3529
B2 A2 B1 B3 A3 B2 B2 B5 A5 A5 A5 A4 B4 A4 A5 B2 B3
3531 3532 3534 3542 3563 3571 3574 3575 3577 3584 3585 3603 3606 3616 3617 3618 3683
B4 B3 B4 B3 C4 B5 B5 B5 B5 C4 D4 C6 E4 C6 C6 C6 B1
3943 3945 3961 3962 3975 5201 5208 5216 5217 5401 5402 5403 5405 5406 5408 5410 5450
C2 D3 C3 D3 D3 D5 D6 D6 D7 A6 B6 B5 B5 B6 B6 B6 B7
5451 5500 5501 5502 5503 5511 5512 5512C 5512D 5531 5532 5536 5537 5551 5552 5561 5562
B7 B2 B2 A3 A3 A4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B3 C4 C4 B5 B5 B4 B4
5581 5602 5603 5901 5902 5907 5908 5913 5914 6001 6401 6403 6404 6406 6410 6411 6412
D4 D7 C7 D2 D2 D1 D2 D3 D3 E8 A6 C6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6
6452 6453 6454 6455 6456 6459 6480 6481 6486 6500 6511 6535 6536 6537 6540 6551 6562
C7 B7 B8 B8 A8 B8 B8 B8 C6 A4 A5 C4 C3 C3 B3 C5 B4
6563 6573 6575 6581 6691 6692 6693 6905 7203 7204 7401 7405 7406 7451 7452 7453 7512
C4 B5 A4 D4 A1 B1 B1 D1 E5 E5 A6 B6 C5 C8 C8 C7 A4
7513 7531 7571 7581 7601 7603 7605 7902 7906 7990 9002 9101 9112 9113 9114 9116 9120
B5 B3 B5 D4 D5 E4 E5 C2 C3 E3 E7 D8 D8 D8 D8 D8 C7
9121 9122 9123 9124 9125 9126 9128 9129 9138 9201 9202 9203 9204 9205 9206 9207 9208
D7 D7 D7 D8 D7 D8 D7 D7 D8 E6 E4 E6 E7 D4 D4 D4 D4
E_14480_002.eps 190204
9209 9210 9211 9212 9213 9214 9215 9216 9217 9218 9219 9220 9221 9222 9223 9224 9225 9226 9227 9228 9229 9230 9231 9232 9233 9234 9235 9236 9237 9238 9239 9240 9241 9242 9243 9244 9245 9246 9247 9248 9249 9250 9251 9252 9253 9254 9255 9257 9258 9259 9260 9261 9262 9263 9264 9265 9266 9267 9268 9269 9271 9272 9273 9274 9275 9276 9277 9278 9279 9280 9290 9294 9295 9296 9297 9298 9299 9401 9402 9407 9410 9417 9460 9466 9467 9469 9470 9473 9474 9475 9476 9477 9478 9479 9480 9481 9482 9483 9484 9485 9486 9487 9488 9489 9490 9491
C5 E7 D7 E7 D7 D4 E7 D4 D6 E6 D6 D5 D5 E5 E6 D5 D4 D4 D5 D4 D5 D5 E6 E5 E6 E7 D7 C5 D6 D7 E6 E5 C6 D4 C4 E6 E4 E6 E4 E6 D4 E6 E5 C5 D5 C7 C7 D7 C7 D7 D7 D7 D7 E7 C7 C7 C7 D7 D7 C4 E5 D4 D4 D4 C5 D5 C6 D4 D4 D5 E6 C6 C5 C5 C4 C5 C5 B5 B6 B6 B6 A5 B6 B5 B6 C5 C6 C5 C5 C5 C5 C6 C6 C6 C6 C6 C7 C8 C7 C7 B7 B8 A8 B8 A8 A6
9492 9500 9501 9502 9503 9504 9505 9506 9507 9508 9509 9510 9511 9512 9513 9514 9532 9536 9537 9570 9573 9574 9575 9576 9577 9578 9579 9582 9583 9584 9585 9586 9587 9589 9590 9591 9592 9593 9604 9605 9607 9612 9631 9633 9637 9639 9642 9643 9653 9660 9661 9662 9663 9664 9665 9666 9683 9688 9689 9690 9694 9695 9696 9910 9911 9913 9914 9915 9920 9921 9924 9926 9927 9933 9935 9936 9937 9939 9940 9941 9942 9943 9944 9946
C6 A2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B3 A3 A2 A2 C4 C4 B2 B3 B5 C4 B3 C4 C4 A3 C2 B4 C3 A4 B5 B3 C3 C4 C4 B4 A4 C4 B4 C5 C5 C3 C3 C4 C6 E6 D7 E4 C6 C7 E7 E4 D7 D5 D4 C1 C1 B1 C1 C1 B1 C1 B1 E4 E4 E4 E6 E4 D4 C3 D3 D3 D3 C3 D3 D3 D2 D3 D2 D3 D3 C3 C3 D3 C3 D3 D3 D3 D3 C2
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
57
Layout Mono Carrier (Overview Bottom Side) 2001 2002 2003 2004 2007 2009 2013 2014 2016 2103 2104 2107 2108 2122 2124 2126 2127
A8 A8 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 B7 A7 B8 B8 B8 B7 B8 B8
2131 2133 2136 2137 2157 2158 2159 2163 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212
C8 C8 C8 B8 A8 A8 A7 A7 A5 B5 B5 A4 A4 B5 B5 B6 B5
2213 2214 2215 2216 2221 2222 2223 2225 2226 2227 2229 2231 2232 2233 2235 2236 2237
B5 A5 B6 B6 A5 A5 B6 B6 A5 A5 B6 B6 B6 B6 A5 A5 B6
2238 2239 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 2249 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 2257
A5 A5 A5 B6 B6 A5 A5 B6 B6 A5 B6 B6 A6 A6 A7 A6 A6
2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2266 2267 2268 2269 2270 2271 2272 2274 2276 2277
B6 B5 A6 A6 B6 A6 B6 A6 A6 A5 A5 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 B5
2278 2279 2280 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286 2287 2288 2289 2402 2403 2408 2409 2410 2414
A5 B5 B5 B5 A6 A6 A6 B6 B6 B4 B4 E8 E8 C6 D6 C6 C6
2420 2425 2428 2453 2456 2461 2462 2464 2468 2469 2470 2480 2482 2483 2487 2488 2489
C6 C6 D7 E8 D8 D7 D7 C8 C8 D7 C8 E8 C5 E8 D6 C5 D6
2490 2491 2512 2513 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 2530 2531 2532 2533 2538 2544 2547 2548
D8 E8 E5 E5 D5 E5 E5 E5 E5 D4 D4 D4 D3 C4 D4 C4 C4
2549 2550 2553 2564 2566 2571 2572 2573 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 2601 2613 2614
D3 D3 D4 C4 C4 D5 C5 D5 C4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B5 B5 B7
2615 2617 2620 2622 2623 2625 2626 2627 2628 2629 2630 2692 2928 2929 2930 2931 2932
B7 B7 A5 B7 A5 A4 C6 B6 B6 B6 C7 D1 C3 B3 B3 C3 C3
2933 2934 2935 2936 2937 2938 2939 2942 2946 2947 2950 2951 2952 2953 2954 2955 2957
C3 C3 B3 B3 B3 B3 B3 C2 B2 C2 B2 C2 C2 C2 B2 B2 B1
2958 2963 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974 2977 2979 2980 2981 2982 2983 2984 2985 2986 2987
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 C2 C3 B1 B2 B2 B2 B2 B3 A3 A3
2988 2989 2990 2991 2992 2993 2994 2995 2996 2997 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006
A3 B3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A8 A8 A8 A7 A8 A7 A5
3007 3008 3009 3010 3014 3016 3018 3019 3104 3106 3111 3113 3115 3121 3124 3126 3129
A5 A7 A5 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 B7 A7 B8 B8 B8 B8 B7 B7 C8
3130 3132 3134 3135 3136 3156 3161 3162 3164 3166 3168 3169 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206
C8 C8 C8 C8 C8 A8 B8 A8 B8 A8 B7 B7 B5 A5 B5 A5 A5
3207 3208 3209 3210 3211 3212 3214 3216 3217 3218 3219 3220 3221 3222 3223 3225 3226
B5 A4 A4 A4 A4 B5 B5 B6 A5 B5 B5 B6 B6 A6 A4 B6 B6
3227 3228 3229 3232 3233 3235 3236 3237 3238 3240 3242 3243 3244 3245 3247 3248 3250
B6 B6 B6 A5 C6 A5 A5 A5 B6 B6 B6 A5 A6 C5 A6 B7 B7
3251 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 3259 3261 3262 3263 3264 3265 3266 3267 3268 3269 3271
A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 B7 B5 B4 B5 B5 B5 B5 B5 A6 B7 B5 B6
3272 3273 3279 3280 3281 3282 3283 3284 3285 3287 3288 3289 3290 3292 3293 3294 3295
B6 B6 B5 B5 B5 B5 B5 B5 A4 B5 B5 B6 C6 B6 B6 C6 A5
3296 3404 3405 3409 3416 3420 3427 3428 3436 3445 3446 3452 3453 3462 3463 3464 3469
A5 E6 E7 E8 D6 C6 D7 D7 D5 C5 C5 D7 E7 D8 D8 C8 C8
3473 3474 3475 3476 3477 3478 3480 3481 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3494
E8 C7 C7 E7 E8 D8 E7 D8 D8 E7 E7 C5 E8 E8 E8 E8 E8
Part 1 E_14480_003a.eps
Part 2 E_14480_003b.eps
Part 3 E_14480_003c.eps 3139 123 5673.1
Part 4 E_14480_003d.eps E_14480_003.eps 190204
3495 3498 3499 3512 3517 3518 3522 3524 3527 3528 3530 3533 3535 3536 3537 3538 3539 3541 3565 3572 3573 3576 3578 3579 3581 3582 3583 3601 3604 3605 3607 3608 3609 3610 3614 3619 3620 3621 3622 3623 3625 3626 3628 3631 3634 3635 3636 3637 3681 3684 3685 3686 3687 3689 3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 3695 3696 3697 3930 3931 3932 3933 3934 3935 3936 3937 3938 3939 3940 3941 3942 3946 3947 3948 3949 3952 3953 3955 3956
C6 C6 C6 E5 E5 E5 E5 E5 D4 D4 D3 D3 C3 C3 D3 D3 D3 C3 C4 C5 D5 D5 D5 D5 B4 B4 B4 B5 B5 B5 A4 A5 A4 A4 B7 C6 C6 C6 A4 A4 B5 B5 B5 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 C1 C1 B1 B1 C1 C1 C2 E1 E1 D1 E1 D1 D1 D1 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C2 B3 B3 B3 B3 B3 B2 C2 B3 C2 C3 C2 C2 C2 B2 B2
3957 3958 3959 3960 3964 3965 3971 3972 3973 3974 3985 3988 3989 3991 3992 3993 3994 3995 3996 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4010 4011 4012 4013 4015 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 4109 4110 4111 4112 4113 4115 4116 4117 4130 4136 4144 4209 4210 4211 4212 4213 4214 4219 4221 4222 4223 4224 4226 4227 4240 4241 4470 4492 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 4601 4602 4604 4605 4606 4607 4609 4610 4611 4612 4620
B3 B1 C3 B1 C3 C3 B2 B2 B2 C2 B3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 B3 A3 B4 A8 A8 A5 A7 A5 A7 A8 A7 A6 A6 A6 A8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 C7 C7 B7 C8 A8 C8 C8 B7 A6 B6 B6 B5 B6 C6 B5 B5 A5 A6 A5 A5 A6 C4 C4 E8 E8 E5 C4 C4 C3 C4 A4 C6 A4 C7 C7 A4 A6 A4 B4 A5 C7
4631 4635 4637 4642 4644 4645 4646 4648 4649 4691 4692 4693 4694 4695 4696 4910 4911 4912 4913 4914 4915 4916 4917 4921 5001 5002 5003 5202 5203 5205 5206 5207 5209 5210 5211 5212 5213 5214 5215 5513 5533 5534 5535 5601 5910 5911 5912 6002 6003 6004 6005 6106 6132 6201 6202 6203 6204 6205 6207 6208 6209 6210 6211 6407 6408 6441 6442 6443 6450 6451 6457 6458 6482 6483 6484 6488 6489 6512 6514 6531 6532 6533 6534
B4 C7 B6 A7 A7 B6 B5 B7 A4 C1 D1 D1 C1 E1 C1 B3 B2 B2 C2 A4 A4 A4 A4 C2 A7 A7 A5 B5 B5 B6 B5 B5 A5 B6 A6 A6 B6 A5 B5 D5 D4 C4 C4 C7 C2 B2 B2 A8 A8 A5 A7 B8 C8 A4 B6 B6 A6 C6 A5 C5 C4 B5 B5 D5 D5 D6 D6 C6 E7 E7 C7 C8 C5 C7 D6 D7 D7 D5 E5 D3 D4 D4 D4
6538 6541 6564 6565 6566 6571 6572 6576 6602 6610 6694 6901 6903 6904 6906 7001 7003 7103 7104 7200 7201 7202 7205 7207 7208 7209 7210 7402 7403 7404 7408 7410 7411 7454 7455 7456 7480 7481 7482 7483 7484 7511 7514 7532 7535 7536 7541 7561 7573 7602 7604 7606 7607 7691 7901 7903 7904 7991 7992 7993
D4 C3 C4 C4 C4 C5 D5 C3 A4 A5 C1 B3 C3 C2 B2 A5 A7 A7 B7 B6 A5 A5 C5 B6 B6 A5 A5 E7 E7 C6 C6 C6 C6 C8 D8 D8 E7 D8 C5 E8 C5 E5 E5 D4 C3 C3 C2 C4 C5 B7 A4 B7 B7 D1 C3 C3 C3 B3 B3 B4
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
Layout Mono Carrier (Part 1 Bottom Side)
Part 1
7.
58
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
59
Layout Mono Carrier (Part 2 Bottom Side)
Part 2
E_14480_003b.eps 200204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
60
Layout Mono Carrier (Part 3 Bottom Side)
Part 3 E_14480_003c.eps 090204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
61
Layout Mono Carrier (Part 4 Bottom Side)
Part 4 E_14480_003d.eps 090204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
62
CRT Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CRT PANEL
ITEM 3328 3329 3330 3337 4328 4329 4330 4337 5351 9351
A
B1
9
10
11
ROW THE REST RGB+DISPL-29FS_IN 100R 100R 100R 100R 100R 100R ----------------JMP --IND FXD LAL04A 22U PM10 --JMP JMP
A
AQUADAG WIRE
1332
10R +200VA
0330 MECHPART
CRT Sockets
3333 100R
140V
3334 I333
OUT2 8
BC2
3335 I334
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
G1
6 CG
CG G2
CR
8
H1
9
H2
10
CB
11
GND
12
Green
7V
C
CR H1 H2 CB GND
BCI 5
PROTECTION
CRT
7 G2
I335
Red
6V
2333
GND
D GND_CRT
4
R
I355
5355
1331
G
THERMAL
B
1K
3331 100R
140V
1n5
7
Blue
5
G1
1 F331
V
Vref 2.5V
I337
B
BC3
2332 F341
6
10n 3357
*
OUT3 7
A3 Vref
I332
R
F340
5
6
RES 9352
4330
3330 100R
4328
3328 100R
D
3k75
3332
Vdd
F339
5
1n
3k77
I336
1K
100R
140V
G
5
RES
A2 Vref
I331
F338
1K 3336
Vdd
2V5
G3
1
7
NOT USED
BC1
I330
188k7 3 IN3
1
G3
2331
A1
3k77
3k75
1
T0 CRT SOCKET
OUT1 9
Vref
BAV21
6331
Vdd
2V5
*
BAV21
6332
6333
10n
2334
188k7
188k7 2 IN2
1254-A
3355
100R
3329
4329
3k75
*
1
B
1256-A
4
3k77
2V5
C
1255
6 Vdd
1 IN1
BAV21
7330 TDA6107
100n
2330
B
2 F332 4337 3337
*
SVM_ROT
*
3n3
2353
1K5
3354 9351
ROT B2
F356
27u
680p
5352
*
2352
BZX384-C5V6
F336
BZX384-C5V6 6337
6 7
BZX384-C5V6 6336
5
BC_INFO
F335
6334
Features & Connectivities
* BZX384-C5V6 6335
4 F334
E
T0 CRT SOCKET
3 F333
From 1204 of
5351
E
F
I357
3356
EHTb
8
F
I353
B2 1352
+200V 1351
FOCUS
VG2
10n
2335
VSVM
EHT
1
F351 2 I351
3351
3
100R
F354 +200VA
From 1401 of
LINE + FRAME DEFLECTION
5330
F353
5
G
10u
2351
Line + Frame Deflection
G
FROM LOT, MAIN CHASSIS Filament
4 F352
EHTb B1
E_14480_017.eps 200204
3139 123 5674.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0330 B1 1254-A B7 1255 B6 1256-A B6 1331 E1 1332 B7 1351 F2 1352 F9 2330 B3 2331 D6 2332 C5 2333 D4 2334 B3 2335 F2 2351 G3 2352 F6 2353 F7 3328 D2 3329 C2 3330 D2 3331 D4 3332 C4 3333 C4 3334 C5 3335 C4 3336 C5 3337 E3 3351 G3 3354 F5 3355 E6 3356 B6 3357 D6 4328 D2 4329 C2 4330 D2 4337 E3 5330 G5 5351 F3 5352 E4 5355 E6 6331 C4 6332 B4 6333 B4 6334 F2 6335 F2 6336 F3 6337 F3 7330 B2 9351 F3 9352 E6 F331 E1 F332 E1 F333 E1 F334 E1 F335 E1 F336 F1 F338 C5 F339 C5 F340 C5 F341 C5 F351 G2 F352 G2 F353 G4 F354 G3 F356 E5 I330 C4 I331 C4 I332 D4 I333 C4 I334 C4 I335 D4 I336 C5 I337 D3 I351 G2 I353 F5 I355 D6 I357 B7
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
63
CRT Panel: Eco Scavem
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ECO SCAVEM A 3364
560R
2363
22u 100V
1K8
1K8
I360
3373
0316
I374
3376
B
14V4
22u 100V
2368
1n0
2362
250
10R
83V
35V
2364 400 V
1361
I369
2365
33R
4n7
I365
3369
6383
I371
SCAVEM COIL
C
7364 2SC3421
0V3
10R
2385
58V I372 1R8
3370
I363
560R
3368
220p
47p
2387
D
2381
7331 BC847B
1K2
3383
I381
RGP10D
1K0
I386
2367
68K
3367
K
3389
35V
7362 BC857B
13V
3390
Filament
3 2 1
470R
68K
9361 RES
10R
3362
3366
AK BAV99 6361
22n
5331
100u 25V
D
F361
F362
14V F360
5361
A
4n7
I364
B1SVM_ROT
B
7363 2SA1358
3371
33R A
2376
83V I366 3365 I367
I362
I375
C
I368 220p
To 1470 of
13V6
AK BAV99
6376
2384
1382
3388
K
MECHPART
7361 BC847B
I361
68K
26V
47n
I373
20V
2361
1K8
1K5
3387
3361
3375
20V 7376 BC857B
180K
I370
10u 100V
VSVM
3363
A
17V7 7381 BC337-40
8V7
I383
9V4
2382
100n
2383
1u0
F382
BAS316
1381 3 2 1
ROTATION COIL
3386 8V7
82K
F
4374
1K0
RES
7382 BC337-40
0V6
10K 3385
I384
I385
3374
3384
F
E
7366 BC857B F381
100n
2386
B1 ROT
6381
7332 BC857B
100R
E
3381
I387
E_14480_018.eps 200204
3139 123 5674.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0316 A6 1361 B7 1381 E7 1382 B4 2361 B4 2362 B4 2363 A4 2364 B4 2365 C4 2367 C6 2368 B4 2376 C2 2381 D3 2382 E6 2383 F6 2384 B5 2385 C5 2386 F3 2387 D3 3361 B3 3362 C3 3363 A5 3364 A5 3365 B5 3366 C5 3367 C5 3368 D5 3369 C5 3370 D5 3371 C6 3373 A2 3374 F5 3375 B2 3376 B2 3381 E4 3383 D4 3384 F4 3385 F4 3386 F5 3387 B3 3388 B4 3389 C4 3390 D3 4374 F5 5331 D2 5361 B6 6361 C3 6376 B2 6381 E5 6383 D2 7331 E3 7332 E3 7361 B3 7362 D3 7363 B5 7364 C5 7366 E6 7376 B2 7381 E5 7382 F5 9361 B6 F360 D2 F361 B6 F362 C6 F381 E7 F382 E7 I360 A5 I361 B3 I362 B3 I363 D3 I364 C3 I365 C4 I366 B5 I367 B5 I368 B5
I369 C5 I370 A4 I371 C5 I372 C5 I373 B3 I374 B2 I375 C2 I381 D3 I383 E4 I384 F4 I385 F4 I386 D2 I387 E3
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
64
Layout CRT Panel (Top Side)
E_14480_004.eps 100204
0316 0330 1254 1255 1256 1331 1332 1351 1352 1361 1381 2330 2351 2352 2353 2361 2363 2364 2367 2368 2381 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 3336 3351 3354 3355 3356 3362 3364 3367 3371 3373 3381 5330 5331 5351
A2 A1 A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1
5352 5361 6331 6332 6333 6383 7330 7363 7364 7381 7382 9351 9352 9361 9373 9390
A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A2 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A2 A1 A2
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
65
Layout CRT Panel (Bottom Side)
2333
3376
2376
E_14480_005.eps 100204
2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2362 2365 2376 2382 2383 2384 2385 2386 2387 3328 3329 3330 3337 3357 3361 3363 3365 3366 3368 3369 3370 3374 3375 3376 3383 3384 3385 3386 3387 3388 3389 3390 4328 4329 4330 4337
A1 A2 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1
4370 4374 6334 6335 6336 6337 6361 6376 6381 7331 7332 7361 7362 7366 7376
A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
Side AV + Headphone Panel 1 2
3
L04U AA
7.
4
5
66
6
7
8
9
10
SIDE AV PANEL + HP PANEL 6 1 2 3 4 5
Video_Gnd 3159
75R
1
1
*
1277-A
2175
1250-C
* I155
4
*
1277-B
*
2178
470pF
1279
I162
2176
3 3157
470pF
for 2X10W from 1902
B
2
I163
*
7
3 2 1
I171
* 1250-B
8 9
C
330p
2171
150R
2u2 50 47K
2180
F150
D
* 9180
F151
E_14480_037.eps 190204
3139 123 5718.1
1
TO ECO SUB
I169
*
3151
3150
RES
2174
SG03
5 6
*
2172
RES
I152
LEFT
D
2173
SG04
7
9152
1250-A
4
RES
9
9175
*
F154
TO SPEAKER
3153
8
3152
RIGHT
*
for 2X5W from 1280
2u2
Video_Gnd
C
F152
5
2181
*
SG11
SG09
Video_Gnd Video_Gnd
I168
1u
3
Video_Gnd
3156
4 3 2 1
I170
6
39K
2
SG10
VIDEO IN
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F153
SG08
SG02
Video_Gnd
6161
B
BZX79-C6V8
100R
5 4 3 2 1
1278
1232
I166
1254
from Main Chassis
1252
3160
Features & Connectivities
I157
From Main Chassis 1207
Video_Gnd
75R
3154
*
3161
SG01
75R
9181
4180
3155
1251 LAP5100-1411F
A
HEADPHONE
100R 3158
A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1232 A9 1250-A C1 1250-B D1 1250-C C1 1251 A2 1252 B5 1254 B6 1277-A C1 1277-B D1 1278 A10 1279 B10 2171 D4 2172 C4 2173 C3 2174 D3 2175 C4 2176 B8 2178 B8 2180 D4 2181 C8 3150 D3 3151 D3 3152 C3 3153 C3 3154 B2 3155 A2 3156 B8 3157 B8 3158 A3 3159 A4 3160 B4 3161 C8 4180 A2 6161 B3 9152 D3 9175 C4 9180 D4 9181 A3 F150 D4 F151 D4 F152 C4 F153 B4 F154 B7 I152 D3 I155 C3 I157 B3 I162 B7 I163 C8 I166 B7 I168 B8 I169 C8 I170 B10 I171 B10 SG01 A3 SG02 B3 SG03 D3 SG04 C3 SG08 B4
SG09 B4 SG10 B4 SG11 B4
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
67
Layout Side AV + Headphone Panel (Top Side) 1232 1250 1251 1252
A4 A3 A2 A1
1254 1277 1278 1279
A3 A2 A4 A4
2171 2172 2173 2174
A1 A2 A3 A2
2175 2180 3150 3151
A2 A1 A2 A2
3152 3153 3154 3155
A3 A3 A1 A1
3156 3157 3158 3159
A4 A4 A1 A1
3160 6161 9152 9175
A1 A1 A3 A2
9180 A1 9181 A1
E_14480_038.eps 100204
3139 123 5718.1
Layout Side AV + Headphone Panel (Bottom Side) 2176
A1
2178
A1
2181
A2
3161
A2
4180
A3
2181
3139 123 5718.1
E_14480_039.eps 100204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
68
Top Control Panel
Layout Top Control Panel (Bottom Side)
1010 A1 1012 B3 1014 B2 3011 A2 3013 A3 3015 A3 F011 A2 I011 A2 1011 B3 1013 B2 3010 A2 3012 A2 3014 B3 3016 B3 F012 A3 I013 A3
1
2
I017 B3 I018 A3
3010 A1 3011 A1 3012 A1 3013 B1 3014 B1 3015 B1 3016 C1
3
E TOP CONTROL (PV2) 1010 1
FROM 1682 OF
A
2
KEY_PROTN
F011
A *
3015 3016
* SKQNAB
volume-
B
I017
E_14480_031.eps 190204
3139 123 5714.1
1
I018
1012
* SKQNAB
volume+
1011
SKQNAB
channel-
150R 390R 1K8 JMP 820R JMP
200R 430R 2K2 200R 820R 120R
1014
3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016
SKQNAB
L04
channel+
ITEM L03SS
1013
B
*
3013
F012
I013 3014
I011
*
3012
*
3011
RES
3010
3
2
3
Layout Top Control Panel (Top Side) 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014
A1 B1 C1 A1 A1
3139 123 5714.1
E_14480_032.eps 190204
3139 123 5714.1
E_14480_033.eps 100204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
69
Linearity & Panorama Panel
1
Layout Linearity & Panorama Panel (Top Side)
2
3
4
LINEARITY & PANORAMA PANEL
INNER PIN CUSHION CORRECTION A
2n2
B
2467 3468
I410
2464
I416
2n2
I405
2466
47K
10u
6462
100R
3464
2470
15K
2469
*
3467 2K7
2460
I409
4R7 3469 3470
*
*
RGP10D
6464
2K7
3463
BZX79-C4V7
2u2 100V
I413
3466
100n
2465 I402
2468
I412
I408
2K2
B
7460 BC547B 6460
I406
BZX79-C12
1
3465
I417
7462 IRF640 I404
470K
3461 I403 3462
I407
4
6K8
1461 TO HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION COIL
100K
A
C
C
I415
*
DIVERSITY TABLE
2466
34 BMCC
29 RF PDCC
34 RF PDCC
470N
220N
120N
1464
10u
6463
22u
1463
*
1N4148 2471
5461
*
I2SD/1
3 2 +9V 1
I419
2478
I418 7463 BC547B
1462
I420 3471 3K9
I421
1u
E
1u
2473
470n
10n 2472
2476
470n 2477
D
From 1221 of
1
22u
2
* 9460
5460
2474
1
D
4
3
4
2475
TO 1404 OF LINE DEFLECTION
E
1461 A1 1462 D4 1463 D3 1464 D1 2460 B3 2464 B4 2465 A3 2466 A4 2467 B4 2468 B1 2469 C1 2470 C1 2471 D3 2472 E3 2473 E3 2474 D2 2475 D2 2476 D1 2477 E1 2478 E1 2479 E1 3461 A2 3462 B2 3463 B2 3464 C2 3465 B3 3466 A3 3467 B4 3468 C4 3469 B1 3470 C1 3471 E4 5460 D1 5461 D1 6460 B3 6462 B4 6463 D3 6464 C1 7460 B3 7462 A4 7463 E3 9460 D1 I402 A3 I403 A2 I404 A4 I405 A4 I406 B3 I407 A1 I408 B3 I409 B2 I410 B4 I412 B1 I413 C1 I415 C1 I416 B4 I417 B1 I418 E3 I419 D3 I420 E4 I421 E3
1461 1462 1463 1464 2460
B2 D2 D1 C2 A1
2464 2465 2466 2467 2468
B2 B1 B2 A2 C2
2469 2470 2471 2472 2473
B2 B1 D2 D2 D2
2474 2475 2476 2477 2478
D2 C2 C2 C2 C2
2479 3461 3462 3463 3464
C2 B2 B1 B1 B1
3465 3466 3467 3468 3469
B1 B2 A2 A2 C2
3470 3471 5460 5461 6460
C1 D2 B2 C2 A1
6461 6462 6463 7460 7461
A2 D2 C1 A1 A2
7462 D2 9460 B2
2479 1u EU NA / LA /AP Regions Screen Size 28WS 28WR 32WR 24WR 28WS 28WR 32WR ----680nF 560nF --2469 560nF 680nF ----2470 470nF 470nF 470nF ------2474 330nF 330nF 470nF 330nF 330nF 330nF ------------2475 560nF ------JMP JMP JMP JMP 9460
E_14480_043.eps 200204
3139 123 5759.1
1
2
3
4
3139 123 5759.1
E_14480_044.eps 100204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
70
LTI/CTI Interface Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
LTI/CTI INTERFACE PANEL
To 1212 of
A
3627
INTF_FBL
4n7
1212
1K0
SANDCASTLE
I626 INTF_V_OUT INTF_U_OUT INTF_Y_OUT
B
1 2
I627
4611 4612 4613
4 GND
7611
2614
6
100n
VIDOa
100n
2V1 VIDIa2
2V2
3-STATE
SELECTABLE CLAMP
20 9V2 VCC 15 5V1 DECDIG
12
3613 3614 100K 3615 100K
100K 2615
D
100n 2616 100n
3
VIDIb1
2V1
SELECTABLE CLAMP
VIDOb
11
VIDIb2
2V1
0V6 SC 0V3 ADEXT1 0V2 ADEXT2 0V2 ADEXT3
6 7
0V5 YIN 0V ADR
18 0V
2V1 7
1 3 4 5
3-STATE
SELECTABLE CLAMP
UIN VIN SCL SDA VOUT UOUT YOUT SOUT CF
SANDCASTLE
11 12 I621
3V211 3V214 2V716 2V717 2V919 21 22
VEE
4631
3621
3619
3-STATE Vp
680p
6633
10K
1u0 3630
10K 2631
100n 3631
4630
3617
from DVD/IDTV/PIP panels 1 SDA From 1214 of
2 GND
2610
2
100n 2611
I633 330K
6
2638
7
1u0
25V 10u I624
4625 3625
From 1206 of 4614
RES
+8V
E_14480_040.eps 200204
3139 123 5740.1
1
I617
I618
3
5
3638
+8V
E
1
4
4
F
*
1206
1215
3 SCL
2606
9
RES
2627
100R
RES 3616 I623
7635 BC857BW
1 9V2
GND
680p
*
1K2 2633
4636
6636
FBI2
BAS316
9612 RES
13
5610
75R
75R
FBI1
1K0 2634
3V9
5613
3V9
FBO 14
4V5 3634
I620
100R
7630 BC847BW
2M2
4V5
1u0
3637
+8V
BAS316
SEL
3635
2630
0V 15
2626
9V
BAS316
5
3-STATE
560R
2V1
SELECTABLE CLAMP
6635
VIDIc2
470p
3636
2V1 8
*
10 470R 2636
VIDOc
3633
E
2V1
SELECTABLE CLAMP
270R
3620
100n
VIDIc1
3632
75R
100n 2618
4
D
I616
+8V 2617
C
10
BAS316
2V4
100n 2612
SELECTABLE CLAMP
9
+9V
100n
VIDIa1
8 I622
INTF_FBL
6610
2
2 10 12 13 23 24 2V 8 2V 9
3610
2605
0V
4610
0V6
DECODING
C
Φ PICTURE IMPROVEMENT
+8V
16
Pr_2
4634
4632
IOCNTR
2613
7
4633 7610 TDA9178T/N1
5 6
Pb_2 TDA8601T
B
3 I628
Y_2
From 1212 of
+9V I613
1K0
BZX384-C6V8 I614 3612
7627 PMBT2369
0V
9613
I611
1K0
100R
I619
3628
3626
GND I610 I612
6625 BZX384-C2V7
2628
1216 1 2 3 4 +9V B4B-EH-A
B5B-EH-A
1214
6611
RES
INTF_Y|GREEN_IN INTF_Pb|BLUE_IN INTF_Pr|RED_IN
0V5
2K2
1 2 3 4 5
for DVD/IDTV panels
from PIP panel
A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
F
1206 E8 1212 B9 1214 A2 1215 E8 1216 A3 2605 C5 2606 F4 2610 E9 2611 E9 2612 C5 2613 C1 2614 D1 2615 D1 2616 D1 2617 D1 2618 E1 2626 E8 2627 E9 2628 A8 2630 E4 2631 F4 2633 E5 2634 E6 2636 E7 2638 F7 3610 D9 3612 B6 3613 D5 3614 D5 3615 D5 3616 E8 3617 E8 3619 E1 3620 E1 3621 E1 3625 F9 3626 A8 3627 A8 3628 A7 3630 F5 3631 F4 3632 E5 3633 E5 3634 E6 3635 E6 3636 E6 3637 E7 3638 F7 4610 D9 4611 B6 4612 B6 4613 B6 4614 F6 4625 F9 4630 E9 4631 D5 4632 D7 4633 C8 4634 C8 4636 E5 5610 E4 5613 F9 6610 E9 6611 A6 6625 A7 6633 F5 6635 F6 6636 E4 7610 C6 7611 C2 7627 A8 7630 E5 7635 E6 9612 E4 9613 F9 I610 B2 I611 B2 I612 B2 I613 B3
I614 B6 I616 D9 I617 E9 I618 F9 I619 B6 I620 E9 I621 C8 I622 C9 I623 E8 I624 F8 I626 B9 I627 B9 I628 B9 I633 F8
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
Layout LTI/CTI Interface Panel (Top Side) 1206 1212 1214 1215
A1 A2 A1 A1
3139 123 5740.1
1216 2611 2636 5610
A1 A2 A2 A2
5613 9612 9613 9614
A2 A2 A2 A2
71
Layout LTI/CTI Interface Panel (Bottom Side) 9615 9616 9617 9618
A2 A2 A2 A2
2605 2606 2610 2612 2613 2614 2615
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2
2616 2617 2618 2626 2627 2628 2630
A2 A2 A2 A1 A2 A1 A1
2631 2633 2634 2638 3610 3612 3613
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2
3614 3615 3616 3617 3619 3620 3621
A2 A2 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2
3625 3626 3627 3628 3630 3631 3632
A2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 4610
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
4611 4612 4613 4614 4617 4625 4630
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A1
4631 4632 4633 4634 4635 4636 4637
A1 A1 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1
6610 6611 6625 6633 6635 6636 7610
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2
7611 7627 7630 7635
A2 A1 A1 A1
E_14480_041.eps 100204
3139 123 5740.1
E_14480_042.eps 100204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
72
Front Interface Panel
Layout Front Interface Panel (Top Side)
1
2
3
1211 D1 1231 C3 1505 A1
4
FRONT INTERFACE PANEL A
A
LATAM 100V - 250V NAFTA 110V EUROPE 220V - 240V
9001 RES 1231
AC MAINS
T4.0AE
INPUT
5
1211
I012
1 2
110V/220V
2
4
I013
1
3
I014
I002
From 1505 OF POWER SUPPLY
B
9002 RES
3M3
3501
1505 1 2
SDKVE30100
3M3
3500
B
I001
6
4001 I003
C RES
3694
C 6692 TSOP1836 3 1 2
A9
4 5
6691
I008
1
I010
2
100n
FOR ITV ONLY
10u 50V 2698
I004
D
I007
2698 A3 3500 B2 3501 B3
3691 B3 3693 B3 3694 B3
6691 B4 6692 B4 6693 A4
9001 C1 9002 D2 9685 B3
9695 B3 9696 A3
3139 123 5722.1
E_14480_035.eps 100204
Layout Front Interface Panel (Bottom Side)
LTL-10224WHCR L01 USA ONLY
I015
I011 6693
6
GND
I009
2691
3
OUT
220R
I006 9695
2
3693
+6
3691
D
FROM 1693 OF FRONT CONTROL
I005
330R
1
7691 RES
LTR-301
1693
VS
1211 B1 1231 A3 1505 B4 1606 D3 1693 D1 2691 D4 2692 E2 2698 D4 3500 B2 3501 B2 3691 D3 3693 D3 3694 C4 3696 E2 3697 E2 4001 C3 4601 E2 6691 D3 6692 C4 6693 E2 7691 E2 9001 A3 9002 B3 9695 D3 I001 B2 I002 B3 I003 C3 I004 D1 I005 D1 I006 D1 I007 D3 I008 D1 I009 D4 I010 D1 I011 D3 I012 B2 I013 B4 I014 B4 I015 D1 I016 E2
1606 D4 1693 A3 2691 A4
1606 POWER
E
47n
4601
680K 2692
E
3696
I016
3697 10K
E_14480_034.eps 200204
3139 123 5722.1
1
2
3
4
3139 123 5722.1
E_14480_036.eps 100204
Alignments
L04U AA
8.
EN 73
8. Alignments 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Index of this chapter: 1. General Alignment Conditions 2. Hardware Alignments 3. Software Alignments and Settings Note: • The Service Default Mode (SDM) and Service Alignment Mode (SAM) are described in chapter 5 “Service Modes, ...”. • Menu navigation is done with the CURSOR UP, DOWN, LEFT, or RIGHT keys of the remote control transmitter.
8.1
10.
General Alignment Conditions
11.
Perform all electrical adjustments under the following conditions: • AC voltage and frequency: 120 V_ac / 60 Hz or 240 V_ac / 50 Hz (region dependent). • Connect the set to the AC power (a.k.a. Mains voltage) via an isolation transformer with a low internal resistance. • Allow the set to warm up for approximately 20 minutes. • Measure the voltages and waveforms in relation to chassis ground (with the exception of the voltages on the primary side of the power supply). Never use the cooling fins / plates as ground. • Test probe: Ri > 10 Mohm; Ci < 2.5 pF. • Use an isolated trimmer / screwdriver to perform the alignments.
12.
13.
SATURATION/COLOR to “0”. CONTRAST to “0”. BRIGHTNESS to minimum (OSD just visible). Return to the SAM via the MENU key. Connect the RF output of a pattern generator to the antenna input. Test pattern is a 'black' picture (blank screen on CRT without any OSD info) with a signal strength of 1 V_pp. Set the channel of the oscilloscope to 50 V/div and the time base to 0.2 ms (external triggering on the vertical pulse). Ground the scope at the CRT panel and connect a 10:1 probe to one of the cathodes of the picture tube socket (see diagram B). Measure the cut off pulse during first full line after the frame blanking (see figure “V_cutoff waveform”). You will see two pulses, one being the “cut off” pulse and the other being the “white drive” pulse. Choose the one with the lowest value; this is the “cut off” pulse. Select the cathode with the highest V_dc value for the alignment. Adjust the V_cutoff of this gun with the SCREEN potentiometer (see figure “Top view family board”) on the LOT to 160 V_dc, except for the 25/28BLD picture tube (Black Line Display, for EU only); this tube must be aligned to 140 V_dc. Restore BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST to normal (= 31).
max.
8.2
Hardware Alignments
VCUTOFF [VDC] 0V Ref.
E_06532_011.eps 110204
Figure 8-2 V_cutoff waveform C
1506
1504
8.2.2
1. Tune the set to a circle or crosshatch test pattern (use an external video pattern generator). 2. Choose picture mode NATURAL (or MOVIES) with the SMART PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter. 3. Adjust the FOCUS potentiometer (see figure “Top view family board”) until the vertical lines at 2/3 from east and west, at the height of the centerline, are of minimum width without visible haze.
7990
5512
7601 9275 SDM
A
9252 1221
1204
B
1000 (TUNER)
LOT
Focus Screen VG2
D 1005 ComPair
E_14480_030.eps 130204
Figure 8-1 Top view family board 8.2.1
Focusing
Vg2 Adjustment 1. Activate the SAM. 2. Go to the WHITE TONE sub menu. 3. Set the values of NORMAL RED, GREEN and BLUE to “32”. 4. Go, via the MENU key, to the normal user menu and set
EN 74 8.3
8.
L04U AA
Alignments
Software Alignments and Settings 00028 L4LUS1 0.12 SDM ERR 0 0 0 0 0 OP 000 057 140 032 120 128 000
00028 L4LUS1 0.12 ERR 0 0 0 0 0
. OP1 . OP2 . OP3 . OP4 . OP5 . OP6 . OP7
0 57 140 32 120 128 0
Clear ? On
SAM . Delta Cool Red -3 . Delta Cool Green -1 . Delta Cool Blue 5
SAM
OP 000 057 140 032 120 128 000 . Clear . Options . AKB . Tuner . White Tone . Geometry . Audio . NVM Editor . ComPair
SAM
SAM
. IFPLL . AGC . CL
32 30 10
SAM
. Normal Red . Normal Green . Normal Blue
32 35 41
on
1 00028 L4LUS1 0.12 CSM 2 CODES 0 0 0 0 0 3 OP 000 057 140 032 120 128 000 4 nnXXnnnn/nnX 5 P3C-1 6 NOT TUNED 7 NTSC 8 STEREO 9 CO 50 CL 50 BR 50 HU 0 0 AVL Off BS 50
SAM . Cool . Normal . Warm
SAM . Delta Warm Red 2 . Delta Warm Green -3 . Delta Warm Blue -13
SAM . Horizontal . Vertical
SAM .HP 37 .HB 31 .HSH 34 .EWW 45 .EWP 14 .EWT 27 .UCP 42 .LCP 53
SAM . QSS Off . FMI On
SAM .SBL .VSH .VS .VAM .VSC
OFF 29 37 30 25
SAM .ADR .VAL .Store
0x0000 0x0000 Store ?
0 0
E_14480_001.eps 090204
Figure 8-3 Service Mode overview
Alignments Enter the Service Alignment Mode (see also chapter 5 “Service Modes, ....”). The SAM menu will now appear on the screen. Select one of the following alignments: • Options • Tuner • White Tone • Geometry • Audio 8.3.1
Options Options are used to control the presence/absence of certain features and hardware. How to change an Option Byte An Option Byte represents a number of different options. Changing these bytes directly, makes it possible to set all options very fast. All options are controlled via seven option bytes. Select the option byte (OP1.. OP7) with the MENU UP/ DOWN keys, and enter the new value. Leaving the OPTION submenu saves the changes in the Option Byte settings. Some changes will only take effect after the set has been switched “off” and “on” with the AC power switch (cold start). How to calculate the value of an Option Byte Calculate an Option Byte value (OP1 .. OP7) in the following way: • Check the status of the single option bits (OB): are they enabled (1) or disabled (0). • When an option bit is enabled (1) it represents a certain value (see column “Bit value” in table below). When an option bit is disabled, its value is 0. • The total value of an Option Byte (decimal) is formed by the sum of its eight option bits. The factory values are printed on a sticker on the CRT. Table 8-1 Option Byte calculation Bit (value)
OP1
OP2
OP3
OP4
OP5
OP6
OP7
0 (1)
OB10 OB20 OB30 OB40 OB50 OB60 OB70
1 (2)
OB11 OB21 OB31 OB41 OB51 OB61 OB71
2 (4)
OB12 OB22 OB32 OB42 OB52 OB62 OB72
3 (8)
OB13 OB23 OB33 OB43 OB53 OB63 OB73
4 (16)
OB14 OB24 OB34 OB44 OB54 OB64 OB74
5 (32)
OB15 OB25 OB35 OB45 OB55 OB65 OB75
6 (64)
OB16 OB26 OB36 OB46 OB56 OB66 OB76
7 (128)
OB17 OB27 OB37 OB47 OB57 OB67 OB77
Total:
Sum
Sum
Sum
Sum
Sum
Sum
Sum
L04U AA
8.
EN 75
EN 76
8.
Alignments
L04U AA
Option Bit Assignment
20DV6941/37
24PT6341/37
25PT6341/85
26DV6941/37
26PW6341/37
27MS6341/37
27PT5441/37
27PT6441/37
27PT6541/37
28DV6941/85
28PW6341/85
29PT6441/44
29PT6441/85
29PT6541/44
29PT6541/85
30DV6941/37
30PW6341/37
32DV6941/85
32MS6341/37
32PT5441/37
32PT6441/37
32PT6541/37
32PW6341/85
33PT5441/85
Table 8-2 Option code overview per model (OP1 - OP4)
7
Philips Tuner
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
FM Radio
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
LNA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
ATS(EU)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
ACI
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
UK PNP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Virgin Mode
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
China
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Decimal
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit Byte_1 (OP1)
Bit Byte_2 (OP2) 7
SC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
Green_UI
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
5
Channel Naming
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
LTI
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
3
Tilt
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
2
Fine Tuning
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
PIP Philips Tuner
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Hue
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Decimal
1
1
1
25
25
65
1
1
17
25
25
1
1
17
17
25
25
25
73
1
9
25
25
1
Bit Byte_3 (OP3) 7
EW Function
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
2 Tuner PIP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
PIP_Splitter
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
Splitter
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
Virtual Dolby
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
2
Wide Screen
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
WSSB(EU)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Eco_Subwoofer
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Decimal
0
128 128 140 140 128
0
128 136 140 140 128 128 136 136 140 140 140 128 128 128 136 140 128
Bit Byte_4 (OP4) 7
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
Ultra Bass
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
4
Delta Volume
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
Volume Limiter
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Stereo_Nicam_2C S
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Decimal
32
32
32
32
32
0
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
0
32
32
32
32
32
Following are the option bit assignments for all software clusters. • Option Byte 1 (OP1) – OB17: PHILIPS TUNER – OB16: FM RADIO – OB15: LNA – OB14: ATS (EU) – OB13: ACI – OB12: UK PNP – OB11: VIRGIN MODE – OB10: CHINA • Option Byte 2 (OP2) – OB27: SC – OB26: GREEN UI – OB25: CHANNEL NAMING – OB24: LTI – OB23: TILT – OB22: FINE TUNING – OB21: PIP PHILIPS TUNER – OB20: HUE • Option Byte 3 (OP3)
•
– OB37: EW FUNCTION – OB36: 2 TUNER PIP – OB35: PIP SPLITTER – OB34: SPLITTER – OB33: VIRTUAL DOLBY – OB32: WIDE SCREEN – OB31: WSSB (EU) – OB30: ECO SUBWOOFER Option Byte 4 (OP4) – OB47: Reserved (value= 0) – OB46: Reserved (value= 0) – OB45: ULTRA BASS – OB44: DELTA VOLUME – OB43: Reserved (value= 0) – OB42: VOLUME LIMITER – OB41: Reserved (value= 0) – OB40: STEREO NICAM 2CS
Alignments
L04U AA
8.
EN 77
20DV6941/37
24PT6341/37
25PT6341/85
26DV6941/37
26PW6341/37
27MS6341/37
27PT5441/37
27PT6441/37
27PT6541/37
28DV6941/85
28PW6341/85
29PT6441/44
29PT6441/85
29PT6541/44
29PT6541/85
30DV6941/37
30PW6341/37
32DV6941/85
32MS6341/37
32PT5441/37
32PT6441/37
32PT6541/37
32PW6341/85
33PT5441/85
Table 8-3 Option code overview per model (OP5 - OP7)
7
AV1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
AV2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
AV3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
CVI
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
SVHS2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
SVHS3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Hotel Mode
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit Byte_5 (OP5)
Decimal
248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248
Bit Byte_6 (OP6) 7
Personal Zapping
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
6
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
FM Trap
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
Combfilter
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
3
Active Control
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
2
Video Text
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Light Sensor
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
Dual Text
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Decimal
136 136 136 154 154
0
128 136 154 154 154 136 136 154 154 154 154 154
0
128 152 154 154 128
Bit Byte_7 (OP7)
•
•
•
7
Time Win1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Decimal
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Option Byte 5 (OP5) – OB57: AV1 – OB56: AV2 – OB55: AV3 – OB54: CVI – OB53: SVHS2 – OB52: SVHS3 – OB51: HOTEL MODE – OB50: Reserved (value= 0) Option Byte 6 (OP6) – OB67: PERSONAL ZAPPING – OB66: Reserved (value= 0) – OB65: FM TRAP – OB64: COMB FILTER – OB63: ACTIVE CONTROL – OB62: VIDEO TEXT – OB61: LIGHT SENSOR – OB60: DUAL TEXT Option Byte 7 (OP7) – OB77: TIME WIN1 – OB76: Reserved (value= 0) – OB75: Reserved (value= 0) – OB74: Reserved (value= 0) – OB73: Reserved (value= 0) – OB72: Reserved (value= 0) – OB71: Reserved (value= 0) – OB70: Reserved (value= 0)
Option bit definition Option Byte 1 (OP1) • OB17: PHILIPS TUNER – 0 : ALPS / MASCO compatible tuner is in use. – 1 : Philips compatible tuner is in use. • OB16: FM RADIO – 0 : FM radio feature is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : FM radio feature is enabled. • OB15: LNA – 0 : Auto Picture Booster is not available or not applicable. – 1 : Auto Picture Booster is available. • OB14: ATS – 0 : Automatic Tuning System (ATS) feature is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : ATS feature is enabled. When ATS is enabled, it sorts the program in an ascending order starting from program “1”. • OB13: ACI – 0 : Automatic Channel Installation (ACI) feature is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : ACI feature is enabled. • OB12: UK PNP – 0 : UK's default Plug and Play setting is not available or not applicable. – 1 : UK's default Plug and Play setting is available. When UK PNP and VIRGIN MODE are set to “1” at the initial setup and after exiting from menu, VIRGIN MODE will be set automatically to “0” while UK PNP remains “1”. • OB11: VIRGIN MODE – 0 : Virgin mode is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Virgin mode is enabled. Plug and Play menu item will be displayed to perform installation at the initial
EN 78
•
8.
L04U AA
Alignments
startup of the TV when VIRGIN MODE is set to “1”. After installation is finished, this option bit will be automatically set to “0”. OB10: CHINA – 0 : Tuning is not for China set, or this option bit is not applicable. – 1 : Tuning is for China set.
Option Byte 2 (OP2) • OB27: SC – 0 : Soft clipping is disabled. – 1 : Soft clipping is enabled. • OB26: GREEN UI – 0 : Green UI is disabled (for Philips brand). – 1 : Green UI is enabled (for Magnavox brand). – Note: only for NAFTA region. • OB25: CHANNEL NAMING – 0 : Name FM Channel is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Name FM Channel is enabled. – Note : Name FM channel can be enabled only when FM RADIO= “1”. • OB24: LTI – 0 : Luminance Transient Improvement (LTI) is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : LTI is enabled. • OB23: TILT – 0 : Rotate Picture is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Rotate Picture is enabled. • OB22: FINE TUNING – 0 : Fine Tuning for Channel Offset is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Fine Tuning for Channel Offset is enabled. • OB21: PIP PHILIPS TUNER – 0 : ALPS / MASCO compatible tuner is in use for PIP module. – 1 : Philips compatible tuner is in use for PIP module. • OB20: HUE – 0 : Hue/Tint Level is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Hue/Tint Level is enabled. Option Byte 3 (OP3) • OB37: EW FUNCTION – 0 : EW function is disabled. In this case, only Expand 4:3 is allowed, Compress 16:9 is not applicable. – 1 : EW function is enabled. In this case, both Expand 4:3 and Compress 16:9 are applicable. • OB36: 2 TUNER PIP – 0 : Software selection no PIP – 1 : Software selection with PIP – Note: Only for EU/AP region for sets with PIP. • OB35: PIP SPLITTER – 0 : Normal Tuner in PIP – 1 : Splitter in PIP – Note: Only for EU/AP region. For PIP sets and build in with Splitter in PIP tuner. • OB34: SPLITTER – 0 : Normal Tuner for main chassis – 1 : Splitter Tuner for main chassis – Note: Only for EU/AP region. • OB33: VIRTUAL DOLBY – 0 : Virtual Dolby is not applicable. – 1 : Virtual Dolby is applicable. • OB32: WIDE SCREEN – 0 : Software is used for 4:3 sets or not applicable. – 1 : Software is used for 16:9 sets. • OB31: WSSB (EU) – 0 : WSSB is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : WSSB is enabled. – Note : This option bit can be set to “1” only when WIDE SCREEN= “1”. • OB30: ECO SUBWOOFER – 0 : Feature is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Feature is enabled.
Option Byte 4 (OP4) • OB47: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB46: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB45: ULTRA BASS – 0 : Ultra Bass is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Ultra Bass is enabled. – Default setting is “0”. • OB44: DELTA VOLUME – 0 : Delta Volume Level is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Delta Volume Level is enabled. • OB43: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB42: VOLUME LIMITER – 0 : Volume Limiter Level is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Toggle Volume Limiter Level is enabled. • OB41: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB40: STEREO NICAM 2CS – 0 : For AV Stereo. – 1 : For NICAM Stereo 2CS. Option Byte 5 (OP5) • OB57: AV1 – 0 : AV1 source is not present. – 1 : AV1 source is present. • OB56: AV2 – 0 : AV2 source is not present. – 1 : AV2 source is present. – Note : For EU, when AV2=“1”, both EXT2 and SVHS2 should be included in the OSD loop. • OB55: AV3 – 0 : Side/Front AV3 source is not present. – 1 : Side/Front AV3 source is present. • OB54: CVI – 0 : CVI source is not available. – 1 : CVI source is available. • OB53: SVHS2 – 0 : SVHS2 source is not available. – 1 : SVHS2 source is available. – Note : This option bit is not applicable for EU. • OB52: SVHS3 – 0 : SVHS3 source is not available. – 1 : SVHS3 source is available. – Note : This option bit is not applicable for EU. • OB51: HOTEL MODE – 0 : Hotel mode is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Hotel mode is enabled. • OB50: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. Option Byte 6 (OP6) • OB67: PERSONAL ZAPPING – 0 : Personal Zapping feature is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Personal Zapping feature is enabled. • OB66: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB65: FM TRAP – 0 : FM Trap is not present. – 1 : FM Trap is present. – Note: Only for LATAM region. • OB64: COMBFILTER – 0 : 3D-combfilter is not present. – 1 : 3D-combfilter is present. • OB63: ACTIVE CONTROL – 0 : Active Control feature is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Active Control feature is enabled. • OB62: VIDEO TEXT – 0 : Video Text (DW with TXT) is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Video Text (DW with TXT) is enabled. – Note: For EU only.
Alignments •
•
OB61: LIGHT SENSOR – 0 : Light sensor feature is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Light sensor feature is enabled. OB60: DUAL TEXT – 0 : Dual Text and Text Dual Screen are disabled or not applicable. – 1: Dual Text and Text Dual Screen are enabled.
Option Byte 7 (OP7) • OB77: TIME WIN1 – 00 : The time window is set to 1.2 s. – 01 : The time window is set to 2 s. – Note :The time-out for all digit entries depends on this setting. • OB76: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB75: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB74: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB73: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB72 Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB71 Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB70: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. 8.3.2
•
•
8.3.4
L04U AA
8.
EN 79
– NORMAL G= “32” – NORMAL B= “27” COOL (color temperature= 12500 K): – DELTA COOL R= “-3” – DELTA COOL G= “0” – DELTA COOL B= “5” WARM (color temperature= 6500 K): – DELTA WARM R= “2” – DELTA WARM G= “0” – DELTA WARM B= “-6”
Geometry The geometry alignments menu contains several items to align the set, in order to obtain correct picture geometry.
1
VERT. SLOPE
2
VERT. SHIFT
3
VERT. AMPLITUDE
4
V.S-CORRECTION
5
HOR. SHIFT
6
HOR. AMPLITUDE
7
E/W PARABOLE
8
UPPER E/W CORNER
9
LOWER E/W CORNER
10
E/W TRAPEZIUM
11
HOR. PARALLELOGRAM
12
HOR. BOW
Tuner Note: Described alignments are only necessary when the NVM (item 7602) is replaced. IF PLL This adjustment is auto-aligned. Therefore, no action is required. AGC (AGC take over point) 1. Set the external pattern generator to a color bar video signal and connect the RF output to aerial input. Set amplitude to 10 mV and set frequency to 61.25 MHz (channel 3). 2. Connect a DC multimeter to pin 1 of the tuner (item 1000 on the main panel). 3. Activate the SAM. 4. Go to the TUNER sub menu. 5. Select AGC with the UP/DOWN cursor keys. 6. Adjust the AGC-value (default value is 27) with the LEFT/ RIGHT cursor keys until the voltage at pin 1 of the tuner lies between 3.8 and 2.3 V (default value is “20”). 7. Switch the set to STANDBY, in order to store the alignments. CL (Cathode drive level) Always set to “5”.
8.3.3
White Tone In the WHITE TONE sub menu, the values of the black cut off level can be adjusted. Normally, no alignment is needed, and you can use the given default values. The color temperature mode (NORMAL, COOL and WARM) and the color (R, G, and B) can be selected with the UP/DOWN RIGHT/LEFT cursor keys. The value can be changed with the LEFT/RIGHT cursor keys. First, select the values for the NORMAL color temperature. Then select the values for the COOL and WARM mode. After alignment, switch the set to STANDBY, in order to store the alignments. Default settings: • NORMAL (color temperature= 9300 K): – NORMAL R= “26”
E_06532_010.eps 110204
Figure 8-4 Geometry alignments 1. Connect an external video pattern generator to the aerial input of the TV-set and input a crosshatch test pattern. Set the generator amplitude to at least 1 mV and set frequency to 61.25 MHz (channel 3). 2. Set 'Smart Picture' to NATURAL (or MOVIES). 3. Activate the SAM menu (see chapter 5 “Service Modes, ...”). 4. Go to the GEOMETRY sub menu. 5. Choose HORIZONTAL or VERTICAL alignment Now the following alignments can be performed:
EN 80
8.
Alignments
L04U AA
Horizontal • Horizontal Parallelogram (HP). Align straight vertical lines in the top and the bottom; vertical rotation around the center. • Horizontal Bow (HB). Align straight horizontal lines in the top and the bottom; horizontal rotation around the center. • Horizontal Shift (HSH). Align the horizontal center of the picture to the horizontal center of the CRT. • East West Width (EWW). Align the picture width until the complete test pattern is visible. • East West Parabola (EWP). Align straight vertical lines at the sides of the screen. • Upper Corner Parabola (UCP). Align straight vertical lines in the upper corners of the screen. • Lower Corner Parabola (LCP). Align straight vertical lines in the lower corners of the screen. • East West Trapezium (EWT). Align straight vertical lines in the middle of the screen. • H60 (Delta HSH for 60Hz, if present). Align straight horizontal lines if NTSC system is used (60 Hz) i.s.o. PAL (50 Hz). Default value is “9”. Vertical • Service blanking (SBL). Switch the blanking of the lower half of the screen “on” or “off” (to be used in combination with the vertical slope alignment). • Vertical Shift (VSH). Align the vertical centering so that the test pattern is located vertically in the middle. Repeat the 'vertical amplitude' alignment if necessary. • Vertical slope (VS). Align the vertical center of the picture to the vertical center of the CRT. This is the first of the vertical alignments to perform. For an easy alignment, set SBL to “on”. • Vertical Amplitude (VAM). Align the vertical amplitude so that the complete test pattern is visible. • Vertical S-Correction (VSC). Align the vertical linearity, meaning that vertical intervals of a grid pattern must be equal over the entire screen height. • Vertical Zoom (VX, if present). The vertical zoom is added in for the purpose of development. It helps the designer to set proper values for the movie expand or movie(16x9) compress. Default value is “25”. • V60 (Delta VAM for 60Hz, if present). Align straight vertical lines if NTSC system (60 Hz) is used i.s.o. PAL (50 Hz). Default value is “-2”. In the next table, you will find the GEOMETRY default values for the different sets. Table 8-4 Default geometry values Alignment
Default values
HP (Horizontal parallelogram)
31
HB (Horizontal Bow)
31
HSH (Horizontal shift)
26
EWW (EW width)
37
EWP (EW parabola width)
10
EWT (EW trapezium)
26
UCP (EW upper corner parabola)
30
LCP (EW lower corner parabola)
40
VSH (Vertical Shift)
8.3.5
26
VS (Vertical slope)
37
VAM (Vertical amplitude)
30
VSC (Vertical S-Correction)
25
Audio No alignments are needed for the audio sub menu. Use the given default values.
QSS (Quasi Split Sound) • For NICAM/2CS sound system (EU/AP, except for APNTSC), set to “On”. • For AV-Stereo sound system (sets without NICAM), set to “On”. • For all other sets (NAFTA/LATAM/AP-NTSC), set to “Off”. FMI (Freq. Modulation Intercarrier) • For NICAM/2CS sound system (EU/AP, except for APNTSC), set to “On”. • For AV-Stereo sound system (sets without NICAM), set to “Off”. • For dBx/non-dBx sound systems, set to “On”, NICAM Alignment • For sets with NICAM/2CS (EU/AP, except for AP-NTSC) sound system, set to “79”. • For all other sets (NAFTA/LATAM/AP-NTSC), set to “63” (= don’t care).
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets
L04U AA
9.
EN 81
9. Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets •
Index of this chapter: 1. Introduction 2. Power Supply 3. Deflection 4. Control 5. Tuner and IF 6. Source Selection 7. Audio 8. Video 9. Abbreviations 10. IC Data Sheets
• • • • •
The tuning system features 181 channels with on-screen display. The main tuning system uses a tuner, a microcomputer, and a memory IC mounted on the main panel. The microcomputer communicates with the memory IC, the customer keyboard, remote receiver, tuner, signal processor IC and the audio output IC via the I2C bus. The memory IC retains the settings for favorite stations, customer-preferred settings, and service / factory data. The on-screen graphics and closed caption decoding are done within the microprocessor where they are added to the main signal.
Notes: • Only new circuits compared to the M8 (L01.1 for other regions) chassis are described in this chapter. For the other circuit descriptions, see the manual of the M8 (L01.1) chassis. • Figures can deviate slightly from the actual situation, due to different set executions. • For a good understanding of the following circuit descriptions, please use the diagrams in sections “Block Diagrams, ...”, and/or “Electrical Diagrams”. Where necessary, you will find a separate drawing for clarification.
9.1
The chassis uses a Switching Mode Power Supply (SMPS) for the main voltage source. The chassis has a 'hot' ground reference on the primary side and a cold ground reference on the secondary side of the power supply and the rest of the chassis.
Introduction The "L04" chassis is a global TV chassis for the model year 2004 and is used for TV sets with large screen sizes (from 21 to 36 inch), in Super Flat and Real Flat executions (both in 4:3 and 16:9 variants). There are three types of CRT namely the 100 degrees, 110 degrees and Wide Screen CRT. • The 100 deg. 4:3 CRT is raster-correction-free and does not need East/West Correction (except when used in AP regions), therefore the corrections needed are Horizontal Shift, Vertical Slope, Vertical Amplitude, Vertical SCorrection, Vertical Shift, and Vertical Zoom for geometry corrections. • The 110 deg. 4:3 CRT comes with East/West Correction. In addition to the parameter mentioned above, it also needs the Horizontal Parallelogram, Horizontal Bow, Horizontal Shift, East/West Width, East/West Parabola, East/West Upper and Lower Corners, and East/West Trapezium correction. • The Wide Screen TV sets have all the correction of the 110 deg. 4:3 CRTs and also have additional picture format like the 4:3 format, 16:9, 14:9, 16:9 zoom, subtitle zoom, and the Super-Wide picture format. In comparison to its predecessor (the M8/L01.1), this chassis is has the following (new) features: • Audio: The sound processor is part of the UOC processor (called “Hercules”). • Video: Enhanced video features, video drivers, and Active Control. • Control: Comparable to M8/L01.1 (e.g. Dual clock, I/O mapping, I/O switching). • Power Supply: Adapted to supply the Hercules IC, and to enable 0.5 W Standby power dissipation. Also provisions are made for future extensions like DVD and iDTV. The standard architecture consists of a Main panel (called "family board"), a Picture Tube panel, a Side I/O panel, and a Top Control panel. The Main panel consists primarily of conventional components with some surface mounted devices in the audio and video processing part. The functions for video/audio processing, microprocessor (P), and CC/Teletext (TXT) decoder are all combined in one IC (TDA1200x, item 7200), the so-called third generation Ultimate One Chip (UOC-III) or “Hercules”. This chip is mounted on the “solder” side of the main panel, and has the following features:
Control, small signal, mono/stereo, and extensive Audio/ Video switching in one IC. Upgrade with digital sound & video processing. Alignment free IF, including SECAM-L/L1 and AM. FM sound 4.5/5.5/6.0/6.5, no traps/bandpass filters. Full multi-standard color decoder. One Xtal reference for all functions (microprocessor, RCP, TXT/CC, RDS, color decoder, and stereo sound processor).
9.2
Power Supply
9.2.1
Block Diagram
Vbatt (to deflection & DVD interface board) -Vaudio
) *
+Vaudio
,- &#' + * &# .%/ &%/ 0!
!" #$% &#' ( %
.%/ &#' !
*1# 1 . !
,2 . %#$ 345 ! + *
,- . %#$ ) !" ,6 ,242 ! 7 &# ! 8 .% . #. 8 . 1. 9 :);: 7! E_14480_072.eps 200204
Figure 9-1 Block diagram power supply Stdby_con signal The Hercules generates this signal. This line is logic “low” (0 V) under normal operation and in semi-Standby of the TV, and is “high” (3.3 V) during Standby. Power_down signal The AUX SMPS generates this signal. It is logic “high” (3 .3 V) under normal operation of the TV and goes “low” (0 V) when the AC power (or Mains) input voltage supply goes below 70 V_ac. B (Hercules port) This port is used to switch the AUX SMPS output V_aux “On/ Off”. This is required for DVD and iDTV (for future extensions).
EN 82 9.2.2
9.
L04U AA
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets
Timing Diagrams Power ON - To Standby - Out of Standby - Power OFF
To Standby Power ON
Normal
Power off
Out of Standby Standby mode
Perform hard-reset
Normal
3, 3.3, 6V POWER_DOWN STDBY
+1V8 EXT.
Stdby_con Vbat, Vaudio
STB bit
VT_supply
+5V
10mS
PIP Supplies B Closed Open
Relay status 1s(ref)
2s(ref)
200ms
100ms(ref)
800ms 200ms
2s(ref)
20ms(ref)
10ms(ref 10ms(ref) E_14480_073.eps 200204
Figure 9-2 Timing diagram Standby Power ON - To Semi Standby - Out of Semi Standby Power OFF
Power ON
To Semi Standby Normal
Out of Semi Standby Semi Standby
Power OFF Normal
under start_up Perform sequence fordetails. Hard-reset
3, 3.3, 6V
STDBY
+1V8 ext
Stdby_con
Vbat, Vaudio
STB bit
VT_supply
+5V
10mS
PIP Supplies B Closed Open
Relay status 1s(ref)
200ms
2s(ref)
800ms
20ms (ref)
10ms(ref)
10ms(ref)
E_14480_074.eps 200204
Figure 9-3 Timing diagram Semi Standby
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets 9.2.3
9.
EN 83
Table 9-3 PSU voltage overview
Startup Sequence When the set is connected to the AC power, the rectified line voltage (via winding 4-5 of L5531 connected to pin 14 of IC7531) will start the internal voltage source to charge the V_cc capacitor (C2532). The IC starts to switch as soon as the V_cc reaches the V_cc start level of 9.5 V. This supply is automatically taken over by winding 1-2, as soon as the V_cc is high enough, and the internal supply source will stop (for high efficiency switching).
L04U AA
Voltage
Normal operation
Stdby mode
V_batt
130 - 143 V
0V
V_audio
+/- 15.5 V
0V
+6V
6V
6V
+3V
3V
3V
Stdby_con
0V
3.3 V
9.3
Deflection
9.3.1
Synchronization
Table 9-1 Pinning overview TEA1523 Pin
Symbol
Description
2
Gnd
This pin is Ground of the IC.
3
V_cc
This pin is connected to the supply voltage. An internal current charges the V_cc capacitor (2532), and the start-up sequence is initiated when this voltage reaches a level of 9.5 V. Note: The output power is disabled when the voltage gets below 9 V (UVLO). Operating range is between 0 to 40 V.
5
RC
6
REG
11
Demag
Before the Hercules (IC7200) can generate horizontal drive pulses, the +3.3V supply voltages must be present. After the start up command of the microprocessor (via I2C), the Hercules outputs the horizontal pulses. These horizontal pulses begin “initially” with double line frequency and then change “gradually” to line frequency in order to limit the current in the line stage (slow-start).
Frequency setting This pin is connected to the feedback loop. The pin contains two functions: 1) Between 1 to 1.425 V it controls the "on" time. 2) Above the threshold of 3.5 V, it is possible to initiate "burst mode" standby.
The VDRA and VDRB signals are the balanced output currents (sawtooth shaped) of the frame oscillator (pins 106 and 107 of the Hercules). These output signals are balanced, so they are less sensitive to disturbances.
This pin is connected to the V_cc winding of 5531. It has three functions: 1) During Magnetisation, the input voltage is sensed to compensate OCP level for OPP. 2) During demagnetisation, the output voltage is sensed for OVP and 3) A comparator is used to prevent continuous conduction when output is overloaded.
12
Sense
This pin contains three different functions.: 1) Dectection of soft start, protection levels of 2) OCP, and 3) SWP.
14
Drain
This pin is connected to the drain of the switch or center tap of the transformer. It contains three functions: 1) M-level (mainsdependent operation-enabling level), 2) Supply for start-up current, and 3) Valley detection.
There is a current source inside the UOC at pin 102. This pumps energy in the capacitor connected to this pin producing a pure saw tooth. The vertical drive signals and the E/W correction signal are derived. Pin 108 is the East-West drive (or AVL), and it is a single ended current output. The correction for “horizontal width for changed EHT” from this pin is available by setting the HCO bit to “1”.
As C2532 of IC7531 is charged, it will also start to charge the V_cc capacitor (C2511) of IC7511. Via resistor R3519 and C2511, the TEA1506 starts to switch as soon as the V_cc voltage reaches the V_cc start level of is about 11 V. The V_cc voltage is automatically taken over by the main transformer L5512 (winding 2-3) when the V_cc is high enough (when this voltage is even higher than the voltage on C2511, there is no current flow from C2532 to C2511 due to diode D6512).
The Phase-2 Compensation available at pin 113 gives frame correction for high beam currents. The phase compensation signal is used to correct the phase of the picture from the horizontal drive signal. Pin 63 is the SANDCASTLE output (contains all sync info) and also HORIZONTAL FLYBACK (HFB) input. Pin 97 is the EHT tracking/over-voltage protection pin. The HCO bit can switch on the tracking on EW. If the voltage at pin 97 exceeds 3.9 V, the over-voltage protection will be activated and the horizontal drive is switched “off” via a slow stop.
Table 9-2 Pinning overview TEA1506
9.2.4
Pin
Symbol
2
Vcc
Description This pin is connected to the supply voltage. When this voltage is high (Vcc_start level, about 11 V), the IC will start switching. When the voltage is lower than Vcc_uvlo (about 8.7 V), the IC will stop switching.Note: This pin is not self supplied by internal source like in TEA1507
3
Gnd
This pin is Ground of the IC.
6
Ctrl
This pin is connected to the feedback loop. The pin will control the "on" time between 1 V to 1.5 V.
7
Demag
This pin is connected to the Vcc winding of 5512. It contains three functions: 1) During magnetisation, the input voltage is sensed to compensate OCP level for OPP, 2) During demagnetisation, the output voltage is sensed for OVP and 3) a comparator is used to prevent continuous conduction when the output is overloaded.
9
Sense
This pin contains three different functions: 1) dectection of soft start, protection levels of 2) OCP, and 3) SWP.
11
Driver
This pin will drive the (MOSFET) switch.
12
HVS
This is High Volt Spacer (n.a.)
14
Drain
Connected to the Drain of the external MOSFET switch, this is the input for valley sensing and initial internal supply.
9.3.2
Horizontal Deflection There are several executions (depending on the CRT): • Sets with no East-West correction. The principle of the horizontal deflection is based on the quasi-diode modulation circuit. This horizontal deflection circuit supplies the deflection current and auxiliary voltages from the LOT. • Sets with East-West correction. The principle of the horizontal deflection is based on a diode modulator with east-west correction. This horizontal deflection circuit supplies the deflection current and auxiliary voltages from the LOT. • Sets with dynamic East-West correction. The principle of the horizontal deflection is based on a diode modulator with dynamic east-west correction for picture tubes with inner pincushion. This horizontal deflection circuit supplies the deflection current and auxiliary voltages from the LOT.
Standby Mode In this mode, IC7511 (TEA1506) will be totally disabled. So there is no voltage on the main transformer output. But IC7531 (TEA1523) will still work and will provide the necessary output voltages (6V -> 5V, 3.3V, 3V -> 1.8V) to the Hercules (IC7200).
Basic Principle During a scan period, either the Line Transistor or diode(s) conduct to ensure a constant voltage over the deflection coil (that results in a linear current). During the flyback period, the Line Transistor stops conducting, and the flyback capacitor(s) together with the inductance of the deflection coil creates oscillation.
EN 84
9.
L04U AA
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets
First Part of Scan Pin 62 of the UOC delivers the horizontal drive signal for the Line Output stage. This signal is a square pulse of line frequency. L5402 is the flyback drive transformer. This transformer de-couples the line output stage from the UOC. It has a direct polarization. The flyback drive circuit works with the start-up supply taken from +6V of the Aux supply (and subsequently taking from VlotAux+9V). When the H-drive is high, TS7404 conducts, and transformer L5402 starts to store energy. The base of the line transistor TS7405 is low and therefore blocks. The current in the deflection coil returns from diode D6404.
frequency) taken from the line aux output. Then a series of width-modulated pulses is formed via two inverted phase amplifiers, filtered by an inductor, which then directly drive the diode modulated line circuit.
Second Part of Scan When the H-drive is low, TS7404 does not conduct, and the energy that is stored in the transformer will transfer to the secondary, making the base of the Line Transistor high. Then the Line Transistor starts to conduct. The current in the deflection coil returns from the transistor in another direction.
Upon entering the picture geometry menu in the SAM mode, the following corrections will be displayed. • EWW: East West Width. • EWP: East West Parabola. • UCP: Upper Corner Parabola. • LCP: Lower Corner Parabola. • EWT: East West Trapezium. The East-West drive circuit realizes them all. The settings can be changed by a remote control. All changed data will be stored into the NVM after the geometry alignment.
East-West Correction To achieve a good geometry, dynamic S-correction is needed. The design is such that the tube/yoke needs East-West correction. Besides that, an inner pincushion is present after East-West correction. The line deflection is modulated with a parabolic voltage (frame frequency). In this way it is not so much at top and bottom, and much more in the middle.
Flyback At the moment the H-drive becomes high, the base of the Line Transistor becomes low. Both the Line Transistor and the Flyback Diode will block. There is an oscillation between the flyback capacitor C2412 and the deflection coil. Because of the inductance of the LOT, the Line Transistor cannot stop conducting immediately. After the Line Transistor is out of conduction, the flyback pulse is created. The flyback capacitor charges until the current in the deflection coil reduce to zero. Then it discharges through the deflection coil and the deflection current increases from the other direction. The flyback diode conducts and is back to the first part of the scan.
Panorama For Wide Screen sets, the S-correction of the picture has to adapt between the different picture modes. In particular, between 16:9 Wide Screen and 4:3 picture modes. This is achieved with the (separate) Panorama circuit (see diagram “G”). A signal (I2SDI1) from the UOC controls the state of TS7463. When in the normal 16:9 Wide Screen mode, the signal is “low” and therefore TS7463 is switched “off”. When the 4:3 mode is selected, this signal from the UOC is pulled “high”, switching TS7463 “on”. The relay 1463 on the Panorama panel is subsequently turned “on” and, in effect, paralleling capacitor C2475/C2474 to the S-Cap C2469/ C2470. This changes the overall effective S-correction. The relay is switched “on” in 4:3 and Superwide picture modes.
Linearity Correction Because the deflection coil has a certain resistance, a picture without any linearity issues cannot be expected. L5401 is the linearity coil to compensate for this resistance. It is a coil with a pre-magnetized core. This correction is called linearity correction. 9.3.3 Horizontal S-Correction Because the electronic beam needs to travel a longer distance to both sides of the screen than the center, the middle of the screen would become narrower than both sides. To prevent this, a parabolic voltage is applied across the deflection coil during scan. To create this parabolic voltage, a capacitor called S-cap (C2417/C2418) is used as a voltage source during scan. The sawtooth current of the deflection through this capacitor creates the required parabolic voltage. This correction is called S-Correction.
The horizontal deflection provides various auxiliary voltages derived either directly or indirectly from the secondary pins of the LOT: • +9V: This supplies the Hercules’s flyback driver. • +11V: This supplies the frame amplifier. • -12V: This supplies the frame amplifier. • 50V: This supplies the frame amplifier. • Filament: This supplies the heater pins of the picture tube. • VideoSupply (+200V from primary side of LOT): This supplies the RGB amplifier and Scavem circuit at the CRT panel.
Mannheim-Circuit When the EHT is heavily loaded with a bright line, the flyback time can be increased a bit in this situation. As a result, the scan delays a bit causing a DC-shift to the right in the next line, which would create a small spike on the S-cap. This spike oscillates with the inductance of the deflection coil and the primary of LOT. The result is visible in vertical lines under horizontal white line. This is called the Mannheim-effect. To prevent this from happening, a circuit called Mannheimcircuit is added. This consists of C2415, R3404, R3417 and D6406. During the scan, C2415 is charged via R3417. During the flyback, the S-correction parabola across the S-Cap C2417/C2418 is in its most negative, and D6406 conducts. Thus, C2415 is switched in parallel to C2417/C2418 during flyback. As C2415 is much larger than C2417/C2418, the voltage across C2415 reduces the Mannheim-effect oscillation. Class D East-West Driver To reduce the power loss of the normal used linear East-West amplifier, a class-D East-West circuit is used. To achieve this, the East-West parabola waveform EW_DRIVE from the Hercules (frame frequency) is sampled with a saw tooth (line
Auxiliary Voltages
Notes: • The V_T voltage (to tuner) is drawn from V_batt. • The EHT voltage is generated by the Line Output Transformer (LOT). The Focus and Vg2 voltages are created with two potentiometers integrated in the transformer. 9.3.4
Beam Current The beam current is adjusted with R3451 and R3452. The components R3473, R3453 and C2451 determine the EHT_info characteristic. The voltage across C2412 varies when the beam current changes. This EHT_info is used to compensate the picture geometry via pin 97 of the Hercules when the picture changes rapidly, and compensate the phase 2 loop via pin 113 of the Hercules. Also from the EHT_info line, a BCL signal is derived and sent to the Hercules for controlling the picture’s contrast and brightness. When the picture content becomes brighter, it will introduce:
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets •
Geometry distortion due to the impedance of the LOT causing the EHT to drop. • Picture blooming due to the picture characteristics Because of the above mentioned, we will need a circuit for Beam Current Limiter (BCL) and EHT compensation (EHT_info). These two circuits derive the signal from the picture tube current info through LOT pin 10.
9.3.7
EHT_info The “PHI2 correction” is to correct the storage time deviation of the Line Output Transistor, which is causing geometry distortion due to brightness change. Line EHT_info is to correct the geometry distortion due to EHT deviation. Both of them feedback through the EHTO and PH2LF pin, and correct the geometry through the East-West circuit.
9.3.6
C2463, R3464 and D6457 are for boosting the base voltage of TS7451 during the flyback period and the 1st half Frame period as well. C2463 is charged by D6457 during the 2nd half scanning. R3467 and R3468 are for oscillation damping. The V_guard protection is to protect the Frame stage if a fault condition happens. The V_guard will sense the pulse with voltage > 3.8 V and period < 900 us. Any signal out of this range will be considered as fault, and the chassis will be shut down. 9.3.8
The X-ray protection circuit rectifies the filament voltage and uses it to trigger TS7481 when the EHT is too high. TS7481 is biased at “off” condition by D6480, R3482, and R3483 during normal operation. When the EHT goes too high, the voltage
Tilt and Rotation The rotation control signal is a PWM output from the UOC. It is filtered by R3252, R3246, R3259 and C2259. The DC voltage after filtering at C2259 will be amplified by R3245 (Main Board) and R3390 (CRT panel). The output stage functions similarly as in M8/L01.1 with rotation IC TDA8941P. TS7331/TS7382 and TS7332/TS7381 will function alternatively corresponding to the rotation setting.
DAF
X-ray Protection
Vertical Deflection
The Frame differential drive signal from the Hercules comes from a current source. Resistors R3460 and R3461 convert them into a voltage, and feed them into the differential amplifier TS7455 and TS7456. The output of TS7456 is input to the next amplification stage of TS7452. Finally, TS7451 and TS7453 deliver the Vertical yoke current to the coil and feedback through the sensing resistors R3471 and R3472. D6458 and TS7454 are used to bias TS7451 and TS7453, to get rid of zero crossovers, which can cause horizontal lines at the screen center. The negative supply is from -12V and the positive scanning supply is from +12V through D6459. The flyback supply is derived from D6455, D6456 and C2456. This circuit is a voltage doubler, which stores energy in C2456 during the Line flyback period and delivers the energy to C2465 during the Line scanning period. Throughout the Frame period, the charging and discharging of C2456 works alternatively. However, at the first half of the Frame scanning, TS7451 is “on” and consumes all the charge from C2456. When entering 2nd half Frame period, TS7451 is “off”, so C2456 will gradually charge up to the required flyback supply.
Components R3454, D6451, D6450, C2453, R3493, and C2230 are for average beam current limiting. C2453 and R3493 also control the timing where average beam current limiting is more active or less active.
The Dynamic Astigmatic Focus (DAF) circuit is required by 34RF sets only. It provides vertical DAF and horizontal DAF. Both of the parabola signals are derived through integration by using chassis available signals: • The vertical parabola is using RC integration (via R3403 and C2401) on the Frame sensing resistor saw tooth (Frame_FB). • The horizontal parabola is obtained by 2 RC integration (R3409, R3410, C2402, C2403) on the +9V LOT output. Both of the parabolas are added on the output stage through adder TS7402 and TS7403. The collector of TS7402 emitterdrives TS7401 and is amplified by pull up resistor R3411. D6401 and C2405 provide the rectified supply voltage.
EN 85
The Frame stage consists fully of discrete components. This has the advantage for better flash behavior than when an IC was used.
Components TS7483, R3490, R3491, R3492, and C2483 are for fast beam current limiting (e.g. with a Black-to-White pattern).
9.3.5
9.
across R3482 will tend to increase as well, while the voltage across D6481 is fixed. Up to certain level (triggering point), TS7481 will be “on” and will force the EHT_info > 3.9 V. The chassis will be shut down through a soft stop sequence.
BCL • When the BCL pin voltage goes to 2.8 V, the Hercules will start to limit CONTRAST gain. • When it reaches 1.7 V, then the BRIGHTNESS gain limit will start to react. • When BCL pin voltage goes to 0.8 V, the RGB will be blanked.
Power Down The power down connection is for EHT discharge during AC Power “Off” state. In the Hercules, if EHT_info > 3.9 V, it will trigger the X-ray protection circuit via a 2fH soft stop sequence. The Hercules bits OSO (Switch Off in Vertical Over scan) and FBC (Fixed Beam Current Switch Off) will discharge the EHT with 1mA cathode current at over-scan position. During switch-off, the H_out frequency is doubled immediately and the duty cycle is set to 25% fixed, during 43 ms. The RGB outputs are driven “high” to get a controlled discharge of the picture tube with 1 mA during 38 ms. This will decrease the EHT to about half the nominal value (= safety requirement). When bit OSO is set, the white spot/flash during switch-off will be written in overscan and thus will not be visible on the screen. Careful application must guarantee that the vertical deflection stays operational until the end of the discharge period.
L04U AA
9.3.9
CRT panel The RGB amplifier stage is exactly the same as in M8/L01.1. However, the RGB amplifier IC has been changed to TDA6107AJF or TDA6108AJF. The “A” indication is with gain of “80” rather than “50” in M8/L01.1. The diode D6332 used in the former chassis, to solve the bright screen during start up, is not required because this IC has the error correction implemented. Scavem In certain versions, the Scavem feature is used to enhance the sharpness of the picture. The RGB signals are first differentiated and subsequently amplified before feeding to an auxiliary coil known as the SVM coil. The current, flowing through the SVM coil during the picture intensity transients, modulates the deflection field and thus the scan velocity.
EN 86
9.
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets
L04U AA
During the first half of the intensity increase, the scan velocity is increased (thus decreasing the current density by spreading it on a wider area). During the second half of the intensity increase, the scan velocity is decreased (increasing the current density by concentrating it on a smaller area). The increasing current density transition is sharpened. A decreasing current density transition is processed in a similar way and is also sharpened. In this chassis the SCAVEM signal is different from its predecessor because the Hercules generates the differential SCAVEM signal inside the IC. The supply of the SCAVEM is taken from V_bat through a 1k5 / 5 W resistor. Compared with the M8/L01.1, this has the advantage of getting better performance for the pattern with tremendous SCAVEM current (like V_sweep). In this former chassis, because the supply was taken from the 200 V through a 8k2 / 5 W resistor, the supply dropped significantly during a large SCAVEM current. In this chassis, the drop due to the pattern will be less because of the lower supply voltage impedance. In the Main Board, 1st stage amplification is taken care by 7208 with the pull up resistors (3361, 3387) located in the CRT panel.
9.4.2
Basic Specification The Micro Controller operates at the following supply voltages: • +3.3 V_dc at pins 33, 125, and 19. • +1.8 V_dc at pins 126, 36, and 33. • I2C pull up supply: +3.3V_dc.
9.4.3
Pin Configuration and Functionality The ports of the Micro Controller can be configured as follows: • A normal input port. • An input ADC port. • An output Open Drain port. • An output Push-Pull port. • An output PWM port. • Input/Output Port The following table shows the ports used for the L04 control: Table 9-4 Micro Controller ports overview
TS7361 and TS7362 is the current buffer delivering the current to the output stage. The diode D6361 is to lightly bias these transistors, to get rid of the zero crossover of the stage. After that, the signal is ac-coupled to TS7363 and TS7364 where the emitter resistors (R3364 and R3370) will determine the final SCAVEM current. TS7363 and TS7364 are biased by R3363, R3366, R3367 and R3368. C2387, R3388, R3389, R3365, R3369, C2384, and C2385 are used for suppressing unwanted oscillations. The function of TS7376 is to limit the SCAVEM current from going too high. It basically senses the voltage after R3373 and clamps the SCAVEM signal through D6367 and C2376.
9.4
Control The Micro Controller is integrated with the Video Processor, and is called the Hercules. For dynamic data storage, such as SMART PICTURE and SMART SOUND settings, an external NVM IC is being used. Another feature includes an optional Teletext/Closed Caption decoder with the possibility of different page storage depending on the Hercules type number. The Micro Controller ranges in ROM from 128 kB with no TXTdecoder to 128 kB with a 10 page Teletext or with Closed Caption.
9.4.1
Block Diagram The block diagram of the Micro Controller application is shown below.
# !$$%
&%'
# ( ) *%& )+ !
$!
)
!,+!+ &+- + ,
.!) / .!) .,$/ !$! 01
*%& )+
!$!
01
IR
INT0
31
P1.0/ INT1
PWRDOWN
INT1
30
P1.1/ T0
LED
P1.1
27
P0.4/ I2SWS
(for future use)
26
P0.3/ I2SCLK
(for future use)
25
P0.2/ I2SDO2
SEL_SC2_INTERF ACE/ SDM
E_14480_070.eps 200204
Configuration
P0.2
24
P0.1/ I2SDO1
(for future use)
P0.1
23
P0.0/ I2SDI/O
Panorama
P0.0
22
P1.3/ T1
Write Protect
P1.3
21
P1.6/ SCL
SCL
SCL
20
P1.7/ SDA
SDA
SDA
18
P2.0/ TPWM
VOL_MUTE
P2.0
17
P2.1/ PWM0
ROTATION
PWM0
16
P2.2/ PWM1
SEL_LL'/M
P2.2
15
P2.3/ PWM2
STANDBY_CON
P2.3
14
P3.0/ ADC0
Light Sensor
13
P3.1/ ADC1
(for future use)
10
P3.2/ ADC2
(for future use)
9
P3.3/ ADC3
KEYBOARD
7
P2.4/ PWM3
A (for future use)
6
P2.5/ PWM4
B (for future use)
P2.5
3
P1.2/ INT2
C (for future use)
INT2
2
P1.4/ RX
E (for future use)
-
1
P1.5/ TX
D (for future use)
-
LED
" !
Figure 9-4 Micro Controller block diagram
INT0/ P0.5
ADC0 ADC3 P2.4
Table 9-5 LED signal diversity
Description
32
The description of each functional pin is explained below: • LED. This signal is used as an indication for the Standby, Remote and Error Indicator. Region diversity: – During protection mode, the LED blinks and the set is in standby mode. – During error conditions it blinks at a predefined rate. – After receiving a valid RC-5 or local keyboard command it flashes once. – For sets with error message indication, the LED blinks when message is active and the set is in standby mode.
Pin Name
• • •
Europe
0
LED brighter
Standby
1
LED dimmer
Normal
AP/ LATAM
NAFTA
LED lighted Standby LED lighted LED "off"
Normal
LED "off"
Normal Standby
SCL. This is the clock wire of the two-wire single master bidirectional I2C bus. SDA. This is the data wire of the two-wire single master bidirectional I2C bus. STDBY_CON. The Hercules generates this signal. This can enable the MAIN SMPS in normal operation and
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets
• •
•
• •
• •
•
•
disable it during Standby. It is of logic “low” (0 V) under normal operation and “high” (3.3 V) during Standby. IR. This input pin is connected to an RC5 remote control receiver. SEL-IF-LL’/ M-TRAP. For AP: All L04 AP sets are Multi System QSS set. This is an output pin to switch the Video SAW filter between M system and other systems. – 0: NTSC M (default) – 1: PAL B/G, DK, I Write Protect. The global protection line is used to enable and disable write protection to the NVM. When write to the NVM is required, pin 7 of the NVM must be pulled to logic ‘0’ first (via Write_Protect of the micro-controller pin) before a write is performed. Otherwise pin 7 of NVM must always be at logic “1” – 0: Disabled – 1: Enabled (default) Mute. This pin is use to MUTE the audio amplifier. It is configured as push pull. Rotation. This pin is configured as PWM for the Rotation feature. The output of the PWM is proportional to the feature control. Light Sensor. This pin is configured as ADC input for the Light Sensor. Sel_SC2_Interface. This pin is use to switch between the SC2_CVBS_OUT and the INTF_CVBS_OUT for the SCART_2_CVBS_OUT/ MONITOR_OUT signal. – 0: Hercules CVBS Output (default) – 1: Interface CVBS Output PWRDOWN. The AUX SMPS generates this signal. Logic “high” (3.3 V) under normal operation of the TV and goes “low” (0 V) when the Mains input voltage supply goes below 70 V_ac. Keyboard. Following are the Keyboard functions and the step values (8 bit) for it.
NAFTA Standby
Voltage (V_dc) Step values (8 bit) 0
0-6
Ch +
0.43
7 - 33
Exit Factory (Ch- and Vol-)
0.69
34 - 53
Ch -
0.93
54 - 73
Menu (Vol - and Vol +)
1.19
74 - 96
Vol -
1.49
97 - 121
DVD Eject
1.8
122 - 147
Vol +
2.12
148 - 169
•
•
•
•
• • • 9.5.1
SDM. This pin is configured as Open Drain during the cold start only. If this pin is shorted to ground during cold start, it will enter the SDM mode (for Service use). ISP. This pin is configured as Open Drain during the cold start only. If this pin is shorted to ground during cold start, it will enter the ISP mode (for Service use). PANEL. This pin is configured as Open Drain during the cold start only. If this pin is shorted to ground during that, then it will enter to the PANEL mode. ResetEnabled. This is an output pin to switch the control transistor (pos. TS7202) “high” or “low” for the reset of 1.8 V in case there is a corruption in the Hercules.
9.
EN 87
Integrated sound band-passes and traps (4.5 / 5.5 / 6.0 / 6.5 MHz). Group delay compensation (for NTSC and for PAL). QSS versions with digital Second-Sound-IF SSIF (AM demodulator for free). FM mono operation possible: Inter-Carrier or QSS.
Diversity The following Tuners can be present (depending on the region and the set execution): • Normal tuner without PIP. • FM radio tuner without PIP. • Normal tuner with PIP (main tuner with splitter). • FM radio set with PIP (PIP tuner with splitter). The SAW filter used, depends on the application concept (whether it is a QSS concept or an Intercarrier): • OFWM3953M for QSS Video. • OFWK9656M for QSS Audio. • OFWM1971M for Intercarrier.
9.5.2
Pin Assignments and Functionality Pin assignment of the Tuner: Table 9-7 Pinning Tuner Pin Pin Description
DC Voltages
1
RF-AGC
4V for Maximum Gain < 4V for Strong Signal Condition
2
FM Radio Input or N.C
-
3
NC (Address Pin)
-
4
SCL
0 to 3.3 V_dc
5
SDA
0 to 3.3 V_dc
6/7 Supply Voltage
Table 9-6 Local keyboard values Function
•
L04U AA
5 V_dc +/- 0.25 V
8
N.C
-
9
Tuning Supply Voltage
30 to 35 V_dc
10
FM Radio IF Output/Ground -
11
TV IF Output
-
Pin assignment of the several SAW filters (depends on region/ execution): Table 9-8 Pinning SAW filters QSS Video Pin (item 1002)
QSS Video (item 1003)
QSS Audio (item 1001)
Intercarrier (item 1002)
Input
Input
Input
1
Input
2
Input Ground Input Ground
3
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
4
Output
Output
Output
Output
5
Output
Output
Output
Output
6
-
n.c.
-
-
7
-
n.c.
-
-
8
-
Ground
-
-
9
-
Free
-
-
10
-
Switching input -
-
Switching Input Input Ground
The table below shows the switching behavior of SAW filter.
9.5
Tuner and IF The tuner used in this chassis comes from two sources, from Philips and from Alps. Both tuner sources have the same pin configuration so they are 1 to 1 compatible except for the software, which will be selected by means of Option Settings. Some features: • Multi-Standard alignment free PLL-IF, including SECAM L/ L’. • Integrated IF-AGC time constant.
Table 9-9 Switching behavior SAW filter Condition System
High
Low
M
BG/DK/I/L
Note: The logic level is measured at the base of transistor 7001.
EN 88 9.5.3
9.
L04U AA
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets
Option Settings The option settings for the Tuner type can be found in Option setting 1 of the SAM mode. The Option settings for Option 1 are as follows: • Option Byte 1 – Bit 7: OP_PHILIPS_TUNER – Bit 6: OP_FM_RADIO – Bit 5: OP_LNA – Bit 4: OP_ATS – Bit 3: OP_ACI – Bit 2: OP_UK_PNP – Bit 1: OP_VIRGIN_MODE – Bit 0: OP_CHINA For more details on the option settings, please refer to the chapter 8 “Alignments”.
9.6
Source Select For this chassis, the audio/video source selection is controlled via the Hercules. The Audio/Video Source Select is one of the more complex functions due to its diversity and complex switching. The Audio/ Video Source Select comprises of the following components: • The Hercules itself for Mono Audio and Video Source Selection. • The HEF switch for Stereo Audio as well as Video Selection.
9.6.1
Options The option settings for the Source Selection can be found in Option settings of the SAM mode. The Option settings for Option 5 are as follows: • Option Byte 5 – Bit 7: AV1 – Bit 6: AV2 – Bit 5: AV3 – Bit 4: CVI – Bit 3: SVHS2 – Bit 2: SVHS3 – Bit 1: HOTEL MODE – Bit 0: For more detail on the option settings, please refer to the chapter 8 “Alignments”.
9.6.2
Diversity The basic diversity of the Audio/Video Source Select is between the Mono and the Stereo sets and the number of Cinch/SCART’s as specified in the product specification. The table below shows the Audio/Video Source Select diversity for all regions:
Table 9-10 AV Source Select diversity Pin No. Symbol 51
R/Pr IN3
50
G/Y IN3
49
B/Pb IN3
52
INSSW3
74
CVBS2/Y2
95
AUDIO IN5 L
94
AUDIO IN5 R
73
AUDIO IN3 L
72
AUDIO IN3 R
71
CVBS3/Y3
70
C2/C3
80
AUDIO IN4 L
79
AUDIO IN4 R
78
CVBS4/Y4
77
C4
81
IFVO/SVO/CVBSI
67
AUD OUT HP L
Remark AV1 (CVI)
AV2 (SVHS)
Side (SHVS)
Monitor Out
66
AUD OUT HP R
69
AUD OUT LS L (AUD OUT/AM OUT) HP/ LS Out
68
AUD OUT LS R
59
V IN (R/Pr IN2/CX)
58
U IN (B/Pb IN2)
57
Y IN (G/Y IN2/CVBS-Yx)
54
U OUT (INSSW2)
76
AUDIO IN2 L
75
AUDIO IN2 R
Interface
86
DVBO/IFVO/FMRO
65
CVBSO/PIP
N.C. PIP application
56
Y SYNC
100 nF
55
Y OUT
100 nF
53
V OUT (SWO)
N.C.
93
AUD OUT S L
N.C.
92
AUD OUT S R
N.C.
Table 9-11 SCART Source Select diversity Pin Symbol
Remark
51
SCART 1
R/Pr IN3
50
G/Y IN3
49
B/Pb IN3
52
INSSW3
74
CVBS2/Y2
86
DVBO/IFVO/FMRO
95
AUDIO IN5 L
94
AUDIO IN5 R
93
AUD OUT S L
92
AUD OUT S R
71
CVBS3/Y3
70
C2/C3
81
IFVO/SVO/CVBSI
73
AUDIO IN3 L
72
AUDIO IN3 R
67
AUD OUT HP L
66
AUD OUT HP R
80
AUDIO IN4 L
79
AUDIO IN4 R
78
CVBS4/Y4
SCART 2
Side I/O
77
C4
69
AUD OUT LS L (AUD OUT/AM OUT)
68
AUD OUT LS R
59
V IN (R/Pr IN2/CX)
58
U IN (B/Pb IN2)
57
Y IN (G/Y IN2/CVBS-Yx)
54
U OUT(INSSW2)
76
AUDIO IN2 L
75
AUDIO IN2 R
65
CVBSO/PIP
for PIP
56
YSYNC
100 nF
55
YOUT
100 nF
53
VOUT(SWO)
N.C.
LS/ HP/ MON OUT Interface
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets 9.6.3
L04U AA
9.
EN 89
42,43 44
CRT
49,50,51
RGB/CVI INPUT
Audio Source Selection NVM
The signals coming out of the DEMDEC (internal demodulator/ decoder block of the Hercules) are selectable and consist of the following (depending on the transmission): • DEC L/R (Can be NICAM, FM 2CS, or BTSC Stereo). • Mono (Refers to fallback/forced Mono in Stereo Transmission). • SAP. For L04, the assigned I/O with respect to the Hercules is as follows: • SCART1 or AV1 Input assigned to Audio In 5. • SCART2 or AV2 Input assigned to Audio In 3. • Side AV Input assigned to Audio In 4. • External Interface Input assigned to Audio In 2. • SCART1 Output assigned to SCART Output. • SCART2 Output (EU) or Monitor Output (LA/NA/AP) assigned to Headphone Output. • Constant Level Output assigned to Loudspeaker Output. 9.6.4
Video Processing
Some features: • Full YUV-loop interface (alternative functions: DVD, RGB or Y/C). • Internal OSD insertion (not Saturation or Contrast controlled). • Double window implementation. • Linear / non linear scaling for 16:9 sets. • Tint (hue) on UV signals (including DVD). • Peaking, Coring, Black \ Blue \ White-stretch. • Transfer-Ratio and Scavem (also on TXT). Features The features included in the Hercules are as follows: • Brightness Control. • Contrast Control. • Saturation Control. • Sharpness Control. • Peak White Limiter. • Beam Current Limiter. • Black Stretch (Contrast Plus). For sets with the TDA9178, there are two extra features: • Luminance Transient Improvement (LTI). • Color Transient Improvement (CTI). 9.7.2
VI DEO SAW
24 25
53,54,55
HERCULES
57,58 59
Block Diagram Following diagram is the block diagram of the video processing part:
LTI/CTI
SW AUDIO SAW
29,30
95,94,80,79, 78,77,76,75, 74,73,72,71,70
PIP/ DVD 86,81, 67,66
68,69
65
CVBS/AUDIO REAR/SIDE INPUT/OUTPUT
AUDIO AM P
Video Source Selection
The Video Processor is basically the Hercules and the TDA9178 (CTI/LTI). Video processing is done in these two chips such as the Brightness Control, Contrast Control and so on.
9.7.1
TUNER
MONITOR OUT
Video source selection is done inside the Hercules. Therefore it provides a video switch with 3 external CVBS inputs and a CVBS output. All CVBS inputs can be used as Y-input for Y/C signals. However, only 2 Y/C sources can be selected because the circuit has 2 chroma inputs. All input signals are converted to YUV, and looped through an external interface. This to enable picture improvement features (like LTI/CTI) or PIP.
9.7
20 21
E_14480_071.eps 200204
Figure 9-5 Video processing block diagram 9.7.3
LTI/CTI The TDA9178 is an I2C-bus controlled IC (INCREDIBLE chip) with YUV interface. This IC can do mainly histogram processing, color transient improvement (CTI) and line transient improvement (LTI). • Luminance Vector Processing involves histogram function, which provides scene dependent contrast improvement, adaptive black and white point stretching. • Color Vector Processing involves skin tone correction, green enhancement and blue stretch. • Spectral Processor involves step improvement processing, contour processing, smart sharpness control, color dependant sharpness and Color Transient Improvement. • Noise detector, feature mode detector and cue flash functions. • Demonstration mode shows all the improvement features in one picture. Table 9-12 Pinning overview TDA9178 Pin Symbol
Description
1
SC
Sandcastle input pin
2
n.c.
Not connected pin
3
ADEXT1
External AD-conversion #1 input pin
4
ADEXT2
External AD-conversion #2 input pin
5
ADEXT3
External AD-conversion #3 input pin
6
Y in
Luminance input pin
7
ADR
Address selection input pin
8
U in
-(B-Y) signal input pin
9
V in
-(R-Y) signal input pin
10
TP
Testpin, connected to ground
11
SCL
I2C-bus: clock input pin
12
n.c.
Not connected pin
13
n.c.
Not connected pin
14
SDA
I2C-bus: data input pin
15
DECDIG
Decoupling digital supply
16
V out
-(R-Y) signal output pin
17
U out
-(B-Y) signal output pin
18
V ee
Ground pin
19
Y out
Luminance output pin
20
V cc
Supply-voltage pin
21
S out
Luminance output for SCAVEM
22
CF
Cue-flash output pin
23
n.c.
Not connected pin
24
n.c.
Not connected pin
EN 90 9.7.4
9.
L04U AA
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets
The option settings allow for process of the video as per set specification. The option settings can be found in “Option 2” and “Option 6” in the SAM mode. The option settings are as follows: • Option Byte 2 – Bit 7: – Bit 6 :OP_GREEN_UI – Bit 5: OP_CHANNEL_NAMING, – Bit 4: OP_LTI, – Bit 3: OP_TILT, – Bit 2: OP_FINE_TUNING – Bit 1: OP_PIP_PHILIPS_TUNER, – Bit 0: OP_HUE, • Option Byte 6 – Bit 7: OP_PERSONAL_ZAPPING, – Bit 6: – Bit 5: OP_FMTRAP – Bit 4: OP_COMBFILTER – Bit 3: OP_ACTIVE_CONTROL – Bit 2: OP_VIDEO_TEXT – Bit 1 :OP_LIGHT_SENSOR, – Bit 0: OP_DUAL_TEXT For more details on the option settings, please refer to the chapter 8 “Alignments”.
9.8
In this chassis, the analog decoder is used in two cases: • It is used for AM Sound demodulation in the Europe SECAM LL’ transmission. • It is used for all FM demodulation in AP AV-Stereo sets.
For the case of NAFTA and LATAM, there is only one transmission standard, which is the M standard. The diversity then will be based on whether it has a dBx noise reduction or a Non-dBx (no dBx noise reduction). For the case of AP, the standard consists of BG/DK/I/M for a Multi-System set. The diversity here will then depends on the region. AP China can have a Multi-System and I/DK version. For India, it might only be BG standard.
•
9.8.2
Functionality The features available in the Hercules are as follows: • Treble and Bass Control. • Surround Sound Effect that includes: – Incredible Stereo. – Incredible Mono. – 3D Sound (not for AV Stereo). – TruSurround (not for AV Stereo). – Virtual Dolby Surround, VDS422 (not for AV Stereo). – Virtual Dolby Surround, VDS423 (not for AV Stereo). – Dolby Pro-Logic (not for AV Stereo). • Bass Feature that includes: – Dynamic Ultra-Bass. – Dynamic Bass Enhancement. – BBE (not for AV Stereo). • Auto-Volume Leveler. • 5 Band Equalizer. • Loudness Control. All the features stated are available for the Full Stereo versions and limited features for the AV Stereo
Audio Processing The audio decoding is done entirely via the Hercules. The IF output from the Tuner is fed directly to either the Video-IF or the Sound-IF input depending on the type of concept chosen. There are mainly two types of decoder in the Hercules, an analog decoder that decodes only Mono, regardless of any standards, and a digital decoder (or DEMDEC) that can decode both Mono as well as Stereo, again regardless of any standards.
9.8.1
•
Options
9.9
Audio Amplifier The audio amplifier part is very straightforward. It uses the integrated power amplifier TDA2616Q, and delivers a maximum output of 2 x 10 W_rms. The maximum operating condition for this amplifier is 21 V unloaded. Normal operating supply is from 7.5 V to 16 V. Muting is done via the VOLUME_MUTE line connected to pin 2 of the amplifier-IC and coming from the UOC. The following table shows pin functionality of the Audio Amplifier:
Diversity Table 9-13 Pinning overview TDA2616 The diversity for the Audio decoding can be broken up into two main concepts: • The Quasi Split Sound concept used in Europe and some AP sets. • The Inter Carrier concept, used in NAFTA and LATAM. The UOC-III family makes no difference anymore between QSS- and Intercarrier IF, nearly all types are softwareswitchable between the two SAW-filter constructions. Simple data settings are required for the set to determine whether it is using the Inter Carrier or the QSS concept. These settings are done via the “QSS” and “FMI” bit found in SAM mode. Due to the diversity involved, the data for the 2 bits are being placed in the NVM location and it is required to write once during startup. On top of that, it can be further broken down into various systems depending on the region. The systems or region chosen, will in turn affect the type of sound standard that is/are allowed to be decoded. • For the case of Europe, the standard consists of BG/DK/I/ LL’ for a Multi-System set. There are also versions of Eastern Europe and Western Europe set and the standard for decoding will be BG/DK and I/DK respectively. FM Radio is a feature diversity for the Europe sets. The same version can have either FM Radio or not, independent of the system (e.g. sets with BG/DK/I/LL’ can have or not have FM radio).
Pin Pin Name
Normal Operation
1
Input Left
2
Mute
Input AC signal 16 V_dc
3
Ground
0V
4
Output L Channel
AC waveform
5
Supply Voltage (negative)
-16 V_dc
6
Output R Channel
AC waveform
7
Supply Voltage (positive)
+ 16 V_dc
8
Inverting inputs L and R
0V
9
Input Right
Input AC signal
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets 9.10 Abbreviation list 2CS ACI
ADC AFC
AFT AGC
AM AP AR ATS AV AVL BCL B/G BTSC
CC CCC ComPair CRT CSM CTI
CVBS CVI DAC DBX D/K DFU DNR DSP DST
DVD EEPROM EHT EHT-INFO EPG EU EW EXT FBL FILAMENT FM H HP I I2C IF
2 Carrier (or Channel) Stereo Automatic Channel Installation: algorithm that installs TV sets directly from cable network by means of a predefined TXT page Analogue to Digital Converter Automatic Frequency Control: control signal used to tune to the correct frequency Automatic Fine Tuning Automatic Gain Control: algorithm that controls the video input of the feature box Amplitude Modulation Asia Pacific region Aspect Ratio: 4 by 3 or 16 by 9 Automatic Tuning System External Audio Video Automatic Volume Leveler Beam Current Limitation Monochrome TV system. Sound carrier distance is 5.5 MHz Broadcast Television Standard Committee. Multiplex FM stereo sound system, originating from the USA and used e.g. in LATAM and AP-NTSC countries Closed Caption Continuous Cathode Calibration Computer aided rePair Cathode Ray Tube or picture tube Customer Service Mode Color Transient Improvement: manipulates steepness of chroma transients Composite Video Blanking and Synchronization Component Video Input Digital to Analogue Converter Dynamic Bass Expander or noise reduction system in BTSC Monochrome TV system. Sound carrier distance is 6.5 MHz Direction For Use: description for the end user Dynamic Noise Reduction Digital Signal Processing Dealer Service Tool: special remote control designed for dealers to enter e.g. service mode Digital Versatile Disc Electrically Erasable and Programmable Read Only Memory Extra High Tension Extra High Tension information Electronic Programming Guide Europe East West, related to horizontal deflection of the set External (source), entering the set via SCART or Cinch Fast Blanking: DC signal accompanying RGB signals Filament of CRT Field Memory or Frequency Modulation Horizontal sync signal Headphone Monochrome TV system. Sound carrier distance is 6.0 MHz Integrated IC bus Intermediate Frequency
IIC ITV LATAM LED L/L'
LS M/N NC NICAM
NTSC
NVM OB OC OP OSD PAL
PCB PLL
POR PTP RAM RC RGB ROM SDAM SAP SC S/C SCL SDA SECAM
SIF SS STBY SVHS SW THD TXT uP UOC V V_BAT V-chip VCR WYSIWYR
XTAL YC
L04U AA
9.
EN 91
Integrated IC bus Institutional TV Latin American countries like Brazil, Argentina, etc. Light Emitting Diode Monochrome TV system. Sound carrier distance is 6.5 MHz. L' is Band I, L is all bands except for Band I Large Screen or Loudspeaker Monochrome TV system. Sound carrier distance is 4.5 MHz Not Connected Near Instantaneous Compounded Audio Multiplexing. This is a digital sound system, mainly used in Europe. National Television Standard Committee. Color system mainly used in North America and Japan. Color carrier NTSC M/N = 3.579545 MHz, NTSC 4.43 = 4.433619 MHz (this is a VCR norm, it is not transmitted off-air) Non Volatile Memory: IC containing TV related data e.g. alignments Option Bit Open Circuit Option Byte On Screen Display Phase Alternating Line. Color system mainly used in West Europe (color carrier = 4.433619 MHz) and South America (color carrier PAL M = 3.575612 MHz and PAL N = 3.582056 MHz) Printed Circuit board Phase Locked Loop. Used for e.g. FST tuning systems. The customer can give directly the desired frequency Power-On Reset Picture Tube Panel (or CRT-panel) Random Access Memory Remote Control handset Red, Green, and Blue video signals Read Only Memory Service Default / Alignment Mode Second Audio Program Sandcastle: pulse derived from sync signals Short Circuit Serial Clock Serial Data SEequence Couleur Avec Memoire. Color system mainly used in France and East Europe. Color carriers = 4.406250 MHz and 4.250000 MHz Sound Intermediate Frequency Small Screen Standby Super Video Home System Software Total Harmonic Distortion Teletext Microprocessor Ultimate One Chip Vertical sync signal Main supply voltage for the deflection stage (mostly 141 V) Violence Chip Video Cassette Recorder What You See Is What You Record: record selection that follows main picture and sound Quartz crystal Luminance (Y) and Chrominance (C) signal
EN 92
9.
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets
L04U AA
9.11 IC Data Sheets
9.11.1 Diagram H, TDA9178 (IC7610)
This section shows the internal block diagrams and pin layouts of ICs that are drawn as "black boxes" in the electrical diagrams (with the exception of "memory" and "logic" ICs).
BLOCK DIAGRAM Sout
spectral processing
Luminance vector processing
Yin Uin Vin
Y
inputstage
luminance processing
smart peaking LTI VDC
black stretch histogram processing gamma control
U,V
Yout +
output stage
Uout Vout
CDS colour vector processing
Vcc
CTI
colour processing
supply skin tone correction green enhancement blue stretch
ground Sandcastle
delay control
saturation correction
DECDIG
CF
window generation noise measuring
Ôcue ßashÕ
calibrate ADC
featuremode detection
I 2C
ADext1 (low frequencies) ADext2 (low frequencies) ADext3 (low frequencies)
I2C-control
PIN CONFIGURATION
Sc
1
24
Nc
Nc
2
23
Nc
ADEXT1
3
22
CF
ADEXT2
4
21
Sout
ADEXT3
5
20
Vcc
Yin
6
19
Yout
TDA9178 ADR
7
18
Vee
Uin
8
17
Uout
Vin
9
16
Vout
TP
10
15
DECDIG
SCL
11
14
SDA
Nc
12
13
Nc E_14480_075.eps 200204
Figure 9-6 Internal Block Diagram and Pin Configuration
Spare Parts List
10. Spare Parts List Not applicable
L04U AA
10.
EN 93
EN 94
11.
L04U AA
11. Revision List First release.
Revision List
Chassis
L04U AA
E_14480_000.eps 120204
Contents
Page
1. Technical Specifications, Connections, and Chassis Overview 2 2. Safety and Maintenance Instructions, Warnings, and Notes 4 3. Directions for Use 6 4. Mechanical Instructions 24 5. Service Modes, Error Codes, and Faultfinding 26 6. Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms Wiring Diagram 37 Block Diagram Supply and Deflection 38 Testpoint Overview Mono Carrier 39 Block Diagram Video 40 Testpoint Overview CRT & LTI Panel 41 Block Diagram Audio/Control 42 I2C and Supply Voltage Overview 43 7. Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts Diagram Power Supply (Diagram A1) 44 Diversity Table for A1 (Power Supply) 45 Deflection (Diagram A2) 46 Diversity Table for A2 (Deflection) 47 Tuner IF (Diagram A3) 48 Hercules (Diagram A4) 49 Features & Connectivities (Diagram A5) 50 Class D - Audio Amplifier (Diagram A6) 51 Audio Amplifier (Diagram A7) 52 Rear I/O Cinch (Diagram A8) 53 Front Control (Diagram A9) 54 DVD Power Supply (Reserved) (Diagram A10)55 CRT Panel (Diagram B1) 62 ECO Scavem Panel (Diagram B2) 63 Side AV + Headphone Panel (Diagram D) 66 Top Control Panel (Diagram E) 68 Linearity & Panorama Panel (Diagram G) 69
Contents 8. 9.
10 11
Page
LTI/CTI Interface Panel (Diagram H) Front Interface Panel (Diagram J) Alignments Circuit Descriptions Abbreviation List IC Data Sheets Spare Parts List (not applicable) Revision List
70 72 73 81 91 92 93 94
71 72
PWB 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 56-61 64-65 64-65 67 68 69
© Copyright 2004 Philips Consumer Electronics B.V. Eindhoven, The Netherlands. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, or otherwise without the prior permission of Philips.
Published by BB 0462 Service PaCE
Printed in the Netherlands
Subject to modification
EN 3122 785 14430
EN 2
1.
Technical Specifications, Connections, and Chassis Overview
L04U AA
1. Technical Specifications, Connections, and Chassis Overview Note: Described specifications are valid for the whole product range. Note: Figures below can deviate slightly from the actual situation, due to different set executions.
1.1
1.2
Note: The following connector color abbreviations are used (acc. to DIN/IEC 757): Bk= Black, Bu= Blue, Gn= Green, Gy= Grey, Rd= Red, Wh= White, Ye= Yellow.
Technical Specifications 1.2.1
1.1.1
Top Control and Front / Side Connections
Reception Tuning system Color systems Sound systems Channel selections IF picture carrier Aerial input A/V Connections
1.1.2
Connections
: : : : : : :
FRONT I/O PLL NTSC BTSC 181, full cable 45.75 MHz 75 Ohm, F-type NTSC M (3.58 - 4.5)
RED IR LIGHT SENSOR LED (OPTIONAL)
Miscellaneous
TOP CONTROL Audio output: : 2x5W : 2 x 10 W Power supply: Mains voltage range Mains frequency
: 90 - 140 V_ac : 60 Hz
Ambient conditions: Temperature range Maximum humidity
: +5 to +45 deg. C : 90 % R.H.
Power consumption: Normal operation Standby
- VOLUME
+
- PROGRAM +
P
SIDE I/O
R AUDIO L VIDEO
E_14480_045.eps 170204
Figure 1-1 Top control and Front / Side connections : from 79 W (20”) : to 119 W (32”) : <1W
Audio / Video In Ye - Video (CVBS) 1 V_pp / 75 ohm Wh - Audio - L 0.2 V_rms / 10 kohm Rd - Audio - R 0.2 V_rms / 10 kohm Bk - Headphone 8 - 600 Ohm / 4 mW 1.2.2
H kq kq ot
Rear Connections
75 Ohm
MONITOR OUT
AV2 IN
AV1 IN
VIDEO
Y
V
V
L/Mono
Pb
L
L
Pr
R
R
AUDIO R
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO E_14480_047.eps 110204
Figure 1-2 Rear connections Aerial In - F-type
Coax, 75 ohm
D
Technical Specifications, Connections, and Chassis Overview kq kq kq
YUV In Bu - U Rd - V Gn - Y
jq jq jq
AV1 In Ye - Video (CVBS) 1 V_pp / 75 ohm Wh - Audio - L 0.5 V_rms / 10 kohm
1.3
jq jq
1.
EN 3
0.5 V_rms / 10 kohm
jq
AV2 In Ye - Video (CVBS) 1 V_pp / 75 ohm Wh - Audio - L 0.5 V_rms / 10 kohm Rd - Audio - R 0.5 V_rms / 10 kohm
jq jq jq
AV2 In (SVHS) 1 - Ground 2 - Ground 3 -Y 4 -C
H H jq jq
Rd - Audio - R
Monitor Out Ye - Video (CVBS) 1 V_pp / 75 ohm Wh - Audio - L 0.5 V_rms / 1 kohm Rd - Audio - R 0.5 V_rms / 1 kohm
0.7 V_pp / 75 ohm 0.7 V_pp / 75 ohm 0.7 V_pp / 75 ohm
L04U AA
GND GND 1 V_pp / 75 ohm 0.3 V_pp / 75 ohm
Chassis Overview
B1
CRT
B2
ECO SCAVEM
D
H
CRT PANEL
SIDE AV PANEL + HEADPHONE
LTT/CTI INTERFACE PANEL
MONO CARRIER
G
LINEARITY & PANORAMA PANEL
TOP CONTROL PANEL
E
FRONT INTERFACE PANEL
J
POWER SUPPLY
A1
LINE DEFLECTION
A2
TUNER IF
A3
HERCULES
A4
FEATURES & CONNECTIVITIES
A5
CLASS D AUDIO AMPLIFIER
A6
AUDIO AMPLIFIER
A7
REAR I/O CINCH
A8
FRONT CONTROL
A9
DVD POWER SUPPLY
A10 E_14480_046.eps 170204
Figure 1-3 PWB location
EN 4
2.
L04U AA
Safety and Maintenance Instructions, Warnings, and Notes
2. Safety and Maintenance Instructions, Warnings, and Notes 2.1
Safety Instructions
2.3
•
Safety regulations require that during a repair: • Due to the chassis concept, a very large part of the circuitry (incl. deflection) is 'hot'. Therefore, connect the set to the mains via an isolation transformer. • Replace safety components, indicated by the symbol h, only by components identical to the original ones. Any other component substitution (other than original type) may increase risk of fire or electrical shock hazard. • Wear safety goggles when you replace the CRT. Safety regulations require that after a repair, you must return the set in its original condition. Pay, in particular, attention to the following points: • General repair instruction: as a strict precaution, we advise you to re-solder the solder connections through which the horizontal deflection current is flowing. In particular this is valid for the: 1. Pins of the line output transformer (LOT). 2. Fly-back capacitor(s). 3. S-correction capacitor(s). 4. Line output transistor. 5. Pins of the connector with wires to the deflection coil. 6. Other components through which the deflection current flows. Note: This re-soldering is advised to prevent bad connections due to metal fatigue in solder connections, and is therefore only necessary for television sets more than two years old. • Route the wire trees and EHT cable correctly and secure them with the mounted cable clamps. • Check the insulation of the mains cord for external damage. • Check the strain relief of the mains cord for proper function, to prevent the cord from touching the CRT, hot components, or heat sinks. • Check the electrical DC resistance between the mains plug and the secondary side (only for sets that have an isolated power supply). Do this as follows: 1. Unplug the mains cord and connect a wire between the two pins of the mains plug. 2. Turn on the main power switch (keep the mains cord unplugged!). 3. Measure the resistance value between the pins of the mains plug and the metal shielding of the tuner or the aerial connection of the set. The reading should be between 4.5 MΩ and 12 MΩ. 4. Switch the TV 'off' and remove the wire between the two pins of the mains plug. • Check the cabinet for defects, to prevent the possibility of the customer touching any internal parts.
2.2
Maintenance Instructions We recommend a maintenance inspection carried out by qualified service personnel. The interval depends on the usage conditions: • When a customer uses the set under normal circumstances, for example in a living room, the recommended interval is three to five years. • When a customer uses the set in an environment with higher dust, grease, or moisture levels, for example in a kitchen, the recommended interval is one year. • The maintenance inspection includes the following actions: 1. Perform the 'general repair instruction' noted above. 2. Clean the power supply and deflection circuitry on the chassis. 3. Clean the picture tube panel and the neck of the picture tube.
Warnings In order to prevent damage to ICs and transistors, avoid all high voltage flashovers. In order to prevent damage to the picture tube, use the method shown in Fig. 2-1, to discharge the picture tube. Use a high voltage probe and a multi-meter (position V_dc). Discharge until the meter reading is 0 V (after approx. 30 s).
V
E_06532_007.eps 110204
Figure 2-1 Discharge picture tube •
•
• • •
All ICs and many other semiconductors are susceptible to electrostatic discharges (ESD, w). Careless handling during repair can reduce life drastically. Make sure that, during repair, you are connected with the same potential as the mass of the set by a wristband with resistance. Keep components and tools also at this potential. Available ESD protection equipment: – Complete kit ESD3 (small tablemat, wristband, connection box, extension cable and ground cable) 4822 310 10671. – Wristband tester 4822 344 13999. Together with the deflection unit and any multi-pole unit, flat square picture tubes form an integrated unit. The deflection and the multi-pole units are set optimally at the factory. We do not recommend adjusting this unit during repair. Be careful during measurements in the high voltage section and on the picture tube. Never replace modules or other components while the unit is 'on’. When you align the set, use plastic rather than metal tools. This will prevent any short circuits and the danger of a circuit becoming unstable.
2.4
Notes
2.4.1
General •
•
•
Measure the voltages and waveforms with regard to the chassis (= tuner) ground (H), or hot ground (I), depending on the tested area of circuitry. The voltages and waveforms shown in the diagrams are indicative. Measure them in the Service Default Mode (see chapter 5) with a color bar signal and stereo sound (L: 3 kHz, R: 1 kHz unless stated otherwise) and picture carrier at 475.25 MHz for PAL, or 61.25 MHz for NTSC (channel 3). Where necessary, measure the waveforms and voltages with (D) and without (E) aerial signal. Measure the voltages in the power supply section both in normal operation (G) and in standby (F). These values are indicated by means of the appropriate symbols.
Safety and Maintenance Instructions, Warnings, and Notes •
•
2.4.2
Schematic Notes •
•
•
• • •
2.4.3
All resistor values are in ohms and the value multiplier is often used to indicate the decimal point location (e.g. 2K2 indicates 2.2 kohm). Resistor values with no multiplier may be indicated with either an "E" or an "R" (e.g. 220E or 220R indicates 220 ohm). All capacitor values are expressed in micro-farads (µ= x 10^-6), nano-farads (n= x 10^-9), or pico-farads (p= x 10^12). Capacitor values may also use the value multiplier as the decimal point indication (e.g. 2p2 indicates 2.2 pF). An "asterisk" (*) indicates component usage varies. Refer to the diversity tables for the correct values. The correct component values are listed in the Electrical Replacement Parts List. Therefore, always check this list when there is any doubt.
Practical Service Precautions •
•
•
2.4.4
The picture tube panel has printed spark gaps. Each spark gap is connected between an electrode of the picture tube and the Aquadag coating. The semiconductors indicated in the circuit diagram and in the parts lists, are interchangeable per position with the semiconductors in the unit, irrespective of the type indication on these semiconductors.
It makes sense to avoid exposure to electrical shock. While some sources are expected to have a possible dangerous impact, others of quite high potential are of limited current and are sometimes held in less regard. Always respect voltages. While some may not be dangerous in themselves, they can cause unexpected reactions - reactions that are best avoided. Before reaching into a powered TV set, it is best to test the high voltage insulation. It is easy to do, and is a good service precaution. Before powering up the TV set with the back cover off (or on a test fixture), attach a clip lead to the CRT DAG ground and to a screwdriver blade that has a well insulated handle. After the TV is powered "on" and high voltage has developed, probe the anode lead with the blade, starting at the case of the High Voltage Transformer (flyback - IFT). Move the blade to within two inches of the connector of the CRT. If there is an arc, you found it the easy way, without getting a shock! If there is an arc to the screwdriver blade, replace the part that is causing the problem: the High Voltage Transformer or the lead (if it is removable).
Lead Free Solder This set is manufactured with lead-free production technology. This is also indicated on the PWB by the PHILIPS lead-free logo (either by a service-printing or by a sticker).
P
b
Figure 2-2 Lead-free logo This set is produced with lead-free solder alloy as well as with lead-free sub-parts. It can be considered as lead-free. Due to this fact, some rules have to be respected by the workshop during a repair: • Use only lead-free soldering tin Philips SAC305 with order code 0622 149 00106. If lead-free solder paste is required, please contact the manufacturer of your soldering equipment. • Use only adequate solder tools applicable for lead-free soldering tin.
• • • •
L04U AA
2.
EN 5
Adjust your solder tool so that a temperature around 217 220 deg. C is reached at the solder joint. Do not mix lead-free soldering tin with leaded soldering tin; this will lead to unreliable solder joints! Use only original spare parts listed in this manual. These are lead-free parts! On the website www.atyourservice.ce.philips.com you can find more information on: – Aspects of lead-free technology. – BGA (de-)soldering, heating-profiles of BGAs used in Philips sets, and others
Subject Panel No. Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . .2 Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Clock Controls Activate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Specific Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Start or Stop Time . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Closed Caption Control . . . . . . . . . .31 Demo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Factory Service Locations . . . . .36-37 Format Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . .15 QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-34 Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Remote Button Descriptions . . . .9-10 Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . .16 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
After using the AutoProgram Control, press the CH + and – buttons to scroll through all the channels stored in the television’s memory.
HELPFUL HINT
751 Round Coaxial Cable
1
AV2 in
S-VIDEO
ANT 75‰
R
AUDIO
Pr
Pb
Y
AV1 in
AV2 in
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Monitor out
VIDEO L/Mono
S-VIDEO
2
75 ⍀
Back of TV
75 ⍀
Jack Panel Back of TV
Connect the Cable TV cable or Direct Cable Connection Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm adapter) to the 751 plug on the TV. Cable signal If you have a Cable Converter coming from Cable Company Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug from the Converter to the 751 plug on the TV.
2
Round Cable 751
Pr
Pb
Y
AV1 in
2
Back of TV
R
AUDIO
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Monitor out
VIDEO L/Mono
L04U AA
Twin Lead Wire
1
1 300 to 751 Adapter
(Outdoor or Indoor)
If your Cable TV signal or Antenna signal is a round cable (75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV. If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need to attach the antenna wires to the screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter. If you have a Cable Converter Box: Connect the Cable TV signal to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on the Converter.
ANT 75‰
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
Antenna Connection our home’s signal input might come from a single (75 ohm) round cable, a Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either case the connecCombination tion to the TV is very easy. VHF/UHF Antenna
1 Y
3.
Active Control, AutoPicture, AutoSound, and Incredible Surround are trademarks of Philips Consumer Electronics Company. Copyright 2001 Philips Consumer Electronics.*Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Subject Panel No. Active Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Antenna/Cable Basic Connection . . .1 Audio/Video Connections AV1 Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Component Video Input Jacks . . . .7 Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Monitor Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . .8 S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Side AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . .5 AutoLock™ Controls Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . .27 Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . .30 TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . .24 Automatically Programming TV . .13 AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . .32 AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . .32 Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . .3 Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . .3
PANEL INDEX
EN 6 Directions for Use
3. Directions for Use
Cable Signal IN from the Cable Company
6
4 5
1 2 3
TO TV/VCR
TO TV/VCR
CABLE IN
CABLE IN
IR
IR
USB
USB
R
AUDIO
L/Mono
VIDEO
L
SPDIF
IN
Pr
Pb
Y
AV1 in
L
Y
SPDIF
Y
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO
OPTICAL SPDIF
ANT 75‰
Monitor out
R
AUDIO
Pr
Pb
Y
AV1 in
AV2 in
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Monitor out
VIDEO
L/Mono
Pr
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
OPTICAL SPDIF
VIDEO
R
AUDIO
L/Mono
AV1 in
AV2 in
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Pr
Pb
Y
S-VIDEO
Point the remote control toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating the TV with the remote.
Press the CHANNEL UP + or DOWN – button to select TV channels.
Pressing both buttons at the same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu, use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
Press the VOLUME + button to increase the sound level, or the VOLUME – button to lower the sound level.
Note: You can also press any button on the front of the TV to turn the TV ON.
o load the supplied batteries into the remote:
3. Reattach the battery lid.
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in the remote. Be sure the (+) and (-) ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the remote.
T
REMOTE CONTROL
3 4
2
1 POWER
–
CHANNEL
–
2 3
+
Remote Sensor - Sensor for activating remote control commands when the remote is used to control the TV.
VOLUME
2 3
Battery Lid
2-AA Batteries
Battery Compartment
Back of Remote
Example of Models 27PT5441/37 and 32PT5441/37
1
Standby Light Indicator - Red light will show when in the Standby Mode. Press the Power button to return the TV to it’s active state.
1
+
Example of Models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the POWER button to turn the TV ON.
3
L04U AA
ANT 75‰
Pr
VIDEO OUT
AV2 in
Pb
IN
Pb
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Monitor out
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
R
TV PASSCARD
DVD-D OUT
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
R
TV PASSCARD
DVD-D OUT
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs): This connection will be mono. 1 2 Connect the Cable Company supplied cable to the signal IN(put) plug on the back of the Cable Box. Jack Panel Back of Cable Box Using a separate round coaxial cable, connect one end to the 3 75 ⍀ OUT(put) (TO TV) plug on the back of the Cable Box. Connect the other end of the round coaxial cable to the 751 input on the back of the television. Screw it down finger tight. Round 751 Jack Panel Back of TV NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTCoaxial Cable PUT CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the cable box to CH 3 or 4. Tune the TV to the same channel and change channels at the cable box. In Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): some cases, the cable box will automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4, change channels until the picture 24 Cable Signal IN appears. from the Cable Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Company Outputs): 4 Cable Box with A/V Outputs This connection will supply Stereo sound. Connect the Cable Company supplied cable to the cable signal IN(put) plug on the back of the Cable Box. Audio Cables Video Cable Using a RCA type Video Cable, L (White) & R (Red) (Yellow) connect one end of the cable to the Video (or ANT, your cable 5 box may be labeled differently) Out jack on the cable box and the other end to the AV1 Video 6 Input on the TV. Connect one end of the Audio Left and Right Cable to the left and right Audio Out L & R Jack Panel Back of TV jacks on the cable box. Connect the other end to the AV1 Audio L & R Input jacks on the TV. NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV remote control to tune to the AV1 channel for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change channels at the cable box, not the television.
tion.
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
f your cable signal uses a cable Isteps box or decoder, follow the easy below to complete the connec-
2
Directions for Use 3. EN 7
HELPFUL HINT
With either of the VCRs (or accessory devices) ON and a prerecorded tape (CD, DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY button to view the tape on the television.
Audio and video cables are not supplied with the TV, but are available from Philips or electronics retailers.
5 6 7
S-VIDEO OUT
Pr
VIDEO OUT
7
S-VIDEO OUT
R L AUDIO OUT
7
VIDEO OUT
VCR Two (or accessory device) (Equipped with Video and Audio Output Jacks)
5
4
ANT/CABLE OUT
AV2 Connection
5
1
2
3
Back of VCR
R L AUDIO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
VCR One (or accessory device) (Equipped with Audio and Video Output Jacks)
ANT/CABLE OUT
2
Y
Pb
AV2 in
4
Audio In (Red and White)
Video In (Yellow)
S-VIDEO
3
5
3 4
2
1
Press the PLAY 䊳 button on the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
Press the AV button on the remote control to tune the TV to the side input jacks. “Front” will appear on the TV screen.
Turn the TV and the accessory device ON.
For Mono Devices: Connect one end of the audio cable from the Audio Out jack on the device to the Audio In (white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the audio cable (red and white) from the Audio Left and Right Outputs on the Camera to the Audio In (white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
Connect the video (yellow) cable from the Video output on the Camera (or accessory device) to the Video (yellow) Input located on the SIDE of the TV.
3 5
Audio Cables
Optional Headphones
1 2
VOL
4
Jack Panel of Accessory Device
S-VIDEO
R
AUDIO
L
VIDEO
Side Jack panel of TV
AUDIO VIDEO LEFT RIGHT
Video Cable
3
Front
L04U AA
4
1 2 3
AV1 Connection
R
AUDIO
L/Mono
AV1 in
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
udio and Video Side Inputs are available for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote control to tune these inputs.
5 A
3.
VIDEO
Monitor out
1
Back of TV
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for direct picture and sound connections between the TV and a VCR (or similar device) that has audio/video output jacks. Both the AV1 and AV2 Input Jack connections are shown on this page, but either one can be connected alone. Follow the easy steps below to connect your accessory device to the AV1 and AV2 IN Jacks located on the back of the TV. Connect the VIDEO (yellow) cable to the VIDEO AV1 IN (or AV2 IN) jack on the back of the TV. Connect the AUDIO (red and white) cables to the AUDIO (left and right) AV1 IN (or AV2 in) jacks on the rear of the TV. Connect the VIDEO (yellow) cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the back of the VCR (either one or two) or accessory device being used. Connect the AUDIO (red and white) cables to the AUDIO (left and right) OUT jacks on the rear of the VCR (either one or two) or accessory device being used. Turn the VCR (either one or two) or accessory device and the TV ON. Press the AV button to set the TV to its AV1or AV2 channel.
T
4
EN 8 Directions for Use
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
2
3 4
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and press the PLAY 䊳 button.
2 3
4
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO OUT
VOL
5
1
S-Video Cable
ANT/CABLE OUT
VCR or External Accessory Device (with S-Video Output)
L R AUDIO OUT
Audio Cables (Red & White)
AV2 in
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Pr
Pb
Y
AV1 in
S-VIDEO
1
HELPFUL HINT The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player or accessory digital source equipment used (for example, Y, Pb, Pr; Y, B-Y, R-Y; Y, Cr, Cb). Although abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital accessory owner’s manual for definitions and connection details.
5
3 4
2
1
back of digital signal source material, such as with DVD players. The color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the luminance (Y) signal are connected and received separately, which allows for improved color bandwidth information (not possible when using composite video or SVideo connections). Connect the Component (Y, Pb, Pr) Video OUT jacks from the DVD player (or similar device) to the (Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV. When using the Component Video Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack. Connect the red and white AUDIO CABLES to the Audio (left and right) output jacks on the rear of the accessory device to the Audio (L and R) AV1 in Input Jacks on the TV. Turn the TV and the DVD (or digital accessory device) ON. Press the AV button or the CH + or CH – buttons to scroll the available channels until CVI appears in the upper left corner of the TV screen. Insert a DVD disc into the DVD player and press the PLAY 䊳 button on the DVD Player. Component Video Cables (Green, Blue, Red)
1
Pr
Pb OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
VOL
L
5
OUT
R
2
AUDIO
AV2 in
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Pr
Pb
Y
AV1 in
Accessory Device Equipped with Component Video Outputs
COMP VIDEO
4
3
Y
R
AUDIO
L/Mono
VIDEO
Monitor out
Back of TV
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables (Red & White)
The CVI connection will be dominate over the AV1 in Video Input. When a Component Video Device is connected as described, it is best not to have a video signal connected to the AV1 in Video Input jack.
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
omponent Video inputs provide C for the highest possible color and picture resolution in the play-
7
L04U AA
5
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (S-Video) OUT jack on the back of the VCR. Then connect the other ends of the AUDIO (red and white) CABLES to the AUDIO (left and right) OUT jacks on the rear of the VCR.
Press the AV button or the CH + or CH – buttons on the remote to scroll the channels until SVHS appears in the upper left corner of the TV screen.
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the SVIDEO jack on the back of the TV. Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and white) CABLES to the AV1 in AUDIO L and R (left and right) jacks on the rear of the TV.
1
NOTE: The accessory device must have an S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to complete the connection on this page.
R
AUDIO
L/Mono
VIDEO
Monitor out
2
Back of TV
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
6 T
Directions for Use 3. EN 9
MONITOR OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
5
4
3
5
IN
OUT
VIDEO
ANTENNA IN
ANTENNA OUT
3
2
IN
L AUDIO
OUT
R
AUDIO
L/Mono
VIDEO
R
Pr
Pb
Y
AV1 in
L
AV2 in
PHONO INPUT
AUX/TV INPUT
R
4
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Monitor out
Pr
Pb
IN
R AUDIO
OUT
L
S-VIDEO
AV2 in
IN
ANTENNA IN
ANTENNA OUT
OUT
VIDEO
1
S-VIDEO
SLEEP Button Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
MUTE Button Press the mute button to eliminate the sound being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level. pressing this button for 3-4 seconds will activate the Demo Mode. (See panel 30 for more details.)
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s sound level. Press the VOL – button to decrease the TV’s sound level.
CC Button Press to activate the Closed Captioning options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button will scroll the available options on the TV screen.
MENU Button Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can be used to back out of the on-screen menu until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
AUTO SOUND Button Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from Personal (how you set the Sound Menu options), Voice (for programming with speaking only), Music (for musical type programs such as concerts), or Theatre (used when watching movies).
SMILEY Button Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf” lists. Works with all colored buttons.
AV Button Press to select an accessory signal input from the front AV Inputs.
VOL
L04U AA
2
R
AUDIO
L/Mono
Y
AV1 in
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Monitor out
VIDEO
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
QUADRASURF Buttons (Red, Green, Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store and surf up to 10 channels you choose for each colored button.
9
3.
1
T
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION: he Audio/Video (Monitor) Output jacks are great for recording with a VCR or used to connect an external audio system for better sound reproduction. AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION: Connect one end of the R(ight) and L(eft) AUDIO Back of TV (Monitor Out) jacks on the TV to the R and L audio input jacks Audio Cables on your amplifier or sound sys(Red and White) tem. Set the audio system’s volume to a normal listening level. Turn the TV and audio system ON. To adjust the volume on the audio system, you will need to change the volume at the external audio system, not the television. SECOND VCR CONNECTION: NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for SECOND VCR CONNECTION: the proper hookup of the first VCR. Back of TV Follow the instructions on how to tune to the AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape. The following steps allow you to connect a second VCR to record the program while your watching it. Connect one end of the yellow Video Audio Video Cable to the Monitor Cable Cables Out VIDEO plug. Connect the other end to the VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR. Connect one end of the red and white Audio cable from the Monitor Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the VCR. 1st VCR Turn the Second VCR ON, (refer to panel 4 for insert a VHS tape and it’s proper connection) 2nd VCR with Audio and ready to record what’s being Video Input Jacks viewed on the TV screen.
8
EN 10 Directions for Use
VOL
10
When finished, press the STATUS/EXIT button to remove the menu from the TV’s screen.
6
The Language control only makes the TV’s on-screen Menu items appear in English, Spanish, or French text. It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed Caption (CC) TV shows.
HELPFUL HINT
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button repeatedly to select English, Francais (French), or Español (Spanish).
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the Install features until the word Language is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Install menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll though the on-screen menu until the word Install is highlighted.
Press the MENU button on the remote control to show the on-screen menu.
5
3 4
1 2 2 4
1 VOL
Main Picture Sound Features Install
3 5
2 4 6
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
Installation Langue Mode synt. Progr. auto. diter progr.
OR
Instalar Idioma Sinton a Auto Programa Editar Canal
OR
Install Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
Main Picture Sound Features Install
Fran ais
Espa ol
English
Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV owners an onscreen Language option is present. With the Language control you can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be shown in English, French, or Spanish.
11 F
L04U AA
CLOCK: Press to display the “Timer” menu. Within this menu, set the time, set the TV to tune to a certain channel at a certain time once or daily.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels or to enter certain values within the onscreen menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire. The TV will pause for a second or two before changing to the chosen channel.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons Press to select channels in ascending or descending order.
3, 4, 1, and 2 Buttons Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within the on-screen menu. Also use the CURSOR 3 or CURSOR 4 to activate or deactivate the EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
STATUS/EXIT Button Press to display the current channel number. If the on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
AUTO PICTURE Button Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from Personal (how you set the Picture Menu Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports (for any sporting event), Weak Signal (used when the signal being received is not great), or Multimedia (for video games).
FROWNIE Button Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra Surf” lists for the colored buttons. Works with all colored buttons.
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel) Press to toggle between the last viewed channel and the channel presently being viewed.
POWER Button Press to turn the TV on or off.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
Directions for Use 3. EN 11
5 6
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the on-screen menu from the TV’s screen.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT button to select either Antenna, Cable, or Auto mode.
Press CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll the Install features until the words Tuner Mode is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT button to display the Install menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Install is highlighted.
1 2 4
HELPFUL HINTS
Install Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
OR
Install Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
OR
English Auto
English Cable
English Antenna
Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available. When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available. When AUTO is selected, the TV will automatically set itself to the correct mode based on the type of signal it detects when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated.
VOL
6 3
Install Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
Main Picture Sound Features Install
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to start the Auto Program scanning of channels. Auto Programming will store all available channels in the TV’s memory then tune to the lowest available channel when done. When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the menu from the TV’s screen.
6
Press CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll the Install features until the words Auto Program are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Install menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Install is highlighted.
Press the MENU button on the remote to show the onscreen menu.
5
3 4
1 2
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
1 2 4
6 3 5
Auto Program Channel
Auto Program Channel
Auto Program Channel
Install Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
Main Picture Sound Features Install
HELPFUL HINTS
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
14
13
12
Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available. When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available. When AUTO is selected, the TV will automatically set itself to the correct mode based on the type of signal it detects when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated.
VOL
2 4
Main Picture Sound Features Install
L04U AA
3 4
1 2
2 4
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
our TV can automatically set itself for local area (or Cable TV) channels. This makes it easy for you to select only the TV stations in your area when the CHANNEL (+), (–) buttons are pressed.
13 Y
3.
Press the MENU button on the remote to show the onscreen menu.
CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s important for the TV to know what type of signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna). In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
Main Picture Sound Features Install
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
he TUNER MODE control T allows you to change the TV’s input signal to either ANTENNA,
12
EN 12 Directions for Use
When finished, press the STATUS/EXIT button to remove the menu from the screen.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT 2 to toggle between On or Off. If ON is selected the channels is skipped when scrolling channels with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF is selected the channels is not skipped when scrolling channels with the CH+ or CH- buttons.
Using the CURSOR DOWN 4 button, scroll the menu to highlight the word SKIPPED.
With the Channel Edit options displayed, and Channel highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add (skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON) from the TV’s memory. You can also use the NUMBERED buttons to go directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or, you can also use the CH+ or CH- to quickly scan through the channels that have not been skipped.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Channel Edit options.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the Install features until the words Channel Edit are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Install menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll though the on-screen menu until the word Install is highlighted.
1 6 2 4 7 6 VOL
On
Off
Channel Edit Channel Skipped
12
Channel Skipped
Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
Channel Edit Channel Skipped
Channel Edit Channel Skipped
Install Language Tuner Mode Auto Program Channel Edit
Main Picture Sound Features Install
An “X” appearing in front of any channel will indicate that channel has skip on. When the CH + or CH - buttons are used, those channels will be skipped.
HELPFUL HINTS
2 4 9 3 5 8 6 6 8
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
DNR Control - Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to turn DNR On or Off. Dynamic Noise Reduction helps to eliminate “noise” from the picture. Contrast + Control - Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to toggle the control On or OFF. The Contrast + control helps to “sharpen” the picture quality. The black portions of the picture become richer in darkness and the whites become brighter.
8
Color Temp Control - Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to select Normal, Cool, or Warm picture preferences. (Normal will keep the whites, white; Cool will make the whites, bluish; and Warm will make the whites, reddish.)
Tint Control - Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to obtain natural skin tones.
Sharpness Control - CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to improve detail in the picture.
Picture Control - Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons until lightest parts of the picture show good detail.
Color Control - Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to add or eliminate color.
7
2 3 4 5 6
1
Brightness Control - Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons until the darkest parts of the picture are as bright as you prefer.
Contrast +
DNR
Color Temp.
Tint
Sharpness
Off
On
Off
On
Normal Warm or Cool
0
50
50
Picture
65 50
50
Color
Brightness
Picture Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint Color Temp.
PICTURE MENU CONTROLS
o adjust your TV picture controls, select a channel and use the T Picture Menu Controls listed below:
15
L04U AA
9
7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6
Press the MENU button on the remote control to show the onscreen menu.
Main Picture Sound Features Install
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to C ADD or DELETE channels from the list of channels stored in the TV’s memory.
14
Directions for Use 3. EN 13
Bass: Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to adjust the control. The control will enhance the low frequency sounds.
2
AVL: (Auto Volume Leveler) Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to turn the control On or Off. When On, AVL will level out the sound being heard when sudden changes in volume occur during commercial breaks or channel changes.
Incr. Surround: Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to select between Dolby Virtual or Stereo settings (If Stereo), or select Spatial or Mono (If Mono).
SAP: Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to toggle this control to On or Off. SAP is short for Secondary Audio Programming and is sent as a third audio channel, a SAP signal can be heard apart from the current TV program sound.Note: If SAP is not present on a selected show No SAP will appear on the screen.
Sound: Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to select between Stereo or Mono settings. Note: If Stereo is not present on a selected show and the TV is placed in the Stereo mode, the sound coming from the TV will remain in the Mono mode.
4
5
6
7
3 L
Sound
Mono or Stereo
On or Off
Dolby Virtual or Stereo
Incr. Surround
SAP
Spatial or Mono
On or Off
Incr. Surround
AVL
R
50
Bass Balance
50
Treble
Treble Bass Balance AVL Incr. Surround More...
1
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to select one of the two options 4:3 or Expand 4:3. 4:3 - Standard format for the TV. Expand 4:3 - Enlarges the picture to fill out the entire screen area, eliminating the “letter box” effect.
mat. This is the format that is shown in movie theaters. when shown on a TV screen, the image will have areas of black on top and bottom of the screen.
VOL
1
1
Expand 4:3
4:3
L04U AA
Balance: Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to adjust the level of sound coming from the left and right speakers.
Treble: Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to adjust the control. The control will enhance the high frequency sounds.
HOW TO USE THE 4:3 EXPAND FORMAT CONTROL
any times while watching M movies from a DVD player the image is shown in “letter box” for-
17
3.
1
Main Picture Sound Features Install
SOUND MENU CONTROLS
o adjust your TV sound, select and T use the Sound Menu Controls listed below:
16
EN 14 Directions for Use
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the on-screen menu from the TV’s screen.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or CURSOR LEFT 1 buttons to change the AM or PM setting.
Enter the correct time by using the Numbered buttons.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Timer menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Features menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Features is highlighted. VOL
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
HELPFUL HINTS
3 4 6
7
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Main Picture Sound Features Install
10:35 PM
10:35 AM
10:-- AM
--:-- AM
Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
Remember, be sure to press “0” and then the hour number for single digit entries. You can get to the Clock setting by pressing the Clock button on the remote control. The TV’s clock settings may be lost when the TV is unplugged or when AC power to the set is interrupted.
1 6 2 5
2
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the on-screen menu from the TV’s screen.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or CURSOR LEFT 1 buttons to change the AM or PM setting.
Enter the correct time by using the Numbered buttons.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the Timer menu until Start Time or Stop Time is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Timer menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Features menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Features is highlighted.
Press the MENU button on the remote to show the onscreen menu.
NOTE: Active Control will only appear in the menu of models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37.
NOTE: The Activate Control must be set to Once or Daily for the television to turn On or Off at the specified time. See panel 21 for more details.
6 7 8
3 4 5
1 2
the same time everyday. Follow the steps below to set the Start and Stop Time.
1 7 2 5 6
3 4 7
2 5 8
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
10:-- AM
Timer Time Start Time 10:35 PM Stop Time Channel Activate Display Timer Time Start Time Stop Time 10:35 PM Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time 10:35 AM Stop Time Channel Activate Display Timer Time Start Time Stop Time 10:35 AM Channel Activate Display
--:-- AM
Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display Timer
Main Picture Sound Features Install
HELPFUL HINTS Remember, be sure to press “0” and then the hour number for single digit entries. You can get to the Clock setting by pressing the Clock button on the remote control. The TV’s clock settings may be lost when the TV is unplugged or when AC power to the set is interrupted.
VOL
Main Picture Sound Features Install
SETTING TV TO TURN ON OR OFF USING START OR STOP CONTROLS
ou can set your TV to turn itself on or off. You can set the TV to Y turn itself On or Off once or at
19
L04U AA
NOTE: Active Control will only appear in the menu of models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37.
3 4 5 6 7
1 2
Press the MENU button on the remote to show the onscreen menu.
on the screen when the STATUS/EXIT button is pressed or if the Timer Display control is turned On.
Main Picture Sound Features Install
TV CLOCK USING THE TIMER CONTROL
our television comes with an on-screen clock. During norY mal operation, the clock appears
ETTING THE
18 S
Directions for Use 3. EN 15
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display 2
7
NOTE: Active Control will only appear in the menu of models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37.
3 4 6 6
10:-- AM
Remember, be sure to press “0” and then the hour number for single digit entries. You can get to the Clock setting by pressing the Clock button on the remote control. The TV’s clock settings may be lost when the TV is unplugged or when AC power to the set is interrupted.
VOL
7
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
HELPFUL HINTS
1 6 2 5 6
2 5
Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the on-screen menu from the TV’s screen.
NOTE: The Activate Control must be set to Once or Daily for this Channel control to take effect.
Press the Numbered buttons to enter the desired start-up channel. Or, press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or CURSOR LEFT 1 or the CH+ or CHbuttons repeatedly to enter the start-up channel you want.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the Timer menu until Channel is highlighted.
With Timer selected, press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Timer menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Features menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Features is highlighted.
Main Picture Sound Features Install
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the on-screen menu from the TV’s screen.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or CURSOR LEFT 1 buttons repeatedly to select Once, Daily, or Off.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or CURSOR DOWN 4 buttons to highlight the Activate Control.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Timer menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Timer is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Features menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Features is highlighted.
Press the MENU button on the remote to show the on-screen menu.
NOTE: Active Control will only appear in the menu of models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37.
5 6 7 8
3 4
1 2
come on Once or Daily, or turned Off through the Activate control.
1 7 2 4 6
2 4 6
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
3 5 7
8
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Main Picture Sound Features Install
OR
OR
Once
Daily
Off
10:-- AM
Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
HELPFUL HINTS Remember, before setting the Timer controls, the TV’s clock must be set to the correct time, see panel 18 for details. The TV’s clock settings may be lost when the TV is unplugged or when AC power to the set is interrupted. You can get to the Clock setting by pressing the Clock button on the remote control.
VOL
Main Picture Sound Features Install
L04U AA
3 4 5 6
1 2
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
ACTIVATE CONTROL
fter you have set the Time, Start A Time, Stop Time, and Start Channel, the timer must be set to
21
3.
Press the MENU button on the remote to show the onscreen menu.
Follow these steps to select the channel.
Main Picture Sound Features Install
TV TO STARTUP ON A SPECIFIC CHANNEL
ou can select a specific channel Y that the television will tune to when the timer turns the set On.
ETTING
20 S
EN 16 Directions for Use
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or CURSOR LEFT 1 buttons repeatedly to select On or Off.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the on-screen menu from the TV’s screen.
8
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or CURSOR DOWN 4 buttons to highlight the Display Control.
With Timer highlighted, press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Timer menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Timer is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Features menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Features is highlighted.
Press the MENU button on the remote to show the onscreen menu.
7
6
5
3 4
1 2
1 7 2 4 6 VOL
Main Picture Sound Features Install
3 5 7
8
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Timer Time Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
Main Picture Sound Features Install
OR
Off
On
10:-- AM
Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
NOTE: Active Control will only appear in the menu of models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37.
2 4 6
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
VIEW TIME USING THE DISPLAY CONTROL
fter the TV’s clock has been set, you can use your TV as a clock. The Display control allows you to permanently display the time in the upper right corner of the screen.
A
OW TO
22 H
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or CURSOR LEFT 1 buttons to toggle the Active Control On or Off. When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the on-screen menu from the TV’s screen.
6
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to repeatedly until Active Control is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Features menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through the on-screen menu until the word Features is highlighted.
5
3 4
1 2
Press the MENU button on the remote to show the onscreen menu.
1 5 2 4 VOL
Main Picture Sound Features Install
3 5
6
Features Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
OR
Features Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
Main Picture Sound Features Install
Off
On
Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
NOTE: Active Control will only appear in the menu of models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37.
2 4
Brightness Color Picture Sharpness Tint More...
ACTIVE CONTROL OPTIONS
he Active Control monitors and adjusts incoming video signals to help provide the best picture quality. When you choose to turn the Active Control On, the picture sharpness and noise reduction are controlled automatically. Active Control adjusts these picture settings continuously and automatically. NOTE: Active Control is only available in models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37.
T
23
Directions for Use L04U AA 3. EN 17
TV-MA -- This program is specifically designed to be viewed by adults and therefore may be unsuitable for children under 17. This type of programming contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual situations (S), or crude indecent language (L).
TV-14 -- This program contains some material that many parents would find unsuitable for children under 14 years of age. This type of programming contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or intensely suggestive dialogue (D).
7
Access Code ----
1 VOL
2 4
Confirm Code XXXX
2 4
OffStop Time Channel Activate Display
New Code ----
Access Code XXXX
Timer Start Time Stop Time Channel Activate Display
3 5 6 7
AutoLock Block Channel Setup Code Clear All Block All Movie Rating TV Rating
Features Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
Features Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
Features Timer Rotation AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
NOTE: Active Control will only appear in the menu of models 27PT6441/37 and 27PT6442/37.
Features Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
Features Timer Access Code AutoLock XXXX Active Control Incorrect Digi. Pic. Demo
Features Timer AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
Timer Rotation AutoLock Active Control Digi. Pic. Demo
L04U AA
TV RATINGS TV-Y -- Designed for a very young audience, including children ages 2-6. TV-Y7 -- It may be appropriate for children age 7 and above who have acquired the development skills needed to distinguish between make-believe and reality. TV-G -- Suitable for most audiences, this type of programming contains little or no violence, no strong language, and little or no sexual dialogue or situations. TV-PG -- This program contains material that parents may find unsuitable for younger children. Could contain Moderate violence (V), some sexual situations (S), infrequent coarse language (L), or some suggestive dialogue (D).
1 2 3 4 5 6
the rating terms for certain programming. First, let’s start by learning how to set a personal access code: Press the MENU button on the remote to display the onscreen menu. Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons until the word Features is highlighted. Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Features menu options. Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons until the words Auto Lock™ are highlighted. Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button. The screen will read, “Access Code - - - - .” Using the NUMBERED buttons, enter 0, 7, 1, 1. “XXXX” appears on the Access Code screen as you press the numbered buttons. “Incorrect Code” will appear on the screen, and you will need to enter 0, 7, 1, 1 again. The screen will ask you to enter a “New Code.” Enter a “new” 4 digit code using the NUMBERED buttons. The screen will then ask you to CONFIRM the code you just entered. Enter your new code again. “XXXX” will appear when you enter your new code and then display the AutoLock™ menu options. Proceed to the next panel to learn more...
Main Picture Sound Features Install
SETTING UP AN ACCESS CODE
ver the next few panels you’ll O learn how to block channels and get a better understanding of
25
3.
MOVIE RATINGS G: General Audience - All ages admitted. Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages. PG: Parental Guidance Suggested This programming contains material that parents may find unsuitable for younger children. PG-13: Parents Strongly Cautioned This programming contains material that parents may find unsuitable for children under the age of 13.
gram providers, that contain program content advisories. When programmed by the viewer, a TV with AutoLock™ can respond to the content advisories and block program content that may be found objectionable (such as offensive language, violence, sexual situations, etc.). This is a great feature to censor the type of viewing children may watch. AutoLock™ offers various BLOCKING controls from which to choose: Access Code - An Access Code must be set to prevent children from unblocking questionable or censored programming set by their parents. Channel Block - After an access code has been programmed, you can block individual channels including the A/V inputs. Clear All - Allows you clear all channels being blocked from your viewing set with the Channel Block Control. Block All - Allows you to block ALL channels and A/V inputs at one time. Movie Ratings - Certain blocking options exist which will block programming based on ratings patterned by the Motion Pictures Association of America. TV Ratings - Just like the Movie Ratings, programs can be blocked from viewing using standard TV ratings set by TV broadcasters.
MOVIE RATINGS Continued R: Restricted - This is programming is specifically designed for adults. Anyone under the age of 17 should only view this programming with an accompanying parent or adult guardian. NC-17: No one under the age of 17 will be admitted. - This type of programming should be viewed by adults only. X: Adults Only - This type of programming contains one or more of the following: very graphic violence, very graphic and explicit or indecent sexual acts, very coarse and intensely suggestive language.
UNDERSTANDING AUTOLOCK CONTROLS
he AutoLock™ feature is an integrated circuit that receives and processes T data sent by broadcasters, or other pro-
24
EN 18 Directions for Use
Press the CH + or CH – button to select other channels you wish to block. Repeat steps 2-3 to block the new channel.
When finished, press the STATUS/EXIT button to remove the menu from the screen.
3
4
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and can be used to enter and create a new access code.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to turn blocking ON or OFF for that channel. When ON is selected the channel will be blocked.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons until the words Block Channel are highlighted.
2
1
VOL
1
Channel 12 Blocked By AutoLock Channel Blocking Access Code ----
Block Channel
AutoLock Block Channel Setup Code Clear All Block All Movie Rating TV Rating
BLOCK CHANNELS
fter your personal access code has been set (see previous page), you are now ready to select the channels or the A/V Inputs you want to block out or censor. Once you’ve entered your access code and the AutoLock™ features are displayed on the screen:
26 A
Enter your Access Code to view a tuned channel that is blocked with Block Channel.
2 3
1 4
On
OffStop Time Channel Activate Display
When finished, press the STATUS/EXIT button to remove the menu from the screen.
If Block All is selected, press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to turn the control On or Off. When On is selected, ALL available channels will be blocked from viewing.
If Clear All is selected, press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to clear all blocked channels. All channels will be viewable.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to select either Clear All or Block All.
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and can be used to enter and create a new access code.
3
2
1
VOL
1
Block All
AutoLock Block Channel Setup Code Clear All Block All Movie Rating TV Rating
Clear All
AutoLock Block Channel Setup Code Clear All Block All Movie Rating TV Rating
2
1 3
On
Off
Cleared
Clear ?Stop Time Channel Activate Display
BLOCK/CLEAR ALL CHANNELS AT THE SAME TIME
fter blocking specific channels there may come a time when you want to block or clear all the channels at the same time. Once you’ve entered your access code and the AutoLock™ features are displayed on the screen:
27 A
Directions for Use L04U AA 3. EN 19
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and can be used to enter and create a new access code.
When a rating level is chosen to be blocked, any higher level rating will also be blocked from viewing. (i.e.: If “R” is selected to be blocked, NC-17 and X will automatically be blocked.)
4
Use the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button on the remote to turn the rating option On or Off.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to highlight any of the Movie Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned On (which will allow blocking) or Off (which will allow viewing).
G
1 3 VOL
Movie Rating G PG PG-13 R NC-17 X
1 3
Off
2 4
On
TV-G, TV-PG, TV-14, or TVMA).
6
5
4
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to highlight any of the TV Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned On (which will allow blocking) or Off (which will allow viewing). NOTE: Some TV RATING options also have sub-ratings. The ratings of TV-Y7, TV-PG, TV-14, TV-MA can be customized to block V (violence), FV (fantasy violence), S (sexual situations), L (coarse language), or D (suggestive dialogue). Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button on the remote to turn the TV-Y or TV-G rating On or Off. Or, press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to enter the sub-menus for the TV-Y7, TVPG, TV-14 or TV-MA ratings. If the TV-Y7, TV-PG, TV-14 or TV-MA sub-menu is accessed, press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to select one of the options (Block All, V, S, L, D, or FV). Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button on the remote to turn the option ON or OFF.
3
1 2
Block All, V, S, L TV-MA
VOL
Block All, V, S, L, D TV-14
2 4 6
Block All, V, S, L, D TV-PG
1 3 5
Off
1 3 5
On Block All, FV
Off
TV-G
TV-Y7
TV-Y
TV Rating TV-Y TV-Y7 TV-G TV-PG TV-14 TV-MA
TV RATINGS
L04U AA
3
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Movie Rating options (G, PG, PG-13, R, NC17, or X).
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to highlight the words Movie Rating.
G PG PG-13 R NC-17 X
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the TV Industry ratings. Once you’ve entered your access code and the AutoLock™ features are displayed on the screen: Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to highlight the words TV Rating. Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the TV Rating options (TV-Y, TV-Y7,
T
29
3.
1 2
AutoLock Block Channel Setup Code Clear All Block All Movie Rating TV Rating
MOVIE RATINGS
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the Movie Industry ratings. Once you’ve entered your access code and the AutoLock™ features are displayed on the screen:
T
28
EN 20 Directions for Use
Note: You can also turn the Digital Picture Demo On or Off by using on-screen menu.
1
Press the MUTE button on the remote approximately 3-4 seconds. The split screen demo appears. After 20 seconds, the TV will automatically reurn to normal operation.
sharper image with more natural motion.
VOL
1
DEMO MODE
When highlighted, each feature can be turned On or Off using the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or the CURSOR LEFT 1 buttons on the remote.
ith Demo Mode On, a split screen demo W will be shown on the screen. The Demo Mode will show the right side wih show a
3 4
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons to highlight the desired feature.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to display the Blocking Options (Blocking, Unrated, or No Rating) menu. Blocking: Might be called the “master switch” for AutoLock™. When On, ALL blocking/censoring will take place. When Off, ALL blocking is disabled. Unrated: ALL unrated programs based on the Movie Ratings or Parental (TV) Guidelines can be blocked if this feature is set to On and the Blocking feature is set to OFF. No Rating: ALL programming with NO content advisory data can be blocked if set to On and the Blocking feature is set to OFF.
1 2
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4 buttons until the words Block Options are highlighted.
OFF. Once you’ve entered your access code and the AutoLock™ features are displayed on the screen:
1 3 VOL
On
No Rating
4
On
Unrated
2 4
Digi. Pic. Demo
1 3
On
Blocking
AutoLock Setup Code Clear All Block All Movie Rating TV Rating Block Options
BLOCKING OPTIONS
utoLock™ offers the viewer other blocking features as well. With these Blocking A Options, the censoring can be turned ON or
30
1 2 VOL
Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to pick the amount of time (15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes) before the TV will turn itself off.
1 2
NOTE: An on-screen count down will appear during the last minute before the TV shuts itself off. If any button is pressed during the last minute of the countdown, the Sleeptimer setting will be cancelled.
Press the SLEEP button on the remote control and the SLEEP timer display will appear on the screen.
1 2
VOL
SLEEPTIMER
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the menu from the TV’s screen.
Press the CC button repeatedly to choose from the four Closed Caption options (CC Off, CC1, CC2, CC Mute).
our TV can be set to automatically turn itself off at a given amount of time.
Y
3
1 2
Press the CC button on the remote to display the current Closed Caption setting.
Sleep 15
CC Off
CLOSED CAPTIONING
losed Captioning (CC) allows you to read the voice content of television programs on the TV screen. Designed to help the hearing impaired, this feature uses onscreen “text boxes” to show dialogue and conversations while the TV program is in progress.
31 C
Sleep off
L04U AA
Sleep 240
Sleep 180
Sleep 120
Sleep 90
Sleep 60
Sleep 45
Sleep 30
Sleep 15
3
CC Mute
CC2
CC1
CC Off
Directions for Use 3. EN 21
2
Press the AUTO SOUND button repeatedly to toggle between the four settings. (Personal, Theatre, Music, or Voice)
1
2
NOTE: The way you choose to set the Sound Menu Controls will become your Personal setting.
Press the AUTO SOUND button on the remote control. The current Auto Sound setting will appear in the middle of the screen.
he Auto Sound feature allows the listener to select between four different factory set sound options.
T
1 2
1 2 VOL
Personal
AUTO SOUND
VOL
Sports
Voice - Preset sound options for programming where heavy dialogue is present.
Music- Preset sound options for musical programming where there is little dialogue. Dynamic Ultra Bass is included in this option.
Theatre - Preset sound options for watching movies. Dynamic Ultra Bass is included in this option.
Voice
Music
Theatre
Movies - Preset picture options for watching Video Tapes, or DVDs. Sports - Preset picture options for watching sporting events. Weak Signal - Preset picture options for watching programs where the reception is not at its best. Multimedia - Preset picture options for use with video gaming.
Multimedia
Weak Signal
6
5
4
To remove a channel from one of the SURF lists; Press the COLORED Quadra Surf button until the desired channel appears. The screen will display the channel number with a colored “Smiley” face to indicate the Colored button it relates to. While the “Smiley” face channel indicator is displayed, press the FROWNIE face button. The screen will read, “Remove item? Press .” Press the FROWNIE face button again to confirm your decision to remove the channel from the Surf list. Repeat steps 4-6 to remove other channels from Surf lists.
1 2 3
2
3 4
VOL
12
12
1
5 6
12
Added!
Remove Item? - Press
12
Select List!
L04U AA
NOTE: The way you choose to set the Picture Menu Controls will become your Personal setting.
Press the AUTO PICTURE button repeatedly to select either Personal, Movies, Sports, Weak Signal, or MULTIMEDIA picture settings.
1
Movies
12
QUADRASURF
he QuadraSurf™ control allows you set up four different personal channel Surf lists using the colored buttons (on the remote control), each holding up to ten channels in its quick viewing“list.” Press the CHANNEL (+) or (–) buttons (or the NUMBER buttons) to select a channel to add to one of the SURF lists. Press the SMILEY button on the remote control to ADD the channel to one of the SURF lists. Press the corresponding COLORED (Red, Green, Yellow or Blue) button to add the channel to that button’s Surf list. (Up to ten channels per button can be stored.) Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add additional channels (up to 10) to each of the the SURF lists.
T
33
3.
Press the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control. The current Auto Picture setting will be displayed on the screen.
Personal
AUTO PICTURE
hether you’re watching a movie or a sporting event, your TV has automatic video control settings matched for your current program source or content.
32 W
EN 22 Directions for Use
4 5
3
2
1
41
12
5
56
99
1 2 3 VOL
5
35
12
Remove Item? - Press
39
10
QUADRASURF
he Quadra Surf buttons on your remote control allow you to store up to 10 channels per button (40 total). You can even program the A/V Input channels for each button making them a “source” button. Assuming channels have now been added to the four Quadra Surf lists (the four colored buttons, see the previous page), let’s review how the feature works. Press one of the pre-programmed COLORED buttons on the remote (Red, Green, Yellow or Blue). The screen will display a smiley face with the first programmed channel for that surf list. While the colored “smiley” face still appears on the screen, press the same COLORED button on the remote to tune the second channel programmed for that specific surf list. Repeatedly pressing the same COLORED button while the “smiley” face appears will tune all the programmed channels. Pressing the COLORED button again will return you to the first channel in the list. If the “smiley” face disappears from the screen and the same COLORED button is pressed, the surf channels will be displayed starting with the FIRST programmed channel again. Repeat steps 1-3 for the other three COLORED buttons (Surf lists) if desired. Any time the “smiley” face appears with the channel number, pressing the “frownie” face button will allow you to remove it from the list (see the previous page for more details).
T
34
28
22
18
TROUBLESHOOTING
TV Displays Wrong Channel or No Channels Above 13 • Repeat channel selection. • Add the desired channel numbers (using the CHANNEL EDIT control) into the TV’s memory. • Check to be sure the TUNER MODES are set to the CABLE option and run the Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
Remote Does Not Work • Check the batteries. If necessary, replace them with AA Heavy Duty (Zinc Chloride) or Alkaline batteries. • Clean the remote control and the remote control sensor window on the TV. • Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug into the outlet and push the POWER button again. • Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used. • Check to be sure the TV outlet is not on a wall switch.
No Sound • Check the VOLUME buttons. • Check the MUTE button on the remote control. • If you’re attempting to hook up auxiliary equipment, check the audio jack connections located on the front of the TV.
No Picture • Check antenna connections. Are they properly secured to the TV's ANT 751 plug? • Check the TUNER MODE control for the correct tuner setting. • Try running the Auto Program feature to find all available channels. • Press the AV button on the remote to make sure the correct signal source is selected (FRONT or Current Channel).
No Power • Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug into the outlet and push the POWER button again. • Check that the outlet is not on a wall switch. • Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
35
Directions for Use L04U AA 3. EN 23
EN 24
4.
L04U AA
Mechanical Instructions
4. Mechanical Instructions 1. Disconnect the degaussing coil [1]. 2. Release the two fixation clamps (at the mid left and mid right side of the bracket), and remove the bracket from the bottom tray, by pulling it backwards [2]. 3. Turn the chassis tray 90 degrees counter clockwise. 4. Move the panel bracket somewhat to the left and flip it 90 degrees [3], with the components towards the CRT. 5. Turn the panel bracket with the rear I/O toward the CRT. 6. Place the hook of the tray in the fixation hole of the cabinet bottom [4] and secure it.
Index of this chapter: 1. Set Disassembly 2. Service Position 3. Assy/Panel Removal 4. Set Re-assembly Note: Figures below can deviate slightly from the actual situation, due to different set executions.
4.1
Set Disassembly Warning: Be sure to disconnect the AC power from the set before opening it.
4.1.1
4.3
Assy/Panel Removal
4.3.1
Front Interface Assy/Panel Removal
Rear Cover 1. Remove all fixation screws of the rear cover (do not forget the screws that hold the rear connection panel). 2. Pull the rear cover backwards to remove it.
4.2
Service Position 1 1
Before placing the Mono Carrier in its service position, remove the Front Interface assy/panel (see paragraph “Front Interface Assy/Panel removal”) and the Side AV assy/panel (see paragraph “Side AV Assy/Panel removal”).
2
3 3 E_14480_049.eps 110204
Figure 4-2 Front interface assy/panel removal 1. Remove the complete module from the bottom plate, by pulling the two fixation clamps upward [1], while sliding the module away from the CRT [2]. Note: these clamps are difficult to access. 2. Release the two fixation clamps [3] at the side of the bracket, and lift the panel out of the bracket (it hinges at one side).
1
4.3.2
Side AV Assy/Panel Removal
2
A
E_14480_050.eps 170204
3
Figure 4-3 Side AV assy/panel removal
4
B
E_14480_048.eps 110204
Figure 4-1 Service position Mono Carrier
1. Remove the two fixation screws, and remove the complete Side AV assembly. 2. Release the two fixation clamps, and lift the panel out of the bracket.
Mechanical Instructions 4.3.3
LTI/CTI Interface Panel Removal Remove the LTI/CTI Interface panel from the Mono Carrier, by disconnecting it from connector 1212.
4.3.4
Top Control Assy/Panel Removal 1. Remove the two fixation screws. 2. Push the assy a little bit upwards, and then pull it backwards to release it from the front hinge. 3. Lift the panel from its bracket, while releasing the two fixation clamps. The panel hinges on the other side.
4.3.5
Linearity Assy/Panel Removal
2
1 1
E_14480_051.eps 110204
Figure 4-4 Linearity assy/panel removal 1. Release the two fixation clamps [1] to lift the panel out of the bracket [2].
4.4
Set Re-assembly To re-assemble the whole set, do all processes in reverse order. Note: before you mount the rear cover, perform the following checks: 1. Check whether the AC power cord is mounted correctly in its guiding brackets. 2. Check whether all cables are replaced in their original position
L04U AA
4.
EN 25
EN 26
5.
L04U AA
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
5. Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding 5.2.1
Index of this chapter: 1. Test Points 2. Service Modes 3. Problems and Solving Tips (related to CSM) 4. ComPair 5. Error Codes 6. The Blinking LED Procedure 7. Protections 8. Repair Tips
5.1
Purpose • To create a predefined setting for measurements to be made. • To override software protections. • To start the blinking LED procedure.
Test Points This chassis is equipped with test points in the service printing. In the schematics test points are identified with a rectangle box around Fxxx or Ixxx. These test points are specifically mentioned in the “Test Point Overview” as “half moons” with a dot in the center. Table 5-1 Test point overview Test point
Circuit
F508, F535, F536, F537, F552, F561, F563, F573, F664, I513, I518, I519, I524, I531, I533, I546
Power supply
Diagr. A1
F401, F412, F413, F414, F418, F452, F453, F455, Line & Frame F456, F458, F459, F460, F461, I408, I416, I417, I420, Deflection I462, I468
A2
F003, F004, I001, I002
Tuner IF
A3
F201, F203, F205, F206
Hercules
A4
F240, F241, F242
Features & Connectivities
A5
F952, F955, I951, I952
Audio Amplifier
A7
F692
Front Control
A9
F331, F332, F333, F338, F339, F341, F351, F353, F354
CRT Panel
B1
F361, F362, F381, F382
ECO Scavem
B2
Perform measurements under the following conditions: • Television set in Service Default Alignment Mode. • Video input: Color bar signal. • Audio input: 3 kHz left channel, 1 kHz right channel.
5.2
Service Default Mode (SDM)
Service Modes Service Default mode (SDM) and Service Alignment Mode (SAM) offers several features for the service technician, while the Customer Service Mode (CSM) is used for communication between the call center and the customer. This chassis also offers the option of using ComPair, a hardware interface between a computer and the TV chassis. It offers the abilities of structured troubleshooting, error code reading, and software version readout for all chassis. Minimum requirements for ComPair: a Pentium processor, a Windows OS, and a CD-ROM drive (see also paragraph "ComPair").
Specifications • Tuning frequency: 61.25 MHz (channel 3). • Color system: NTSC M. • All picture settings at 50% (brightness, color contrast, hue). • Bass, treble and balance at 50 %; volume at 25 %. • All service-unfriendly modes (if present) are disabled. The service unfriendly modes are: – Timer / Sleep timer. – Child / parental lock. – Blue mute. – Hotel / hospital mode. – Auto shut off (when no “IDENT” video signal is received for 15 minutes). – Skipping of non-favorite presets / channels. – Auto-storage of personal presets. – Auto user menu time-out. – Auto Volume Leveling (AVL). How to enter To enter SDM, use one of the following methods: • Press the following key sequence on the remote control transmitter: “062596” directly followed by the MENU button (do not allow the display to time out between entries while keying the sequence). • Short jumper wires 9252 and 9275 on the family board (see Fig. 8-1) and apply AC power. Then press the power button (remove the short after start-up). Caution: Entering SDM by shorting wires 9252 and 9275 will override the +8V-protection. Do this only for a short period. When doing this, the service-technician must know exactly what he is doing, as it could damage the television set. • Or via ComPair. After entering SDM, the following screen is visible, with SDM in the upper right corner of the screen to indicate that the television is in Service Default Alignment Mode.
00028 L4LUS1 0.12 SDM ERR 0 0 0 0 0 OP 000 057 140 032 120 128 000
Table 5-2 Software cluster overview SW Cluster SW name
UOC Type 12 NC
Features
L4LUS1
L04US1_x.y TDA12000 9352 753 88557 CC+BTSC
L4LUS1
L04US1_x.y TDA12001 9352 753 89557 CC+BTSC+CMB+DW
L4LUS1
L04US1_x.y TDA12001 9352 753 35557 CC+BTSC+CMB
U= USA (NAFTA), S= Stereo dBx, CC= Closed Caption, BTSC= Broadcast Television Systems Committee, CMB= Comb Filter, DW = Double Window E_14480_066.eps 190204
Figure 5-1 SDM menu
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding How to navigate Use one of the following methods: • When you press the MENU button on the remote control, the set will switch on the normal user menu in the SDM mode. • On the TV, press and hold the VOLUME DOWN and press the CHANNEL DOWN for a few seconds, to switch from SDM to SAM and reverse. How to exit Switch the set to STANDBY by pressing the POWER button on the remote control transmitter or the television set. If you turn the television set off by removing the AC power (i.e., unplugging the television) without using the POWER button, the television set will remain in SDM when AC power is reapplied, and the error buffer is not cleared. 5.2.2
Service Alignment Mode (SAM) Purpose • To change option settings. • To display / clear the error code buffer. • To perform alignments. Specifications • Operation hours counter (maximum five digits displayed). • Software version, Error codes, and Option settings display. • Error buffer clearing. • Option settings. • AKB switching. • Software alignments (Tuner, White Tone, Geometry & Audio). • NVM Editor. • ComPair Mode switching. How to enter To enter SAM, use one of the following methods: • Press the following key sequence on the remote control transmitter: “062596" directly followed by the OSD/ STATUS button (do not allow the display to time out between entries while keying the sequence). • Or via ComPair. After entering SAM, the following screen is visible, with SAM in the upper right corner of the screen to indicate that the television is in Service Alignment Mode.
00028 L4LUS1 0.12 ERR 0 0 0 0 0
SAM
OP 000 057 140 032 120 128 000 . Clear . Options . AKB . Tuner . White Tone . Geometry . Audio . NVM Editor . ComPair
Clear ? On
on E_14480_067.eps 190204
Figure 5-2 SAM menu
L04U AA
5.
EN 27
Menu explanation 1. LLLLL. This represents the run timer. The run timer counts normal operation hours, but does not count standby hours. 2. AAABCD-X.Y. This is the software identification of the main microprocessor: – A= the project name (L04). – B= the region: E= Europe, A= Asia Pacific, U= NAFTA, L= LATAM. – C= the software diversity: • Europe: T= 1 page TXT, F= Full TXT, V= Voice control. • LATAM and NAFTA: N= Stereo non-dBx, S= Stereo dBx. • Asian Pacific: T= TXT, N= non-TXT, C= NTSC. • ALL regions: M= mono, D= DVD, Q= Mk2. – D= the language cluster number. – X= the main software version number (updated with a major change that is incompatible with previous versions). – Y= the sub software version number (updated with a minor change that is compatible with previous versions). 3. SAM. Indication of the Service Alignment Mode. 4. Error Buffer. Shows all errors detected since the last time the buffer was erased. Five errors possible. 5. Option Bytes. Used to set the option bytes. See “Options” in the Alignments section for a detailed description. Seven codes are possible. 6. Clear. Erases the contents of the error buffer. Select the CLEAR menu item and press the MENU RIGHT key. The content of the error buffer is cleared. 7. Options. Used to set the option bits. See “Options” in the Alignments section for a detailed description. 8. AKB. Used to disable (Off) or enable (On) the “black current loop” (AKB= Auto Kine Bias). 9. Tuner. Used to align the tuner. See “Tuner” in the Alignments section for a detailed description. 10. White Tone. Used to align the white tone. See “White Tone” in the Alignments section for a detailed description. 11. Geometry. Used to align the geometry settings of the television. See “Geometry” in the Alignments section for a detailed description. 12. Audio. No audio alignment is necessary for this television set. 13. NVM Editor. Can be used to change the NVM data in the television set. See table “NVM data” further on. 14. ComPaIr. Can be used to switch on the television to In System Programming (ISP) mode, for software uploading via ComPair. Caution: When this mode is selected without ComPair connected, the TV will be blocked. Remove the AC power to reset the TV. How to navigate • In SAM, select menu items with the MENU UP/DOWN keys on the remote control transmitter. The selected item will be highlighted. When not all menu items fit on the screen, use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to display the next / previous menu items. • With the MENU LEFT/RIGHT keys, it is possible to: – Activate the selected menu item. – Change the value of the selected menu item. – Activate the selected submenu. • In SAM, when you press the MENU button twice, the set will switch to the normal user menus (with the SAM mode still active in the background). To return to the SAM menu press the MENU or STATUS/EXIT button. • When you press the MENU key in while in a submenu, you will return to the previous menu. How to store SAM settings To store the settings changed in SAM mode, leave the top level SAM menu by using the POWER button on the remote control transmitter or the television set.
EN 28
5.
L04U AA
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
How to exit Switch the set to STANDBY by pressing the POWER button on the remote control transmitter or the television set. If you turn the television set “off” by removing the AC power (i.e., unplugging the television) without using the POWER button, the television set will remain in SAM when AC power is re-applied, and the error buffer is not cleared. 5.2.3
• •
Press the MENU, STATUS/EXIT, or POWER button on the remote control transmitter. Press the POWER button on the television set.
5.3
Problems and Solving Tips Related to CSM
5.3.1
Picture Problems
Customer Service Mode (CSM) Purpose The Customer Service Mode shows error codes and information on the TV’s operation settings. The call center can instruct the customer (by telephone) to enter CSM in order to identify the status of the set. This helps the call center to diagnose problems and failures in the TV set before making a service call. The CSM is a read-only mode; therefore, modifications are not possible in this mode. How to enter To enter CSM, press the following key sequence on the remote control transmitter: “123654” (do not allow the display to time out between entries while keying the sequence). Upon entering the Customer Service Mode, the following screen will appear:
1 00028 L4LUS1 0.12 CSM 2 CODES 0 0 0 0 0 3 OP 000 057 140 032 120 128 000 4 nnXXnnnn/nnX 5 P3C-1 6 NOT TUNED 7 NTSC 8 STEREO 9 CO 50 CL 50 BR 50 HU 0 0 AVL Off BS 50
Note: The problems described below are all related to the TV settings. The procedures used to change the value (or status) of the different settings are described. Picture too dark or too bright If: • The picture improves when you have press the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter, or • The picture improves when you enter the Customer Service Mode, Then: 1. Press the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter repeatedly (if necessary) to choose PERSONAL picture mode. 2. Press the MENU button on the remote control transmitter. This brings up the normal user menu. 3. In the normal user menu, use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to highlight the PICTURE sub menu. 4. Press the MENU LEFT/RIGHT keys to enter the PICTURE sub menu. 5. Use the MENU UP/DOWN keys (if necessary) to select BRIGHTNESS. 6. Press the MENU LEFT/RIGHT keys to increase or decrease the BRIGHTNESS value. 7. Use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to select PICTURE. 8. Press the MENU LEFT/RIGHT keys to increase or decrease the PICTURE value. 9. Press the MENU button on the remote control transmitter twice to exit the user menu. 10. The new PERSONAL preference values are automatically stored. White line around picture elements and text
E_14480_068.eps 190204
Figure 5-3 CSM menu Menu explanation 1. Indication of the decimal value of the operation hours counter, Software identification of the main microprocessor (see "Service Default or Alignment Mode" for an explanation), and the service mode (CSM= Customer Service Mode). 2. Displays the last five errors detected in the error code buffer. 3. Displays the option bytes. 4. Displays the type number version of the set. 5. Reserved item for P3C call centers (AKBS stands for Advanced Knowledge Base System). 6. Indicates the television is receiving an "IDENT" signal on the selected source. If no "IDENT" signal is detected, the display will read "NOT TUNED" 7. Displays the detected Color system (e.g. PAL/NTSC). 8. Displays the detected Audio (e.g. stereo/mono). 9. Displays the picture setting information. 10. Displays the sound setting information. How to exit To exit CSM, use one of the following methods:
If: The picture improves after you have pressed the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter, Then: 1. Press the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter repeatedly (if necessary) to choose PERSONAL picture mode. 2. Press the MENU button on the remote control transmitter. This brings up the normal user menu. 3. In the normal user menu, use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to highlight the PICTURE sub menu. 4. Press the MENU LEFT/RIGHT keys to enter the PICTURE sub menu. 5. Use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to select SHARPNESS. 6. Press the MENU LEFT key to decrease the SHARPNESS value. 7. Press the MENU button on the remote control transmitter twice to exit the user menu. 8. The new PERSONAL preference value is automatically stored. Snowy picture Check CSM line 6. If this line reads “Not Tuned”, check the following: • Antenna not connected. Connect the antenna. • No antenna signal or bad antenna signal. Connect a proper antenna signal.
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding •
The tuner is faulty (in this case line 2, the Error Buffer line, will contain error number 10). Check the tuner and replace/ repair the tuner if necessary.
5.4.2
If: • The picture improves after you have pressed the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter,
Menu text not sharp enough If: • The picture improves after you have pressed the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter, Then: 1. Press the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter repeatedly (if necessary) to choose PERSONAL picture mode. 2. Press the MENU button on the remote control transmitter. This brings up the normal user menu. 3. In the normal user menu, use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to highlight the PICTURE sub menu. 4. Press the MENU LEFT/RIGHT keys to enter the PICTURE sub menu. 5. Use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to select PICTURE. 6. Press the MENU LEFT key to decrease the PICTURE value. 7. Press the MENU button on the remote control transmitter twice to exit the user menu. 8. The new PERSONAL preference value is automatically stored.
5.4.1
Introduction ComPair (Computer Aided Repair) is a service tool for Philips Consumer Electronics products. ComPair is a further development on the European DST (service remote control), which allows faster and more accurate diagnostics. ComPair has three big advantages: ComPair helps you to quickly get an understanding on how to repair the chassis in a short time by guiding you systematically through the repair procedures. ComPair allows very detailed diagnostics (on I2C level) and is therefore capable of accurately indicating problem areas. You do not have to know anything about I2C commands yourself because ComPair takes care of this. ComPair speeds up the repair time since it can automatically communicate with the chassis (when the microprocessor is working) and all repair information is directly available. When ComPair is installed together with the SearchMan electronic manual of the defective chassis, schematics and PWBs are only a mouse click away.
EN 29
Specifications
The ComPair faultfinding program is able to determine the problem of the defective television. ComPair can gather diagnostic information in two ways: • Automatic (by communication with the television): ComPair can automatically read out the contents of the entire error buffer. Diagnosis is done on I2C level. ComPair can access the I2C bus of the television. ComPair can send and receive I2C commands to the micro controller of the television. In this way, it is possible for ComPair to communicate (read and write) to devices on the I2C busses of the TV-set. • Manually (by asking questions to you): Automatic diagnosis is only possible if the micro controller of the television is working correctly and only to a certain extend. When this is not the case, ComPair will guide you through the faultfinding tree by asking you questions (e.g. Does the screen give a picture? Click on the correct answer: YES / NO) and showing you examples (e.g. Measure test-point I7 and click on the correct waveform you see on the oscilloscope). You can answer by clicking on a link (e.g. text or a waveform picture) that will bring you to the next step in the faultfinding process. By a combination of automatic diagnostics and an interactive question / answer procedure, ComPair will enable you to find most problems in a fast and effective way.
Then: 1. Press the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter repeatedly (if necessary) to choose PERSONAL picture mode. 2. Press the MENU button on the remote control transmitter. This brings up the normal user menu. 3. In the normal user menu, use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to highlight the PICTURE sub menu. 4. Press the MENU LEFT/RIGHT keys to enter the PICTURE sub menu. 5. Use the MENU UP/DOWN keys to select COLOR. 6. Press the MENU RIGHT key to increase the COLOR value. 7. Press the MENU button on the remote control transmitter twice to exit the user menu. 8. The new PERSONAL preference value is automatically stored.
ComPair
5.
ComPair consists of a Windows based faultfinding program and an interface box between PC and the (defective) product. The ComPair interface box is connected to the PC via a serial or RS232 cable. In this chassis, the ComPair interface box and the TV communicate via a bi-directional service cable via the service connector.
Black and white picture
5.4
L04U AA
Beside fault finding, ComPair provides some additional features like: • Up- or downloading of pre-sets. • Managing of pre-set lists. • Emulation of the Dealer Service Tool (DST). • If both ComPair and SearchMan (Electronic Service Manual) are installed, all the schematics and the PWBs of the set are available by clicking on the appropriate hyperlink. Example: Measure the DC-voltage on capacitor C2568 (Schematic/Panel) at the Mono-carrier. – Click on the “Panel” hyperlink to automatically show the PWB with a highlighted capacitor C2568. – Click on the “Schematic” hyperlink to automatically show the position of the highlighted capacitor. • Software downloading (as soon as this is supported by ComPair). 5.4.3
How To Connect 1. First, install the ComPair Browser software (see the Quick Reference Card for installation instructions). 2. Connect the RS232 interface cable between a free serial (COM) port of your PC and the PC connector (marked with “PC”) of the ComPair interface. 3. Connect the mains adapter to the supply connector (marked with “POWER 9V DC”) of the ComPair interface. 4. Switch the ComPair interface “off”. 5. Switch the television set “off” with the Power switch. 6. Connect the ComPair interface cable between the connector on the rear side of the ComPair interface (marked with “I2C”) and the ComPair (or Service) connector at the rear side of the TV (for its location see chapter “Service Modes, ....”). 7. Plug the mains adapter in a mains outlet, and switch the interface “on”. The green and red LEDs light up together. The red LED extinguishes after approx. 1 second while the green LED remains lit.
EN 30
5.
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
L04U AA
8. Start the ComPair program and read the “Introduction” chapter.
buffer, it is displayed at the left side and all other errors shift one position to the right. 5.5.1
TO SERVICE CONNECTOR
PC
VCR
Power 9V DC
How To Read The Error Buffer You can read the error buffer in 3 ways: • On screen via the SAM (if you have a picture). Examples: – ERROR: 0 0 0 0 0 : No errors detected – ERROR: 6 0 0 0 0 : Error code 6 is the last and only detected error – ERROR: 9 6 0 0 0 : Error code 6 was detected first and error code 9 is the last detected (newest) error • Via the blinking LED procedure (when you have no picture). See “The Blinking LED Procedure”. • Via ComPair.
I2C
E_06532_008.eps 190204
Figure 5-4 ComPair Interface connection 5.5.2 5.4.4
The error code buffer is cleared in the following cases: • By using the CLEAR command in the SAM menu: – To enter SAM, press the following key sequence on the remote control transmitter: “062596” directly followed by the OSD/STATUS button (do not allow the display to time out between entries while keying the sequence). – Make sure the menu item CLEAR is highlighted. Use the MENU UP/DOWN buttons, if necessary. – Press the MENU RIGHT button to clear the error buffer. The text on the right side of the “CLEAR” line will change from “CLEAR?” to “CLEARED” • If the contents of the error buffer have not changed for 50 hours, the error buffer resets automatically.
ComPair order codes: • ComPair Software: ST4191. • ComPair Interface Box: 4822 727 21631. • AC Adapter: T405-ND. • ComPair Quick Start Guide: ST4190. Note: If you encounter any problems, contact your local support desk.
5.5
Error Codes The error code buffer contains all errors detected since the last time the buffer was erased. The buffer is written from left to right. When an error occurs that is not yet in the error code
5.5.3
How To Clear The Error Buffer
How To Order
Note: If you exit SAM by disconnecting the AC power from the television set, the error buffer is not reset.
Error Codes In case of non-intermittent faults, write down the errors present in the error buffer and clear the error buffer before you begin the repair. This ensures that old error codes are no longer present. If possible, check the entire contents of the error buffer. In some situations, an error code is only the result of another error and not the actual cause of the problem (for example, a fault in the protection detection circuitry can also lead to a protection). Table 5-3 Error code overview Error Device 0
Error description
Check item
Diagram
Not applicable No Error
1
Not applicable X-Ray/Over-voltage protection (US only)
2411, 2412, 2413, 6404, 6411, 6412
A2
2
Not applicable High beam (BCI) protection
3404, 7405
A2
3
Not applicable Vertical guard protection
3466, 7451, 7452, 7453, 7454
A2
4
Tuner
1000, 5010, (PIP Module)
F2
5
Not applicable +5v protection
7604, 7605
A5
6
I2C bus
7200, 3207, 3214
A4
7
Not applicable -
-
8
Not applicable -
-
9
24C16
I2C error while communicating with the EEPROM
7601, 3604, 3605
A5
I2C error while communicating with 2nd tuner General I2C error
-
10
Tuner
I2C error while communicating with the PLL tuner
1000, 5001
A3
11
TDA6107/A
Black current loop instability protection
7330, 3351, CRT
B1
12
SDA9488X
I2C error while communicating with the PIP processor
7242 (PIP Module)
F1
13
Not applicable -
-
14
DVD Loader
DVD Interface module
I2C error while communicating with the DVD Interface module
DVD Loader
15
TDA9178T/N1 I2C error while communicating with LTI module
7610
H
16
TDA9887
7201
F2
17
Not applicable -
-
18
Not applicable -
-
19
TDA1200x
I2C error while communicating with SSD stereo sound decoder 7200
A4
20
TDA1200x
I2C error while communicating with video cosmic in Hercules IC 7200
A4
I2C error while communicating with PIP_Demodulator
-
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding 5.6
The Blinking LED Procedure
EN 31
NVM Editor In some cases, it can be handy if one directly can change the NVM contents. This can be done with the “NVM Editor” in SAM mode. In the next table, the default NVM values are given.
When the SDM is entered, the front LED will blink the contents of the error-buffer: • When all the error-codes are displayed, the sequence finishes with a LED blink of 1.5 seconds, • The sequence starts again.
Table 5-4 NVM default values for NAFTA-region
Protections If a fault situation is detected, an error code will be generated; and, if necessary, the television set will go into protection mode. Blinking of the red LED at a frequency of 3 Hz indicates the protection mode. In some error cases, the microprocessor does not put the set in protection mode. The error codes of the error buffer and the blinking LED procedure can be read via the Service Default Menu (SDM), or via ComPair. To get a quick diagnosis the chassis has three service modes implemented: • The Customer Service Mode (CSM). • The Service Default Mode (SDM). • The Service Alignment Mode (SAM). For a detailed mode description, see the relevant sections.
5.8
5.
Using this procedure, you can make the contents of the error buffer visible via the front LED. This is especially useful when there is no picture.
Example of error buffer: 12 9 6 0 0 After entering SDM, the following occurs: • 1 long blink of 5 seconds to start the sequence, • 12 short blinks followed by a pause of 1.5 seconds, • 9 short blinks followed by a pause of 1.5 seconds, • 6 short blinks followed by a pause of 1.5 seconds, • 1 long blink of 1.5 seconds to finish the sequence, • The sequence starts again at 12 short blinks.
5.7
5.8.1
L04U AA
Fault Finding and Repair Tips Notes: • It is assumed that the components are mounted correctly with correct values and no bad solder joints. • Before any fault finding actions, check if the correct options are set.
NAFTA Region
Address Value (dec) (hex)
EW (EW width)
19
25
PW (EW parabola width)
20
0A
HS (Horizontal shift)
21
1A
HP (Horizontal parallelogram)
22
1F
HB (Horizontal Bow)
23
1F
UCP (EW upper corner parabola)
24
1E
LCP (EW lower corner parabola)
25
28
TC (EW trapezium)
26
1A
VS (Vertical slope)
27
25
VA (Vertical amplitude)
28
1E
SC (S-Correction)
29
19
VSH (Vertical Shift)
30
1A
VX (Vertical Zoom)
31
19
VSL (Vertical scroll)
32
20
VL (Vertical linearity)
33
20
BLOR (Black level Offset - Red)
34
1D
BLOG (Black level Offset - Green)
35
13
AGC (AGC Takeover)
36
14
OIF (IF-PLL Offset)
37
26
AGC10 (AGC 10)
38
2
H60 (60 Hz Horizontal Shift)
39
9
PF_SC_PWL (Peaking Frequency, Soft Clipper, Peak White Limit)
40
0A
COR (Phase 1 time constant, Video Dependant Coring, Ratio & White stretch)
41
0C
60 Hz Vertical amplitude
42
40
YD & CL
43
58
RGB amplitude for full teletext mode
46
8
NVM_TABLE_VERSION
60
19
OPTION_TABLE_VERSION
61
8
CVI_BLOR
62
15
CVI_BLOG
63
0F
TXT Brightness
64
17
V60 offset (60Hz Vertical Amplitude)
66
FE
FOAB, CHSE
139
3
SPR, WS
140
0
VMA, SVM
141
32
NVM_SOC_SMD
142
3
CCC_Preset_Gain_Red
143
1F
CCC_Preset_Gain_Green
144
1F
CCC_Preset_Gain_Blue
145
1F
NVM_FMWS
149
3
NVM_ASD_SC1_THR
150
10
NVM_CRYSTAL_ALIGN
208
3F
Last Brightness (VID PP others)
264
2A
Last Color (VID PP others)
265
30
Last Contrast (VID PP others)
266
55
Last Sharpness (VID PP others)
267
37
Last Hue (VID PP others)
268
32
Last Colour Temperature (VID PP others)
269
1
White-D Cool Red
294
FD
White-D Cool Blue
296
5
White-D Normal Red
297
1A
White-D Normal Green
298
20
White-D Normal Blue
299
1B
White-D Warm Red
300
2
White-D Warm Blue
302
FA
Last Volume
343
14
Last Balance
344
32
Last Treble (AUD PP others)
345
32
Last Bass (AUD PP others)
346
32
EN 32 5.8.2
5.
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
L04U AA
5.8.3
Power Supply Set Not Working
One Thin Vertical Line Quick check: • Set in protection mode. • LED blinking with error “3”.
Check Power Supply Mains Switch
Bridge Rectifier circuit 6500
Deflection
One Thin Vertical Line LED Blinking
Check fusible resistor 3510 & circuit before it
Not Ok
Ok
Check DC voltage at 2505/2507
Check all connection and peripheral at Deflection Circuit in place
Not Ok
Ok
Check fusible resistor 3532
Check 7512
Check Line Transistor 7405
Check IC7511 & IC7531
Ok
Set able to start-up
No
Check other fusible resistor and capacitor in the circuit
Is VBE between 200mV to 30mV & VCB approximately 500mV
Yes
Yes
Check Horizontal Deflection Circuitry
End E_14480_057.eps 190204
Figure 5-5 Fault finding tree “Set not working” Replace transistor
Set Does Not Start Up
E_14480_059.eps 170204 Set Unable to Start
Figure 5-7 Fault finding tree “One thin vertical line” Software loaded?
No
Fuse Blown?
Yes
Yes
Change Fuse
One Thin Horizontal Line Quick check: • Set in protection mode. • LED blinking with error “2”.
Load Software Check voltage across 2552
One Horizontal Thin Line LED Blinking Is Vbatt approximately 140V
No
Check Power Supply circuit
Yes Check voltage 2562 &2563
Check all connection and peripheral at Deflection Circuit in place
No 16V
Yes
Check 3V across 2535 Yes
Check transistor (7451, 7523, 7543) at Vertical Deflection Circuitry
Check 6V across 2535
Yes
Set able to Start
No
Check Line Transistor 7405
Check Vertical Deflection Circuit
Yes
End
Replace transistor
E_14480_058.eps 170204
Figure 5-6 Fault finding tree “Set does not start up”
E_14480_060.eps 170204
Figure 5-8 Fault finding tree “One thin horizontal line”
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
L04U AA
5.
EN 33
5. If IF output is present, Tuner is working fine. If no IF output, I2C data lines may be open, check continuity of I2C lines. If I2C lines are ok, Tuner may be defect, replaced Tuner. 6. If Tuner IF is present and yet still no picture in RF mode, go to Video Processing troubleshooting section.
Blank Screen Blank Screen
No Picture, No Sound Check Vg2 (fine tune)
Ok
Not Ok
Picture appears?
No Picture, No Sound, Raster Ok
Check tuning supply voltage, pin 9 of tuner
Check AGC Voltage, pin 1 of tuner
>30V & <35V
Picture not appearing
Check Beam Current Limit (voltage is 1.8V-2V when brightness and contrast is set to the maximum
Not Ok
Check deflection circuit
Check VT Supply Section
No
Check Power Supply
Yes
Ok
Check heater voltage (measure pin 9&10 at the CRT socket)
No
Ok
Picture not appearing
AGC voltage changes with different signal strength
Check supply voltage, pin 7 of tuner
5V No
Not Ok Check video supply (2457) is approximately 180V
Ok
Yes Check AGC circuit section
Check Tuner pin 4 & 5 I2C Bus
Picture appears? Ok
No
Check other functional area
Yes
Ok End Replace Tuner E_14480_061.eps 170204
Figure 5-9 Fault finding tree “Blank screen” 5.8.4
Source Selection Set is not able to go into AV or any missing AV is encountered E.g. AV1 is available but not able to enter to AV1: Check if the option setting is correct. Set is able to go to AV, but no audio is heard. 1. Check that continuity of signal is there from the SCART/ Cinch input to the input of the Hercules. 2. If continuity is there and still no audio, check that option settings are correct. 3. If logic setting is correct and still no audio, proceed to Audio Decoder/Processor troubleshooting section. Set is able to go into AV but no video is available: 1. Check continuity from AV input to Hercules depending on the input. 2. If continuity is available and yet no video, proceed to Video Processor troubleshooting section.
5.8.5
Tuner and IF No Picture 1. Check that the Option settings are correct. 2. If correct, check that supply voltages are there. 3. If supply voltages are present, check whether picture is present in AV. 4. If picture is present in AV, check with the scope the Tuner IF output signal by manual storage to a known channel.
E_14480_062.eps 170204
Figure 5-10 Fault finding tree “No picture, no sound”
EN 34
5.
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
L04U AA
5.8.6
Picture Ok, No Sound
Below are some guidelines for troubleshooting of the Micro Controller function. Normally Micro Controller should be checked when there is a problem of startup. 1. Check that both +3.3 V_dc and +1.8 V_dc are present. 2. Check that crystal oscillator is working. 3. Check that Power Good signal is at “high” logic, normal operation. 4. Check that Hercules is not in standby mode. Pin 15 of Hercules should be 0 V_dc. 5. Make sure H-drive pulse is there. This can be checked at resistor R3239. If H-drive does not exist, remove resistor R3239 to check if there is loading.
Picture Ok, No Sound
Check IF output of tuner, pin 11
CVBS present?
No
Controller
Refer to fig. "Power Supply: Set not working"
Note: When the set shuts down after a few second after power “on”, the main cause is that Vg2 not aligned properly, try adjusting Vg2 during the few seconds of power “on”.
Yes
Check SAW filter output (pin 4&5) EU/AP/CH (QSS)- 1001 NA/LA/AP INT - 1002
Output Ok?
5.8.7
No
Video Processing No Picture When “no picture in RF”, first check if the microprocessor is functioning ok in section “Controller”. If that is ok, follow the next steps. When “no picture in AV”, first check if the video source selection is functioning ok in section “Source Selection”. If that is ok, follow the next steps.
Replace SAW filter
Yes
1. Check that normal operating conditions are met. 2. Check that there is video signal at pin 81. If no video, demodulator part of the Hercules is faulty, replace with new Hercules. 3. If video signal is available at pin 81, check pin 56, 57, and 58 for the RGB signal. 4. If signal is not available, try checking the BRIGHTNESS and/or CONTRAST control, and make sure it is not at zero. 5. If still with the correct settings and no video is available, proceed to the CRT/RGB amplifier diagram.
Check other functional area E_14480_063.eps 170204
Figure 5-11 Fault finding tree “Picture ok, no sound” Unable To Perform Tuning Unable to perform tuning
Enter SDM check optionbyte 1
Enter SDM and change to the appropriate byte
Incorrect
Correct
Check if tuner Supply Voltage pin 7
5V
No
Check Power Supply
Yes
Check I2C circuit
Replace Tuner
No
Check Tuner Supply Voltage
33V Yes
Not Ok
Check I2C at pin 4 & 5 and tuner
Not Ok
Not Ok Ok I2C Check other functional area
Tuner
For sets with TDA9178, follow steps below: 1. Put Option Byte 2 bit 4 to “0”; if video signal is not available, then check fault finding section “Controller”, Section “Source Selection”, and steps above. 2. If video is available but not correct, put Option Byte 2 bit 4 to “1”, then check if LTI panel is present. If not, put LTI panel in the main chassis (connector 1221). 3. If LTI panel is in main chassis, check cable between LTI panel and main chassis (position is 1206). If it is connected, then the LTI panel is faulty, replace it. For sets with Scavem, and Scavem does not work, follow steps below: 1. Check Scavem coil connector (position is 1361) if connected; if not, connect it. 2. If connected, check NVM “bit storage” byte 1 bit 7; if it is not “1”, set it to “1”. 3. If it is “1”, then check the data of the NVM addresses as in the next table. If the data is not correct, then set these addresses to diagram values. 4. If it still not works, track Scavem output from pin64 of Hercules to CRT panel.
Not Ok E_14480_064.eps 170204
Figure 5-12 Fault finding tree “Unable to perform tuning”
Table 5-5 NVM default values for Scavem Description
Address (dec) Address (hex) Value (hex)
SPR, WS
140
8C
00
VMA, SVM
141
8D
32
NVM_SOC_SMD
142
8E
03
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding 5.8.8
Audio Processing No Sound Picture Ok, No Sound
Tuner IF Ok
Not Ok
Check Tuner/IF
Ok
Check AUDOUTLSL & AUDOUTLSR pin at Hercules
Not Ok
Check Hercules IC
Ok
Check Audio Amplifier
Not Ok
Check Audio Power Supply
Check Power Supply
Ok
Check Audio Amplifier Circuit and loud speaker
Not Ok
Replace Audio Amplifier
Ok
Check NVM E_14480_065.eps 170204
Figure 5-13 Fault finding tree “No sound” No RF audio for QSS/Inter-Carrier stereo sets. 1. Check pin 99 and 100 for SIF signal (for QSS) or pin 104 and 105 for video with SIF (for Inter-Carrier) 2. If signal is not present, check for the QSS/FMI bit settings. Check also the NVM data. 3. If signals are present and still no audio, check the audio supply voltage +8V are present. 4. If still no audio signal at Hercules output, Hercules is faulty. No AV audio. 1. Check troubleshooting methods in section “Source Selection”. 2. Check the output of the Hercules to see if there is signal available. If no, check the normal operating condition and also the NVM data. 3. If still no audio signal at Hercules output, Hercules is faulty. Note: If there is audio signal at Hercules output and no audio at loudspeaker, proceed to Audio Amplifier troubleshooting methods. 5.8.9
Audio Amplifier No RF as well as AV audio at the loudspeaker: 1. Check that the normal operation condition of the amplifier is met. 2. If normal operation conditions are met, check the continuity from Hercules output to input of the amplifier. 3. If continuity is there and still no audio, check speaker wire connections. If still no audio, amplifier IC might be faulty.
L04U AA
5.
EN 35
EN 36
5.
L04U AA
Service Modes, Error Codes, and Fault Finding
E_06532_012.eps 130204
Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms
L04U AA
6.
37
6. Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms Wiring Diagram DEGAUSSING COIL
E
TOP CONTROL PANEL AQUADAG
CRT 16:9
EHT CRT
1010 3P FRAME ROTATION COIL
(component view)
YELLOW
B
CRT PANEL
RIGHT SPEAKER
ORANGE BLUE
1361 3P
5P 1351
LEFT SPEAKER
RED SCAVEM COIL
1332
7P
1352
B
CRT SOCKET
RED BLACK
BLACK RED
CRT PANEL 1381 3P
J
FRONT INTERFACE Warning: Some models have tact switch.
6P
1693
6P 1504
1252
1505
2P
MAINS CORD
7P
2P
2P
LEFT (WHITE)
1254
RIGHT (RED)
5P
CVBS (YELLOW)
MAIN CHASSIS
1278 4P
3P
A
5P 1280
1279
G
(track view) 3P
1404
1204 2P
1215 7P
1214
H
LTI/ CTI
1464 2P
1221 7P
H
LINEARITY& PANORAMA
1462 3P
1206
LTI/CTI INTERFACE
1461 5401
1212
1401
7P
5P
1207
1451 2P LOT
TUNER
1212
12P
1206 12P
to SUB WOOFER (OPTONAL)
3P
1682
7P
HEADPHONE
1211
1212
2P
SIDE I/O PANEL
2P
D
MAINS SWITCH
1693
1005 3P COMPAIR CONNECTOR
E_14480_021.eps 200204
Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms
L04U AA
6.
38
Block Diagram Supply and Deflection SUPPLY AND DEFLECTION G
SUPPLY
J
FRONT INTERFACE 1231
1211 1
LINEARITY & PANORAMA 7460 ACTIVATING CIRCUIT
ONLY FOR: 28"WSRF LA/NA 32" WSRF LA/NA 28" WS-SF LA
7462
1212 1
2
2464 2467
2466
2 1404 4
MAINS SWITCH (not USA)
1461 4 LINEARITY AND PANORAMA CORRECTION
1
1 HOR. DEFL. COIL
2474 2475
1462 1 TO 1221
A5
2
CONNECTIONS
3
1463
+9V
7463 I2SD/1
DEFLECTION
4
2
1
ENERGIZING CIRCUIT (optional)
t
V_DG
7200-H (SYNC)
112
EHTinfo
3 3507
A2
7541
2240
Degaussing Coil
1505
1503
113
A2 LINE + FRAME DEFLECTION
A2 Vguard
A4 HERCULES 1504
3232
A1 POWER SUPPLY
Vbatt
+6VA
LINE
116
7408 1506
5500 : 5502
1500
VERTICAL GUARD DETECTOR
VIDEO IDENT
6500 AC
F508
T4E
6401
2505
DC
5402 5520
MAIN SUPPLY
9
17
8
18
DRIVER
7512 11
I511
3514
I519
2 2511 6
SENSE
Vcc
9
DEMAG
5552
G
5
5562 6563
3
7514
10
6571
5561 6562
3517
7571
1
108
EW_DRIVE
7410
HOR. DEFL. COIL
3410
BCL
A4 1454
6
7406
6452 6483
6484
6453
3458 3484 3485
I573
6456
8
1452
+9V 3457
9
2456
6566
POWER-DOWN A4 2x
I533
2564
5
6533 10
2534
X-RAY PROTECTION
EHTo
FRAME
1 3538
8
+3V +6VA +6VA
6676
2535 6536
6
AUX
5537
2536
2
+6V
VERTICAL SYNC SEPARATOR
VERTICAL DIVIDER
VERTICAL SAWTHOOTH
VERTICAL OUTPUT + GEOMETRY
106 107
VDRA
3474 F461
7455
7456
G I548 7536
FILAMENT
F458
3466
7453
Vaux
D
4
Vguard
A4
3465 7454
6537
1401 5
EHTb
7451
VDRB
VIDEO/SUPPLY
1491 1
3
TO 1351
2
CRT
1
Vbatt
7452
7535
3531
6459
3462
F460
F537
S
3534
3455
3565
F536
12
6532
97
+9V
6535
9
I531
A2
6454 6455
F564
14
CONTROL IC
7561 6565
VIDEO/SUPPLY F455
FILAMENT
7
EHTinfo 6564
F453
7411
3532
4
F452
-12V
5
A4
A4
2403
3440 I417
EHTb EHTb + EHTinfo + EHTinfo BCL PROC.
6481 3481
7484
Stdby_Con
STANDBY CIRCUIT
3451
3442
10 2
Vbatt
7573
2
5531
11
E/W + GEOMETRY
1404 1
3576
+3V3 7515 TCET1103
+8V
3420
REFERENCE CIRCUIT
1532 1A
7531 TEA1620
SOURCE
A5
SANDCASTLE GENERATOR
3575
6512
REG
MAIN SYNC SEPARATOR
LINE OUTPUT CIRCUIT + E/W 3497 CORR.
E/W
SANDCASTLE +8V
3571
11
STANDBY SUPPLY
6
+Vbatt
FOCUS VG2
7207
INTF_Y GREEN_IN 56
6573
3530
OR
63
+6VA
3
DRAIN
HDRIVE
62
-Vaudio F561
A5
3518
Vcc
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT
1543
14
4
3
PHI 2 DETECTOR
+Vaudio
S
3532
13
I516
D
6511
3519
HORIZONTAL OSC.
FRAME_FB
F418
3516 7
PHI 1 DETECTOR
Vbatt
A1
B1
HD
2
CONTROL IC CTRL
4
3513 14
DRAIN
F552
7401 : 7403 3411 7480 : 7483 POWER-DOWN
TO CRT
1
F563
I513
7511 TEA1506T
5551 6551
EHT
3
7405 BU4508DX
7404
MAINS SWITCH (not USA)
I433
5445
6486
-9V
F414
1505
7532
TO RGB PROC.
3498
OR
R.G.B. BLANKING
F402
F412
HD
2 VER. DEFL. COIL
3463
3401
VT_SUPPLY
F459
-12V
F401
3461
A4
FRAME_FB 3471
For IDTV only
HOT GROUND
COLD GROUND
E_14480_024.eps 190204
B1
Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms
L04U AA
6.
39
Testpoint Overview Mono Carrier F001 F002 F003 F004 F005 F006 F007 F008 F009 F010 F011
A8 A7 A7 A7 A8 A6 A8 A8 B4 A7 A8
F101 F102 F103 F104 F105 F106 F107 F108 F109 F110 F111
B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 C8 B8
F112 F113 F115 F116 F117 F119 F120 F121 F122 F123 F138
C8 C8 C7 C7 C7 A8 A8 A8 B8 B8 B7
F200 F201 F202 F203 F204 F205 F206 F207 F208 F209 F210
B4 C5 B5 B5 C5 C5 C6 B5 B6 A5 A4
F211 F212 F213 F214 F215 F216 F217 F218 F219 F220 F221
A4 A5 A5 B5 B6 C6 C6 C6 B7 B7 B7
F222 F223 F224 F225 F226 F227 F228 F229 F230 F232 F233
C7 B7 C6 C6 B6 A4 C5 C5 B5 B5 B5
F237 F238 F239 F240 F241 F242 F243 F244 F245 F247 F248
B5 B4 B5 C5 C6 C6 C6 B5 C6 A6 A6
F249 F250 F251 F270 F401 F402 F404 F407 F412 F414 F415
A7 C6 B5 B5 C4 D6 D6 D6 C6 E7 E6
F416 F417 F418 F419 F420 F451 F452 F453 F454 F455 F456
E6 E5 D6 D6 D7 C8 C7 D7 C7 D7 E7
F457 F458 F459 F460 F461 F462 F463 F464 F465 F466 F500
E7 C7 C7 C7 C7 E7 D8 E5 E5 E8 C2
F501 F502 F503 F504 F505 F506 F507 F508 F509 F510 F535
D2 D2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E3 E4 D5 C4
F536 F537 F541 F542 F551 F552 F561 F562 F563 F564 F573
C5 C3 C3 C3 C5 D5 C4 D4 C4 C5 C5
F581 F582 F583 F682 F683 F685 F691 F692 F693 F694 F695
B3 B4 C4 B1 B1 B1 C1 D1 E1 C1 C1
F696 F697 F698 F699 F901 F903 F904 F905 F910 F911 F950
D1 E1 C1 D1 B3 B2 B1 B2 B3 B3 B3
F951 F952 F953 F955 I001 I002 I003 I004 I005 I006 I007
B3 A3 A3 A3 A8 A8 A7 A7 A5 A5 A7
I008 I009 I010 I011 I012 I013 I014 I015 I016 I017 I104
A5 A5 A5 A7 A7 A6 A8 A8 A7 B5 B8
I105 I106 I107 I108 I109 I110 I111 I112 I113 I114 I115
B7 B7 B8 B7 B7 B7 B8 B7 C8 B8 C8
I116 I117 I118 I119 I120 I201 I203 I204 I205 I206 I207
B7 B8 A7 A7 B7 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 B6
I208 I209 I210 I211 I212 I213 I214 I215 I216 I217 I218
C5 B6 B6 C6 B6 A5 A5 A6 B6 B7 B6
I219 I222 I223 I224 I225 I226 I227 I228 I229 I230 I231
B6 B5 B5 B4 B5 C6 A5 B5 C5 B5 B5
I232 I233 I234 I235 I236 I240 I241 I401 I402 I403 I404
A7 B7 A4 B5 B5 A4 A4 E7 E6 E7 E7
I405 I406 I407 I409 I410 I412 I413 I414 I415 I416 I417
E7 E7 E7 E8 E6 E6 C6 D6 C6 C5 D5
I418 I419 I421 I422 I423 I424 I425 I426 I427 I428 I429
D6 C6 D7 D7 D5 E8 C6 D7 D5 D6 E8
I430 I431 I432 I433 I434 I443 I444 I445 I446 I448 I449
E6 C7 D6 E6 C5 E7 E7 E7 C5 E7 D8
I451 I452 I453 I455 I456 I457 I458 I459 I460 I461 I462
D7 E8 D7 D7 D8 D7 D7 D7 C8 C8 C8
I463 I464 I465 I466 I467 I468 I469 I470 I471 I472 I473
SERVICE TEST POINT
3139 123 5673.1
E_14480_029.eps 200204
D8 C8 E7 D7 E8 D7 E8 D8 C8 C7 E5
I474 I475 I501 I502 I503 I504 I505 I506 I507 I511 I513 I514 I515 I516 I517 I518 I519 I520 I521 I523 I524 I527 I529 I531 I532 I533 I535 I536 I537 I538 I539 I540 I541 I542 I543 I544 I545 I546 I547 I548 I551 I552 I553 I554 I555 I556 I557 I561 I562 I565 I571 I572 I573 I574 I575 I576 I577 I578 I579 I582 I583 I584 I585 I586 I587 I588 I681 I682 I683 I686 I687 I688 I689 I691 I693 I909 I910 I911 I913 I914 I915 I916 I918 I919 I920 I921 I922 I924 I925 I926 I927 I928 I930 I934 I935 I936 I937 I938 I939 I940
E6 D8 E3 E3 E2 E2 D1 E3 D3 E5 E5 D4 E4 E4 E4 E5 E5 E5 E4 E5 E5 E5 D3 D3 D3 D3 D3 D3 C4 C3 D3 D4 D4 C3 C2 D3 C3 C3 C3 C3 D5 D5 D3 D4 D4 D4 D3 D4 D4 C4 D5 C5 D5 D5 D5 D5 D5 D5 D4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 C4 B4 E1 B1 B1 C1 D1 C1 D1 E1 D1 B3 C3 C3 C3 C2 C3 C2 C3 C2 B3 C2 C2 B3 B3 B2 C2 B1 B2 B2 B1 B2 C2 B2 B2 B2
I941 I942 I943 I944 I945 I946 I948 I951 I952 I953 I954 I955 I956 I957 I958
B2 C3 B2 C3 C2 B3 B3 B3 A3 A3 A3 B3 A3 A3 B4
Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms
L04U AA
6.
40
Block Diagram Video VIDEO H
LTI/CTI
7611 TDA8601T
INTF_Y_OUT 2
1214
N.C.
1
INTF_Y
3
INTF_U_OUT 3 INTF_Pb 7
6
INTF_V_OUT 4 INTF_Pr 8
5
CLAMP
3-STATE
CLAMP CLAMP
3-STATE
CLAMP
12
1212 6
11
8
YIN
YOUT
LTI/C+I PROC.
UIN
UOUT VOUT
CLAMP
3-STATE
CLAMP
15 3-STATE
14 5
10
9
19
Y_2
4
4
INTF_Y/GREEN_IN
17
Pb_2
6
6
INTF_Pb/BLUE_IN
16
Pr_2
8
8
INTF_Pr/RED_IN
INTF_FBL
9
13 SC 1
16
INTF_FBL
9
PULSE FORMER INTF_FBL
1
CONN.
1212
ERR 15
VIN
1216
N.C.
A5
7610 TDA9178T
7630 7635
SANDCASTLE
10
SANDCASTLE 10
A5
INTF_V-OUT
(RGB/YPrPb/YUV 7200-C INPUT SWITCHING)
51 50 49
1
1
3
SCL
SCL
3
3
SCL
INTF_BBL
6
6
INTF_BBL
53
54
57 58 59
55
7200-B (CVBS I/O + FILTERS + COLOUR DECODING)
7200-A (IF)
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROC. - 4:3 LINEAR/NON-LINEAR SCALING - DOUBLE WINDOW PROC.
TUNER IF
7003
6, 7
VT
F002
ERR FM-RADIO FM 10 10 TUNER
FM
1002 1003 F004
+ IF 11 TV TUNER
TV
5 3001
PHASE DISC
9
4
24
VIF_2
25
RF
31
VIDEO IF
RGB2/ RGB3 SELECTION ADC
I001
TUNER IF AGC
Yint INPUT SWITCH
DAC
1004 SIF1
29
SIF2
30
AUDIO IF QSS/AM
COMB FILTER &TRAP SWITCH
SC2_CHROMA_IN 70
AM SOUND DET.
SIDE_CHROMA_IN 77
FM/QSS
Uint CHROMA/CVBS
C
TO AUDIO PART AM
Yint
PAL, NTSC SECAM DECODER
YUV TO DVD
DVD TO YUV
Yint
Y
Uint
Pr
Vint
Pb
Vint SC1_FBL
52 INSSW3 SELECTION LOGIC
N.C.
See block diagram AUDIO
RGB TO DVD
CVBS/Y
PLL
SOUND MIXER
DVD TO DVD
SC2_Y/CVBS_IN 71 SIDE_Y/CVBS_IN 78 CVBS1
FILTER SELECTION
INTF_CVBS_OUT N.C.
SC1_CVBS_IN 74
SOUND TRAP
VIDEO DEMOD
AGC 1
7001
65
PLL VIF_1
A4 SCL
A4 SEL-LLPIM
SW_SC2_CVBS 81
I002
A4 SDA 3000
VCO
OUTPUT SWITCH
VIDEO IDENT
YUV RGB DVD
DINT
1000
86 N.C.
SWITCH
YUV
+5VS
YPrPb2/ YPrPb3 SELECTION
SSIF
6001 BZX79-C33
5001
RGB
A2 VT_SUPPLY
9003
DVD
9002 +5V
SDA
INTF_Pr/RED_IN
3
SDA
INTF_Pb/BLUE_IN
3
1206
SDA
INTF_Y/GREE_IN
INTF_V_OUT
N.C.
1206
1
INTF_Y_OUT
2
SC1_RED_IN
2
See block diagram AUDIO
A4 HERCULES
A3
INTF_U_OUT
SC1_GREEN_IN
TO AUDIO PART
1
SC1_BLUE_IN
SSIF
1215
1212
1
INTF_U-OUT
1212 INTF_Y_OUT
SC1_FBL
A8 REAR I/O CINCH
B1 CRT
B2 SCAVEM
SC2_Y/CVBS_IN
2
FILAMENT
3
1381 1
SC2_CHROMA_IN
SVHS 1
4
ROT
ROTATION OUTPUT
5
2
ROTATION COIL (OPTIONAL)
AV1 SC1_CVBS_IN
V
AV2
FILAMENT VSVM
V 1361 1
YUV INPUT SC1_GREEN_IN
Y
A4 HERCULES
SC1_BLUE_IN
U
SC1_RED_IN
V
A5
SVM
A5
SCAVEM OUTPUT
2
SCAVEM COIL (OPTIONAL)
7200-E (RGB PROCESSING + CATHODE CALIBRATION)
7200-D (YUV PROCESSING)
7606 7607
MONITOR OUTPUT
FROM µP PART
SW_SC2_CVBS
SC2_CVBS_OUT
V
F240
1204
R
7
7
6
6
SIDE_CHROMA_IN
WHITE/BLACK STRETCH GAMMA COR.
Y Pr
2
Pb
3
C
SVHS 1
5
5
RGB ADDER
G B
PEAKING
CLAMP + MUTE
BLUE STRETCH & CONTRAST
OSD INSERTION
BRIGHTNESS + PEAK WHITE LIM.
CATHODE CALIBRATION
OUTPUT STAGE
43 44
3226 3227 3228
BOUT
1
7330
1 B
3 V11
GOUT
2
2 G
ROUT
3
3 R
IBLACK
SIDE_Y/CVBS_IN
V13
1331
4
4
5
5
6
6
SVM
7
7
ROT
V16
1332
7 B 3332
1
9 G 3334
2
8 R
3336
V15
V14
AQUADAG
11 6
B
8
G
10 9
4 5
45 SVM
SCAVEM PROC.
SATURATION
MATRIX
G_Y
VSVM FILAMENT V14
B_Y 64
5352
+200V
46 7308 BCL
A2
EHT-b 3351
ROT
TINT CONTROL SKINTONE
5 7 1
5 25kV
BEAM CURRENT LIM.
R_Y
VIDEO IN
V12
BC_INFO
CRT
R
A4
EHT
Y
1207
42
VG2 FOCUS DEFLECTION
1252
+200VA
F242
FBL
B_OSD
A5 CONNECTION
SIDE AV
G_OSD
R_OSD
F241
D
A2 FROM DEFLECTION
+200VA 2351
1351
1 1351 2 3
4
to 1401 A2 DEFLECTION
5
E_14480_027.eps 200204
Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms
L04U AA
6.
41
Testpoint Overview CRT & LTI Panel F331 F332 F333 F334 F335 F336 F338 F339 F340 F341 F351 F352 F353 F354 F356 F360 F361 F362 F381 F382 I330 I331 I332 I333 I334 I335 I336 I337 I351 I353 I355 I357 I360 I361 I362 I363 I364 I365 I366 I367 I368 I369 I370 I371 I372 I373 I374 I375 I381 I383 I384 I385 I386 I387
CRT
3139 123 5674.1
LTI
3139 123 5740.1
1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1626 1627 1628 1633
A2 A2 A1 A2 A1 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A1 A2 A2 A1 A1 A2
E_14480_069.eps 200204
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A2 A2 A1 A1 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms
L04U AA
6.
42
Block Diagram Audio/Control AUDIO A3 TUNER IF
A4 HERCULES
A8 REAR I/O CINCH SUBWOOFER (optional)
7200-A (IF)
7003 9002
A2 VT_SUPPLY
+5V 9003
1000
6, 7
2 FM
PHASE DISC
+ 11 TV TUNER IF
VIF_1
24
VIF_2
25
N.C. RF
31
I001
PLL
TUNER IF AGC
A4 SCL 1004 7001 FILTER SELECTION
A4 SEL-LLPIM
AMPLI + MUTE
AUDIO SOURCE SELECTION
ADC
DIGITAL SOUND PROCESSING
AUDIO SELECT
DAC
SCART CINCH OUTPUT
92
SC1_R_OUT
93
SC1_L_OUT
SIF1
29
SIF2
30
AUDIO IF QSS/AM
(optional)
7103
1228 1
3161
N.C.
2 3
AM
To VIDEO PART see block diagram VIDEO
VIDEO DEMOD
I002
A4 SDA 3000
VIDEO IF
AGC 1
4
FM DEM.
96
PLL
1002 1003 F004
TV
3001
FM/QSS SSIF
VCO
F002
ERR FM-RADIO FM 10 10 TUNER
5
3164
9 VT
SPDIF
DIGITAL PART
SSIF
6001 BZX79-C33
5001
+5VS
7200-F (AUDIO)
SOUND MIXER
FM/QSS
AM SOUND DET.
AM
INTF_R_IN
75
INTF_L_IN
76
SC2_R_IN
72
SC2_L_IN
73
SIDE_R_IN
79
SIDE_L_IN
80
SC1_R_IN
94
SC1_L_IN
95
DIGITAL STEREO SOUND DECODER
AUDIO SELECT
HP OUTPUT
66
SC2_R_OUT
67
SC2_L_OUT
MONITOR OUT L
ERR 19
LS OUTPUT
68
MAIN_OUTR
69
MAIN_OUTL
R 7140 MUTING
A8 REAR I/O CINCH A7 AUDIO AMPLIFIER
AV1 L
7990 TDA2616Q
SC1_R_IN
R
F952
I952
SC2_L_IN
L
MAIN_OUTR
MUTE
MUTING
A4 POWER_DOWN
4
1
AV2
1281 5
L 8 Ohm/15W
F955
9
6
2
R 8 Ohm/15W
SC2_R_IN
R
2
D
A4 Stby_Con
7
I951
MAIN_OUTL
A5
7993, 7994
V AUDIO+1
SC1_L_IN
A5 CONNECTIVITIES
SIDE AV 1252
L R
-V AUDIO
1207
3
3
SIDE_L_IN
1
1
SIDE_R_IN
A4 VOL_MUTE
VOLUME + MUTE
D
5
7991 7992
1280
1254
1
SIDE AV
1278
5
1
2
2
L 8 Ohm/15W
7991 OR 2
R 8 Ohm/15W
CONTROL E
A4 HERCULES (CONTROL)
TOP CONTROL
LOCAL KEYBOARD
+3.3V
7200-G (Control) TDA12001H1 1682 2
INTERFACE J1 FRONT (PARTLY)
A9
6692 TSOP1836 IR 6691 +3.3V
IR
4
4
LED
5
5
KEYBOARD
6
6
LIGHT_SENSOR
9
IR
32
LED
30
LIGHT-SENSOR
14
LIGHT_SENSOR
+3.3V
+ 3202
IIC BUS TRANSCEIVER
20 21
3207
3204
7
EEPROM 8 (NVM) 6 ERR 5 9
3605
3604
SDA
3214
see IIC DIAGRAM
SCL
+ OR
A1
POWER_DOWN 31
ON/OFF USA only
WRITE_PROTECT
I/O PORTS
LED
KEYBOARD
22
PWRDOWN 31
?
KEY_PROTN
FRONT CONTROL
1693 3
1693 3
A5 FEATURES
1010 2
6693
PWM OUTPUTS
18
VOL_MUTE
+
15
Stdby_Con
A7 A1 A7
CPU LIGHT_SENSOR
6693
+ 6692 TSOP1836
TELETEXT (close caption)
F692
1
IR
OR
7205
17
ROT
16
SEL_LLPIM
23
I2SD/1
24
Reset__5V
25
SEL_SC2_INTF
B2 A3
6691 +3.3V
LOCAL KEYBOARD + ON/OFF (USA only)
+
LED
ROM RAM 119
KEYBOARD
1205 24MHz
ERR 20
A5 G A5 A5
SERVICE DUMPER
9275 9252
SDM
118
E_14480_025.eps 190204
Block Diagrams, Testpoint Overviews, and Waveforms
L04U AA
6.
43
I2C and Supply Voltage Overview SUPPLY LINES DIAGRAM A2 LINE + FRAME DEFLECTION
A1 POWER SUPPLY 3 2
4
1503
7541 ENERGIZING CIRCUIT (optional)
1
B1 CRT
V_DG
Vbatt
5445 5402
17
8
18
4
14
5
SUPPLY PRIMARY SIDE
5551 6551
5552
10
A4
Vbatt
A7 AUDIO_AMPLIFIER 5562 6563
1543
-Vaudio
13
3
7405
EHT
+Vaudio
7990 TDA2616Q
7
Vaudio+1
LINE OUTPUT CIRCUIT + E/W CORR.
AUDIO OUTPUT
1401 1
VIDEO SUPPLY FILAMENT
+5V VSVM
2
2
+200V
3
3
FILAMENT
4
4
5
5
A4
EW_DRIVE
9002
+5V
To 3405, 3463, 3475 on
10
HOR. DEFL. COIL
A2
BCL 1454
5001
To TUNER Pin 6.7
+200V
FILAMENT 3351
VT_SUPPLY
+200A
To TUNER Pin 9 6001 -/C33
FOCUS VG2
2
6
2
6484
B1
1404 1
6571
5561 6562
Vbatt
6483
FILAMENT
1351 1
HDRIVE
5
-Vaudio
TO CRT
1
7404
5520
A3 TUNER IF
VSVM
V_DG
3
9
B2 SCAVEM
+Vbatt
A5 FEATURES & CONNECTIVITIES
A8 REAR I/O CINCH
6452 -12V
Vbutter
Vbutter
+6VA 1221
3571
12
7571
A6 CLASS D
3575
3
1
4
3401
3576
7573 STANDBY CIRCUIT
2
1903
+Vaudio
7
VT_SUPPLY
6456
1452
+9V
9910
3457
9
2456
V_DG 3455
4
2564
10
6459
To VERTICAL DEFLECTION
3610
1
8
+8V
6
+3V
+3V (N.C.)
+3V
+3V
+6V
+6V
3210
2X +6V
G
LINEARITY & PANORAMA
1
4604
+9V
+6VS
Vaux
7603 L78L33ACZ
D 7535
7200
HERCULES PWM1
115
1
DECDIG
3
3206
A1 A1
Stdby_Con
15
1X 16
POWER_DOWN
31
1212 12
3610
6610
9613 +8V
+5V +5V
7203
3208
LTI/CTI
+3.3V
+1.8V_B
only used in sets with DVD
H
+3.3V
7201-2
3209
COLD GROUND
+6V
1462
7204
G 7536
HOT GROUND
1X
+1.8V_A
3211 S
FRONT INTERFACE
1693
Vbuffer 1X
2X 6537
J
1X
2536
2
1
Vbuffer
2X
1693
+8V
9605
+6VA 5537
To 3-6692 (IR_REC) 6694 -/C5V1
6610
+3V
6536
To LED
+9VA_1
+6VA
6676
3693
3639
A4 HERCULES 2535
3690
+9VA
+6VA
A4
3565
6535
+5V
+9V
2X
5
A9 FRONT CONTROL
12
VT_SUPPLY
POWER-DOWN
6566
+9V
6454
+6VA (To 3445) 6565
+9V
6455
3532
6564
A2
4611
* see diversity table 6573
5531
+9V
9911 *
A4
7561
1212 To 6403, 3480, 3420, b-7401, c-7403 on
3485
Vaudio+1
1
+9V
FILAMENT
8
STDBY_CON
VIDEO SUPPLY
3484
(RESERVED)
+3V3 7515 TCET1103
6453
5
To 6407 on A2
AUDIO AMP
REFERENCE CIRCUIT
3458
7605
2X 1X
3608 3295 7201-1
+5V
VT_SUPPLY 3606
+5V 7210
6207 +3.3V
D
G S
+3.3V
7209
7604
RESET +5V D
3607
A4
G
3609
S
2204
+Vbutter
+Vbutter
+6V
+6V
3217 7202
+8V
+8V
I2C BUS INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM A4 HERCULES
+3.3V
PIP MODULE (optional) A5 FEATURES & CONNECTIONS
+3.3V
A3 TUNER IF
A5
H
F1 PIP POWER SUPPLY
LTI/CTI
F2
ERROR CODE LIST
TUNER IF
ERR 6
3202
PART OF VIDEOPROCESSER (HERCULES)
3204 1206
7200 20 SET PROCESSOR 21
6210
1214
SDA
SDA
1
1
1
1
SCL
SCL
3
3
3
3
3605
6211
5
3601
ERR 19,20
1215
3214
+3.3V
22
1206
3207
WRITE_PROTECT
7
3604
6
3001
5
3000
3616
4
7601 PCF8511 EEPROM (NVM)
1000 TUNER
ERR 9
ERR 10
14 1005 1 2 For COMPAIR only
3617
11
3244
5
3243
6
3002
5
3001
4
3207
10
7610 TDA9178T LTI/CTI PROC.
7242 SDA9488X PIP PROC.
1000 UV1316 TUNER PIP
7201 TDA9887 PIP IF DEMO.
ERR 15
ERR 12
ERR 4
ERR 16
3
3206
Error 0 1
Device Not applicable Not applicable
2
Not applicable
Error description No Error X-Ray/Over -voltage protection (US only) High beam (BCI) protection
3
Not applicable
Vert ical guard protection
5
Not applicable
+5v protection
6 9
I2C bus 24C16
10
Tuner
11
TDA6107/A
15
TDA9178T/N1
19
TDA1200x
20
TDA1200x
11
Check item
Diagram
2411, 2412, 2413, 6404, 6411, 6412 3404, 7405
A2
3466, 7451, 7452, 7453, 7454 7604, 7605
A5
General I2C error I2C error while communicating with the EEPROM
7200, 3207, 3214 7601, 3604, 3605
A4 A5
I2C error while communicating with the PLL tuner Black current loop instability protection I2C error while communicatin g with LTI module I2C error while communicating with SSD stereo sound decoder
1000, 5001
A3
7330, 3351, CRT
B1
I2C error while communicating with video cosmic in Hercules IC
A2
A2
7610
H
7200
A4
7200
A4
E_14480_026.eps 190204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
44
7. Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts Mono Carrier: Power Supply 1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
POWER SUPPLY 1503 LKS1AF 4
F542
"$"
1 F508
6500
4
3
2507
2505
2n2
RES
AUDIO_GND2
5513
I571
6572
I575
7513 TCET1103(G) 2573
10n
3563
6564
220R
BAS316
+
REG
2V7
10X +
+
11 AUX
I536
3538
POWER-UP RESET
U
2.5V
100p
2K2 2549
3537
4n7
2533
100K
3531
10n
2544
GND
4
SGND
4R7 I540 2
1u0 4535
BAS316
6536
+6VA
470P
SS22220-03
470p
6537
I539
10n 9512
STPS10L60D
2543
2540
2n2
+6V 2548
9537 RES
1u0 Vaux_GND F537
4536
Vaux
10
HOT
1n
COLD
I547
Vaux_GND 2m2 16V
1
+3V F536
RES
2539
Vaux_GND
5537
SB180
RES
5536
E
100n
1u0 Vaux_GND
RES
2535
8 Vaux_GND 9
I538
2566 2547
9536
4537 6576
3532
3
5535
A2, A4(3x)
7535
SI2307DS
F
I548 I546
*
B A4
3535 I545 1K0
7536 PDTC143ZT Vaux_GND
Vaux_GND
For IDTV Only
3536
1545 Provision For Lightning Protection
0V3
FOR MAINS 120V AC 170V (177V) 220V AC 309V (317V) ..V.. Normal Operation (..V..) Standy Mode "$"
2545
2546
For IDTV Only
SOURCE 0V
3542
I529
12 I532 1R8 (Basic) 2R2 (IDTV)
1.8
6
BLANK
F
0V3
I531
68p
PROT LOGIC
I544
Vaux_GND 7
4
1u0
SB160
68K
2534
LOW FREQ
8K2
470p 3533
2531
THERMAL SHTDWN
OSC
6540
6
I537
POWER_DOWN
BAS316
I565
6535
5534
5531
3V3 F564
-17V7
3565
RES
1m0 6.3V 2536
5532
3539 3R3
RC
1V
33P
9532
+
STOP
T315MA
2550
-8V3
PWM
I535 5
DRAIN 14
VALLEY
LOGIC
470P
4534 RES
* *
F535
6566
6565
Vaux_GND
2537
3 VCC
5
1532
For IDTV Only
BZX384-B6V8
6533 3530
I533
SUPPLY
BZX384-B3V9
6531
BZX384-C15 I556 I557 6534
BAV21WS 100R
TEA1620 (Basic)
7531 TEA1623 (IDTV)
220R
100n
2512
7532
33u 3534
*
3V8
5533
13V
I554
330p 6532
10u 2530
3527
*
I555
*
6538
3528
2528
*
*
2532
I541
I553
F
1K2
3512
3K3
8V2
7561 PDTC143ZT
3518
15K
3519
6512
BAT54 COL
I527
D
*
2538
E
3572
2562
6V2
1K5
BZX384-B6V2
2 8V2
3577
I578
I577
9V3
6573
1
5V 3
2518
1u0
4
BZX79-C9V1
2515
1n5
470p
15V6
I523
470p
OVER POWER PROTECTION
*
6V8
220n
I519 100n
I521
BC547B
I561
470P
A4
7V6 7571
2570
3511 4R7 F510
11 2V2
330K 2513
MAXIMUM ON-TIME PROTECTION
I518 2519
OUTPUT DRIVER
1K0
47K 2516
1N5062 3520
Driver
3515
3522
9 0V
Stdby_Con
10n
10
2572
9
F573
82K
AUDIO_GND1
7573 PDTC114ET
I576
15n 3575
11
470R
C
+6VA
4K7
8
2K2 2571
I573
A2
I574
3579
3578
12
K
I572
3571
3576
3K3
*
*
A1
100n
14
5511
3524
2514
7 0V
I520
G
15
5
* AUDIO_GND2
13
100p
CURRENT SENSING
POWER-ON RESET
BURST DETECTOR
1n0
RGP10D 2517
Sense
CIRCUIT
0V 6511
I516
D 295V S 0V
4 I515
6571 BAV70
2564
100n
RES
CONTROL
* INPUT CONTROL CIRCUIT
7512
I524
LOGIC
OVER TEMPERATURE PROTECTIOM
Ctrl
Demag
3514
START-UP CURRENT SOURCE
B +16V
1n
9513 RES
HVS
VOLTAGE CONTRLLED OSCILLATOR
FREQUENCY CONTROL
6
* 2V3 G
-16V
F561
3574
Gnd
3529
(For Lightning Protection)
I513 14 297V
VALLEY
TO 1013 OF
D
Drain
CURRENT SOURCE
3517
2511
3M3
1510
START-UP
SUPPLY MANAGEMENT
*
AUDIO_GND1
2561
17
*
22u 50V
3
Vcc
6562
2
16
3521
3M3
3500 3501
1n5
2 15V5
-Vaudio
F562
*
0V
2V3
*
9514
+Vaudio
2K2
7514 BC847B
1507 For 70W Subwoofer
7511 TEA1506T/N1 I511
I562
5561
3
DSP
F563
2565
5512
I514
3513
3503
I517
I505
3M3 2509
3506
C
For Lightning Protection
*
F504
1542 For Heatsink
18
BAS316
9508
*
6575
*
1509
For DVD
1R
* 1n
3516 0R1
I504
3502
3 9504
2
1508
* *
6563
2542
F509
47K 6514
F507 MAINS SWITCH
2
I579
5562
*
F551
140V
I502
-T 4R7 I507 9511 RES
2 3 DMF-2405 9503 RES
3510
F505
4
*
Vbatt
1535 3 2 1
1543
Vaux_GND
3
9505 RES 2508
3
5500
2502
1
1
9502
1
1
* *
1M5
4
*
2
9501 RES 5501 4
1
9500 For ITV only
2
3504
1505
V
B
1506 6 5
470n 3505
* *
9507
F506
2500
I503
T4E.250V
F503
2504
* 1 4 DMF-2810
1500
1n
15K
5503
5552 27u
Vaux_GND
2m2 10V
2
A
Vaux_GND
AUDIO_GND1
F552
3573
+t RES
2
* 2551 2552
33n
AUDIO_GND2
6551
I551
2563
2503
470R
9509
100u 160V
2506
3509
2541
7541 BC857B
I552
5551
F541
I501
9506
47u 25V
3508
Audio_Gnd
16V4
2n2
*
*
9510
BZX384-C12
16V4
5502
3507 I506
I542
47K 6541
3541
1 2
1
4
*
1502 PFC5000
2553 180P
+t
5
+t 1501 PFC5000
11
I543
8
RES
2501
F501
1
1
Rp
3523
Rs
3
3
F502
2
F500
2
A
10
V_DG
DEGAUSSING COIL
1504
9
NC
G
1 2 7 9 10 13 15 16
8
HOT GROUND COLD GROUND
E_14480_006.eps 200204
3139 123 5673.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1500 B2 1501 A2 1502 A3 1503 A7 1504 A1 1505 B1 1506 B1 1507 C4 1508 C1 1509 C1 1510 D1 1532 E6 1535 A10 1542 B7 1543 B10 1545 G6 2500 B3 2501 A3 2502 B4 2503 A6 2504 B6 2505 B6 2506 A5 2507 B6 2508 B4 2509 C1 2511 D1 2512 E2 2513 E5 2514 D6 2515 D6 2516 D5 2517 E2 2518 E6 2519 D5 2528 F1 2530 F2 2531 F3 2532 F2 2533 G3 2534 F5 2535 F9 2536 F9 2537 F8 2538 E8 2539 F8 2540 F8 2541 A7 2542 B7 2543 F6 2544 G2 2545 F6 2546 F6 2547 E10 2548 F10 2549 G3 2550 F6 2551 A8 2552 A9 2553 A10 2561 C8 2562 C9 2563 B9 2564 E9 2565 B8 2566 E10 2570 D7 2571 C9 2572 D10 2573 E7 3500 C1 3501 C1 3502 C3 3503 C4 3504 B3 3505 B3 3506 C1 3507 A3 3508 A5 3509 A3 3510 B5 3511 D6 3512 E2 3513 C6 3514 D5 3515 D5 3516 D5 3517 E4 3518 E4 3519 F1 3520 D6 3521 C6 3522 D5 3523 A3 3524 C5 3527 F2 3528 F1 3529 D1 3530 F3 3531 G2 3532 E6 3533 F3 3534 F2 3535 F9 3536 F10 3537 G3 3538 G5 3539 G5 3541 A7 3542 F6 3563 E8 3565 E9 3571 C8 3572 C10 3573 D9 3574 D9 3575 D9 3576 D9 3577 D8
3578 C8 3579 C9 4534 E8 4535 F8 4536 F9 4537 E9 5500 B4 5501 B3 5502 A5 5503 B5 5511 C6 5512 B7 5513 E5 5531 E7 5532 F5 5533 F2 5534 E8 5535 F8 5536 E9 5537 F9 5551 A8 5552 A10 5561 B8 5562 B8 6500 A6 6511 E1 6512 E1 6514 C6 6531 F2 6532 F2 6533 E3 6534 F3 6535 E8 6536 F8 6537 F8 6538 F1 6540 F6 6541 A8 6551 A8 6562 B8 6563 B8 6564 E9 6565 E9 6566 E10 6571 C10 6572 D8 6573 D7 6575 D6 6576 E8 7511 C2 7512 C5 7513 E7 7514 C5 7531 E3 7532 F2 7535 F9 7536 G10 7541 A7 7561 D10 7571 D9 7573 C9 9500 B2 9501 B3 9502 B4 9503 B3 9504 B4 9505 B5 9506 A5 9507 B2 9508 C2 9509 A10 9510 A9 9511 B5 9512 F6 9513 C8 9514 B10 9532 F5 9536 E9 9537 F9 F500 A1 F501 A1 F502 A5 F503 B2 F504 C2 F505 B2 F506 B3 F507 B3 F508 B6 F509 B6 F510 D6 F535 E10 F536 E10 F537 F10 F541 A7 F542 A7 F551 B10 F552 A9 F561 B10 F562 B9 F563 B10 F564 D11 F573 C10 I501 A6 I502 B6 I503 B1 I504 C1 I505 C1 I506 A5 I507 B5 I511 C2 I513 C5 I514 C6 I515 C6 I516 C6 I517 C5 I518 D5 I519 D5 I520 E4 I521 D6
I523 D6 I524 C6 I527 E2 I529 F6 I531 G3 I532 F5 I533 E5 I535 E6 I536 G2 I537 E8 I538 F8 I539 F8 I540 F7 I541 F1 I542 A7 I543 A7 I544 F6 I545 G9 I546 F10 I547 F9 I548 F10 I551 A8 I552 A8 I553 F1 I554 F1 I555 F1 I556 F3 I557 F3 I561 D8 I562 B8 I565 E9 I571 D8 I572 C8 I573 C8 I574 C9 I575 D7 I576 C9 I577 D8 I578 D9 I579 B8
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
45
Mono Carrier: Diversity Table for A1 (Power Supply)
1
2
3
DIVERSITY TABLE FOR MAIN RANGE
B
C
D
E
32RF
FR
VBATT
130V
130V
26WSRF 30WSRF 32FSQ 143V
AUDIO OUTPUT 1508
2X5W 2X10W ---
2X5W 2X10W ---
2X5W 2X10W ---
1510
---
---
SET
200V 470U 200V 470U ----------------250V 1N5 250V 1N5 ----1MA/423V 1MA/423V ------144V 3R ----100R 100R 0R18 0R18 --------------145V 1R5 15K 15K 150K 150K --------SS40310-01 SS40310-01 GBU4JL GBU6JL ----STTH8L06D BYV29X-500 UDZS9.1B UDZS9.1B FQPF9N50 FQPF9N50 ----JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP
2505 2506 2508 2509 2528 2542 2570 3505 3506 3507 3508 3514 3520 3527 3528 3529 3523 3565 3574 5500 5502 5512 6500 6538 6551 6565 7512 7532 9502 9504 9506
6
LATAM / AP
LR 27RF 27FSQ
5
7
8
9
10
POWER SUPPLY
NAFTA
REGION
A
4
21RF 130V 2X10W
WIRE SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK --WIRE SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 200V 470U 400V 330U ------275V 100N --250V 1N5 470N --250V 1N5 250V 1N --250V 470P 1MA/423V 1MA/612V --3M3 --144V 3R ----100R 47R 0R18 0R33 --47K --1M --2M2 --276V 4R5 15K 18K 150K 33K --10MH 2A ----SS40312-01 SS42315-01 GBU4JL GBU6JL BAS316 --BYV29X-500 STTH8L06D UDZS9.1B UDZS7.5B FQPF9N50 FQPF7N80 --BC857B --JMP --JMP JMP JMP
25RF 29FSQ
29RF
29RF
28WSSF
28WSRF 32WSRF
130V
130V
130V
143V
143V
2X5W 2X5W 2X10W 2X5W 2X10W 2X10W WIRE SIN WIRE SIN WIRE SIN WIRE SIN WIRE SIN 180 SIN 180 SIN 180 SIN 180 SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK 18ST BK 18ST BK 18ST BK 18ST BK WIRE SIN WIRE SIN WIRE SIN WIRE SIN WIRE SIN 400 SIN 400 SIN 400 SIN 400 SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 18ST BK 18ST BK 18ST BK 18ST BK 400V 330U 400V 330U 400V 330U 400V 330U 400V 330U ----------275V 100N 275V 100N 275V 100N 275V 100N 275V 100N 250V 1N5 250V 1N5 250V 1N5 250V 1N5 250V 1N5 470N 470N 470N 470N 470N 250V 1N 250V 1N 250V 1N 250V 1N 250V 1N 250V 470P 250V 470P 250V 470P 250V 470P 250V 470P 1MA/612V 1MA/612V 1MA/612V 1MA/612V 1MA/612V 3M3 3M3 3M3 3M3 3M3 --------------------47R 47R 47R 47R 47R 0R33 0R33 0R22 0R33 0R22 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 2M2 2M2 2M2 2M2 2M2 276V 4R5 276V4R5 276V 4R5 276V 4R5 276V 4R5 18K 18K 18K 18K 18K 150K 150K 150K 33K 33K 10MH 2A 10MH 2A 10MH 2A 10MH 2A 10MH 2A ----------SS42315-01 SS42315-01 SS49309-01 SS42316-01 SS49308-01 GBU4JL GBU6JL GBU6JL GBU6JL GBU6JL BAS316 BAS316 BAS316 BAS316 BAS316 BYV29X-500 STTH8L06D STTH8L06D STTH8L06D STTH8L06D UDZS7.5B UDZS7.5B UDZS7.5B UDZS7.5B UDZS7.5B STP10NK8OZFP STP10NK8OZFP STP10NK8OZFP STP10NK8OZFP STP10NK8OZFP BC857B BC857B BC857B BC857B BC857B --------------------JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP
21/25RF 130V 2X10W WIRE SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK WIRE SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 450V 220U --275V 100N 250V 1N5 470N 250V 1N 250V 470P 1MA/612V 3M3 ----47R 0R33 47K 1M 2M2 276V 4R5 15K 150K 20MH 1A5 --SS42315-01 GBU4JL BAS316 STTH8L06D UDZS10B FQPF7N80 BC857B ----JMP
CHINA
INDIA
HR
HR
29RF
34RF
130V
130V
2X10W 2X5W 2X10W WIRE SIN WIRE SIN 180 SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK 18ST BK WIRE SIN WIRE SIN 400 SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 18ST BK 450V 220U 450V 220U 400V 33N 400V 33N 275V 100N 275V 100N 250V 1N5 250V 1N5 470N 470N 250V 1N 250V 1N 250V 470P 250V 470P 1MA/612V 1MA/612V 3M3 3M3 ----470R 470R 47R 47R 0R33 0R33 47K 47K 1M 1M 2M2 2M2 276V 4R5 276V 4R5 15K 15K 150K 150K 20MH 1A5 20MH 1A5 65MH 65MH SS42315-01 SS42315-01 GBU4JL BYV29X-500 BAS316 BAS316 STTH8L06D GBU4JL UDZS10B UDZS10B FQPF7N80 FQPF7N80 BC857B BC857B -------------
21/29RF
EUROPE HR
21/29RF 29FSQ
21RF
29RF 28WSSF
29RF
24WR 25/28BLD
130V
130V
130V
130V
130V
143V
2X5W 2X10+20W WIRE SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK WIRE SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 450V 220U ----250V 1N5 470N 250V 1N 250V 470P 1MA/612V 3M3 ----47R 0R33 47K 1M 2M2 276V 4R5 15K 150K ----SS42315-01 GBU4JL BAS316 STTH8L06D UDZS10B FQPF7N80 BC857B JMP JMP JMP
2X15W
2X5W 2X10W WIRE SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK WIRE SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 400V 220U --275V 100N 250V 1N5 470N 250V 1N 250V 470P 1MA/612V 3M3 ----47R 0R33 47K 1M 2M2 276V 4R5 15K 150K 20MH 1A5 --SS42315-01 GBU4JL BAS316 STTH8L06D UDZS10B FQPF7N80 BC857B ----JMP
2X5W WIRE SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK WIRE SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 400V 220U --275V 100N 250V 1N5 470N 250V 1N 250V 470P 1MA/612V 3M3 ----47R 0R33 47K 1M 2M2 276V 4R5 15K 150K 20MH 1A5 --SS42315-01 GBU4JL BAS316 STTH8L06D UDZS10B FQPF7N80 BC857B ----JMP
2X10W WIRE SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK WIRE SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 400V 220U 400V 33N 275V 100N 250V 1N5 470N 250V 1N 250V 470P 1MA/612V 3M3 --470R 47R 0R33 47K 1M 2M2 276V 4R5 15K 150K 20MH 1A5 65MH SS42315-01 GBU4JL BAS316 STTH8L06D UDZS10B FQPF7N80 BC857B -------
2X5W 2X10W WIRE SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK WIRE SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 400V 220U --275V 100N 250V 1N5 470N 250V 1N 250V 470P 1MA/612V 3M3 ----47R 0R33 47K 1M 2M2 276V 4R5 15K 33K 20MH 1A5 --SS42316-01 GBU4JL BAS316 STTH8L06D UDZS10B FQPF7N80 BC857B ----JMP
WIRE SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK WIRE SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 450V 220U ----250V 1N5 470N 250V 1N 250V 470P 1MA/612V 3M3 ----47R 0R33 47K 1M 2M2 276V 4R5 15K 150K ----SS42317-01 GBU4JL BAS316 STTH8L06D UDZS10B FQPF7N80 BC857B JMP JMP JMP
28WSRF
32WSRF
143V
143V
2X5W 2X5W 2X10W 2X10W WIRE SIN WIRE SIN 180 SIN 180 SIN 18ST BK 18ST BK WIRE SIN WIRE SIN 400 SIN 400 SIN 18ST BK 18ST BK 400V 220U 400V 220U 400V 33N 400V 33N 275V 100N 275V 100N 250V 1N5 250V 1N5 470N 470N 250V 1N 250V 1N 250V 470P 250V 470P 1MA/612V 1MA/612V 3M3 3M3 ----470R 470R 47R 47R 0R33 0R33 47K 47K 1M 1M 2M2 2M2 276V 4R5 276V 4R5 15K 15K 33K 33K 20MH 1A5 20MH 1A5 65MH 38MH SS42316-01 SS42316-01 GBU4JL GBU4JL BAS316 BAS316 STTH8L06D BYV29X-500 UDZS10B UDZS10B FQPF7N80 FQPF7N80 BC857B BC857B -------------
AUDIO 2X5W 2X10W 2X10+20W 2X15W OUTPUT ----2A 250V 2A250V 1543 25V 1000uF 25V 2200uF 25V 2200uF 25V 2200uF 2562 25V 1000uF 25V 2200uF 25V 2200uF 25V 2200uF 2563 220R 680R 3571 220R 220R 220R 3572 220R 220R 470R SB360 6562 SB360 SB360 SB380 SB360 6563 SB360 SB360 SB380 ----JMP 9514 JMP
E_14480_019.eps 190204
3139 123 5673.1
2
B
C
D
E
REGION NAFTA ROW --1506 Main Switch --9507 JMP --9508 JMP
1
A
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
46
Mono Carrier: Deflection
4
5
6
7
8 +9V
I443
3488
I445
3487 F402 +9V 47u F414
F415
3492 RES
RES
I457
1R MRT 6453
3463
-12V4 I468
BAS316 I463
1K0
4K7
3498
1453 RES
7484 BC847B
56n
1V3 I434 0V2
2428
2425
1V7
10K
RES 3483
3K3 3494
3482
*
BAV21WS
*6483
100n 3481
RES 2480
3n3 2484
RGP10D
6454
* 3474
15K
A4 1u0
22u 100V 2470
24V 2465
2460
Vguard
3437
-0V8
E
2K0
7454 BC847B
I471 2464 470p
7453 BD136 3470
-1V9
-11V8
7452 BF422
22R 2469 220n
-12V4
1R 3467
0V5
-1V1
F458 1
I472
-1V6
4437
1451
2 -12V4
VERTICAL DEFLECTION COIL
F
F459
3461
Frame_FB A2 3471
3R3
2K2
6488 BAS316
3V6
RES
3495
G
1K5
3V3
7451 BD135
-0V6
I464
F461
8K2
FRAME DEFLECTION
3427
I425 I417
D
G
I426 6489 BZX384-C33
820K
470R 3440
3420 7410 BC857B
RGP10D
-12V
I461
7411 BC857B I421
9451
3475
F457
3464
6458
7455 BC857B -12V4
0V8 7456 BC857B 3469
-12V VDRB A4
330R
I422
I431
5451
I462
3468
F460 2K2
100K
VDRA A4
I415
Vbatt
F456
330R 2463 50V 100u 6457
0V8
+9V
2V8
1u0 16V
3493
*
3466
1n
2462
2K2
3462
1n
2461
9407
*
1K0
1n0 3436
2487
100K
2457
9417
2418
15K
9402 1
CI-15 3 SC21329
3460 470R
10n
3418 100R
2490
RGP10D
1R MRT
1V4
7406 KTC2800
6455
2456 47n I456
1452
I467
I460
*
3428 2R2
EW_DRIVE A4
3446
2482
F
4u7 2458
4R7 5406
2
1R0
0V6
F466 F455
4R7
3465
4
I416 27V6
3431
100p
3457
6456
I470 3425
3499
820K
2488
*
470p
35m
BAV21WS
3497
BAV21WS
6484 BAV21WS
F454
6459
1R0
8
*
1 Vbatt
EW DRIVE
E_14480_007.eps 200204
3139 123 5673.1
1
2
3
4
C
+9V
*
I423
VideoSupply 200V
1N4148
2459
2
5405
6408
F453
16V 470u
16V 470u
6481
RGP15G
5403 I427
2455
Filament 3455
I475
I428
*
F452
4R7
3485
I458 12
5408
6407
3458
I466
*
I459
*
2454
RGP10D
3484 7
9401
BY228-1500
6491
*
I412
2419
*
A2 F463
-12V
9
2492
*
*
I449 BZX79-B5V1 EHTb
11
I473 2416
A
6410 RGP10D
BYV29X-500 2412
6412
DMV1500M
6411
*
*
BYV29X-500 2413
1n
2408
F407
*
AK
6404
A4
1 0V7
2411
I413
HDRIVE
I455
B
6480
3486
470u 16V
33n F419
3 4V5
7404 SI2306DS
1u0
6K8
6K8 6452 I453
2468
10n
2489
0V
K
2
D
I430
100n
RES 2414
0V
5
I414
17V1
3443
RGP10D
3 PSD10-204B 6 2410
*
F418
5402 1
1K0
100n
6
6K8 1454
5
3417
I418
126V
RGP10D
2409
3404
68V
3414
2420
7405 BU4508DX
680K
33R
1V
47R
RGP10D
2403
6442
6406
6441
6486
I419
2415
I465
2u2 100V
3416
3489
I410
10
F465
-2V2 680K 3415
of CRT PANEL
3442 F464
3430 3441
To
A4 A4
3478
6K8
1404
2486 100p
BZX384-C12
VG2
1
BCL
7481 BC857B 18V1
BAS316
3410 3R3
33n
I406
FOCUS
1 4
2K2 6450
I452
F417
2417
6V
2402
6443
7408 BC847B A4
I409
3409 1K8
3K3
F412
1470
I448
3
BAS316
68R
3406
4u7 50V
2401
OR To 1404 of
3405 -12V +6VA
TO 1382 of
TO PICTURE TUBE
F416
COIL
I405
I404
1K0
3445
EHT
*
I401
3407
A2
*
*
220p
3403
390R
Frame_FB
EHTinfo
F462
3476
RES
DEFLECTION I407
8K2
2451
BC847B
1401
* 5450
3453
HORIZONTAL
LOT
6451
680p
I469
680K
3454
BZX384-C4V7 2453
I474 5401
2405
A2
7403
I403
7402 BC847B
5
56K
F451
2406
BYD33V
L.LIN
680K
1n 2KV
EHTb
E
4492
2491
3477
220R
1K0 3412
I402
3 F404 4
BAV21 6403
*
A
47n
I429
0V
3473
Filament
+9V
6401
*
A1
15n
I433
22R
POWER_DOWN
2483
6V2 I424
56K
I451
3472
3411
15n
220R 3434
3432 I432
3452
7483 2V6 BC857B
10u 50V 3491
220R
2
2427
33R
0V5
6482
BZX384-C6V8
1V7
220R 2467
68K
7401 BUH2M20AP
3451
2481
I444
0V
3433
9410 2404
+9V
CRT PANEL 1
3401
VideoSupply
HD
7480 BC857B
7V9
3R3
To 1351 of
F401
C
F420
RES
Vbatt
VT_Supply
B
10K
I446 22K
(For A80ERF042X14 Tube Only) 5410
A
10
7482 PDTA114ET
LINE + FRAME DEFLECTIONFrom LOT 5450 1402
9 3490
3
2K2
2
3480
1
5
6
7
8
9
10
1401 B2 1402 A3 1404 B5 1451 F9 1452 D8 1453 G2 1454 C8 1470 B8 2401 B3 2402 C4 2403 C4 2404 A4 2405 B4 2406 A5 2408 D2 2409 C2 2410 D2 2411 D4 2412 D4 2413 D4 2414 D1 2415 C5 2416 D5 2417 C5 2418 C6 2419 D5 2420 D1 2425 G4 2427 A5 2428 G4 2451 B8 2453 B8 2454 C9 2455 C9 2456 D9 2457 C8 2458 C9 2459 D7 2460 D8 2461 E6 2462 E7 2463 E8 2464 F8 2465 E9 2467 F9 2468 E8 2469 F8 2470 E9 2480 C9 2481 A8 2482 F3 2483 A9 2484 C9 2486 C3 2487 E4 2488 E3 2489 C3 2490 D9 2491 A9 2492 D5 3401 A2 3403 B2 3404 C5 3405 B2 3406 B3 3407 B3 3409 B4 3410 B4 3411 A4 3412 B5 3414 C1 3415 C2 3416 C4 3417 C5 3418 F2 3420 G2 3425 E4 3427 G5 3428 F5 3430 C4 3431 F4 3432 A5 3433 A6 3434 A6 3436 E4 3437 E9 3440 G3 3441 C2 3442 B8 3443 B8 3445 C1 3446 F3 3451 A6 3452 A7 3453 B7 3454 A8 3455 D7 3457 D8 3458 C8 3460 F6 3461 F7 3462 E7 3463 F7 3464 E8 3465 E7 3466 E9 3467 E9 3468 F9 3469 F7 3470 F8 3471 F9 3472 F9 3473 A8 3474 E10 3475 D10 3476 A9 3477 A8 3478 B9 3480 A7 3481 C9 3482 B9 3483 B10 3484 C8 3485 D8 3486 B9 3487 A8 3488 A7 3489 C1 3490 A8 3491 A8 3492 A9 3493 B8 3494 B9 3495 G2 3497 E3 3498 G2 3499 E1 4437 E9 4492 A9 5401 B6 5402 C3 5403 E4 5405 E4 5406 E5 5408 E6 5410 A5 5450 B6
5451 D10 6401 A4 6403 C1 6404 D4 6406 C5 6407 E2 6408 E3 6410 D5 6411 D4 6412 D4 6441 C3 6442 C3 6443 C2 6450 B9 6451 B8 6452 C8 6453 C8 6454 D9 6455 D9 6456 D7 6457 E7 6458 E8 6459 D8 6480 B9 6481 C8 6482 A10 6483 C9 6484 C10 6486 C1 6488 G5 6489 G5 6491 D5 7401 A3 7402 B3 7403 B4 7404 D2 7405 C4 7406 F3 7408 C2 7410 G2 7411 F3 7451 E9 7452 F8 7453 F8 7454 E8 7455 E6 7456 E7 7480 A7 7481 B9 7482 A9 7483 A8 7484 G3 9401 D5 9402 D6 9407 E6 9410 A5 9417 C6 9451 D10 F401 A1 F402 A1 F404 B2 F407 D3 F412 C1 F414 A5 F415 A5 F416 B6 F417 B6 F418 C4 F419 C4 F420 A5 F451 A9 F452 C10 F453 C10 F454 C8 F455 D9 F456 D10 F457 E8 F458 F9 F459 F9 F460 F6 F461 F6 F462 A9 F463 C9 F464 C6 F465 C6 F466 D9 I401 B2 I402 A3 I403 B3 I404 B3 I405 B3 I406 C3 I407 B4 I409 B4 I410 C5 I412 D5 I413 D2 I414 C3 I415 F3 I416 E3 I417 G2 I418 C3 I419 C1 I421 G4 I422 F5 I423 E4 I424 A8 I425 G2 I426 G5 I427 E2 I428 D5 I429 A9 I430 C5 I431 G3 I432 A5 I433 A4 I434 G2 I443 A7 I444 A7 I445 A8 I446 A9 I448 B7 I449 B9 I451 A7 I452 B8 I453 C8 I455 C7 I456 D9 I457 C7 I458 D7 I459 D7 I460 E7 I461 E8 I462 D9 I463 F7 I464 F8 I465 B7 I466 C8 I467 D8 I468 F7 I469 A8 I470 E7 I471 E8 I472 F9 I473 D5 I474 A5 I475 D7
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
47
Mono Carrier: Diversity Table for A2 (Deflection)
1
2
DIVERSITY TABLE FOR
A
B
C
D
Region
F
G
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
DEFLECTION
NAFTA
LATAM
AP
CHINA
INDIA
Tube
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
SMGK
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
SMGK
CPT
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
CPD
LPD
SMGK
Size
27 V
28 WR
29 RF
32 V
32 V RF
32 WR
25 RF
25 RF
27V
28WS
28WR
32WR
29RF
21RF
25RF
29RF
32WR
34RF
25RF
21RF
29RF
34RF
21RF
29RF
29FSQ
2.2nF 1.5nF 680pF 330pF 1.2nF 470pF 1.2nF 12nF 13nF 15nF 15nF 12nF 13nF 15nF 18nF 33nF 39nF 33nF 120nF 15nF 33nF 4n7 3n3 270nF 330nF 470nF 390nF 390nF 2u2 2u2 430nF 2u2 390nF 2u2 10nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 150nF 180nF 150nF 180nF 180nF 150nF 100nF 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 2n2 1n5 1n5 1n5 1n5 1n5 47n 47n 560K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 8K2 5% 8K2 5% 10K 5% 8K2 5% 8K2 5% 8K2 5% 8K2 5% 2R2 1W 5% 1R 1W 5% 1R 1W 5% 0R33 1W 5% 3R3 1W 5% 1R 1W 5% 6R8 1W 5% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 10K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 68K 1% 82K 1% 68K 1% 68K 1% 75K 1% 68K 1% 82K 1% 18K 5% 15K 5% 18K 5% 6K8 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 6K8 5% 33K 5% 22K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 22K 5% 33K 5% 22K 5% 120R 5% 120R 5% 120R 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 120R 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 150R 5% 150R 5% 150R 5% 150R 5% 1R8 1% 2R2 1% 2R4 1% 2R7 1% 2R4 1% 2R2 1% 3R3 1% 2R2 1% 2R7 1% 2R4 1% 3R3 1% 2R4 1% 2R 1% 820K 5% 820K 5% 680K 5% 390K 5% 820K 5% 820K 5% 680K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 12K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 4R7 5% 5R6 5% 5R6 5% 10R 5% 2R7 5% 5R6 5% 22K 1% 22K 1% 22K 1% 2K4 1% 22K 1% 22K 1% 56K 1% 56K 1% 56K 1% 5K6 1% 56K 1% 56K 1% 100K 5% 100K 5% 82K 5% 100K 5% 68K 5% 82K 5% 100K 5% 150K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 100K 5% 180K 5% 680K- 5% 680K- 5% 330K- 5% 680K- 5% 680K- 5% 680K- 5% 680K- 5% 33uH 42uH 25uH 33uH 42uH 50uH 33uH SC2132 9-00B CU15 CU15 SC2132 9-00B CU15 CU15 JF0501-21835B JF0501-85021B JF0501-21836B JF0501-21140B JF0101-85020B JF0101-85021B JF0501-21835B 27uH 10% 27uH 10% JMP JMP JMP 33uH 10% 33uH 10% DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M BY229X-800 BY229X-800 BY359X-1500 BY359X-1500 BU4508DX BU2725DX BU2725DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU2725DX JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP -
2411 2412 2413 2416 2418 2419 2425 2451 2457 2487 2490 3224 3295 3414 3431 3451 3452 3453 3467 3468 3471 3472 3473 3474 3481 3482 3483 3491 3494 3499 5401 5408 5450 5451 6404 6411 6412 7405 9407 9417
Region
E
3
680nF 15nF 33nF 360nF 2u2 33nF 100nF 4u7 1n5 680K 5% 8K2 5% 1R 1W 5% 82K 1% 68K 1% 18K 5% 33K 5% 120R 5% 150R 5% 2R4 1% 2R4 1% 820K 5% 15K 5% 100K 5% 680K- 5% 37uH CU15 JF0501-2153B 27uH 10% DVM1500M BU4508DX JMP -
1.5nF 330pF 470pF 1.2nF 1.2nF 220pF 680nF 1.2nF 330pF 15nF 12nF 15nF 13nF 13nF 15nF 13nF 8n2 15nF 120nF 18nF 15nF 68nF 33nF 33nF 18nF 18nF 39nF 3n3 2n2 3n3 390nF 330nF 220nF 360nF 330nF 470nF 390nF 430nF 2u2 2u2 2u2 430nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 150nF 120nF 150nF 180nF 100nF 120nF 120nF 220nF 180nF 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 3n3 1n5 1n5 1n5 1nF 1n5 1nF 1n5 47n 680K 5% 680K 5% 560K 5% 1M 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 10K 5% 8K2 5% 8K2 5% 8K2 5% 2K7 5% 8K2 5% 10K 5% 8K2 5% 8K2 5% 1R 1W 5% 4R7 1W 5% 2R2 1W 5% 6R8 1W 5% 0R33 1W 5% 1R 1W 5% 1R 1W 5% 6R8 1W 5% 10R 1W 5% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 68K 1% 120K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 68K 1% 82K 1% 68K 1% 68K 1% 82K 1% 18K 5% 27K 5% 15K 5% 6K8 5% 15K 5% 18K 5% 18K 5% 15K 5% 6K8 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 22K 5% 22K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 22K 5% 120R 5% 220R 5% 120R 5% 220R 5% 120R 5% 220R 5% 120R 5% 120R 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 150R 5% 220R 5% 1R8 1% 1R8 1% 2R2 1% 2R7 1% 2R2 1% 2R4 1% 2R4 1% 1R8 1% 3R3 1% 3R3 1% 2R4 1% 3R3 1% 2R2 1% 3R9 1% 2R4 1% 2R4 1% 3R3 1% 680K 5% 820K 5% 1M 5% 390K 5% 1M 5% 390K 5% 820K 5% 680K 5% 820K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 12K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 5R6 5% 5R6 5% 4R7 5% 4R7 5% 22K 1% 22K 1% 22K 1% 22K 1% 56K 1% 56K 1% 56K 1% 56K 1% 100K 5% 82K 5% 82K- 5% 100K 5% 82K 5% 82K 5% 100K 5% 82K 5% 82K 5% 180K 5% 680K 5% 680K 1% 680K- 5% 680K- 5% 680K- 5% 680K- 5% 680K- 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 50uH 16uH 42uH 42uH 25uH 82uH 37uH 33uH 42uH CU15 CU15 SC2132 9-00B SC2132 9-00B SC2132 9-00B SC2132 9-00B CU15 JF0501-21835B JF0501-21133B JF0501-85021B JF0101-85021B JF0501-2136B JF0501-2135B JF0501-2135B JF0501-2136B JF0101-85021B JMP 27uH 10% 68uH 5% 27uH 10% 39uH 10% JMP 27uH 10% 27uH 10% 0.58mm COL DVM1500M DMV1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M BY229X-80 BY229X-80 BY229X-800 BY229X-800 BY359X-1500 BY359X-1500 BY359X-1500 BY359X-1500 BU4508DX BU4508DX BU2725DX BU2725DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU2725DX BU4508DX JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP
680nF 220pF 1.2nF 1nF 220pF 1.2nF 680pF 1nF 12nF 15nF 8n2 15nF 12nF 8n2 15nF 13nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 33nF 68nF 33nF 39nF 68nF 3n3 3n3 270nF 330nF 300nF 220nF 330nF 390nF 300nF 360nF 2u2 2u2 2u2 2u2 2u2 2u2 10nF 33nF 33nF 10nF 33nF 33nF 220nF 270nF 120nF 220nF 220nF 270nF 120nF 220nF 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 4u7 3n3 1n5 1nF 1nF 3n3 1nF 1nF 1nF 680K 5% 1M 5% 1M 5% 680K 5% 1M 5% 1M 5% 680K 5% 1M 5% 8K2 5% 10K 5% 7K5 1% 2K7 5% 10K 5% 8K2 5% 7K5 1% 8K2 5% 6R8 1W 5% 1R 1W 5% 4R7 1W 5% 1R 1W 5% 6R8 1W 5% 10R 1W 5% 1R 1W 5% 4R7 1W 5% 10K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 10K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 82K 1% 68K 1% 68K 1% 68K 1% 68K 1% 68K 1% 82K 1% 68K 1% 56K 1% 18K 5% 18K 5% 18K 5% 15K 5% 18K 5% 18K 5% 15K 5% 18K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 33K 5% 150R 5% 120R 5% 220R 5% 120R 5% 150R 5% 220R 5% 120R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 150R 5% 220R 5% 150R 5% 2R4 1% 2R2 1% 2R4 1% 2R2 1% 2R2 1% 2R4 1% 3R9 1% 2R2 1% 2R2 1% 2R4 1% 4R7 1% 2R4 1% 2R2 1% 3R9 1% 2R4 1% 2R2 1% 430K 5% 820K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 430K 5% 390K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 15K 5% 82K 5% 82K 5% 82K 5% 56K 5% 82K 5% 100K- 5% 56K 5% 82K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K 5% 42uH 82uH 33uH 42uH 82uH 33uH 33uH CU15 CU15 CU15 CU15 CU15 CU15 37uH JF0501-2601B JF0501-2135B JF0501-2135B JF0501-2136B JF0501-2601B JF0501-2135B JF0501-2136B JF0501-2133B 22uH 27uH 10% 68uH 5% 27uH 10% 22uH 68uH 5% 27uH 10% 22uH 10% DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M DVM1500M BU4508DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU4508DX BU4508DX JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP JMP -
B
C
D
EUROPE
Tube
LPD
LPD
Size
21RF
24 WR
2411 2412 2413 2416 2418 2419 2425 2451 2457 2487 2490 3224 3295 3414 3431 3451 3452 3453 3467 3468 3471 3472 3473 3474 3481 3482 3483 3491 3494 3499 5401 5408 5450 5451 6404 6411 6412 7405 9407 9417
470pF 8n2 33nF 470nF 2u2 33nF 220nF 4u7 1nF 47n 1M 5% 8K2 5% 4R7 1W 82K 1% 68K 1% 18K 5% 22K 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 3R3 1% 3R3 1% 470K 5% 15K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K- 5% 82uH CU15 1342.0033CY 22uH 10% DVM1500M BU4508DX JMP -
1n2 13nF 15nF 2n2 470nF 33nF 220nF 4u7 1nF 1M 5% 8K2 5% 4R7 1W 82K 1% 56K 1% 18K 5% 22K 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 3R3 5% 3R3 1% 470K 5% 15K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K- 5% 37uH SC21329-00B 1342.0048B 22uH 10% BY229X-800 BY359X-1500 BU2725DX JMP
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
LPD
25 I
28 I
29 RF
28 WR
28 WS
32 WR
470pF 9n1 18nF 390nF 470nF 33nF 220nF 4u7 1nF 1M 5% 8K2 5% 10R 1W 5% 82K 1% 120K 5% 18K 5% 33K 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 1R5 1% 2R2 1% 680K 5% 15K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K- 5% 50uH SC21329-00B 1342.0048B 27uH 10% BY229X-800 BY359X-1500 BU2725DX -
470pF 9n1 18nF 390nF 470nF 33nF 220nF 4u7 1nF 1M 5% 8K2 5% 10R 1W 5% 82K 1% 120K 5% 18K 5% 33K 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 1R5 1% 2R2 1% 680K 5% 15K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K- 5% 50uH SC21329-00B 1342.0048B 27uH 10% BY229X-800 BY359X-1500 BU2725DX -
1nF 13nF 33nF 360nF 2u2 33nF 220nF 4u7 1nF 1M 5% 8K2 5% 2R2 1W 82K 1% 68K 1% 18K 5% 33K 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 2R2 1% 2R2 1% 680K 5% 15K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K- 5% 25uH CU15 1362.0016AB 39uH 10% DVM1500M BU4508DX JMP -
680pF 11nF 15nF 4n7 430nF 33nF 220nF 4u7 1nF 1M 5% 8K2 5% 3R3 1W 82K 1% 68K 1% 18K 5% 22K 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 1R5 1% 6R8 1% 470K 5% 15K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K- 5% 50uH SC21329-00B 1362-0015AB 0.588 COL BY229X-800 BY359X-1500 BU2725DX JMP
680pF 11nF 15nF 2n2 470nF 33nF 220nF 4u7 1nF 1M 5% 8K2 5% 4R7 1W 82K 1% 68K 1% 18K 5% 22K 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 3R3 1% 3R3 1% 470K 5% 15K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K- 5% 25uH SC21329-00B 1342.0042CY 22uH 10% BY229X-800 BY359X-1500 BU4508DX JMP
680pF 11nF 15nF 4n7 430nF 33nF 220nF 4u7 1nF 1M 5% 8K2 5% 3R3 1W 68K 1% 18K 5% 220R 5% 220R 5% 1R5 1% 6R8 1% 470K 5% 15K 5% 56K 5% 56K 5% 680K 5% 680K 5% 25uH SC21329-00B 1362-0015AB 33uH 10% BY229X-800 BY359X-1500 BU2725DX JMP
E
F
G
3139 123 5673.1
1
A
E_14480_020.eps 190204
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
48
Mono Carrier: Tuner IF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TUNER IF +5V +5VS Vbuffer
2 I016
4000
7
ADC
2004
+5
5
8
6006
1K5
for ATSC
F009
2016
*
*
I007
F010
SSIF
*
1V1
* *
I008
*
*
C
I012
0V3
1002
1
A4
*
7003
2013
2014
3018
* I006
5V
I003
I005
3006
1012
*
5V
* 3008
3009
F011
I017
*
I004
*
4
VIF1
0V
A4 3007
SEL_LLP|M
*
3014
2008
4006
4010 RES 3010
6004 0V
VIF2
5
A4
D
3
IFGND
AP LNA CH LNA AP Splitter UV1356A/A I G-3 TEDE9-703A UV1356A/A I G-3 50V 22P 50V 22P 50V 22P 100u 68u 100u ------------------------------------------------------0U39 0U47 0U39 -------
I009 2
*
GND_28
IFGND
*
10
1
*
2
4004
4002
E
* *
+5V
* NA/LA/AP NTSC EU Normal EU FM Radio EU Splitter UV1316E/A I-4 UR1316/A I-3 TEDE9-703A TEDH9-305A 50V 22P --50V 22P 50V 22P 68u 68u 68u 100u ----16V 100N ------25V 1N ----25V 1N --------25V 1N ------330R ----820R --------100K ----560R ------150K ----0U47 0U47 0U39 0U47 ------BFS20
*
B
RF_AGC A4
*
1 2 3
D ITEM 1000 2002 2008 2009 2013 2014 2016 3010 3014 3016 3018 3019 5002 7003
*
F006
100R
2009
RES 2002
2001 1005
7001 PDTC124ET A4
4003 5002
2003
*
I002
3001
3005
I011
RES
For Compair only
C
* *
3002
3016
A4
100n
I001
3000
4001 I015 F008
(optional)
6003
RES
SDA
220R
FOR DVD ONLY
BAS316 6002
3019
A4
SDA
4
4005 RES
1 2 3
I013
RES
I014 F007
F004
3004
SCL
SCL
4.9V
3
4.3V
AS
POWER SUPPLY
F003
11
15
1011
B
10
3003
MT
F002
34V5
2007
FOR EMC ONLY
9
2005
14
4.3V
TO 0282 OF
NC
VT_Supply
47n
TV TUNER
13
3020 BZX79-B8V2
1010
A
1004
5001
470u
6
12
2006
F005
BZX79-C33
FOR ITV ONLY
6001 10u 50V
A
F001
1
9002
*
1000
SWI
O1
4 (For Lightning Protection)
IN ING GND
GND_28
* *
TO 1510 OF 1013
1003
3
O2
5
for EMC
4013 GND_28
8
GND_28
E
1001
IFGND
1
SIF2
4
F
EU-QSS K9656M K3953M --50V 10N 10K 10K 2K2 6K8 2K2 JMP ------JMP --BAS316 1SS356 PDTC124ET
NA/LA/AP INT AP QSS CH QSS --K9352M K9362M --K7257M M1971M K6274M ------50V 10N 50V 10N ------10K --10K 2K2 --2K2 6K8 6K8 --2K2 2K2 ----JMP JMP ----JMP --JMP --JMP JMP JMP ------JMP JMP ----------1SS356 1SS356 --PDTC124ET PDTC124ET
2
SIF1
5
A4 4012
ITEM 1001 1002 1003 2003 3002 3006 3007 3008 3009 4002 4003 4004 4006 4011 4012 6002 6004 7001
4011
1u8
I010
*
5003
A4
*
3
GND_28
F
IFGND
G
G
E_14480_008.eps 200204
3139 123 5673.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1000 A4 1001 E8 1002 D8 1003 D8 1004 A10 1005 C3 1010 A3 1011 B3 1012 C10 1013 D10 2001 C4 2002 C4 2003 B5 2004 B6 2005 B6 2006 A6 2007 A7 2008 B6 2009 C9 2013 C9 2014 C8 2016 C9 3000 B4 3001 B4 3002 B7 3003 A7 3004 B7 3005 B8 3006 D4 3007 D7 3008 D7 3009 C5 3010 C8 3014 C9 3016 C9 3018 C9 3019 C9 3020 A9 4000 B4 4001 B4 4002 E8 4003 B6 4004 E8 4005 A8 4006 B7 4010 C8 4011 E8 4012 F8 4013 E9 5001 A8 5002 B6 5003 E9 6001 B6 6002 B7 6003 B7 6004 C5 6006 A9 7001 D4 7003 C9 9002 A8 F001 A5 F002 A5 F003 A5 F004 B5 F005 A4 F006 B9 F007 B3 F008 B3 F009 D3 F010 C10 F011 C3 I001 B4 I002 B4 I003 C8 I004 C9 I005 D4 I006 D6 I007 C9 I008 D7 I009 D8 I010 E8 I011 B7 I012 C9 I013 A9 I014 B3 I015 B3 I016 A6 I017 D3
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
49
Mono Carrier: Hercules
1
Vaux_GND
2
3
A5
A5
A9
INTF_U_OUT
INTF_V_OUT
KEY_protn
BAS316 3234
1n0
2282
4
5
100R
3233
A5
100u 10V
2V 7209 BSH103 GND_1 I204
6201
BAS316
7203 2V9 GND_1 I201 BC327-25 7201-2 7201-1 IMX1 3 IMX1 2V 2 5 2V 2V6
4
2V
2V6
E 1R0
3210
27K
3211
F200 1R0
3208
3209
GND_1
22n 3203 150K
for ITV only
1u0
2277
*
-1V
27K
5214 100n 2217
2214 2269 39p
7204 BC327-25 2V8 6 2V 2V 12V
I224 +1.8V_A I225 F209
5K6
+1.8V_B
3296
F
GND12
4u7 10V
220n 2290
2227
5K6
GND12
4u7
39p
A5
E
7202
BAS316
6207
+3.3V
3206
2226
3225
2268 INTF_Y_OUT
100R
2258
100n 100n
INTF_Y|GREEN_IN 100n 2243
A5
D
+3.3V
+3V
2V6 7210 BSH103
SERVICE JUMPER 9275 9252
GND12 GND_1
GND_1
A5
A5
A5
A3 A3
A3 A3 A5 A4
A5
+3.3V
#$%#
SC1_FBL
c209
c208
c207
GND1 GND2 GND3 GND12 GND_28 GND68 GND89 GND92 GND95 GND121GND125
GND2
A1,A5
D
5V
GND_1
GND_28
HC49U 24MHZ576
1u0 2246
100n INTF_Pr|RED_IN 2247
15K
*
1K0
GND92 GND3 GND2 GND1
3285
37 0V0 GNDA 48 0V0 GND3 89 0V0 GND2 111 0V0 GND1
1205
GND1 INTF_Pb|BLUE_IN
150n 2278
2251 220n 5213
2229
VIF1 VIF2
100R 6208 BAS316
+5V
#%#&
c211
100R
A5
A5
INTF_FBL
SVM 3290
BZX384-C27
3245
220R 6205
220n
*4211
*4214
I208
I203
GND89 100n
47u 25V 2223
I212 2218
3241 GND1
1M0
3217
GND12
B C
100R
3205
101 0V0
C A5
A
100R 3266
GND95
105 0V0 104 0V0 121 0V0 123 3V3 120 3V3 124 3V3 122 1V6 38 0V0 40 3V3 39 4V0 103 1V6 119 1V6 118 1V5 58 1V5 59 1V5 57 2V0 56
116 39K
0V5 2V0
0V3 100 0V3 99 GND1
GND2
15K
4K7 3279
2204
GND1
c206
I235
3265 100R
0V0
GND95
GND_1
4K7 3282 3283 4K7
3263 100R
117 0V0
GNDIF
I222 F270
100R 3264
2242
10n
2236
12K 1u5 3224
I206
SIF1 SIF2 VD c200 F204 3230 Vguard
I213
2263
2235 GND1 3232
A2 c204
9203
4210
c203
9202
+3.3V
4K7
A8
EHTinfo
10K 3295
3251
SIDE_Y|CVBS_IN
SC2_Y|CVBS_IN A8
+8V
3281 3280 4K7
3262
F202
0V0
B
1K0
GND121
2V5 90
0V3 1V2 1V2 5V0 1V7 VSSP2 128 0V0
VSSADC 34
GND89
OR To 1280 of
+3.3V
VSSCOMB 61 0V0 GND68 127 VSSC4 0V0 GND125 VSSC3 4 0V0 VSSC2 28 0V0 VSSC1|P 8 GND121
3247 100n 390R 2239 220n 2266 2u2 GND2
100R 6n8
3231 100n 100R
GND1
GND2
I205
c210
9205
100R
ROT
22K
3246
I216
3201
3287
64 54 106 107 53 55
0V5 13 0V0 10 0V0 9 3V3 14
2V0
3V2 17 0V0 16 3V4 15 0V0 7 0V0 6 0V0 18
31
30 3 22 2 1 21 20
24 25 26 27 32
3V3 3V9 0V0 3V3 3V3 3V3 2V1 2V2
0V0 0V0 0V0 0V0 5V5
0V0 23 I215
33K 33K
2240
3244
3297 3243
TOP CONTROL PANEL
SIDE AV PANEL+HP PANEL(FL13)
I236
I214
To 1010 or 1682 of 1682 1 2 3
I209
100R
GND92
A
KEY_protn
1K0
100n
11
GND1
3242
100R
10u 50V 2275
2u2 2241
22n
GND1 +5V 100p
2260 100n
1n0
*
100R 9262
3274
2285
GND2
* SC1_CVBS_IN A8
INTF_L_IN INTF_R_IN SC2_L_IN SC2_R_IN SIDE_L_IN SIDE_R_IN SC1_L_IN SC1_R_IN
SIDE_CHROMA_IN A5
22K 2259
3259
100R
2245 1n0
for EMC
3139 123 5673.1
7205 1V BC847B
5n6
1n0 2222
10n 2248
GND1
2252
3n3
GND2
*
13V
1V7
6202
A5
A2
A2
*
VDRB
3271 220R
3293 56K
100R 3235
3237
3292
1230 2257
for ITV only SC2_STATUS|ITV_MSG
10K
LIGHT_SENSOR SC1_STATUS
1234
100R
3212
+3.3V 3284 4K7
for ITV only
BZX384-C5V6 6210
4213 VDRA
A5 A8 A8
A1 A3 A1,A3:A7 BAS316 6209 SEL_LLP|M Stdby_Con 3252
SDA VOL_MUTE
*4219
3219 100R
10R 3207
GND121
A7
POWER_DOWN
A3,A5 10R 6211
BZX384-C5V6
3204 3214
100R
3218 10R
3216
A3,A5 +3.3V
POWER_DOWN LED WRITE_PROTECT SCL 3K3 3202 3K3
3215 1u0
100p 2280
2279 100R
GND121
A9
A1 A9 A5 +3.3V
IR 4K7
I2SCLK I2SWS 4K7
3261 100R 3269
3260
5K6
GND_1 3223
9204 62 1V3 81 1V4
63 0V8
108 3V5
86 3V8
2244
2230 100p 2256
100n 2287
2261 100p 3275
100R 9215
GND2
2283 10n
2255
*
100R 9257
3270
A5 A5
A5 A5 A5 A5 GND1 33n SW_SC2_CVBS I2SD|1 Reset_+5V SEL_SC2_INTF
2221 4u7
F205
3236
100R
100R
3267
9201
EW_DRIVE
SC1_CVBS_OUT
A8 A2
A5 ITV_V1OUT 100R
for ITV only 3268
100R 100R
85 4V4
2V3 2V4 2V4 0V0 42 43 44 65
83 76 75 73 72 80 79 95 94 49 100p GND2
10n 2284
2262 100p
2237
2286 100n
100n 3278
*9265
100R
*
SC2_CHROMA_IN A8
A8
+5V
7200 TDA12001H1
GND2 2254
c205
Vaux_GND
3294
!'( ) c201
H
I217
100R
220n
220n 2208
2207
A5 A5 A2
4212
100R 9261 GND2
2232
+6V
A8
IFGND
SC1_RED_IN
C Iblack BCL
4209
A8
SC1_BLUE_IN
A1
+3V
1V9 2V2 2V2 2V2 2V2 2V2 2V2 2V2 2V2 1V3
560p 100n
2231 100R
GND3 3276
100u 16V 100R
3277
1683TO 1282 OF
3288
220n 2203 GND121
A4 POWER DOWN
*9266
2264
390R
5201 2206
Vguard
GND3
c202
I226 5295
220n
+1.8V_B
F203
A2
I211
2u2 GND2
1K0
BAS316
GND3
2267 2213
100n
180R
220n
3229
I207
AGCOUT AUDOUTHPL AUDOUTHPR AUDOUTLSL AUDOUTLSR AUDOUTSL AUDOUTSR AVL SWO SSIF REFO REFIN BO GO RO CVBSO PIP DVBO FMRO DVBO IFVO FMRO EWD AVL FBISO CSY HOUT IFVO SVO CVBSI I2SDI1 O I2SDO1 I2SDO2 I2SCLK I2SWS INT0 P0<0:5> INT1 T0 INT2 T1 RX TX SCL SDA P1<0:7> TPWM PWM0 PWM1 PWM2 PWM3 PWM4 P2<0:5> ADC0 ADC1 ADC2 ADC3 P3<0:3> QSSO AMOUT AUDEEM SVM UOUT VDRA VDRB VOUT YOUT
VCC8V
GND92
SC1_GREEN_IN
100n 3221
220n
6203
A2
G
VDDA_1.8
220n GND95 2225
2211 GND89
3220
2273
100u 10V 2272
+3.3V
To 1729 Of
Vguard
VDDA1
5216
GND2
F
7V0
1V4
10
+3.3V
VSSA1
2274
84 2216
Rear I/O Scart 1684
36 2V0
220n
E
3V3
5206
+1.8V_A 2212
41
*
A5
+3.3V
120R
3254
GND92
220n 5215
125 VDDA3_3.3 35 VDDA2_3.3
3V3 2215 3V3 220n
2210
VDDADC_1.8
A5 A5 A8 A8 A5 A5 A8 A8
SS14
F207 +1.8V_B GND125
7208 13V
9
I228
1V4 78 2V3 109 2V8 115 2V3 91 2V0 11 1V7 97 0V0 52 2V0 102 2V3 112 4V0 113 2V0 88 2V3 110 1V5 87
5205
1V5 71
220n +3.3V
VDDC4 VDDC3 VDDC2 VDDC1
3V4 46 3V2 45 1V6 70 1V6 77 1V4 74
100n 5203
2205
*
VDDCOMB
4u7 50V
GND68
2V0 126 5 2V0 2V0 29 12 2V0 2V0 33
+5V
8
VDDP_3.3
1V3 51
100u 25V 2249
5207
F201
60
1V3 50
GND68
5V0
VIDEO SIGNAL PROCESSOR
+1.8V_A
(+8V)
Vbuffer
GND1 220n
100u 10V
2250
19
Φ
5210 +5V
6204
2238
7
AGC2SIF AUDIOIN2L AUDIOIN2R AUDIOIN3L AUDIOIN3R AUDIOIN4L AUDIOIN4R AUDIOIN5L AUDIOIN5R B PBIN3 G YIN3 R PRIN3 BCLIN BLKIN C2 C3 C4 CVBS2 Y2 CVBS3 Y3 CVBS4 Y4 DECBG DECDIG DECSDEM DECV1V8 EHTO INSSW3 IREF PH1LF PH2LF PLLIF SECPLL SIFAGC DVBAGC SIFIN1 DVBIN1 SIFIN2 DVBIN2 VGUARD SWIO VIFIN1 VIFIN2 VREF_NEG_HPL+HPR VREF_NEG_LSL+HPL VREF_POS_HPR VREF_POS_LSL VREF_POS_LSR+HPR VREFAD VREFAD_NEG VREFAD_POS VSC XTALIN XTALOUT UIN VIN YIN YSYNC
5209 2224
GND121
3V3 47 5V1 VP3 82 5V1 VP2 5V1 114 VP1
100n
+5V
5211
220n
100u 10V
GND1
D
2209
4V5 3V8 3V6 3V3 3V3 3V6 3V6 0V0
GND3
2234 100u 25V 2233
98 67 66 69 68 93 92 96
100n 2265 GND2
+3.3V
+5V
2276
C
5202
I210
3253
5208
6
3289
5212 +5V
*9260
Bout Gout Rout INTF_CVBS_OUT INTCO 100R 3227
I218
10n
GND2
2270 GND2 100n
2253
100n
2271
1 2 3
3228
3226
100R
680R
3222
1208
5217
A5 A5 A5 A5 A5
A3 SSIF
A8
5
100R
SC1_R_OUT
A8 SC1_L_OUT 3255 2289 1n0
100R
3248 100R
3257 100R
3256 100R
A8
RF_AGC
MAIN_OUTL
MAIN_OUTR
A8
A8
100R 3249
3258 2K2
for ITV only
3239
100R
22K
1K0 3240
3238
F206
1K0
3291 3250
I219 820R
3272
0v7
GND68
1n0
+5V
7207 BC847B
1K0
3273
B
SC2_L_OUT
A2
A2 HD
+5V 0v6
2288
F208 HDRIVE
HD_PIP
SANDCASTLE
A5
A
A5
HERCULES
4 A3
3 A8
2
SC2_R_OUT
1
6
! "
E_14480_009.eps 200204
7
8
9
10
11
G
H
1205 E8 1208 B2 1230 B7 1234 B7 1682 B10 1683 G1 1684 F1 2203 F2 2204 E10 2205 D2 2206 F1 2207 H1 2208 H1 2209 C3 2210 D2 2211 E2 2212 E2 2213 E3 2214 E9 2215 D2 2216 E2 2217 E9 2218 F7 2221 A5 2222 B8 2223 F7 2224 C2 2225 E2 2226 F9 2227 F9 2229 F7 2230 F4 2231 F2 2232 F2 2233 C2 2234 C2 2235 F6 2236 G6 2237 F3 2238 C2 2239 F6 2240 G5 2241 F5 2242 F8 2243 F8 2244 F5 2245 B8 2246 F7 2247 F7 2248 B8 2249 D2 2250 D2 2251 F7 2252 B8 2253 B3 2254 F5 2255 G3 2256 F4 2257 B7 2258 F8 2259 B8 2260 F4 2261 F4 2262 F3 2263 F6 2264 F2 2265 C2 2266 F6 2267 E3 2268 F8 2269 F8 2270 B4 2271 B4 2272 E1 2273 E1 2274 F5 2275 F5 2276 C2 2277 D10 2278 F7 2279 B6 2280 B6 2282 C9 2283 F4 2284 F3 2285 G5 2286 F3 2287 F4 2288 A2 2289 B3 2290 F9 3201 B9 3202 B6 3203 E9 3204 B6 3205 D9
3206 F9 3207 B7 3208 E10 3209 E10 3210 E11 3211 E11 3212 B7 3214 B6 3215 B6 3216 B6 3217 D9 3218 B6 3219 B7 3220 E1 3221 F1 3222 A4 3223 B5 3224 G6 3225 F8 3226 B4 3227 C4 3228 B4 3229 E2 3230 F6 3231 F5 3232 F5 3233 B10 3234 A9 3235 A8 3236 B5 3237 A8 3238 B2 3239 B2 3240 B2 3241 F6 3242 B8 3243 G5 3244 F5 3245 B9 3246 A8 3247 F6 3248 B3 3249 B3 3250 B2 3251 G5 3252 A7 3253 C5 3254 E1 3255 A3 3256 B4 3257 B3 3258 B3 3259 B8 3260 B5 3261 B5 3262 C10 3263 C9 3264 C10 3265 D9 3266 D10 3267 B5 3268 B4 3269 B5 3270 G3 3271 A7 3272 B1 3273 B1 3274 G4 3275 G4 3276 G2 3277 G2 3278 G2 3279 C10 3280 C10 3281 B10 3282 C10 3283 C10 3284 B7 3285 D9 3287 B9 3288 G2 3289 C4 3290 A9 3291 B2 3292 A8 3293 A7 3294 A9 3295 G5 3296 F9 3297 G5 4209 G1 4210 H3 4211 B9 4212 H1 4213 A8 4214 A9
4219 B6 5201 F1 5202 C3 5203 D2 5205 D2 5206 E2 5207 D2 5208 C2 5209 C2 5210 D2 5211 E1 5212 C2 5213 F7 5214 E9 5215 E2 5216 E2 5217 B5 5295 F1 6201 E10 6202 B9 6203 E1 6204 D1 6205 B9 6207 E9 6208 G6 6209 A7 6210 B7 6211 B6 7200 D6 7201-1 E10 7201-2 E10 7202 D10 7203 E10 7204 E11 7205 B9 7207 B1 7208 A8 7209 F9 7210 F10 9201 B4 9202 H2 9203 H4 9204 B5 9205 H2 9215 G4 9252 G11 9257 G3 9260 B5 9261 G3 9262 G4 9265 G2 9266 G2 9275 G11 F200 E10 F201 D2 F202 C9 F203 F2 F204 F6 F205 B5 F206 B2 F207 D2 F208 B2 F209 F11 F270 C9 I201 E10 I203 E7 I204 F9 I205 G5 I206 G5 I207 A8 I208 A8 I209 B9 I210 C2 I211 E4 I212 E7 I213 F6 I214 F6 I215 E5 I216 B8 I217 A9 I218 C1 I219 B1 I222 C9 I224 F11 I225 F11 I226 E1 I228 B9 I235 C9 I236 B9 c200 F6 c201 H4 c202 H4 c203 H5 c204 H5 c205 H5 c206 H5
c207 H6 c208 H6 c209 H6 c210 H5 c211 H6
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
50
Mono Carrier: Features & Connectivities
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A4
100R
F250 3619
+3.3V GND_1
6
100R
5
3605
A4
SDA
A4
+8V 100u 10V
9605
I232
A4
Vbuffer
INTF_CVBS_IN A4
A4 F244
6V
68K
I223
100u 10V
SW_SC2_CVBS A4
9235 RES 5602
22u 50V 2615
3614
A4
VD
A4
HD_PIP
4u7
100R
100n
47K
A4
ITV_V1OUT
SIDE_L_IN
A4 Stdby_Con
3V3
7607 BC847B
GND_1
Reset_+5V
9603
MUTING 1240
A7
5601 2630
F
TO 1138 OF
(FOR CINCH)
/
GND_1
3622
F227
100K
1 2 3 4 5 6
TO 1763 & 1764 OF
+6V
3623 100K
22K
3631
33p
2622
1K0
A8
A4
9612
A4
SIDE_CHROMA_IN A4
9280 for ITV only
1213
3626
F228
3625 10R
F229
10R 3628
F232
1221 1 2 3
E
F249
A4
1241
1n0
F248
A4 I2SCLK F251 A4 I2SD|1 I231
4601 4607
+3.3V +3V +5V For ITV Only 1243
I2SD|1
SIDE_Y|CVBS_IN A4
I2SWS I229
+9V
(FOR SCART)
F247
D
1220
+9VA_1 For ITV 1242 Only
GND_1 GND_1 GND_1
A4
F220
A4
3V2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SIDE_R_IN 9607 4606
4u7 7606 BC847B
ROT A4
F223
7V
SC2_CVBS_OUT
C
F245
SVM A4
4605 RES F222
+6VS
I233
3634
2623 I234 3609
3635
2631
+5V
GND_1 GND_1
F221
INTF_L_IN
A4 INTF_CVBS_OUT
AK K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1207
A4
470R
27K
2u2 3607
2625
E
7602 PDTC124ET
5V4 7604 BC847B 0V5
6602 BAV99 A
4u7
SEL_SC2_INTF
5V F213
F219
INTF_R_IN
A2 INTF_CVBS_IN
2617
27K
3608 5V
7605 BC327-25
100n 2624
I241
I227
3606
D
150K
+6V
F243
Iblack
2614
3637
GND_1 GND_1
VT_Supply
F242
A4
Vbuffer
3636
BAS316
100n 2621
100R
Rout
1204 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1219 A4
F212
6610
F241
To 1252 of
4612
47R
I240
2620
4610 RES 3610
Gout A4
for EMC GND3
F215
C
F240
A4
For ITV Only 1245
A4 INTF_FBL A4 SANDCASTLE
100R
1
Bout
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10R
I2S RES
2601
7 4 3 2
B
100n
100R
4602
SCL
2613
27p
3V3 F214
A4
22R
3604
SEL_SC2_INTF A4
27p 2629
WRITE_PROTECT
F237
A A4
4609
+9VA_1
EEPROM
+9VA
14 16
F238
B A4
9604 RES 3603
8
1n0
9639 RES 3639
7601 PCF85116
4K7
3601
4611
+9V
+9V
F233
27p 2628
B
F218
C A4
27p 2627
GND_1
F239
A4
2626
47u 16V
D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A
CRT PANEL
INTF_Pr|RED_IN
3618 100R
1206
To 1331 of
INTF_Pb|BLUE_IN A4
F217
FOR ITV ONLY
2611
COM GND 2
100R 3617
A4
+3.3V
F216
To 1219 of FOR ITV
I230
3 OUT
3616
To 1462 of
OUT
INTF_Y|GREEN_IN
75R
1 IN IN
4604
A4
75R 3621
F211 +6V
F226
INTF_Y_OUT
7603 L78L33ACZ
3620 75R
F210 +6VS
F230
E A4
To 1206 of
F225
INTF_U_OUT A4
To 1212 of
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15
LT1/CT1 INTERFACE PANEL
1212 F224
INTF_V_OUT A4
AV PANEL
A
LT1/CT1 INTERFACE PANEL
FEATURES & CONNECTIVITIES
LIGHT_SENSOR A4 C A4 Stdby_Con A4
F
4630
1213 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MTV
ITV
1206 A B C D E
I2SWS ITV DATA OUT/SDA I2SCLK ITV DATAIN I2SDI1 ITV CLOCK GND GND ITV SCL Light sensor C ITV POR 1 Stdby-con Stdby-con
PCMCIA iDTV USB DVD Power On Power On Power On Power On Bus Request Bus Request Bus Request Bus Request Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx Tx
G
G
3139 123 5673.1
E_14480_010.eps 190204
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1204 B9 1206 A9 1207 D9 1212 A7 1213 E9 1219 C8 1220 E8 1221 F8 1240 F4 1241 F7 1242 E6 1243 F7 1245 C7 2601 C4 2611 B2 2613 B9 2614 D5 2615 E4 2617 D6 2620 C2 2621 C2 2622 E5 2623 E2 2624 E2 2625 E1 2626 D8 2627 D9 2628 D9 2629 D9 2630 F2 2631 E4 3601 B4 3603 B7 3604 C5 3605 C5 3606 D1 3607 E1 3608 D2 3609 E2 3610 C1 3614 E4 3616 B6 3617 B6 3618 B6 3619 B6 3620 B6 3621 B6 3622 E7 3623 E7 3625 E9 3626 E9 3628 E9 3631 E6 3634 E5 3635 D5 3636 D5 3637 D5 3639 C2 4601 E7 4602 B6 4604 B1 4605 D7 4606 D7 4607 E7 4609 D9 4610 C1 4611 B1 4612 C2 4630 F2 5601 F2 5602 E5 6602 E1 6610 C2 7601 B5 7602 D5 7603 A2 7604 D2 7605 D2 7606 E5 7607 E6 9235 E5 9280 F7 9603 F1 9604 B7 9605 C3 9607 D7 9612 E7
9639 B2 F210 A1 F211 B1 F212 C2 F213 D2 F214 C4 F215 C4 F216 B6 F217 B6 F218 B6 F219 C7 F220 D7 F221 C7 F222 D7 F223 D7 F224 A6 F225 A6 F226 A6 F227 E7 F228 E9 F229 E9 F230 A9 F232 E9 F233 B9 F237 B9 F238 B9 F239 A9 F240 B9 F241 B9 F242 C9 F243 C9 F244 C9 F245 C9 F247 D9 F248 E9 F249 E9 F250 B7 F251 E8 I223 D5 I227 D1 I229 E8 I230 B3 I231 E8 I232 C3 I233 E5 I234 E2 I240 C2 I241 D1
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
51
Mono Carrier: Class D - Audio Amplifier
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CLASS D - AUDIO AMP (RESERVED) 3975 +9VB
Vaudio+
47n 2950
3
6905
Audio_Gnd 22u 2947
-V
1
-Vaudio 2
3 P0102DA
I926
RES 9914
5910
Vaudio47n
I914
100K
+Vaudio
Vaudio+
Vaudio-
VSS1
VSS2
35V 470u 2946
39K
680p
10K
15n 3956
220n 2982
Vaudio+ 680p
4912 5912
D
2970
4R7
Vaudio+
Audio_Gnd
680p
5 4 3 2 1
I943
I939
5902
I940
Audio_Gnd
BZX384-C27
I946
5908
3957 Vaudio+
33u
33u 2981
150K
F903 F905
Vaudio-
3971
6904 -V
Audio_Gnd
2971
47n
560p 3937
Audio_Gnd
I938
11
Vaudio-
-Vaudio
Vaudio+
39K 10K
OUT2
2945
2936
1902 2954
3945
I918
2953
12 10V5 I937
1u0
SW2 REL2 EN2
I945
-15V6
Vaudio680p
4R7
10K
BOOT2
2955
I936
C
F904
15n 3972
-2V8
-2V8
POWERUP
3953
-2V8
17 16 14
3
Audio_Gnd
33u
220n 2983
DIAG
220n 5907
I935
220n 2957
STAB
5901 33u
3955
10
7903 BC847B
-9V1
5911
Audio_Gnd
220n 2974
15
I934
220n
-8V8
4911
1u0 7
Audio_Gnd
220n 2980
2952
10V7
2973
BOOT1
6
2984
2958
SW1 REL1 EN1
8
47K
3946
BAS316
9
4910 Audio_Gnd
I919 I922
47K
-2V8 I921
39K
3948
1 2 4
B
-V
VDD2
OUT1
4K7
2K2
22K
3974
-15V6
3943
3961
-2V7
3947 Audio_Gnd
6901
-9V1
100n
1V5
4K7
D
Vaux_GND
Audio_Gnd
Vaux_GND
39K
I915 470R
I920
3962
1V6
Φ
CLASS-D AMPLIFIER
22u 2942
3949
7904 BC857B
3K9
3959
VDD1
3952
5
7902 TDA8925J
2960
F901
VT_Supply BAS316
13
Vaudio-
VOL_MUTE A4
6903
9915
Audio_Gnd
C
I944
I927
RES 4913 2978
470u 35V 2948
3935
2K7
120p
7901-1 LM393N
220n 2972
B
1u0 3933
I913
47K
4K7 2933
4
3934
2932
3932
3960 100K 10p
220p
3965 10K
5914
2
I942
I930
25V 47u
47n 2949
I916
1 -9V1
I911
I924
V_DG 7906 BC327-25
2963
10K
2934
100n
Audio_Gnd
8 I910
2K2
1n0 3930
I909
3942
2930
MAIN_OUTL A4
+Vaudio 2961
22K
1u
9910
3964
2977
Audio_Gnd 2928
A
Vaudio+ Vaudio+1
RES
47n
I941
Vaudio-
9913 5913
VALUE MRT
BAV99 2K2
2951
9911
Vaudio3958
150K
10K
3973
A
6906
I928
1903
*
Vaudio+
560p 3931
50 22u 2979
2931
*
Audio_Gnd 2929
E
2935
MAIN_OUTR A4
I925
100n
2939
1n0 3936
7
10K
F
For SUB Woofer And For ITV
1222 1 2 3 4 5 6
1u0 3939
120p Audio_Gnd
F910
2K7
E
-9V1
4
7901-2 LM393N
47K
4K7 2938
3940
2937
Audio_Gnd
6
220p 3938
Audio_Gnd
Audio_Gnd
8 5
-V
3941 I948
100K
F911
F
Vaudio+ Audio_Gnd
3975
ROW Europe 100R, 2W 150R, 2W
9911 1903
AMP-ST-5W-GL JMP ---
AMP-ST-10W+20W-GL --FUSE RAD LT 2A 250V IEC
AMP-ST-15W/20W-GL --FUSE RAD LT 2A 250V IEC
AMP-ST-5W-NO.SAV-EU JMP ---
AMP-ST-10W-GL AMP-ST-5W-NO.SAV-ITV-EU JMP JMP -----
AMP-ST-5W-ITV-GL AMP-ST-5W-EU AMP-ST-10W-EU JMP JMP JMP -------
AMP-ST-5W-ITV-EU JMP ---
4914
4916
4915
4917 Audio_Gnd
E_14480_011.eps 200204
3139 123 5673.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1222 F1 1902 C9 1903 A7 2928 A2 2929 E2 2930 A2 2931 A2 2932 B2 2933 B2 2934 B2 2935 E2 2936 D2 2937 E2 2938 F2 2939 E2 2942 C4 2945 D5 2946 D5 2947 B5 2948 B5 2949 A5 2950 A5 2951 A5 2952 C6 2953 C6 2954 D7 2955 C7 2957 C8 2958 C8 2960 B4 2961 A5 2963 B6 2970 D7 2971 D7 2972 E7 2973 E8 2974 E8 2977 A4 2978 B7 2979 B8 2980 C8 2981 E7 2982 C8 2983 E8 2984 C8 3930 A2 3931 A2 3932 B2 3933 B2 3934 B3 3935 B3 3936 E2 3937 D2 3938 E2 3939 F2 3940 E3 3941 F3 3942 B4 3943 C4 3945 E9 3946 D2 3947 C3 3948 D2 3949 C3 3952 C6 3953 D6 3955 C7 3956 C8 3957 D9 3958 A5 3959 C3 3960 A5 3961 C3 3962 C2 3964 A8 3965 A8 3971 D7 3972 E8 3973 A3 3974 C4 3975 A7 4910 B9
4911 C7 4912 D7 4913 B7 4914 F8 4915 F8 4916 F8 4917 F8 5901 C7 5902 D7 5907 C8 5908 D8 5910 B7 5911 C7 5912 D7 5913 A8 5914 B7 6901 D2 6903 A9 6904 D3 6905 B5 6906 A6 7901-1 B3 7901-2 E3 7902 B5 7903 D3 7904 C2 7906 A8 9910 A7 9911 A7 9913 A8 9914 B7 9915 B7 F901 C2 F903 D9 F904 C9 F905 D9 F910 F1 F911 F1 I909 A2 I910 A3 I911 A3 I913 B2 I914 B3 I915 C3 I916 A4 I918 D3 I919 C4 I920 C2 I921 C4 I922 C4 I924 A5 I925 E2 I926 A8 I927 B8 I928 A5 I930 A6 I934 C6 I935 C7 I936 C7 I937 C6 I938 D6 I939 D7 I940 D7 I941 A3 I942 A8 I943 D7 I944 A9 I945 D4 I946 D9 I948 F3
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
52
Mono Carrier: Audio Amplifier
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AUDIO_AMPLIFIER
A
A
100n
2986
100n
2987
Vaudio+1
2985 RES 3985 1K0
7990 TDA2616Q +16V 7
I951
2989 220n
4
MAIN_OUTR
3 I954
F952
F955
I952
2992
1281
1280
3989 10R
22n
RES 3991
F951
I956
47n
2994
2991
B
AmpOutL
1
2996
4K7
3988
B
1n0
A4
I953
2990
F950
MAIN_OUTL
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
8 ohm / 15W
8 ohm / 15W
F953 Audio_Gnd
9 6
1n0
4K7
3992
220n
AmpOutR 2995
8
I957
+16V 2
I958
3996 3997
820K 120K
1282
POWER DOWN
4u7 3999
TO 1683 OF
47K
100n
3995 2988
I955
C
Audio_Gnd
0V7
A4
D
16V
-16V 5
68K
VOL_MUTE
7992 BC847B
2916
68K
4u7
7991 BC847B
3994 Vaudio+1
10R 2997
22n
C
Audio_Gnd
3993
47n
1K0
2993
A4
-Vaudio
7993 BC847B
D
I959
6990
E
4u7 2915
4u7 2914
4u7 2913
4u7 2912
2911
BAS316
E
Stdby_Con
3998
A4
7994 BC847B
10K
MUTING A5
E_14480_012.eps 200204
3139 123 5673.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1280 B9 1281 B9 1282 D3 2911 D3 2912 D3 2913 D4 2914 D4 2915 D4 2916 C6 2985 B4 2986 A7 2987 A7 2988 C7 2989 B5 2990 B5 2991 B4 2992 B5 2993 C5 2994 B7 2995 C7 2996 B8 2997 C8 3985 B4 3988 B5 3989 B8 3991 B4 3992 C5 3993 C8 3994 C4 3995 C6 3996 D5 3997 D4 3998 E3 3999 D4 6990 D3 7990 B6 7991 C6 7992 C5 7993 D5 7994 E3 F950 B4 F951 B4 F952 B8 F953 C9 F955 B8 I951 B6 I952 B6 I953 B5 I954 B5 I955 C6 I956 B8 I957 C8 I958 D4 I959 D4
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
53
Mono Carrier: Rear I/O Cinch
1
2
3
4
5
REAR I/O CINCH
6
7
8
9
1 2 3
1236
ITV RES
3101
SC2_CVBS_OUT A5
68R
7104-2 IMX1
6
7104-1 IMX1 5
2
4
1
MUTING
1229
6 1 2 3 4 5
3135
C
4116
75R
4136
1113
F112
For ITV F113
9138
RES
6132
RES
1110
3138
75R
For ITV
SC2_Y|CVBS_IN A4
*
1267
3130
3129
75R
75R
4130
AV2 15
1265
I117
10K
1K0
2163
47p 100n
2
1237
1
4117
1
2157
10K
F
2 A4
F138
SC2_STATUS|ITV_MSG
3 6
7
E_14480_014.eps 200204
3139 123 5673.1
2
3
4
5
E
Sub Woofer
F120
SC1_FBL
1266
SPDIF
I118
2K2
3164 1262 8 9
3166
3156
3161
SC2_L_OUT A4
47n
A4
F119
7103 BC847B
SC1_R_IN
for ITV only For ITV
390p 1111
4115
1228 1 2 3
22R
2159
2u2 50V
F121
3162
47n
2125
390p 1112 I119
2158
3126
330p
390p
2136 2137
330p
150R
A4
SC2_R_OUT
CN-R1 I-ITV-LA ----------------JMP -----
16
SC1_L_IN I109
D
V
F111
Vbuffer
I112
R
47K 1153
47K
2u2 50V
14
13
3157
2123
A4
ITEM CN-R1 I/1 O/YUV-GL CN-R2 I/1 O/YUV-GL CN-R2 I/1 O-GL CN-R1 I/1 O-GL CN-R1 I/1 O/YUV-SY-ITV-GL --4101 --JMP --JMP 4102 --JMP JMP --JMP 4103 --JMP JMP --JMP 4109 --JMP ------4110 --JMP --------4111 --JMP ----4130 ----JMP ----9112 JMP JMP --JMP --9113 JMP JMP JMP --JMP JMP JMP --9114 JMP --JMP JMP --9116 JMP ---
4104 RES
330p
2131
3132
47K
2133
I120 50V 2u2
9101
F110
3133 47K
A4
150R
1224
L
3131
I114 3134
75R
4113
2134
I113
4144
3124
330p
2122
50V 2u2
SC2_R_IN
*
3125 150R
2127
1109
75R
3121 4110
6106
BZX284-C6V8
*
F109
A4
I110
330R 9113
I111
2124
F123
A4
SC1_CVBS_IN
3123 150R
2132
I116
SC2_L_IN
4111
9
* 390p
1108
R
4105 RES
F108
2126
1107 11
10
3168
3115
*9116 3122
L
SC1_RED_IN A4
RES
F107
AV1
I106
3116
4108 1106
D
12
3167
RES
3113
1105
*
9114
F122 F106
1223-3
A4
RES
47K
8
RES
Y
I105 SC1_BLUE_IN
3114
4107 F105
5
1
1137
1264
V
F
3136 RES
A4
RES
*9112
I115
A4
75R
SC2_CHROMA_IN I104 SC1_GREEN_IN 3169
RES
3111
4109
1104
7
6
V
for ITV
F116
10u
3112
U
E
SC2_R_OUT A4
1263
F104
1223-2
B
for ITV
For ITV
4106
YUV INPUT
SC2_L_OUT A4
10u 4112
220K 220K
2108
1103 4103
I107
* * *
C
F117
2106
150R
4102
4101
I108
3105
F103
330p 3106
4
390p
2107
1102 1
V
390p
B
150R
330p 3104
2
R
2105
3103
F102
2103
L
1138
A5
3 2 1
From 1240 OF
3
2104
1223-1
F115
MONITOR OUTPUT
A
3
1227
1101
A
1 2 3
F101
6
7
8
9
1101 A3 1102 B3 1103 B3 1104 C3 1105 C3 1106 D3 1107 E3 1108 E3 1109 F3 1110 C8 1111 D8 1112 E8 1113 C8 1137 B9 1138 A3 1153 F9 1223-1 B2 1223-2 C2 1223-3 E2 1227 B6 1228 E9 1229 B8 1236 A4 1237 F9 1262 F6 1263 C5 1264 C5 1265 D5 1266 F5 1267 D5 2103 B4 2104 B4 2105 B5 2106 B5 2107 B3 2108 B3 2122 E4 2123 E5 2124 F4 2125 E5 2126 E3 2127 F3 2131 D7 2132 D7 2133 E7 2134 D7 2136 D8 2137 E8 2157 F9 2158 F7 2159 F8 2163 E9 3101 A3 3103 B4 3104 B4 3105 B4 3106 B4 3111 C4 3112 C4 3113 C4 3114 C4 3115 D4 3116 D4 3121 E4 3122 D4 3123 E3 3124 E5 3125 E3 3126 F5 3129 C9 3130 C9 3131 D8 3132 D7 3133 D8 3134 E7 3135 C7 3136 C7 3138 C7 3156 F8 3157 E8 3161 E7 3162 E9
3164 F7 3166 E7 3167 C5 3168 D5 3169 C5 4101 C2 4102 C3 4103 C2 4104 D8 4105 E3 4106 C3 4107 C3 4108 D3 4109 C3 4110 E3 4111 E3 4112 B5 4113 D6 4115 E6 4116 C9 4117 F9 4130 C9 4136 C7 4144 E6 6106 E3 6132 C8 7103 E8 7104-1 A4 7104-2 A4 9101 D6 9112 C4 9113 E4 9114 C4 9116 D4 9138 C7 F101 A3 F102 B3 F103 B3 F104 C2 F105 C2 F106 D2 F107 D2 F108 E2 F109 E2 F110 D8 F111 D8 F112 C8 F113 C8 F115 B7 F116 B5 F117 B5 F119 E9 F120 F9 F121 E9 F122 D2 F123 E2 F138 F6 I104 C5 I105 C5 I106 D5 I107 B4 I108 B4 I109 E5 I110 D5 I111 E5 I112 E5 I113 D7 I114 D7 I115 C7 I116 D6 I117 E7 I118 E8 I119 E8 I120 D6
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
54
Mono Carrier: Front Control
1
2
3
4
FRONT CONTROL
1602
3681
820R
1K8
3687
3686
390R
150R 1603
A
I686
volume-
USA
F683
I683
channel-
1604
channel+
DVD Eject
POWER
1606
I682
volume+
I688
I681
TS
3685
1K2
3684
9683
RES
A
3683
F682
RES
KEY_PROTN
3689
A4,A9
1601
1600
F685
B
B
STANDBY LED 6691 F693 1 2
*
I689
330R 3693
*
A4
3
IR_OUT
F692
4691
6692 TSOP1836
1 F699 2
IR LED_OUT
D
GND
D
for ITV only
F695
1692
BPW46
6693
4694
OUT
IR RECEIVER
For Engg Purpose Only F694
VS
BZX384-C5V1
3694 F691
IR
C
I693
100u 6694
3692
C
3691
220R
4692 F696
2691
LED
A4
4695 RES
4K7
RES
3690
I691
3695
220R
+6V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7691 BC847B
680K
47n 3696
2692
I687
*
4693
F697
1693 1 2 3 4 5 6
To 1693 of
1600 A4 1601 A4 1602 A4 1603 B3 1604 B3 1606 B2 1692 D4 1693 D4 2691 C4 2692 E2 3681 A4 3683 A2 3684 A2 3685 A3 3686 A3 3687 A4 3689 A2 3690 C4 3691 C3 3692 C2 3693 C4 3694 C3 3695 B2 3696 E2 3697 E3 4691 D2 4692 C2 4693 E3 4694 D1 4695 B3 6691 C3 6692 C4 6693 D2 6694 C4 7691 D3 9683 A2 F682 A2 F683 A4 F685 B4 F691 D2 F692 D3 F693 C2 F694 D1 F695 D2 F696 C1 F697 D4 F698 E3 F699 D3 I681 A2 I682 A3 I683 A3 I686 A4 I687 D2 I688 A3 I689 C4 I691 B3 I693 C3
3697
E
10K
F698
E
LIGHT_SENSOR A4 KEY_PROTN A9
ITEM NO. 6691
NAFTA
EU
LATAM
AP
4693
SETS WITH LIGHT_SENSOR JMP
LTL-10234WHCR LTL-10234WHCR LTL-10224WHCR LTL-10224WHCR (RED) (RED) (GREEN) (GREEN) E_14480_015.eps 200204
3139 123 5673.1
1
2
3
4
E_06532_012.eps 130204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
55
Mono Carrier: DVD Power Supply
1
2
3
4
5
6
DVD POWER SUPPLY (RESERVED) Vaux
1582
A
ITV only
4 3 2 1
A
ITV only
22K
3584 2K7
I588 3 OSC
I582
8K2
3582
100n
2584
2n2
B 4K7
3583
1n0
2587
I584
6
SB340
1
6581
GND BOOT
7
100n
COMP
2583
F583
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 SS_INH
Vaux_GND
2586
Vaux_GND
F582
47u
I583 Vaux_GND
F581
Vaux_GND +5V
5581
OUT 4
1m0 16V
B
FB 8
VCC
2588
220n 3581
2582
100u 25V
2581
100R
3585
5
I587
DVD/IDTV
1581
7581 L4978
Vaux
Vaux_GND
Vaux_GND
Vaux_GND
Vaux_GND
4581 7582 L78L08ACZ OUT COM 2
3
C
Vaux_GND 2u2
2u2
IN
2590
1
+9VB
Vaux_GND
22n
Vaux_GND +9VA
2589
C
2585
I585
MainSupplyGnd MainSupplyGnd MainSupplyGnd E_14480_016.eps 200204
3139 123 5673.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1581 A6 1582 A6 2581 B1 2582 B2 2583 C2 2584 C2 2585 C3 2586 B3 2587 B4 2588 B5 2589 C1 2590 C2 3581 B2 3582 C3 3583 B5 3584 B5 3585 B1 4581 C2 5581 B4 6581 B4 7581 A3 7582 C2 F581 B6 F582 B6 F583 B6 I582 B2 I583 B2 I584 B3 I585 C3 I587 B4 I588 B4
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
56
Layout Mono Carrier: (Top Side) 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1010 1011 1012 1013 1137 1138 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208
E8 E6 E5 E5 E7 E8 E7 E7 E6 E8 C8 E7 C6 D5 D5 E7 D7
1212 1213 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1227 1228 1229 1234 1236 1237 1240 1241 1262 1280
C6 C5 C7 E4 C5 D3 D8 C7 E8 C8 D5 D7 E8 D4 D5 D7 E3
1281 1401 1402 1404 1451 1452 1453 1454 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508
3139 123 5673.1
E3 C7 A6 A5 C7 A8 B5 B7 A2 A2 B2 C3 C2 A2 A2 C2 A2
1509 1510 1532 1535 1542 1543 1545 1581 1582 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1606 1682 1692
C2 B1 B3 C5 C4 C4 C4 D4 C3 C1 C1 D1 D1 C1 A1 D4 C1
1693 1902 1903 2006 2008 2105 2106 2123 2125 2132 2134 2203 2217 2218 2224 2230 2234
C1 D2 D3 E7 E8 D7 D7 D7 D7 C7 C8 D5 E5 D6 E5 D6 D6
2240 2250 2251 2265 2273 2275 2401 2404 2405 2406 2411 2412 2413 2415 2416 2417 2418
E5 D6 E5 E6 E6 E6 A7 B6 A6 A6 B6 A6 B6 A5 B6 A6 A5
2419 2427 2451 2454 2455 2457 2458 2459 2460 2463 2465 2467 2481 2484 2486 2500 2501
B6 B6 A8 A8 A8 C7 C7 A8 A7 C8 C8 C7 A7 A8 B6 A2 C2
2502 2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 2511 2514 2528 2534 2535 2536 2537 2539 2540
C2 A4 A4 A4 A3 A3 C2 C1 A5 A4 B4 B3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3
2541 2542 2543 2545 2546 2551 2552 2561 2562 2563 2565 2570 2581 2588 2611 2621 2624
C3 B4 B3 B3 B3 B5 C5 C4 B4 C4 C4 B4 C4 C4 E4 E5 E5
2691 2945 2948 2949 2960 2961 2978 3020 3101 3103 3105 3112 3114 3116 3122 3123 3125
B1 D2 D2 D2 D2 D1 C3 E7 D8 D8 D8 D8 D8 D8 D8 D8 D8
3131 3133 3138 3157 3167 3201 3215 3224 3230 3231 3234 3239 3241 3246 3249 3252 3258
C8 D8 D8 E8 D7 D5 D5 E5 D4 D6 C6 C7 E5 D5 D7 D5 D7
3260 3270 3274 3275 3276 3277 3278 3291 3401 3403 3406 3407 3410 3411 3412 3414 3415
D5 D7 D7 E7 C7 C7 D7 D7 C6 A7 A7 A7 A8 A6 A6 C6 B6
3417 3418 3425 3430 3431 3432 3433 3434 3440 3441 3442 3443 3451 3454 3455 3457 3458
A6 C5 C5 B6 C6 B7 B6 B6 C5 B6 A7 A7 B6 A8 B8 B8 B7
3460 3461 3466 3467 3468 3470 3471 3472 3482 3483 3484 3485 3497 3500 3501 3502 3503
B7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C8 C7 C7 B8 B8 B8 B8 C5 B1 B1 A1 B1
3504 3505 3506 3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 3513 3514 3515 3516 3519 3520 3521 3523 3529
B2 A2 B1 B3 A3 B2 B2 B5 A5 A5 A5 A4 B4 A4 A5 B2 B3
3531 3532 3534 3542 3563 3571 3574 3575 3577 3584 3585 3603 3606 3616 3617 3618 3683
B4 B3 B4 B3 C4 B5 B5 B5 B5 C4 D4 C6 E4 C6 C6 C6 B1
3943 3945 3961 3962 3975 5201 5208 5216 5217 5401 5402 5403 5405 5406 5408 5410 5450
C2 D3 C3 D3 D3 D5 D6 D6 D7 A6 B6 B5 B5 B6 B6 B6 B7
5451 5500 5501 5502 5503 5511 5512 5512C 5512D 5531 5532 5536 5537 5551 5552 5561 5562
B7 B2 B2 A3 A3 A4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B3 C4 C4 B5 B5 B4 B4
5581 5602 5603 5901 5902 5907 5908 5913 5914 6001 6401 6403 6404 6406 6410 6411 6412
D4 D7 C7 D2 D2 D1 D2 D3 D3 E8 A6 C6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6
6452 6453 6454 6455 6456 6459 6480 6481 6486 6500 6511 6535 6536 6537 6540 6551 6562
C7 B7 B8 B8 A8 B8 B8 B8 C6 A4 A5 C4 C3 C3 B3 C5 B4
6563 6573 6575 6581 6691 6692 6693 6905 7203 7204 7401 7405 7406 7451 7452 7453 7512
C4 B5 A4 D4 A1 B1 B1 D1 E5 E5 A6 B6 C5 C8 C8 C7 A4
7513 7531 7571 7581 7601 7603 7605 7902 7906 7990 9002 9101 9112 9113 9114 9116 9120
B5 B3 B5 D4 D5 E4 E5 C2 C3 E3 E7 D8 D8 D8 D8 D8 C7
9121 9122 9123 9124 9125 9126 9128 9129 9138 9201 9202 9203 9204 9205 9206 9207 9208
D7 D7 D7 D8 D7 D8 D7 D7 D8 E6 E4 E6 E7 D4 D4 D4 D4
E_14480_002.eps 190204
9209 9210 9211 9212 9213 9214 9215 9216 9217 9218 9219 9220 9221 9222 9223 9224 9225 9226 9227 9228 9229 9230 9231 9232 9233 9234 9235 9236 9237 9238 9239 9240 9241 9242 9243 9244 9245 9246 9247 9248 9249 9250 9251 9252 9253 9254 9255 9257 9258 9259 9260 9261 9262 9263 9264 9265 9266 9267 9268 9269 9271 9272 9273 9274 9275 9276 9277 9278 9279 9280 9290 9294 9295 9296 9297 9298 9299 9401 9402 9407 9410 9417 9460 9466 9467 9469 9470 9473 9474 9475 9476 9477 9478 9479 9480 9481 9482 9483 9484 9485 9486 9487 9488 9489 9490 9491
C5 E7 D7 E7 D7 D4 E7 D4 D6 E6 D6 D5 D5 E5 E6 D5 D4 D4 D5 D4 D5 D5 E6 E5 E6 E7 D7 C5 D6 D7 E6 E5 C6 D4 C4 E6 E4 E6 E4 E6 D4 E6 E5 C5 D5 C7 C7 D7 C7 D7 D7 D7 D7 E7 C7 C7 C7 D7 D7 C4 E5 D4 D4 D4 C5 D5 C6 D4 D4 D5 E6 C6 C5 C5 C4 C5 C5 B5 B6 B6 B6 A5 B6 B5 B6 C5 C6 C5 C5 C5 C5 C6 C6 C6 C6 C6 C7 C8 C7 C7 B7 B8 A8 B8 A8 A6
9492 9500 9501 9502 9503 9504 9505 9506 9507 9508 9509 9510 9511 9512 9513 9514 9532 9536 9537 9570 9573 9574 9575 9576 9577 9578 9579 9582 9583 9584 9585 9586 9587 9589 9590 9591 9592 9593 9604 9605 9607 9612 9631 9633 9637 9639 9642 9643 9653 9660 9661 9662 9663 9664 9665 9666 9683 9688 9689 9690 9694 9695 9696 9910 9911 9913 9914 9915 9920 9921 9924 9926 9927 9933 9935 9936 9937 9939 9940 9941 9942 9943 9944 9946
C6 A2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B3 A3 A2 A2 C4 C4 B2 B3 B5 C4 B3 C4 C4 A3 C2 B4 C3 A4 B5 B3 C3 C4 C4 B4 A4 C4 B4 C5 C5 C3 C3 C4 C6 E6 D7 E4 C6 C7 E7 E4 D7 D5 D4 C1 C1 B1 C1 C1 B1 C1 B1 E4 E4 E4 E6 E4 D4 C3 D3 D3 D3 C3 D3 D3 D2 D3 D2 D3 D3 C3 C3 D3 C3 D3 D3 D3 D3 C2
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
57
Layout Mono Carrier (Overview Bottom Side) 2001 2002 2003 2004 2007 2009 2013 2014 2016 2103 2104 2107 2108 2122 2124 2126 2127
A8 A8 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 B7 A7 B8 B8 B8 B7 B8 B8
2131 2133 2136 2137 2157 2158 2159 2163 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212
C8 C8 C8 B8 A8 A8 A7 A7 A5 B5 B5 A4 A4 B5 B5 B6 B5
2213 2214 2215 2216 2221 2222 2223 2225 2226 2227 2229 2231 2232 2233 2235 2236 2237
B5 A5 B6 B6 A5 A5 B6 B6 A5 A5 B6 B6 B6 B6 A5 A5 B6
2238 2239 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 2249 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 2257
A5 A5 A5 B6 B6 A5 A5 B6 B6 A5 B6 B6 A6 A6 A7 A6 A6
2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2266 2267 2268 2269 2270 2271 2272 2274 2276 2277
B6 B5 A6 A6 B6 A6 B6 A6 A6 A5 A5 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 B5
2278 2279 2280 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286 2287 2288 2289 2402 2403 2408 2409 2410 2414
A5 B5 B5 B5 A6 A6 A6 B6 B6 B4 B4 E8 E8 C6 D6 C6 C6
2420 2425 2428 2453 2456 2461 2462 2464 2468 2469 2470 2480 2482 2483 2487 2488 2489
C6 C6 D7 E8 D8 D7 D7 C8 C8 D7 C8 E8 C5 E8 D6 C5 D6
2490 2491 2512 2513 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 2530 2531 2532 2533 2538 2544 2547 2548
D8 E8 E5 E5 D5 E5 E5 E5 E5 D4 D4 D4 D3 C4 D4 C4 C4
2549 2550 2553 2564 2566 2571 2572 2573 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 2601 2613 2614
D3 D3 D4 C4 C4 D5 C5 D5 C4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B5 B5 B7
2615 2617 2620 2622 2623 2625 2626 2627 2628 2629 2630 2692 2928 2929 2930 2931 2932
B7 B7 A5 B7 A5 A4 C6 B6 B6 B6 C7 D1 C3 B3 B3 C3 C3
2933 2934 2935 2936 2937 2938 2939 2942 2946 2947 2950 2951 2952 2953 2954 2955 2957
C3 C3 B3 B3 B3 B3 B3 C2 B2 C2 B2 C2 C2 C2 B2 B2 B1
2958 2963 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974 2977 2979 2980 2981 2982 2983 2984 2985 2986 2987
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 C2 C3 B1 B2 B2 B2 B2 B3 A3 A3
2988 2989 2990 2991 2992 2993 2994 2995 2996 2997 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006
A3 B3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A8 A8 A8 A7 A8 A7 A5
3007 3008 3009 3010 3014 3016 3018 3019 3104 3106 3111 3113 3115 3121 3124 3126 3129
A5 A7 A5 A7 A7 A7 A7 A7 B7 A7 B8 B8 B8 B8 B7 B7 C8
3130 3132 3134 3135 3136 3156 3161 3162 3164 3166 3168 3169 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206
C8 C8 C8 C8 C8 A8 B8 A8 B8 A8 B7 B7 B5 A5 B5 A5 A5
3207 3208 3209 3210 3211 3212 3214 3216 3217 3218 3219 3220 3221 3222 3223 3225 3226
B5 A4 A4 A4 A4 B5 B5 B6 A5 B5 B5 B6 B6 A6 A4 B6 B6
3227 3228 3229 3232 3233 3235 3236 3237 3238 3240 3242 3243 3244 3245 3247 3248 3250
B6 B6 B6 A5 C6 A5 A5 A5 B6 B6 B6 A5 A6 C5 A6 B7 B7
3251 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 3259 3261 3262 3263 3264 3265 3266 3267 3268 3269 3271
A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 B7 B5 B4 B5 B5 B5 B5 B5 A6 B7 B5 B6
3272 3273 3279 3280 3281 3282 3283 3284 3285 3287 3288 3289 3290 3292 3293 3294 3295
B6 B6 B5 B5 B5 B5 B5 B5 A4 B5 B5 B6 C6 B6 B6 C6 A5
3296 3404 3405 3409 3416 3420 3427 3428 3436 3445 3446 3452 3453 3462 3463 3464 3469
A5 E6 E7 E8 D6 C6 D7 D7 D5 C5 C5 D7 E7 D8 D8 C8 C8
3473 3474 3475 3476 3477 3478 3480 3481 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3494
E8 C7 C7 E7 E8 D8 E7 D8 D8 E7 E7 C5 E8 E8 E8 E8 E8
Part 1 E_14480_003a.eps
Part 2 E_14480_003b.eps
Part 3 E_14480_003c.eps 3139 123 5673.1
Part 4 E_14480_003d.eps E_14480_003.eps 190204
3495 3498 3499 3512 3517 3518 3522 3524 3527 3528 3530 3533 3535 3536 3537 3538 3539 3541 3565 3572 3573 3576 3578 3579 3581 3582 3583 3601 3604 3605 3607 3608 3609 3610 3614 3619 3620 3621 3622 3623 3625 3626 3628 3631 3634 3635 3636 3637 3681 3684 3685 3686 3687 3689 3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 3695 3696 3697 3930 3931 3932 3933 3934 3935 3936 3937 3938 3939 3940 3941 3942 3946 3947 3948 3949 3952 3953 3955 3956
C6 C6 C6 E5 E5 E5 E5 E5 D4 D4 D3 D3 C3 C3 D3 D3 D3 C3 C4 C5 D5 D5 D5 D5 B4 B4 B4 B5 B5 B5 A4 A5 A4 A4 B7 C6 C6 C6 A4 A4 B5 B5 B5 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 C1 C1 B1 B1 C1 C1 C2 E1 E1 D1 E1 D1 D1 D1 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C2 B3 B3 B3 B3 B3 B2 C2 B3 C2 C3 C2 C2 C2 B2 B2
3957 3958 3959 3960 3964 3965 3971 3972 3973 3974 3985 3988 3989 3991 3992 3993 3994 3995 3996 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4010 4011 4012 4013 4015 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 4109 4110 4111 4112 4113 4115 4116 4117 4130 4136 4144 4209 4210 4211 4212 4213 4214 4219 4221 4222 4223 4224 4226 4227 4240 4241 4470 4492 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 4601 4602 4604 4605 4606 4607 4609 4610 4611 4612 4620
B3 B1 C3 B1 C3 C3 B2 B2 B2 C2 B3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 B3 A3 B4 A8 A8 A5 A7 A5 A7 A8 A7 A6 A6 A6 A8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 B8 C7 C7 B7 C8 A8 C8 C8 B7 A6 B6 B6 B5 B6 C6 B5 B5 A5 A6 A5 A5 A6 C4 C4 E8 E8 E5 C4 C4 C3 C4 A4 C6 A4 C7 C7 A4 A6 A4 B4 A5 C7
4631 4635 4637 4642 4644 4645 4646 4648 4649 4691 4692 4693 4694 4695 4696 4910 4911 4912 4913 4914 4915 4916 4917 4921 5001 5002 5003 5202 5203 5205 5206 5207 5209 5210 5211 5212 5213 5214 5215 5513 5533 5534 5535 5601 5910 5911 5912 6002 6003 6004 6005 6106 6132 6201 6202 6203 6204 6205 6207 6208 6209 6210 6211 6407 6408 6441 6442 6443 6450 6451 6457 6458 6482 6483 6484 6488 6489 6512 6514 6531 6532 6533 6534
B4 C7 B6 A7 A7 B6 B5 B7 A4 C1 D1 D1 C1 E1 C1 B3 B2 B2 C2 A4 A4 A4 A4 C2 A7 A7 A5 B5 B5 B6 B5 B5 A5 B6 A6 A6 B6 A5 B5 D5 D4 C4 C4 C7 C2 B2 B2 A8 A8 A5 A7 B8 C8 A4 B6 B6 A6 C6 A5 C5 C4 B5 B5 D5 D5 D6 D6 C6 E7 E7 C7 C8 C5 C7 D6 D7 D7 D5 E5 D3 D4 D4 D4
6538 6541 6564 6565 6566 6571 6572 6576 6602 6610 6694 6901 6903 6904 6906 7001 7003 7103 7104 7200 7201 7202 7205 7207 7208 7209 7210 7402 7403 7404 7408 7410 7411 7454 7455 7456 7480 7481 7482 7483 7484 7511 7514 7532 7535 7536 7541 7561 7573 7602 7604 7606 7607 7691 7901 7903 7904 7991 7992 7993
D4 C3 C4 C4 C4 C5 D5 C3 A4 A5 C1 B3 C3 C2 B2 A5 A7 A7 B7 B6 A5 A5 C5 B6 B6 A5 A5 E7 E7 C6 C6 C6 C6 C8 D8 D8 E7 D8 C5 E8 C5 E5 E5 D4 C3 C3 C2 C4 C5 B7 A4 B7 B7 D1 C3 C3 C3 B3 B3 B4
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
Layout Mono Carrier (Part 1 Bottom Side)
Part 1
7.
58
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
59
Layout Mono Carrier (Part 2 Bottom Side)
Part 2
E_14480_003b.eps 200204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
60
Layout Mono Carrier (Part 3 Bottom Side)
Part 3 E_14480_003c.eps 090204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
61
Layout Mono Carrier (Part 4 Bottom Side)
Part 4 E_14480_003d.eps 090204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
62
CRT Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CRT PANEL
ITEM 3328 3329 3330 3337 4328 4329 4330 4337 5351 9351
A
B1
9
10
11
ROW THE REST RGB+DISPL-29FS_IN 100R 100R 100R 100R 100R 100R ----------------JMP --IND FXD LAL04A 22U PM10 --JMP JMP
A
AQUADAG WIRE
1332
10R +200VA
0330 MECHPART
CRT Sockets
3333 100R
140V
3334 I333
OUT2 8
BC2
3335 I334
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
G1
6 CG
CG G2
CR
8
H1
9
H2
10
CB
11
GND
12
Green
7V
C
CR H1 H2 CB GND
BCI 5
PROTECTION
CRT
7 G2
I335
Red
6V
2333
GND
D GND_CRT
4
R
I355
5355
1331
G
THERMAL
B
1K
3331 100R
140V
1n5
7
Blue
5
G1
1 F331
V
Vref 2.5V
I337
B
BC3
2332 F341
6
10n 3357
*
OUT3 7
A3 Vref
I332
R
F340
5
6
RES 9352
4330
3330 100R
4328
3328 100R
D
3k75
3332
Vdd
F339
5
1n
3k77
I336
1K
100R
140V
G
5
RES
A2 Vref
I331
F338
1K 3336
Vdd
2V5
G3
1
7
NOT USED
BC1
I330
188k7 3 IN3
1
G3
2331
A1
3k77
3k75
1
T0 CRT SOCKET
OUT1 9
Vref
BAV21
6331
Vdd
2V5
*
BAV21
6332
6333
10n
2334
188k7
188k7 2 IN2
1254-A
3355
100R
3329
4329
3k75
*
1
B
1256-A
4
3k77
2V5
C
1255
6 Vdd
1 IN1
BAV21
7330 TDA6107
100n
2330
B
2 F332 4337 3337
*
SVM_ROT
*
3n3
2353
1K5
3354 9351
ROT B2
F356
27u
680p
5352
*
2352
BZX384-C5V6
F336
BZX384-C5V6 6337
6 7
BZX384-C5V6 6336
5
BC_INFO
F335
6334
Features & Connectivities
* BZX384-C5V6 6335
4 F334
E
T0 CRT SOCKET
3 F333
From 1204 of
5351
E
F
I357
3356
EHTb
8
F
I353
B2 1352
+200V 1351
FOCUS
VG2
10n
2335
VSVM
EHT
1
F351 2 I351
3351
3
100R
F354 +200VA
From 1401 of
LINE + FRAME DEFLECTION
5330
F353
5
G
10u
2351
Line + Frame Deflection
G
FROM LOT, MAIN CHASSIS Filament
4 F352
EHTb B1
E_14480_017.eps 200204
3139 123 5674.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0330 B1 1254-A B7 1255 B6 1256-A B6 1331 E1 1332 B7 1351 F2 1352 F9 2330 B3 2331 D6 2332 C5 2333 D4 2334 B3 2335 F2 2351 G3 2352 F6 2353 F7 3328 D2 3329 C2 3330 D2 3331 D4 3332 C4 3333 C4 3334 C5 3335 C4 3336 C5 3337 E3 3351 G3 3354 F5 3355 E6 3356 B6 3357 D6 4328 D2 4329 C2 4330 D2 4337 E3 5330 G5 5351 F3 5352 E4 5355 E6 6331 C4 6332 B4 6333 B4 6334 F2 6335 F2 6336 F3 6337 F3 7330 B2 9351 F3 9352 E6 F331 E1 F332 E1 F333 E1 F334 E1 F335 E1 F336 F1 F338 C5 F339 C5 F340 C5 F341 C5 F351 G2 F352 G2 F353 G4 F354 G3 F356 E5 I330 C4 I331 C4 I332 D4 I333 C4 I334 C4 I335 D4 I336 C5 I337 D3 I351 G2 I353 F5 I355 D6 I357 B7
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
63
CRT Panel: Eco Scavem
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ECO SCAVEM A 3364
560R
2363
22u 100V
1K8
1K8
I360
3373
0316
I374
3376
B
14V4
22u 100V
2368
1n0
2362
250
10R
83V
35V
2364 400 V
1361
I369
2365
33R
4n7
I365
3369
6383
I371
SCAVEM COIL
C
7364 2SC3421
0V3
10R
2385
58V I372 1R8
3370
I363
560R
3368
220p
47p
2387
D
2381
7331 BC847B
1K2
3383
I381
RGP10D
1K0
I386
2367
68K
3367
K
3389
35V
7362 BC857B
13V
3390
Filament
3 2 1
470R
68K
9361 RES
10R
3362
3366
AK BAV99 6361
22n
5331
100u 25V
D
F361
F362
14V F360
5361
A
4n7
I364
B1SVM_ROT
B
7363 2SA1358
3371
33R A
2376
83V I366 3365 I367
I362
I375
C
I368 220p
To 1470 of
13V6
AK BAV99
6376
2384
1382
3388
K
MECHPART
7361 BC847B
I361
68K
26V
47n
I373
20V
2361
1K8
1K5
3387
3361
3375
20V 7376 BC857B
180K
I370
10u 100V
VSVM
3363
A
17V7 7381 BC337-40
8V7
I383
9V4
2382
100n
2383
1u0
F382
BAS316
1381 3 2 1
ROTATION COIL
3386 8V7
82K
F
4374
1K0
RES
7382 BC337-40
0V6
10K 3385
I384
I385
3374
3384
F
E
7366 BC857B F381
100n
2386
B1 ROT
6381
7332 BC857B
100R
E
3381
I387
E_14480_018.eps 200204
3139 123 5674.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0316 A6 1361 B7 1381 E7 1382 B4 2361 B4 2362 B4 2363 A4 2364 B4 2365 C4 2367 C6 2368 B4 2376 C2 2381 D3 2382 E6 2383 F6 2384 B5 2385 C5 2386 F3 2387 D3 3361 B3 3362 C3 3363 A5 3364 A5 3365 B5 3366 C5 3367 C5 3368 D5 3369 C5 3370 D5 3371 C6 3373 A2 3374 F5 3375 B2 3376 B2 3381 E4 3383 D4 3384 F4 3385 F4 3386 F5 3387 B3 3388 B4 3389 C4 3390 D3 4374 F5 5331 D2 5361 B6 6361 C3 6376 B2 6381 E5 6383 D2 7331 E3 7332 E3 7361 B3 7362 D3 7363 B5 7364 C5 7366 E6 7376 B2 7381 E5 7382 F5 9361 B6 F360 D2 F361 B6 F362 C6 F381 E7 F382 E7 I360 A5 I361 B3 I362 B3 I363 D3 I364 C3 I365 C4 I366 B5 I367 B5 I368 B5
I369 C5 I370 A4 I371 C5 I372 C5 I373 B3 I374 B2 I375 C2 I381 D3 I383 E4 I384 F4 I385 F4 I386 D2 I387 E3
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
64
Layout CRT Panel (Top Side)
E_14480_004.eps 100204
0316 0330 1254 1255 1256 1331 1332 1351 1352 1361 1381 2330 2351 2352 2353 2361 2363 2364 2367 2368 2381 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 3336 3351 3354 3355 3356 3362 3364 3367 3371 3373 3381 5330 5331 5351
A2 A1 A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1
5352 5361 6331 6332 6333 6383 7330 7363 7364 7381 7382 9351 9352 9361 9373 9390
A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A2 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A2 A1 A2
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
65
Layout CRT Panel (Bottom Side)
2333
3376
2376
E_14480_005.eps 100204
2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2362 2365 2376 2382 2383 2384 2385 2386 2387 3328 3329 3330 3337 3357 3361 3363 3365 3366 3368 3369 3370 3374 3375 3376 3383 3384 3385 3386 3387 3388 3389 3390 4328 4329 4330 4337
A1 A2 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1
4370 4374 6334 6335 6336 6337 6361 6376 6381 7331 7332 7361 7362 7366 7376
A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
Side AV + Headphone Panel 1 2
3
L04U AA
7.
4
5
66
6
7
8
9
10
SIDE AV PANEL + HP PANEL 6 1 2 3 4 5
Video_Gnd 3159
75R
1
1
*
1277-A
2175
1250-C
* I155
4
*
1277-B
*
2178
470pF
1279
I162
2176
3 3157
470pF
for 2X10W from 1902
B
2
I163
*
7
3 2 1
I171
* 1250-B
8 9
C
330p
2171
150R
2u2 50 47K
2180
F150
D
* 9180
F151
E_14480_037.eps 190204
3139 123 5718.1
1
TO ECO SUB
I169
*
3151
3150
RES
2174
SG03
5 6
*
2172
RES
I152
LEFT
D
2173
SG04
7
9152
1250-A
4
RES
9
9175
*
F154
TO SPEAKER
3153
8
3152
RIGHT
*
for 2X5W from 1280
2u2
Video_Gnd
C
F152
5
2181
*
SG11
SG09
Video_Gnd Video_Gnd
I168
1u
3
Video_Gnd
3156
4 3 2 1
I170
6
39K
2
SG10
VIDEO IN
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F153
SG08
SG02
Video_Gnd
6161
B
BZX79-C6V8
100R
5 4 3 2 1
1278
1232
I166
1254
from Main Chassis
1252
3160
Features & Connectivities
I157
From Main Chassis 1207
Video_Gnd
75R
3154
*
3161
SG01
75R
9181
4180
3155
1251 LAP5100-1411F
A
HEADPHONE
100R 3158
A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1232 A9 1250-A C1 1250-B D1 1250-C C1 1251 A2 1252 B5 1254 B6 1277-A C1 1277-B D1 1278 A10 1279 B10 2171 D4 2172 C4 2173 C3 2174 D3 2175 C4 2176 B8 2178 B8 2180 D4 2181 C8 3150 D3 3151 D3 3152 C3 3153 C3 3154 B2 3155 A2 3156 B8 3157 B8 3158 A3 3159 A4 3160 B4 3161 C8 4180 A2 6161 B3 9152 D3 9175 C4 9180 D4 9181 A3 F150 D4 F151 D4 F152 C4 F153 B4 F154 B7 I152 D3 I155 C3 I157 B3 I162 B7 I163 C8 I166 B7 I168 B8 I169 C8 I170 B10 I171 B10 SG01 A3 SG02 B3 SG03 D3 SG04 C3 SG08 B4
SG09 B4 SG10 B4 SG11 B4
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
67
Layout Side AV + Headphone Panel (Top Side) 1232 1250 1251 1252
A4 A3 A2 A1
1254 1277 1278 1279
A3 A2 A4 A4
2171 2172 2173 2174
A1 A2 A3 A2
2175 2180 3150 3151
A2 A1 A2 A2
3152 3153 3154 3155
A3 A3 A1 A1
3156 3157 3158 3159
A4 A4 A1 A1
3160 6161 9152 9175
A1 A1 A3 A2
9180 A1 9181 A1
E_14480_038.eps 100204
3139 123 5718.1
Layout Side AV + Headphone Panel (Bottom Side) 2176
A1
2178
A1
2181
A2
3161
A2
4180
A3
2181
3139 123 5718.1
E_14480_039.eps 100204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
68
Top Control Panel
Layout Top Control Panel (Bottom Side)
1010 A1 1012 B3 1014 B2 3011 A2 3013 A3 3015 A3 F011 A2 I011 A2 1011 B3 1013 B2 3010 A2 3012 A2 3014 B3 3016 B3 F012 A3 I013 A3
1
2
I017 B3 I018 A3
3010 A1 3011 A1 3012 A1 3013 B1 3014 B1 3015 B1 3016 C1
3
E TOP CONTROL (PV2) 1010 1
FROM 1682 OF
A
2
KEY_PROTN
F011
A *
3015 3016
* SKQNAB
volume-
B
I017
E_14480_031.eps 190204
3139 123 5714.1
1
I018
1012
* SKQNAB
volume+
1011
SKQNAB
channel-
150R 390R 1K8 JMP 820R JMP
200R 430R 2K2 200R 820R 120R
1014
3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016
SKQNAB
L04
channel+
ITEM L03SS
1013
B
*
3013
F012
I013 3014
I011
*
3012
*
3011
RES
3010
3
2
3
Layout Top Control Panel (Top Side) 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014
A1 B1 C1 A1 A1
3139 123 5714.1
E_14480_032.eps 190204
3139 123 5714.1
E_14480_033.eps 100204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
69
Linearity & Panorama Panel
1
Layout Linearity & Panorama Panel (Top Side)
2
3
4
LINEARITY & PANORAMA PANEL
INNER PIN CUSHION CORRECTION A
2n2
B
2467 3468
I410
2464
I416
2n2
I405
2466
47K
10u
6462
100R
3464
2470
15K
2469
*
3467 2K7
2460
I409
4R7 3469 3470
*
*
RGP10D
6464
2K7
3463
BZX79-C4V7
2u2 100V
I413
3466
100n
2465 I402
2468
I412
I408
2K2
B
7460 BC547B 6460
I406
BZX79-C12
1
3465
I417
7462 IRF640 I404
470K
3461 I403 3462
I407
4
6K8
1461 TO HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION COIL
100K
A
C
C
I415
*
DIVERSITY TABLE
2466
34 BMCC
29 RF PDCC
34 RF PDCC
470N
220N
120N
1464
10u
6463
22u
1463
*
1N4148 2471
5461
*
I2SD/1
3 2 +9V 1
I419
2478
I418 7463 BC547B
1462
I420 3471 3K9
I421
1u
E
1u
2473
470n
10n 2472
2476
470n 2477
D
From 1221 of
1
22u
2
* 9460
5460
2474
1
D
4
3
4
2475
TO 1404 OF LINE DEFLECTION
E
1461 A1 1462 D4 1463 D3 1464 D1 2460 B3 2464 B4 2465 A3 2466 A4 2467 B4 2468 B1 2469 C1 2470 C1 2471 D3 2472 E3 2473 E3 2474 D2 2475 D2 2476 D1 2477 E1 2478 E1 2479 E1 3461 A2 3462 B2 3463 B2 3464 C2 3465 B3 3466 A3 3467 B4 3468 C4 3469 B1 3470 C1 3471 E4 5460 D1 5461 D1 6460 B3 6462 B4 6463 D3 6464 C1 7460 B3 7462 A4 7463 E3 9460 D1 I402 A3 I403 A2 I404 A4 I405 A4 I406 B3 I407 A1 I408 B3 I409 B2 I410 B4 I412 B1 I413 C1 I415 C1 I416 B4 I417 B1 I418 E3 I419 D3 I420 E4 I421 E3
1461 1462 1463 1464 2460
B2 D2 D1 C2 A1
2464 2465 2466 2467 2468
B2 B1 B2 A2 C2
2469 2470 2471 2472 2473
B2 B1 D2 D2 D2
2474 2475 2476 2477 2478
D2 C2 C2 C2 C2
2479 3461 3462 3463 3464
C2 B2 B1 B1 B1
3465 3466 3467 3468 3469
B1 B2 A2 A2 C2
3470 3471 5460 5461 6460
C1 D2 B2 C2 A1
6461 6462 6463 7460 7461
A2 D2 C1 A1 A2
7462 D2 9460 B2
2479 1u EU NA / LA /AP Regions Screen Size 28WS 28WR 32WR 24WR 28WS 28WR 32WR ----680nF 560nF --2469 560nF 680nF ----2470 470nF 470nF 470nF ------2474 330nF 330nF 470nF 330nF 330nF 330nF ------------2475 560nF ------JMP JMP JMP JMP 9460
E_14480_043.eps 200204
3139 123 5759.1
1
2
3
4
3139 123 5759.1
E_14480_044.eps 100204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
70
LTI/CTI Interface Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
LTI/CTI INTERFACE PANEL
To 1212 of
A
3627
INTF_FBL
4n7
1212
1K0
SANDCASTLE
I626 INTF_V_OUT INTF_U_OUT INTF_Y_OUT
B
1 2
I627
4611 4612 4613
4 GND
7611
2614
6
100n
VIDOa
100n
2V1 VIDIa2
2V2
3-STATE
SELECTABLE CLAMP
20 9V2 VCC 15 5V1 DECDIG
12
3613 3614 100K 3615 100K
100K 2615
D
100n 2616 100n
3
VIDIb1
2V1
SELECTABLE CLAMP
VIDOb
11
VIDIb2
2V1
0V6 SC 0V3 ADEXT1 0V2 ADEXT2 0V2 ADEXT3
6 7
0V5 YIN 0V ADR
18 0V
2V1 7
1 3 4 5
3-STATE
SELECTABLE CLAMP
UIN VIN SCL SDA VOUT UOUT YOUT SOUT CF
SANDCASTLE
11 12 I621
3V211 3V214 2V716 2V717 2V919 21 22
VEE
4631
3621
3619
3-STATE Vp
680p
6633
10K
1u0 3630
10K 2631
100n 3631
4630
3617
from DVD/IDTV/PIP panels 1 SDA From 1214 of
2 GND
2610
2
100n 2611
I633 330K
6
2638
7
1u0
25V 10u I624
4625 3625
From 1206 of 4614
RES
+8V
E_14480_040.eps 200204
3139 123 5740.1
1
I617
I618
3
5
3638
+8V
E
1
4
4
F
*
1206
1215
3 SCL
2606
9
RES
2627
100R
RES 3616 I623
7635 BC857BW
1 9V2
GND
680p
*
1K2 2633
4636
6636
FBI2
BAS316
9612 RES
13
5610
75R
75R
FBI1
1K0 2634
3V9
5613
3V9
FBO 14
4V5 3634
I620
100R
7630 BC847BW
2M2
4V5
1u0
3637
+8V
BAS316
SEL
3635
2630
0V 15
2626
9V
BAS316
5
3-STATE
560R
2V1
SELECTABLE CLAMP
6635
VIDIc2
470p
3636
2V1 8
*
10 470R 2636
VIDOc
3633
E
2V1
SELECTABLE CLAMP
270R
3620
100n
VIDIc1
3632
75R
100n 2618
4
D
I616
+8V 2617
C
10
BAS316
2V4
100n 2612
SELECTABLE CLAMP
9
+9V
100n
VIDIa1
8 I622
INTF_FBL
6610
2
2 10 12 13 23 24 2V 8 2V 9
3610
2605
0V
4610
0V6
DECODING
C
Φ PICTURE IMPROVEMENT
+8V
16
Pr_2
4634
4632
IOCNTR
2613
7
4633 7610 TDA9178T/N1
5 6
Pb_2 TDA8601T
B
3 I628
Y_2
From 1212 of
+9V I613
1K0
BZX384-C6V8 I614 3612
7627 PMBT2369
0V
9613
I611
1K0
100R
I619
3628
3626
GND I610 I612
6625 BZX384-C2V7
2628
1216 1 2 3 4 +9V B4B-EH-A
B5B-EH-A
1214
6611
RES
INTF_Y|GREEN_IN INTF_Pb|BLUE_IN INTF_Pr|RED_IN
0V5
2K2
1 2 3 4 5
for DVD/IDTV panels
from PIP panel
A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
F
1206 E8 1212 B9 1214 A2 1215 E8 1216 A3 2605 C5 2606 F4 2610 E9 2611 E9 2612 C5 2613 C1 2614 D1 2615 D1 2616 D1 2617 D1 2618 E1 2626 E8 2627 E9 2628 A8 2630 E4 2631 F4 2633 E5 2634 E6 2636 E7 2638 F7 3610 D9 3612 B6 3613 D5 3614 D5 3615 D5 3616 E8 3617 E8 3619 E1 3620 E1 3621 E1 3625 F9 3626 A8 3627 A8 3628 A7 3630 F5 3631 F4 3632 E5 3633 E5 3634 E6 3635 E6 3636 E6 3637 E7 3638 F7 4610 D9 4611 B6 4612 B6 4613 B6 4614 F6 4625 F9 4630 E9 4631 D5 4632 D7 4633 C8 4634 C8 4636 E5 5610 E4 5613 F9 6610 E9 6611 A6 6625 A7 6633 F5 6635 F6 6636 E4 7610 C6 7611 C2 7627 A8 7630 E5 7635 E6 9612 E4 9613 F9 I610 B2 I611 B2 I612 B2 I613 B3
I614 B6 I616 D9 I617 E9 I618 F9 I619 B6 I620 E9 I621 C8 I622 C9 I623 E8 I624 F8 I626 B9 I627 B9 I628 B9 I633 F8
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
Layout LTI/CTI Interface Panel (Top Side) 1206 1212 1214 1215
A1 A2 A1 A1
3139 123 5740.1
1216 2611 2636 5610
A1 A2 A2 A2
5613 9612 9613 9614
A2 A2 A2 A2
71
Layout LTI/CTI Interface Panel (Bottom Side) 9615 9616 9617 9618
A2 A2 A2 A2
2605 2606 2610 2612 2613 2614 2615
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2
2616 2617 2618 2626 2627 2628 2630
A2 A2 A2 A1 A2 A1 A1
2631 2633 2634 2638 3610 3612 3613
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2
3614 3615 3616 3617 3619 3620 3621
A2 A2 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2
3625 3626 3627 3628 3630 3631 3632
A2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 4610
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
4611 4612 4613 4614 4617 4625 4630
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A1
4631 4632 4633 4634 4635 4636 4637
A1 A1 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1
6610 6611 6625 6633 6635 6636 7610
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2
7611 7627 7630 7635
A2 A1 A1 A1
E_14480_041.eps 100204
3139 123 5740.1
E_14480_042.eps 100204
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts
L04U AA
7.
72
Front Interface Panel
Layout Front Interface Panel (Top Side)
1
2
3
1211 D1 1231 C3 1505 A1
4
FRONT INTERFACE PANEL A
A
LATAM 100V - 250V NAFTA 110V EUROPE 220V - 240V
9001 RES 1231
AC MAINS
T4.0AE
INPUT
5
1211
I012
1 2
110V/220V
2
4
I013
1
3
I014
I002
From 1505 OF POWER SUPPLY
B
9002 RES
3M3
3501
1505 1 2
SDKVE30100
3M3
3500
B
I001
6
4001 I003
C RES
3694
C 6692 TSOP1836 3 1 2
A9
4 5
6691
I008
1
I010
2
100n
FOR ITV ONLY
10u 50V 2698
I004
D
I007
2698 A3 3500 B2 3501 B3
3691 B3 3693 B3 3694 B3
6691 B4 6692 B4 6693 A4
9001 C1 9002 D2 9685 B3
9695 B3 9696 A3
3139 123 5722.1
E_14480_035.eps 100204
Layout Front Interface Panel (Bottom Side)
LTL-10224WHCR L01 USA ONLY
I015
I011 6693
6
GND
I009
2691
3
OUT
220R
I006 9695
2
3693
+6
3691
D
FROM 1693 OF FRONT CONTROL
I005
330R
1
7691 RES
LTR-301
1693
VS
1211 B1 1231 A3 1505 B4 1606 D3 1693 D1 2691 D4 2692 E2 2698 D4 3500 B2 3501 B2 3691 D3 3693 D3 3694 C4 3696 E2 3697 E2 4001 C3 4601 E2 6691 D3 6692 C4 6693 E2 7691 E2 9001 A3 9002 B3 9695 D3 I001 B2 I002 B3 I003 C3 I004 D1 I005 D1 I006 D1 I007 D3 I008 D1 I009 D4 I010 D1 I011 D3 I012 B2 I013 B4 I014 B4 I015 D1 I016 E2
1606 D4 1693 A3 2691 A4
1606 POWER
E
47n
4601
680K 2692
E
3696
I016
3697 10K
E_14480_034.eps 200204
3139 123 5722.1
1
2
3
4
3139 123 5722.1
E_14480_036.eps 100204
Alignments
L04U AA
8.
EN 73
8. Alignments 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Index of this chapter: 1. General Alignment Conditions 2. Hardware Alignments 3. Software Alignments and Settings Note: • The Service Default Mode (SDM) and Service Alignment Mode (SAM) are described in chapter 5 “Service Modes, ...”. • Menu navigation is done with the CURSOR UP, DOWN, LEFT, or RIGHT keys of the remote control transmitter.
8.1
10.
General Alignment Conditions
11.
Perform all electrical adjustments under the following conditions: • AC voltage and frequency: 120 V_ac / 60 Hz or 240 V_ac / 50 Hz (region dependent). • Connect the set to the AC power (a.k.a. Mains voltage) via an isolation transformer with a low internal resistance. • Allow the set to warm up for approximately 20 minutes. • Measure the voltages and waveforms in relation to chassis ground (with the exception of the voltages on the primary side of the power supply). Never use the cooling fins / plates as ground. • Test probe: Ri > 10 Mohm; Ci < 2.5 pF. • Use an isolated trimmer / screwdriver to perform the alignments.
12.
13.
SATURATION/COLOR to “0”. CONTRAST to “0”. BRIGHTNESS to minimum (OSD just visible). Return to the SAM via the MENU key. Connect the RF output of a pattern generator to the antenna input. Test pattern is a 'black' picture (blank screen on CRT without any OSD info) with a signal strength of 1 V_pp. Set the channel of the oscilloscope to 50 V/div and the time base to 0.2 ms (external triggering on the vertical pulse). Ground the scope at the CRT panel and connect a 10:1 probe to one of the cathodes of the picture tube socket (see diagram B). Measure the cut off pulse during first full line after the frame blanking (see figure “V_cutoff waveform”). You will see two pulses, one being the “cut off” pulse and the other being the “white drive” pulse. Choose the one with the lowest value; this is the “cut off” pulse. Select the cathode with the highest V_dc value for the alignment. Adjust the V_cutoff of this gun with the SCREEN potentiometer (see figure “Top view family board”) on the LOT to 160 V_dc, except for the 25/28BLD picture tube (Black Line Display, for EU only); this tube must be aligned to 140 V_dc. Restore BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST to normal (= 31).
max.
8.2
Hardware Alignments
VCUTOFF [VDC] 0V Ref.
E_06532_011.eps 110204
Figure 8-2 V_cutoff waveform C
1506
1504
8.2.2
1. Tune the set to a circle or crosshatch test pattern (use an external video pattern generator). 2. Choose picture mode NATURAL (or MOVIES) with the SMART PICTURE button on the remote control transmitter. 3. Adjust the FOCUS potentiometer (see figure “Top view family board”) until the vertical lines at 2/3 from east and west, at the height of the centerline, are of minimum width without visible haze.
7990
5512
7601 9275 SDM
A
9252 1221
1204
B
1000 (TUNER)
LOT
Focus Screen VG2
D 1005 ComPair
E_14480_030.eps 130204
Figure 8-1 Top view family board 8.2.1
Focusing
Vg2 Adjustment 1. Activate the SAM. 2. Go to the WHITE TONE sub menu. 3. Set the values of NORMAL RED, GREEN and BLUE to “32”. 4. Go, via the MENU key, to the normal user menu and set
EN 74 8.3
8.
L04U AA
Alignments
Software Alignments and Settings 00028 L4LUS1 0.12 SDM ERR 0 0 0 0 0 OP 000 057 140 032 120 128 000
00028 L4LUS1 0.12 ERR 0 0 0 0 0
. OP1 . OP2 . OP3 . OP4 . OP5 . OP6 . OP7
0 57 140 32 120 128 0
Clear ? On
SAM . Delta Cool Red -3 . Delta Cool Green -1 . Delta Cool Blue 5
SAM
OP 000 057 140 032 120 128 000 . Clear . Options . AKB . Tuner . White Tone . Geometry . Audio . NVM Editor . ComPair
SAM
SAM
. IFPLL . AGC . CL
32 30 10
SAM
. Normal Red . Normal Green . Normal Blue
32 35 41
on
1 00028 L4LUS1 0.12 CSM 2 CODES 0 0 0 0 0 3 OP 000 057 140 032 120 128 000 4 nnXXnnnn/nnX 5 P3C-1 6 NOT TUNED 7 NTSC 8 STEREO 9 CO 50 CL 50 BR 50 HU 0 0 AVL Off BS 50
SAM . Cool . Normal . Warm
SAM . Delta Warm Red 2 . Delta Warm Green -3 . Delta Warm Blue -13
SAM . Horizontal . Vertical
SAM .HP 37 .HB 31 .HSH 34 .EWW 45 .EWP 14 .EWT 27 .UCP 42 .LCP 53
SAM . QSS Off . FMI On
SAM .SBL .VSH .VS .VAM .VSC
OFF 29 37 30 25
SAM .ADR .VAL .Store
0x0000 0x0000 Store ?
0 0
E_14480_001.eps 090204
Figure 8-3 Service Mode overview
Alignments Enter the Service Alignment Mode (see also chapter 5 “Service Modes, ....”). The SAM menu will now appear on the screen. Select one of the following alignments: • Options • Tuner • White Tone • Geometry • Audio 8.3.1
Options Options are used to control the presence/absence of certain features and hardware. How to change an Option Byte An Option Byte represents a number of different options. Changing these bytes directly, makes it possible to set all options very fast. All options are controlled via seven option bytes. Select the option byte (OP1.. OP7) with the MENU UP/ DOWN keys, and enter the new value. Leaving the OPTION submenu saves the changes in the Option Byte settings. Some changes will only take effect after the set has been switched “off” and “on” with the AC power switch (cold start). How to calculate the value of an Option Byte Calculate an Option Byte value (OP1 .. OP7) in the following way: • Check the status of the single option bits (OB): are they enabled (1) or disabled (0). • When an option bit is enabled (1) it represents a certain value (see column “Bit value” in table below). When an option bit is disabled, its value is 0. • The total value of an Option Byte (decimal) is formed by the sum of its eight option bits. The factory values are printed on a sticker on the CRT. Table 8-1 Option Byte calculation Bit (value)
OP1
OP2
OP3
OP4
OP5
OP6
OP7
0 (1)
OB10 OB20 OB30 OB40 OB50 OB60 OB70
1 (2)
OB11 OB21 OB31 OB41 OB51 OB61 OB71
2 (4)
OB12 OB22 OB32 OB42 OB52 OB62 OB72
3 (8)
OB13 OB23 OB33 OB43 OB53 OB63 OB73
4 (16)
OB14 OB24 OB34 OB44 OB54 OB64 OB74
5 (32)
OB15 OB25 OB35 OB45 OB55 OB65 OB75
6 (64)
OB16 OB26 OB36 OB46 OB56 OB66 OB76
7 (128)
OB17 OB27 OB37 OB47 OB57 OB67 OB77
Total:
Sum
Sum
Sum
Sum
Sum
Sum
Sum
L04U AA
8.
EN 75
EN 76
8.
Alignments
L04U AA
Option Bit Assignment
20DV6941/37
24PT6341/37
25PT6341/85
26DV6941/37
26PW6341/37
27MS6341/37
27PT5441/37
27PT6441/37
27PT6541/37
28DV6941/85
28PW6341/85
29PT6441/44
29PT6441/85
29PT6541/44
29PT6541/85
30DV6941/37
30PW6341/37
32DV6941/85
32MS6341/37
32PT5441/37
32PT6441/37
32PT6541/37
32PW6341/85
33PT5441/85
Table 8-2 Option code overview per model (OP1 - OP4)
7
Philips Tuner
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
FM Radio
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
LNA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
ATS(EU)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
ACI
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
UK PNP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Virgin Mode
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
China
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Decimal
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit Byte_1 (OP1)
Bit Byte_2 (OP2) 7
SC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
Green_UI
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
5
Channel Naming
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
LTI
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
3
Tilt
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
2
Fine Tuning
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
PIP Philips Tuner
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Hue
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Decimal
1
1
1
25
25
65
1
1
17
25
25
1
1
17
17
25
25
25
73
1
9
25
25
1
Bit Byte_3 (OP3) 7
EW Function
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
2 Tuner PIP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
PIP_Splitter
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
Splitter
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
Virtual Dolby
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
2
Wide Screen
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
WSSB(EU)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Eco_Subwoofer
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Decimal
0
128 128 140 140 128
0
128 136 140 140 128 128 136 136 140 140 140 128 128 128 136 140 128
Bit Byte_4 (OP4) 7
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
Ultra Bass
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
4
Delta Volume
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
Volume Limiter
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Stereo_Nicam_2C S
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Decimal
32
32
32
32
32
0
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
0
32
32
32
32
32
Following are the option bit assignments for all software clusters. • Option Byte 1 (OP1) – OB17: PHILIPS TUNER – OB16: FM RADIO – OB15: LNA – OB14: ATS (EU) – OB13: ACI – OB12: UK PNP – OB11: VIRGIN MODE – OB10: CHINA • Option Byte 2 (OP2) – OB27: SC – OB26: GREEN UI – OB25: CHANNEL NAMING – OB24: LTI – OB23: TILT – OB22: FINE TUNING – OB21: PIP PHILIPS TUNER – OB20: HUE • Option Byte 3 (OP3)
•
– OB37: EW FUNCTION – OB36: 2 TUNER PIP – OB35: PIP SPLITTER – OB34: SPLITTER – OB33: VIRTUAL DOLBY – OB32: WIDE SCREEN – OB31: WSSB (EU) – OB30: ECO SUBWOOFER Option Byte 4 (OP4) – OB47: Reserved (value= 0) – OB46: Reserved (value= 0) – OB45: ULTRA BASS – OB44: DELTA VOLUME – OB43: Reserved (value= 0) – OB42: VOLUME LIMITER – OB41: Reserved (value= 0) – OB40: STEREO NICAM 2CS
Alignments
L04U AA
8.
EN 77
20DV6941/37
24PT6341/37
25PT6341/85
26DV6941/37
26PW6341/37
27MS6341/37
27PT5441/37
27PT6441/37
27PT6541/37
28DV6941/85
28PW6341/85
29PT6441/44
29PT6441/85
29PT6541/44
29PT6541/85
30DV6941/37
30PW6341/37
32DV6941/85
32MS6341/37
32PT5441/37
32PT6441/37
32PT6541/37
32PW6341/85
33PT5441/85
Table 8-3 Option code overview per model (OP5 - OP7)
7
AV1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
AV2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
AV3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
CVI
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
SVHS2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
SVHS3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Hotel Mode
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit Byte_5 (OP5)
Decimal
248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248 248
Bit Byte_6 (OP6) 7
Personal Zapping
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
6
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
FM Trap
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
Combfilter
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
3
Active Control
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
2
Video Text
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Light Sensor
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
Dual Text
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Decimal
136 136 136 154 154
0
128 136 154 154 154 136 136 154 154 154 154 154
0
128 152 154 154 128
Bit Byte_7 (OP7)
•
•
•
7
Time Win1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Decimal
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Option Byte 5 (OP5) – OB57: AV1 – OB56: AV2 – OB55: AV3 – OB54: CVI – OB53: SVHS2 – OB52: SVHS3 – OB51: HOTEL MODE – OB50: Reserved (value= 0) Option Byte 6 (OP6) – OB67: PERSONAL ZAPPING – OB66: Reserved (value= 0) – OB65: FM TRAP – OB64: COMB FILTER – OB63: ACTIVE CONTROL – OB62: VIDEO TEXT – OB61: LIGHT SENSOR – OB60: DUAL TEXT Option Byte 7 (OP7) – OB77: TIME WIN1 – OB76: Reserved (value= 0) – OB75: Reserved (value= 0) – OB74: Reserved (value= 0) – OB73: Reserved (value= 0) – OB72: Reserved (value= 0) – OB71: Reserved (value= 0) – OB70: Reserved (value= 0)
Option bit definition Option Byte 1 (OP1) • OB17: PHILIPS TUNER – 0 : ALPS / MASCO compatible tuner is in use. – 1 : Philips compatible tuner is in use. • OB16: FM RADIO – 0 : FM radio feature is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : FM radio feature is enabled. • OB15: LNA – 0 : Auto Picture Booster is not available or not applicable. – 1 : Auto Picture Booster is available. • OB14: ATS – 0 : Automatic Tuning System (ATS) feature is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : ATS feature is enabled. When ATS is enabled, it sorts the program in an ascending order starting from program “1”. • OB13: ACI – 0 : Automatic Channel Installation (ACI) feature is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : ACI feature is enabled. • OB12: UK PNP – 0 : UK's default Plug and Play setting is not available or not applicable. – 1 : UK's default Plug and Play setting is available. When UK PNP and VIRGIN MODE are set to “1” at the initial setup and after exiting from menu, VIRGIN MODE will be set automatically to “0” while UK PNP remains “1”. • OB11: VIRGIN MODE – 0 : Virgin mode is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Virgin mode is enabled. Plug and Play menu item will be displayed to perform installation at the initial
EN 78
•
8.
L04U AA
Alignments
startup of the TV when VIRGIN MODE is set to “1”. After installation is finished, this option bit will be automatically set to “0”. OB10: CHINA – 0 : Tuning is not for China set, or this option bit is not applicable. – 1 : Tuning is for China set.
Option Byte 2 (OP2) • OB27: SC – 0 : Soft clipping is disabled. – 1 : Soft clipping is enabled. • OB26: GREEN UI – 0 : Green UI is disabled (for Philips brand). – 1 : Green UI is enabled (for Magnavox brand). – Note: only for NAFTA region. • OB25: CHANNEL NAMING – 0 : Name FM Channel is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Name FM Channel is enabled. – Note : Name FM channel can be enabled only when FM RADIO= “1”. • OB24: LTI – 0 : Luminance Transient Improvement (LTI) is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : LTI is enabled. • OB23: TILT – 0 : Rotate Picture is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Rotate Picture is enabled. • OB22: FINE TUNING – 0 : Fine Tuning for Channel Offset is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Fine Tuning for Channel Offset is enabled. • OB21: PIP PHILIPS TUNER – 0 : ALPS / MASCO compatible tuner is in use for PIP module. – 1 : Philips compatible tuner is in use for PIP module. • OB20: HUE – 0 : Hue/Tint Level is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Hue/Tint Level is enabled. Option Byte 3 (OP3) • OB37: EW FUNCTION – 0 : EW function is disabled. In this case, only Expand 4:3 is allowed, Compress 16:9 is not applicable. – 1 : EW function is enabled. In this case, both Expand 4:3 and Compress 16:9 are applicable. • OB36: 2 TUNER PIP – 0 : Software selection no PIP – 1 : Software selection with PIP – Note: Only for EU/AP region for sets with PIP. • OB35: PIP SPLITTER – 0 : Normal Tuner in PIP – 1 : Splitter in PIP – Note: Only for EU/AP region. For PIP sets and build in with Splitter in PIP tuner. • OB34: SPLITTER – 0 : Normal Tuner for main chassis – 1 : Splitter Tuner for main chassis – Note: Only for EU/AP region. • OB33: VIRTUAL DOLBY – 0 : Virtual Dolby is not applicable. – 1 : Virtual Dolby is applicable. • OB32: WIDE SCREEN – 0 : Software is used for 4:3 sets or not applicable. – 1 : Software is used for 16:9 sets. • OB31: WSSB (EU) – 0 : WSSB is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : WSSB is enabled. – Note : This option bit can be set to “1” only when WIDE SCREEN= “1”. • OB30: ECO SUBWOOFER – 0 : Feature is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Feature is enabled.
Option Byte 4 (OP4) • OB47: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB46: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB45: ULTRA BASS – 0 : Ultra Bass is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Ultra Bass is enabled. – Default setting is “0”. • OB44: DELTA VOLUME – 0 : Delta Volume Level is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Delta Volume Level is enabled. • OB43: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB42: VOLUME LIMITER – 0 : Volume Limiter Level is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Toggle Volume Limiter Level is enabled. • OB41: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB40: STEREO NICAM 2CS – 0 : For AV Stereo. – 1 : For NICAM Stereo 2CS. Option Byte 5 (OP5) • OB57: AV1 – 0 : AV1 source is not present. – 1 : AV1 source is present. • OB56: AV2 – 0 : AV2 source is not present. – 1 : AV2 source is present. – Note : For EU, when AV2=“1”, both EXT2 and SVHS2 should be included in the OSD loop. • OB55: AV3 – 0 : Side/Front AV3 source is not present. – 1 : Side/Front AV3 source is present. • OB54: CVI – 0 : CVI source is not available. – 1 : CVI source is available. • OB53: SVHS2 – 0 : SVHS2 source is not available. – 1 : SVHS2 source is available. – Note : This option bit is not applicable for EU. • OB52: SVHS3 – 0 : SVHS3 source is not available. – 1 : SVHS3 source is available. – Note : This option bit is not applicable for EU. • OB51: HOTEL MODE – 0 : Hotel mode is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Hotel mode is enabled. • OB50: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. Option Byte 6 (OP6) • OB67: PERSONAL ZAPPING – 0 : Personal Zapping feature is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Personal Zapping feature is enabled. • OB66: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB65: FM TRAP – 0 : FM Trap is not present. – 1 : FM Trap is present. – Note: Only for LATAM region. • OB64: COMBFILTER – 0 : 3D-combfilter is not present. – 1 : 3D-combfilter is present. • OB63: ACTIVE CONTROL – 0 : Active Control feature is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Active Control feature is enabled. • OB62: VIDEO TEXT – 0 : Video Text (DW with TXT) is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Video Text (DW with TXT) is enabled. – Note: For EU only.
Alignments •
•
OB61: LIGHT SENSOR – 0 : Light sensor feature is disabled or not applicable. – 1 : Light sensor feature is enabled. OB60: DUAL TEXT – 0 : Dual Text and Text Dual Screen are disabled or not applicable. – 1: Dual Text and Text Dual Screen are enabled.
Option Byte 7 (OP7) • OB77: TIME WIN1 – 00 : The time window is set to 1.2 s. – 01 : The time window is set to 2 s. – Note :The time-out for all digit entries depends on this setting. • OB76: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB75: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB74: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB73: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB72 Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB71 Reserved – Default setting is “0”. • OB70: Reserved – Default setting is “0”. 8.3.2
•
•
8.3.4
L04U AA
8.
EN 79
– NORMAL G= “32” – NORMAL B= “27” COOL (color temperature= 12500 K): – DELTA COOL R= “-3” – DELTA COOL G= “0” – DELTA COOL B= “5” WARM (color temperature= 6500 K): – DELTA WARM R= “2” – DELTA WARM G= “0” – DELTA WARM B= “-6”
Geometry The geometry alignments menu contains several items to align the set, in order to obtain correct picture geometry.
1
VERT. SLOPE
2
VERT. SHIFT
3
VERT. AMPLITUDE
4
V.S-CORRECTION
5
HOR. SHIFT
6
HOR. AMPLITUDE
7
E/W PARABOLE
8
UPPER E/W CORNER
9
LOWER E/W CORNER
10
E/W TRAPEZIUM
11
HOR. PARALLELOGRAM
12
HOR. BOW
Tuner Note: Described alignments are only necessary when the NVM (item 7602) is replaced. IF PLL This adjustment is auto-aligned. Therefore, no action is required. AGC (AGC take over point) 1. Set the external pattern generator to a color bar video signal and connect the RF output to aerial input. Set amplitude to 10 mV and set frequency to 61.25 MHz (channel 3). 2. Connect a DC multimeter to pin 1 of the tuner (item 1000 on the main panel). 3. Activate the SAM. 4. Go to the TUNER sub menu. 5. Select AGC with the UP/DOWN cursor keys. 6. Adjust the AGC-value (default value is 27) with the LEFT/ RIGHT cursor keys until the voltage at pin 1 of the tuner lies between 3.8 and 2.3 V (default value is “20”). 7. Switch the set to STANDBY, in order to store the alignments. CL (Cathode drive level) Always set to “5”.
8.3.3
White Tone In the WHITE TONE sub menu, the values of the black cut off level can be adjusted. Normally, no alignment is needed, and you can use the given default values. The color temperature mode (NORMAL, COOL and WARM) and the color (R, G, and B) can be selected with the UP/DOWN RIGHT/LEFT cursor keys. The value can be changed with the LEFT/RIGHT cursor keys. First, select the values for the NORMAL color temperature. Then select the values for the COOL and WARM mode. After alignment, switch the set to STANDBY, in order to store the alignments. Default settings: • NORMAL (color temperature= 9300 K): – NORMAL R= “26”
E_06532_010.eps 110204
Figure 8-4 Geometry alignments 1. Connect an external video pattern generator to the aerial input of the TV-set and input a crosshatch test pattern. Set the generator amplitude to at least 1 mV and set frequency to 61.25 MHz (channel 3). 2. Set 'Smart Picture' to NATURAL (or MOVIES). 3. Activate the SAM menu (see chapter 5 “Service Modes, ...”). 4. Go to the GEOMETRY sub menu. 5. Choose HORIZONTAL or VERTICAL alignment Now the following alignments can be performed:
EN 80
8.
Alignments
L04U AA
Horizontal • Horizontal Parallelogram (HP). Align straight vertical lines in the top and the bottom; vertical rotation around the center. • Horizontal Bow (HB). Align straight horizontal lines in the top and the bottom; horizontal rotation around the center. • Horizontal Shift (HSH). Align the horizontal center of the picture to the horizontal center of the CRT. • East West Width (EWW). Align the picture width until the complete test pattern is visible. • East West Parabola (EWP). Align straight vertical lines at the sides of the screen. • Upper Corner Parabola (UCP). Align straight vertical lines in the upper corners of the screen. • Lower Corner Parabola (LCP). Align straight vertical lines in the lower corners of the screen. • East West Trapezium (EWT). Align straight vertical lines in the middle of the screen. • H60 (Delta HSH for 60Hz, if present). Align straight horizontal lines if NTSC system is used (60 Hz) i.s.o. PAL (50 Hz). Default value is “9”. Vertical • Service blanking (SBL). Switch the blanking of the lower half of the screen “on” or “off” (to be used in combination with the vertical slope alignment). • Vertical Shift (VSH). Align the vertical centering so that the test pattern is located vertically in the middle. Repeat the 'vertical amplitude' alignment if necessary. • Vertical slope (VS). Align the vertical center of the picture to the vertical center of the CRT. This is the first of the vertical alignments to perform. For an easy alignment, set SBL to “on”. • Vertical Amplitude (VAM). Align the vertical amplitude so that the complete test pattern is visible. • Vertical S-Correction (VSC). Align the vertical linearity, meaning that vertical intervals of a grid pattern must be equal over the entire screen height. • Vertical Zoom (VX, if present). The vertical zoom is added in for the purpose of development. It helps the designer to set proper values for the movie expand or movie(16x9) compress. Default value is “25”. • V60 (Delta VAM for 60Hz, if present). Align straight vertical lines if NTSC system (60 Hz) is used i.s.o. PAL (50 Hz). Default value is “-2”. In the next table, you will find the GEOMETRY default values for the different sets. Table 8-4 Default geometry values Alignment
Default values
HP (Horizontal parallelogram)
31
HB (Horizontal Bow)
31
HSH (Horizontal shift)
26
EWW (EW width)
37
EWP (EW parabola width)
10
EWT (EW trapezium)
26
UCP (EW upper corner parabola)
30
LCP (EW lower corner parabola)
40
VSH (Vertical Shift)
8.3.5
26
VS (Vertical slope)
37
VAM (Vertical amplitude)
30
VSC (Vertical S-Correction)
25
Audio No alignments are needed for the audio sub menu. Use the given default values.
QSS (Quasi Split Sound) • For NICAM/2CS sound system (EU/AP, except for APNTSC), set to “On”. • For AV-Stereo sound system (sets without NICAM), set to “On”. • For all other sets (NAFTA/LATAM/AP-NTSC), set to “Off”. FMI (Freq. Modulation Intercarrier) • For NICAM/2CS sound system (EU/AP, except for APNTSC), set to “On”. • For AV-Stereo sound system (sets without NICAM), set to “Off”. • For dBx/non-dBx sound systems, set to “On”, NICAM Alignment • For sets with NICAM/2CS (EU/AP, except for AP-NTSC) sound system, set to “79”. • For all other sets (NAFTA/LATAM/AP-NTSC), set to “63” (= don’t care).
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets
L04U AA
9.
EN 81
9. Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets •
Index of this chapter: 1. Introduction 2. Power Supply 3. Deflection 4. Control 5. Tuner and IF 6. Source Selection 7. Audio 8. Video 9. Abbreviations 10. IC Data Sheets
• • • • •
The tuning system features 181 channels with on-screen display. The main tuning system uses a tuner, a microcomputer, and a memory IC mounted on the main panel. The microcomputer communicates with the memory IC, the customer keyboard, remote receiver, tuner, signal processor IC and the audio output IC via the I2C bus. The memory IC retains the settings for favorite stations, customer-preferred settings, and service / factory data. The on-screen graphics and closed caption decoding are done within the microprocessor where they are added to the main signal.
Notes: • Only new circuits compared to the M8 (L01.1 for other regions) chassis are described in this chapter. For the other circuit descriptions, see the manual of the M8 (L01.1) chassis. • Figures can deviate slightly from the actual situation, due to different set executions. • For a good understanding of the following circuit descriptions, please use the diagrams in sections “Block Diagrams, ...”, and/or “Electrical Diagrams”. Where necessary, you will find a separate drawing for clarification.
9.1
The chassis uses a Switching Mode Power Supply (SMPS) for the main voltage source. The chassis has a 'hot' ground reference on the primary side and a cold ground reference on the secondary side of the power supply and the rest of the chassis.
Introduction The "L04" chassis is a global TV chassis for the model year 2004 and is used for TV sets with large screen sizes (from 21 to 36 inch), in Super Flat and Real Flat executions (both in 4:3 and 16:9 variants). There are three types of CRT namely the 100 degrees, 110 degrees and Wide Screen CRT. • The 100 deg. 4:3 CRT is raster-correction-free and does not need East/West Correction (except when used in AP regions), therefore the corrections needed are Horizontal Shift, Vertical Slope, Vertical Amplitude, Vertical SCorrection, Vertical Shift, and Vertical Zoom for geometry corrections. • The 110 deg. 4:3 CRT comes with East/West Correction. In addition to the parameter mentioned above, it also needs the Horizontal Parallelogram, Horizontal Bow, Horizontal Shift, East/West Width, East/West Parabola, East/West Upper and Lower Corners, and East/West Trapezium correction. • The Wide Screen TV sets have all the correction of the 110 deg. 4:3 CRTs and also have additional picture format like the 4:3 format, 16:9, 14:9, 16:9 zoom, subtitle zoom, and the Super-Wide picture format. In comparison to its predecessor (the M8/L01.1), this chassis is has the following (new) features: • Audio: The sound processor is part of the UOC processor (called “Hercules”). • Video: Enhanced video features, video drivers, and Active Control. • Control: Comparable to M8/L01.1 (e.g. Dual clock, I/O mapping, I/O switching). • Power Supply: Adapted to supply the Hercules IC, and to enable 0.5 W Standby power dissipation. Also provisions are made for future extensions like DVD and iDTV. The standard architecture consists of a Main panel (called "family board"), a Picture Tube panel, a Side I/O panel, and a Top Control panel. The Main panel consists primarily of conventional components with some surface mounted devices in the audio and video processing part. The functions for video/audio processing, microprocessor (P), and CC/Teletext (TXT) decoder are all combined in one IC (TDA1200x, item 7200), the so-called third generation Ultimate One Chip (UOC-III) or “Hercules”. This chip is mounted on the “solder” side of the main panel, and has the following features:
Control, small signal, mono/stereo, and extensive Audio/ Video switching in one IC. Upgrade with digital sound & video processing. Alignment free IF, including SECAM-L/L1 and AM. FM sound 4.5/5.5/6.0/6.5, no traps/bandpass filters. Full multi-standard color decoder. One Xtal reference for all functions (microprocessor, RCP, TXT/CC, RDS, color decoder, and stereo sound processor).
9.2
Power Supply
9.2.1
Block Diagram
Vbatt (to deflection & DVD interface board) -Vaudio
) *
+Vaudio
,- &#' + * &# .%/ &%/ 0!
!" #$% &#' ( %
.%/ &#' !
*1# 1 . !
,2 . %#$ 345 ! + *
,- . %#$ ) !" ,6 ,242 ! 7 &# ! 8 .% . #. 8 . 1. 9 :);: 7! E_14480_072.eps 200204
Figure 9-1 Block diagram power supply Stdby_con signal The Hercules generates this signal. This line is logic “low” (0 V) under normal operation and in semi-Standby of the TV, and is “high” (3.3 V) during Standby. Power_down signal The AUX SMPS generates this signal. It is logic “high” (3 .3 V) under normal operation of the TV and goes “low” (0 V) when the AC power (or Mains) input voltage supply goes below 70 V_ac. B (Hercules port) This port is used to switch the AUX SMPS output V_aux “On/ Off”. This is required for DVD and iDTV (for future extensions).
EN 82 9.2.2
9.
L04U AA
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets
Timing Diagrams Power ON - To Standby - Out of Standby - Power OFF
To Standby Power ON
Normal
Power off
Out of Standby Standby mode
Perform hard-reset
Normal
3, 3.3, 6V POWER_DOWN STDBY
+1V8 EXT.
Stdby_con Vbat, Vaudio
STB bit
VT_supply
+5V
10mS
PIP Supplies B Closed Open
Relay status 1s(ref)
2s(ref)
200ms
100ms(ref)
800ms 200ms
2s(ref)
20ms(ref)
10ms(ref 10ms(ref) E_14480_073.eps 200204
Figure 9-2 Timing diagram Standby Power ON - To Semi Standby - Out of Semi Standby Power OFF
Power ON
To Semi Standby Normal
Out of Semi Standby Semi Standby
Power OFF Normal
under start_up Perform sequence fordetails. Hard-reset
3, 3.3, 6V
STDBY
+1V8 ext
Stdby_con
Vbat, Vaudio
STB bit
VT_supply
+5V
10mS
PIP Supplies B Closed Open
Relay status 1s(ref)
200ms
2s(ref)
800ms
20ms (ref)
10ms(ref)
10ms(ref)
E_14480_074.eps 200204
Figure 9-3 Timing diagram Semi Standby
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets 9.2.3
9.
EN 83
Table 9-3 PSU voltage overview
Startup Sequence When the set is connected to the AC power, the rectified line voltage (via winding 4-5 of L5531 connected to pin 14 of IC7531) will start the internal voltage source to charge the V_cc capacitor (C2532). The IC starts to switch as soon as the V_cc reaches the V_cc start level of 9.5 V. This supply is automatically taken over by winding 1-2, as soon as the V_cc is high enough, and the internal supply source will stop (for high efficiency switching).
L04U AA
Voltage
Normal operation
Stdby mode
V_batt
130 - 143 V
0V
V_audio
+/- 15.5 V
0V
+6V
6V
6V
+3V
3V
3V
Stdby_con
0V
3.3 V
9.3
Deflection
9.3.1
Synchronization
Table 9-1 Pinning overview TEA1523 Pin
Symbol
Description
2
Gnd
This pin is Ground of the IC.
3
V_cc
This pin is connected to the supply voltage. An internal current charges the V_cc capacitor (2532), and the start-up sequence is initiated when this voltage reaches a level of 9.5 V. Note: The output power is disabled when the voltage gets below 9 V (UVLO). Operating range is between 0 to 40 V.
5
RC
6
REG
11
Demag
Before the Hercules (IC7200) can generate horizontal drive pulses, the +3.3V supply voltages must be present. After the start up command of the microprocessor (via I2C), the Hercules outputs the horizontal pulses. These horizontal pulses begin “initially” with double line frequency and then change “gradually” to line frequency in order to limit the current in the line stage (slow-start).
Frequency setting This pin is connected to the feedback loop. The pin contains two functions: 1) Between 1 to 1.425 V it controls the "on" time. 2) Above the threshold of 3.5 V, it is possible to initiate "burst mode" standby.
The VDRA and VDRB signals are the balanced output currents (sawtooth shaped) of the frame oscillator (pins 106 and 107 of the Hercules). These output signals are balanced, so they are less sensitive to disturbances.
This pin is connected to the V_cc winding of 5531. It has three functions: 1) During Magnetisation, the input voltage is sensed to compensate OCP level for OPP. 2) During demagnetisation, the output voltage is sensed for OVP and 3) A comparator is used to prevent continuous conduction when output is overloaded.
12
Sense
This pin contains three different functions.: 1) Dectection of soft start, protection levels of 2) OCP, and 3) SWP.
14
Drain
This pin is connected to the drain of the switch or center tap of the transformer. It contains three functions: 1) M-level (mainsdependent operation-enabling level), 2) Supply for start-up current, and 3) Valley detection.
There is a current source inside the UOC at pin 102. This pumps energy in the capacitor connected to this pin producing a pure saw tooth. The vertical drive signals and the E/W correction signal are derived. Pin 108 is the East-West drive (or AVL), and it is a single ended current output. The correction for “horizontal width for changed EHT” from this pin is available by setting the HCO bit to “1”.
As C2532 of IC7531 is charged, it will also start to charge the V_cc capacitor (C2511) of IC7511. Via resistor R3519 and C2511, the TEA1506 starts to switch as soon as the V_cc voltage reaches the V_cc start level of is about 11 V. The V_cc voltage is automatically taken over by the main transformer L5512 (winding 2-3) when the V_cc is high enough (when this voltage is even higher than the voltage on C2511, there is no current flow from C2532 to C2511 due to diode D6512).
The Phase-2 Compensation available at pin 113 gives frame correction for high beam currents. The phase compensation signal is used to correct the phase of the picture from the horizontal drive signal. Pin 63 is the SANDCASTLE output (contains all sync info) and also HORIZONTAL FLYBACK (HFB) input. Pin 97 is the EHT tracking/over-voltage protection pin. The HCO bit can switch on the tracking on EW. If the voltage at pin 97 exceeds 3.9 V, the over-voltage protection will be activated and the horizontal drive is switched “off” via a slow stop.
Table 9-2 Pinning overview TEA1506
9.2.4
Pin
Symbol
2
Vcc
Description This pin is connected to the supply voltage. When this voltage is high (Vcc_start level, about 11 V), the IC will start switching. When the voltage is lower than Vcc_uvlo (about 8.7 V), the IC will stop switching.Note: This pin is not self supplied by internal source like in TEA1507
3
Gnd
This pin is Ground of the IC.
6
Ctrl
This pin is connected to the feedback loop. The pin will control the "on" time between 1 V to 1.5 V.
7
Demag
This pin is connected to the Vcc winding of 5512. It contains three functions: 1) During magnetisation, the input voltage is sensed to compensate OCP level for OPP, 2) During demagnetisation, the output voltage is sensed for OVP and 3) a comparator is used to prevent continuous conduction when the output is overloaded.
9
Sense
This pin contains three different functions: 1) dectection of soft start, protection levels of 2) OCP, and 3) SWP.
11
Driver
This pin will drive the (MOSFET) switch.
12
HVS
This is High Volt Spacer (n.a.)
14
Drain
Connected to the Drain of the external MOSFET switch, this is the input for valley sensing and initial internal supply.
9.3.2
Horizontal Deflection There are several executions (depending on the CRT): • Sets with no East-West correction. The principle of the horizontal deflection is based on the quasi-diode modulation circuit. This horizontal deflection circuit supplies the deflection current and auxiliary voltages from the LOT. • Sets with East-West correction. The principle of the horizontal deflection is based on a diode modulator with east-west correction. This horizontal deflection circuit supplies the deflection current and auxiliary voltages from the LOT. • Sets with dynamic East-West correction. The principle of the horizontal deflection is based on a diode modulator with dynamic east-west correction for picture tubes with inner pincushion. This horizontal deflection circuit supplies the deflection current and auxiliary voltages from the LOT.
Standby Mode In this mode, IC7511 (TEA1506) will be totally disabled. So there is no voltage on the main transformer output. But IC7531 (TEA1523) will still work and will provide the necessary output voltages (6V -> 5V, 3.3V, 3V -> 1.8V) to the Hercules (IC7200).
Basic Principle During a scan period, either the Line Transistor or diode(s) conduct to ensure a constant voltage over the deflection coil (that results in a linear current). During the flyback period, the Line Transistor stops conducting, and the flyback capacitor(s) together with the inductance of the deflection coil creates oscillation.
EN 84
9.
L04U AA
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets
First Part of Scan Pin 62 of the UOC delivers the horizontal drive signal for the Line Output stage. This signal is a square pulse of line frequency. L5402 is the flyback drive transformer. This transformer de-couples the line output stage from the UOC. It has a direct polarization. The flyback drive circuit works with the start-up supply taken from +6V of the Aux supply (and subsequently taking from VlotAux+9V). When the H-drive is high, TS7404 conducts, and transformer L5402 starts to store energy. The base of the line transistor TS7405 is low and therefore blocks. The current in the deflection coil returns from diode D6404.
frequency) taken from the line aux output. Then a series of width-modulated pulses is formed via two inverted phase amplifiers, filtered by an inductor, which then directly drive the diode modulated line circuit.
Second Part of Scan When the H-drive is low, TS7404 does not conduct, and the energy that is stored in the transformer will transfer to the secondary, making the base of the Line Transistor high. Then the Line Transistor starts to conduct. The current in the deflection coil returns from the transistor in another direction.
Upon entering the picture geometry menu in the SAM mode, the following corrections will be displayed. • EWW: East West Width. • EWP: East West Parabola. • UCP: Upper Corner Parabola. • LCP: Lower Corner Parabola. • EWT: East West Trapezium. The East-West drive circuit realizes them all. The settings can be changed by a remote control. All changed data will be stored into the NVM after the geometry alignment.
East-West Correction To achieve a good geometry, dynamic S-correction is needed. The design is such that the tube/yoke needs East-West correction. Besides that, an inner pincushion is present after East-West correction. The line deflection is modulated with a parabolic voltage (frame frequency). In this way it is not so much at top and bottom, and much more in the middle.
Flyback At the moment the H-drive becomes high, the base of the Line Transistor becomes low. Both the Line Transistor and the Flyback Diode will block. There is an oscillation between the flyback capacitor C2412 and the deflection coil. Because of the inductance of the LOT, the Line Transistor cannot stop conducting immediately. After the Line Transistor is out of conduction, the flyback pulse is created. The flyback capacitor charges until the current in the deflection coil reduce to zero. Then it discharges through the deflection coil and the deflection current increases from the other direction. The flyback diode conducts and is back to the first part of the scan.
Panorama For Wide Screen sets, the S-correction of the picture has to adapt between the different picture modes. In particular, between 16:9 Wide Screen and 4:3 picture modes. This is achieved with the (separate) Panorama circuit (see diagram “G”). A signal (I2SDI1) from the UOC controls the state of TS7463. When in the normal 16:9 Wide Screen mode, the signal is “low” and therefore TS7463 is switched “off”. When the 4:3 mode is selected, this signal from the UOC is pulled “high”, switching TS7463 “on”. The relay 1463 on the Panorama panel is subsequently turned “on” and, in effect, paralleling capacitor C2475/C2474 to the S-Cap C2469/ C2470. This changes the overall effective S-correction. The relay is switched “on” in 4:3 and Superwide picture modes.
Linearity Correction Because the deflection coil has a certain resistance, a picture without any linearity issues cannot be expected. L5401 is the linearity coil to compensate for this resistance. It is a coil with a pre-magnetized core. This correction is called linearity correction. 9.3.3 Horizontal S-Correction Because the electronic beam needs to travel a longer distance to both sides of the screen than the center, the middle of the screen would become narrower than both sides. To prevent this, a parabolic voltage is applied across the deflection coil during scan. To create this parabolic voltage, a capacitor called S-cap (C2417/C2418) is used as a voltage source during scan. The sawtooth current of the deflection through this capacitor creates the required parabolic voltage. This correction is called S-Correction.
The horizontal deflection provides various auxiliary voltages derived either directly or indirectly from the secondary pins of the LOT: • +9V: This supplies the Hercules’s flyback driver. • +11V: This supplies the frame amplifier. • -12V: This supplies the frame amplifier. • 50V: This supplies the frame amplifier. • Filament: This supplies the heater pins of the picture tube. • VideoSupply (+200V from primary side of LOT): This supplies the RGB amplifier and Scavem circuit at the CRT panel.
Mannheim-Circuit When the EHT is heavily loaded with a bright line, the flyback time can be increased a bit in this situation. As a result, the scan delays a bit causing a DC-shift to the right in the next line, which would create a small spike on the S-cap. This spike oscillates with the inductance of the deflection coil and the primary of LOT. The result is visible in vertical lines under horizontal white line. This is called the Mannheim-effect. To prevent this from happening, a circuit called Mannheimcircuit is added. This consists of C2415, R3404, R3417 and D6406. During the scan, C2415 is charged via R3417. During the flyback, the S-correction parabola across the S-Cap C2417/C2418 is in its most negative, and D6406 conducts. Thus, C2415 is switched in parallel to C2417/C2418 during flyback. As C2415 is much larger than C2417/C2418, the voltage across C2415 reduces the Mannheim-effect oscillation. Class D East-West Driver To reduce the power loss of the normal used linear East-West amplifier, a class-D East-West circuit is used. To achieve this, the East-West parabola waveform EW_DRIVE from the Hercules (frame frequency) is sampled with a saw tooth (line
Auxiliary Voltages
Notes: • The V_T voltage (to tuner) is drawn from V_batt. • The EHT voltage is generated by the Line Output Transformer (LOT). The Focus and Vg2 voltages are created with two potentiometers integrated in the transformer. 9.3.4
Beam Current The beam current is adjusted with R3451 and R3452. The components R3473, R3453 and C2451 determine the EHT_info characteristic. The voltage across C2412 varies when the beam current changes. This EHT_info is used to compensate the picture geometry via pin 97 of the Hercules when the picture changes rapidly, and compensate the phase 2 loop via pin 113 of the Hercules. Also from the EHT_info line, a BCL signal is derived and sent to the Hercules for controlling the picture’s contrast and brightness. When the picture content becomes brighter, it will introduce:
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets •
Geometry distortion due to the impedance of the LOT causing the EHT to drop. • Picture blooming due to the picture characteristics Because of the above mentioned, we will need a circuit for Beam Current Limiter (BCL) and EHT compensation (EHT_info). These two circuits derive the signal from the picture tube current info through LOT pin 10.
9.3.7
EHT_info The “PHI2 correction” is to correct the storage time deviation of the Line Output Transistor, which is causing geometry distortion due to brightness change. Line EHT_info is to correct the geometry distortion due to EHT deviation. Both of them feedback through the EHTO and PH2LF pin, and correct the geometry through the East-West circuit.
9.3.6
C2463, R3464 and D6457 are for boosting the base voltage of TS7451 during the flyback period and the 1st half Frame period as well. C2463 is charged by D6457 during the 2nd half scanning. R3467 and R3468 are for oscillation damping. The V_guard protection is to protect the Frame stage if a fault condition happens. The V_guard will sense the pulse with voltage > 3.8 V and period < 900 us. Any signal out of this range will be considered as fault, and the chassis will be shut down. 9.3.8
The X-ray protection circuit rectifies the filament voltage and uses it to trigger TS7481 when the EHT is too high. TS7481 is biased at “off” condition by D6480, R3482, and R3483 during normal operation. When the EHT goes too high, the voltage
Tilt and Rotation The rotation control signal is a PWM output from the UOC. It is filtered by R3252, R3246, R3259 and C2259. The DC voltage after filtering at C2259 will be amplified by R3245 (Main Board) and R3390 (CRT panel). The output stage functions similarly as in M8/L01.1 with rotation IC TDA8941P. TS7331/TS7382 and TS7332/TS7381 will function alternatively corresponding to the rotation setting.
DAF
X-ray Protection
Vertical Deflection
The Frame differential drive signal from the Hercules comes from a current source. Resistors R3460 and R3461 convert them into a voltage, and feed them into the differential amplifier TS7455 and TS7456. The output of TS7456 is input to the next amplification stage of TS7452. Finally, TS7451 and TS7453 deliver the Vertical yoke current to the coil and feedback through the sensing resistors R3471 and R3472. D6458 and TS7454 are used to bias TS7451 and TS7453, to get rid of zero crossovers, which can cause horizontal lines at the screen center. The negative supply is from -12V and the positive scanning supply is from +12V through D6459. The flyback supply is derived from D6455, D6456 and C2456. This circuit is a voltage doubler, which stores energy in C2456 during the Line flyback period and delivers the energy to C2465 during the Line scanning period. Throughout the Frame period, the charging and discharging of C2456 works alternatively. However, at the first half of the Frame scanning, TS7451 is “on” and consumes all the charge from C2456. When entering 2nd half Frame period, TS7451 is “off”, so C2456 will gradually charge up to the required flyback supply.
Components R3454, D6451, D6450, C2453, R3493, and C2230 are for average beam current limiting. C2453 and R3493 also control the timing where average beam current limiting is more active or less active.
The Dynamic Astigmatic Focus (DAF) circuit is required by 34RF sets only. It provides vertical DAF and horizontal DAF. Both of the parabola signals are derived through integration by using chassis available signals: • The vertical parabola is using RC integration (via R3403 and C2401) on the Frame sensing resistor saw tooth (Frame_FB). • The horizontal parabola is obtained by 2 RC integration (R3409, R3410, C2402, C2403) on the +9V LOT output. Both of the parabolas are added on the output stage through adder TS7402 and TS7403. The collector of TS7402 emitterdrives TS7401 and is amplified by pull up resistor R3411. D6401 and C2405 provide the rectified supply voltage.
EN 85
The Frame stage consists fully of discrete components. This has the advantage for better flash behavior than when an IC was used.
Components TS7483, R3490, R3491, R3492, and C2483 are for fast beam current limiting (e.g. with a Black-to-White pattern).
9.3.5
9.
across R3482 will tend to increase as well, while the voltage across D6481 is fixed. Up to certain level (triggering point), TS7481 will be “on” and will force the EHT_info > 3.9 V. The chassis will be shut down through a soft stop sequence.
BCL • When the BCL pin voltage goes to 2.8 V, the Hercules will start to limit CONTRAST gain. • When it reaches 1.7 V, then the BRIGHTNESS gain limit will start to react. • When BCL pin voltage goes to 0.8 V, the RGB will be blanked.
Power Down The power down connection is for EHT discharge during AC Power “Off” state. In the Hercules, if EHT_info > 3.9 V, it will trigger the X-ray protection circuit via a 2fH soft stop sequence. The Hercules bits OSO (Switch Off in Vertical Over scan) and FBC (Fixed Beam Current Switch Off) will discharge the EHT with 1mA cathode current at over-scan position. During switch-off, the H_out frequency is doubled immediately and the duty cycle is set to 25% fixed, during 43 ms. The RGB outputs are driven “high” to get a controlled discharge of the picture tube with 1 mA during 38 ms. This will decrease the EHT to about half the nominal value (= safety requirement). When bit OSO is set, the white spot/flash during switch-off will be written in overscan and thus will not be visible on the screen. Careful application must guarantee that the vertical deflection stays operational until the end of the discharge period.
L04U AA
9.3.9
CRT panel The RGB amplifier stage is exactly the same as in M8/L01.1. However, the RGB amplifier IC has been changed to TDA6107AJF or TDA6108AJF. The “A” indication is with gain of “80” rather than “50” in M8/L01.1. The diode D6332 used in the former chassis, to solve the bright screen during start up, is not required because this IC has the error correction implemented. Scavem In certain versions, the Scavem feature is used to enhance the sharpness of the picture. The RGB signals are first differentiated and subsequently amplified before feeding to an auxiliary coil known as the SVM coil. The current, flowing through the SVM coil during the picture intensity transients, modulates the deflection field and thus the scan velocity.
EN 86
9.
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets
L04U AA
During the first half of the intensity increase, the scan velocity is increased (thus decreasing the current density by spreading it on a wider area). During the second half of the intensity increase, the scan velocity is decreased (increasing the current density by concentrating it on a smaller area). The increasing current density transition is sharpened. A decreasing current density transition is processed in a similar way and is also sharpened. In this chassis the SCAVEM signal is different from its predecessor because the Hercules generates the differential SCAVEM signal inside the IC. The supply of the SCAVEM is taken from V_bat through a 1k5 / 5 W resistor. Compared with the M8/L01.1, this has the advantage of getting better performance for the pattern with tremendous SCAVEM current (like V_sweep). In this former chassis, because the supply was taken from the 200 V through a 8k2 / 5 W resistor, the supply dropped significantly during a large SCAVEM current. In this chassis, the drop due to the pattern will be less because of the lower supply voltage impedance. In the Main Board, 1st stage amplification is taken care by 7208 with the pull up resistors (3361, 3387) located in the CRT panel.
9.4.2
Basic Specification The Micro Controller operates at the following supply voltages: • +3.3 V_dc at pins 33, 125, and 19. • +1.8 V_dc at pins 126, 36, and 33. • I2C pull up supply: +3.3V_dc.
9.4.3
Pin Configuration and Functionality The ports of the Micro Controller can be configured as follows: • A normal input port. • An input ADC port. • An output Open Drain port. • An output Push-Pull port. • An output PWM port. • Input/Output Port The following table shows the ports used for the L04 control: Table 9-4 Micro Controller ports overview
TS7361 and TS7362 is the current buffer delivering the current to the output stage. The diode D6361 is to lightly bias these transistors, to get rid of the zero crossover of the stage. After that, the signal is ac-coupled to TS7363 and TS7364 where the emitter resistors (R3364 and R3370) will determine the final SCAVEM current. TS7363 and TS7364 are biased by R3363, R3366, R3367 and R3368. C2387, R3388, R3389, R3365, R3369, C2384, and C2385 are used for suppressing unwanted oscillations. The function of TS7376 is to limit the SCAVEM current from going too high. It basically senses the voltage after R3373 and clamps the SCAVEM signal through D6367 and C2376.
9.4
Control The Micro Controller is integrated with the Video Processor, and is called the Hercules. For dynamic data storage, such as SMART PICTURE and SMART SOUND settings, an external NVM IC is being used. Another feature includes an optional Teletext/Closed Caption decoder with the possibility of different page storage depending on the Hercules type number. The Micro Controller ranges in ROM from 128 kB with no TXTdecoder to 128 kB with a 10 page Teletext or with Closed Caption.
9.4.1
Block Diagram The block diagram of the Micro Controller application is shown below.
# !$$%
&%'
# ( ) *%& )+ !
$!
)
!,+!+ &+- + ,
.!) / .!) .,$/ !$! 01
*%& )+
!$!
01
IR
INT0
31
P1.0/ INT1
PWRDOWN
INT1
30
P1.1/ T0
LED
P1.1
27
P0.4/ I2SWS
(for future use)
26
P0.3/ I2SCLK
(for future use)
25
P0.2/ I2SDO2
SEL_SC2_INTERF ACE/ SDM
E_14480_070.eps 200204
Configuration
P0.2
24
P0.1/ I2SDO1
(for future use)
P0.1
23
P0.0/ I2SDI/O
Panorama
P0.0
22
P1.3/ T1
Write Protect
P1.3
21
P1.6/ SCL
SCL
SCL
20
P1.7/ SDA
SDA
SDA
18
P2.0/ TPWM
VOL_MUTE
P2.0
17
P2.1/ PWM0
ROTATION
PWM0
16
P2.2/ PWM1
SEL_LL'/M
P2.2
15
P2.3/ PWM2
STANDBY_CON
P2.3
14
P3.0/ ADC0
Light Sensor
13
P3.1/ ADC1
(for future use)
10
P3.2/ ADC2
(for future use)
9
P3.3/ ADC3
KEYBOARD
7
P2.4/ PWM3
A (for future use)
6
P2.5/ PWM4
B (for future use)
P2.5
3
P1.2/ INT2
C (for future use)
INT2
2
P1.4/ RX
E (for future use)
-
1
P1.5/ TX
D (for future use)
-
LED
" !
Figure 9-4 Micro Controller block diagram
INT0/ P0.5
ADC0 ADC3 P2.4
Table 9-5 LED signal diversity
Description
32
The description of each functional pin is explained below: • LED. This signal is used as an indication for the Standby, Remote and Error Indicator. Region diversity: – During protection mode, the LED blinks and the set is in standby mode. – During error conditions it blinks at a predefined rate. – After receiving a valid RC-5 or local keyboard command it flashes once. – For sets with error message indication, the LED blinks when message is active and the set is in standby mode.
Pin Name
• • •
Europe
0
LED brighter
Standby
1
LED dimmer
Normal
AP/ LATAM
NAFTA
LED lighted Standby LED lighted LED "off"
Normal
LED "off"
Normal Standby
SCL. This is the clock wire of the two-wire single master bidirectional I2C bus. SDA. This is the data wire of the two-wire single master bidirectional I2C bus. STDBY_CON. The Hercules generates this signal. This can enable the MAIN SMPS in normal operation and
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets
• •
•
• •
• •
•
•
disable it during Standby. It is of logic “low” (0 V) under normal operation and “high” (3.3 V) during Standby. IR. This input pin is connected to an RC5 remote control receiver. SEL-IF-LL’/ M-TRAP. For AP: All L04 AP sets are Multi System QSS set. This is an output pin to switch the Video SAW filter between M system and other systems. – 0: NTSC M (default) – 1: PAL B/G, DK, I Write Protect. The global protection line is used to enable and disable write protection to the NVM. When write to the NVM is required, pin 7 of the NVM must be pulled to logic ‘0’ first (via Write_Protect of the micro-controller pin) before a write is performed. Otherwise pin 7 of NVM must always be at logic “1” – 0: Disabled – 1: Enabled (default) Mute. This pin is use to MUTE the audio amplifier. It is configured as push pull. Rotation. This pin is configured as PWM for the Rotation feature. The output of the PWM is proportional to the feature control. Light Sensor. This pin is configured as ADC input for the Light Sensor. Sel_SC2_Interface. This pin is use to switch between the SC2_CVBS_OUT and the INTF_CVBS_OUT for the SCART_2_CVBS_OUT/ MONITOR_OUT signal. – 0: Hercules CVBS Output (default) – 1: Interface CVBS Output PWRDOWN. The AUX SMPS generates this signal. Logic “high” (3.3 V) under normal operation of the TV and goes “low” (0 V) when the Mains input voltage supply goes below 70 V_ac. Keyboard. Following are the Keyboard functions and the step values (8 bit) for it.
NAFTA Standby
Voltage (V_dc) Step values (8 bit) 0
0-6
Ch +
0.43
7 - 33
Exit Factory (Ch- and Vol-)
0.69
34 - 53
Ch -
0.93
54 - 73
Menu (Vol - and Vol +)
1.19
74 - 96
Vol -
1.49
97 - 121
DVD Eject
1.8
122 - 147
Vol +
2.12
148 - 169
•
•
•
•
• • • 9.5.1
SDM. This pin is configured as Open Drain during the cold start only. If this pin is shorted to ground during cold start, it will enter the SDM mode (for Service use). ISP. This pin is configured as Open Drain during the cold start only. If this pin is shorted to ground during cold start, it will enter the ISP mode (for Service use). PANEL. This pin is configured as Open Drain during the cold start only. If this pin is shorted to ground during that, then it will enter to the PANEL mode. ResetEnabled. This is an output pin to switch the control transistor (pos. TS7202) “high” or “low” for the reset of 1.8 V in case there is a corruption in the Hercules.
9.
EN 87
Integrated sound band-passes and traps (4.5 / 5.5 / 6.0 / 6.5 MHz). Group delay compensation (for NTSC and for PAL). QSS versions with digital Second-Sound-IF SSIF (AM demodulator for free). FM mono operation possible: Inter-Carrier or QSS.
Diversity The following Tuners can be present (depending on the region and the set execution): • Normal tuner without PIP. • FM radio tuner without PIP. • Normal tuner with PIP (main tuner with splitter). • FM radio set with PIP (PIP tuner with splitter). The SAW filter used, depends on the application concept (whether it is a QSS concept or an Intercarrier): • OFWM3953M for QSS Video. • OFWK9656M for QSS Audio. • OFWM1971M for Intercarrier.
9.5.2
Pin Assignments and Functionality Pin assignment of the Tuner: Table 9-7 Pinning Tuner Pin Pin Description
DC Voltages
1
RF-AGC
4V for Maximum Gain < 4V for Strong Signal Condition
2
FM Radio Input or N.C
-
3
NC (Address Pin)
-
4
SCL
0 to 3.3 V_dc
5
SDA
0 to 3.3 V_dc
6/7 Supply Voltage
Table 9-6 Local keyboard values Function
•
L04U AA
5 V_dc +/- 0.25 V
8
N.C
-
9
Tuning Supply Voltage
30 to 35 V_dc
10
FM Radio IF Output/Ground -
11
TV IF Output
-
Pin assignment of the several SAW filters (depends on region/ execution): Table 9-8 Pinning SAW filters QSS Video Pin (item 1002)
QSS Video (item 1003)
QSS Audio (item 1001)
Intercarrier (item 1002)
Input
Input
Input
1
Input
2
Input Ground Input Ground
3
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
4
Output
Output
Output
Output
5
Output
Output
Output
Output
6
-
n.c.
-
-
7
-
n.c.
-
-
8
-
Ground
-
-
9
-
Free
-
-
10
-
Switching input -
-
Switching Input Input Ground
The table below shows the switching behavior of SAW filter.
9.5
Tuner and IF The tuner used in this chassis comes from two sources, from Philips and from Alps. Both tuner sources have the same pin configuration so they are 1 to 1 compatible except for the software, which will be selected by means of Option Settings. Some features: • Multi-Standard alignment free PLL-IF, including SECAM L/ L’. • Integrated IF-AGC time constant.
Table 9-9 Switching behavior SAW filter Condition System
High
Low
M
BG/DK/I/L
Note: The logic level is measured at the base of transistor 7001.
EN 88 9.5.3
9.
L04U AA
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets
Option Settings The option settings for the Tuner type can be found in Option setting 1 of the SAM mode. The Option settings for Option 1 are as follows: • Option Byte 1 – Bit 7: OP_PHILIPS_TUNER – Bit 6: OP_FM_RADIO – Bit 5: OP_LNA – Bit 4: OP_ATS – Bit 3: OP_ACI – Bit 2: OP_UK_PNP – Bit 1: OP_VIRGIN_MODE – Bit 0: OP_CHINA For more details on the option settings, please refer to the chapter 8 “Alignments”.
9.6
Source Select For this chassis, the audio/video source selection is controlled via the Hercules. The Audio/Video Source Select is one of the more complex functions due to its diversity and complex switching. The Audio/ Video Source Select comprises of the following components: • The Hercules itself for Mono Audio and Video Source Selection. • The HEF switch for Stereo Audio as well as Video Selection.
9.6.1
Options The option settings for the Source Selection can be found in Option settings of the SAM mode. The Option settings for Option 5 are as follows: • Option Byte 5 – Bit 7: AV1 – Bit 6: AV2 – Bit 5: AV3 – Bit 4: CVI – Bit 3: SVHS2 – Bit 2: SVHS3 – Bit 1: HOTEL MODE – Bit 0: For more detail on the option settings, please refer to the chapter 8 “Alignments”.
9.6.2
Diversity The basic diversity of the Audio/Video Source Select is between the Mono and the Stereo sets and the number of Cinch/SCART’s as specified in the product specification. The table below shows the Audio/Video Source Select diversity for all regions:
Table 9-10 AV Source Select diversity Pin No. Symbol 51
R/Pr IN3
50
G/Y IN3
49
B/Pb IN3
52
INSSW3
74
CVBS2/Y2
95
AUDIO IN5 L
94
AUDIO IN5 R
73
AUDIO IN3 L
72
AUDIO IN3 R
71
CVBS3/Y3
70
C2/C3
80
AUDIO IN4 L
79
AUDIO IN4 R
78
CVBS4/Y4
77
C4
81
IFVO/SVO/CVBSI
67
AUD OUT HP L
Remark AV1 (CVI)
AV2 (SVHS)
Side (SHVS)
Monitor Out
66
AUD OUT HP R
69
AUD OUT LS L (AUD OUT/AM OUT) HP/ LS Out
68
AUD OUT LS R
59
V IN (R/Pr IN2/CX)
58
U IN (B/Pb IN2)
57
Y IN (G/Y IN2/CVBS-Yx)
54
U OUT (INSSW2)
76
AUDIO IN2 L
75
AUDIO IN2 R
Interface
86
DVBO/IFVO/FMRO
65
CVBSO/PIP
N.C. PIP application
56
Y SYNC
100 nF
55
Y OUT
100 nF
53
V OUT (SWO)
N.C.
93
AUD OUT S L
N.C.
92
AUD OUT S R
N.C.
Table 9-11 SCART Source Select diversity Pin Symbol
Remark
51
SCART 1
R/Pr IN3
50
G/Y IN3
49
B/Pb IN3
52
INSSW3
74
CVBS2/Y2
86
DVBO/IFVO/FMRO
95
AUDIO IN5 L
94
AUDIO IN5 R
93
AUD OUT S L
92
AUD OUT S R
71
CVBS3/Y3
70
C2/C3
81
IFVO/SVO/CVBSI
73
AUDIO IN3 L
72
AUDIO IN3 R
67
AUD OUT HP L
66
AUD OUT HP R
80
AUDIO IN4 L
79
AUDIO IN4 R
78
CVBS4/Y4
SCART 2
Side I/O
77
C4
69
AUD OUT LS L (AUD OUT/AM OUT)
68
AUD OUT LS R
59
V IN (R/Pr IN2/CX)
58
U IN (B/Pb IN2)
57
Y IN (G/Y IN2/CVBS-Yx)
54
U OUT(INSSW2)
76
AUDIO IN2 L
75
AUDIO IN2 R
65
CVBSO/PIP
for PIP
56
YSYNC
100 nF
55
YOUT
100 nF
53
VOUT(SWO)
N.C.
LS/ HP/ MON OUT Interface
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets 9.6.3
L04U AA
9.
EN 89
42,43 44
CRT
49,50,51
RGB/CVI INPUT
Audio Source Selection NVM
The signals coming out of the DEMDEC (internal demodulator/ decoder block of the Hercules) are selectable and consist of the following (depending on the transmission): • DEC L/R (Can be NICAM, FM 2CS, or BTSC Stereo). • Mono (Refers to fallback/forced Mono in Stereo Transmission). • SAP. For L04, the assigned I/O with respect to the Hercules is as follows: • SCART1 or AV1 Input assigned to Audio In 5. • SCART2 or AV2 Input assigned to Audio In 3. • Side AV Input assigned to Audio In 4. • External Interface Input assigned to Audio In 2. • SCART1 Output assigned to SCART Output. • SCART2 Output (EU) or Monitor Output (LA/NA/AP) assigned to Headphone Output. • Constant Level Output assigned to Loudspeaker Output. 9.6.4
Video Processing
Some features: • Full YUV-loop interface (alternative functions: DVD, RGB or Y/C). • Internal OSD insertion (not Saturation or Contrast controlled). • Double window implementation. • Linear / non linear scaling for 16:9 sets. • Tint (hue) on UV signals (including DVD). • Peaking, Coring, Black \ Blue \ White-stretch. • Transfer-Ratio and Scavem (also on TXT). Features The features included in the Hercules are as follows: • Brightness Control. • Contrast Control. • Saturation Control. • Sharpness Control. • Peak White Limiter. • Beam Current Limiter. • Black Stretch (Contrast Plus). For sets with the TDA9178, there are two extra features: • Luminance Transient Improvement (LTI). • Color Transient Improvement (CTI). 9.7.2
VI DEO SAW
24 25
53,54,55
HERCULES
57,58 59
Block Diagram Following diagram is the block diagram of the video processing part:
LTI/CTI
SW AUDIO SAW
29,30
95,94,80,79, 78,77,76,75, 74,73,72,71,70
PIP/ DVD 86,81, 67,66
68,69
65
CVBS/AUDIO REAR/SIDE INPUT/OUTPUT
AUDIO AM P
Video Source Selection
The Video Processor is basically the Hercules and the TDA9178 (CTI/LTI). Video processing is done in these two chips such as the Brightness Control, Contrast Control and so on.
9.7.1
TUNER
MONITOR OUT
Video source selection is done inside the Hercules. Therefore it provides a video switch with 3 external CVBS inputs and a CVBS output. All CVBS inputs can be used as Y-input for Y/C signals. However, only 2 Y/C sources can be selected because the circuit has 2 chroma inputs. All input signals are converted to YUV, and looped through an external interface. This to enable picture improvement features (like LTI/CTI) or PIP.
9.7
20 21
E_14480_071.eps 200204
Figure 9-5 Video processing block diagram 9.7.3
LTI/CTI The TDA9178 is an I2C-bus controlled IC (INCREDIBLE chip) with YUV interface. This IC can do mainly histogram processing, color transient improvement (CTI) and line transient improvement (LTI). • Luminance Vector Processing involves histogram function, which provides scene dependent contrast improvement, adaptive black and white point stretching. • Color Vector Processing involves skin tone correction, green enhancement and blue stretch. • Spectral Processor involves step improvement processing, contour processing, smart sharpness control, color dependant sharpness and Color Transient Improvement. • Noise detector, feature mode detector and cue flash functions. • Demonstration mode shows all the improvement features in one picture. Table 9-12 Pinning overview TDA9178 Pin Symbol
Description
1
SC
Sandcastle input pin
2
n.c.
Not connected pin
3
ADEXT1
External AD-conversion #1 input pin
4
ADEXT2
External AD-conversion #2 input pin
5
ADEXT3
External AD-conversion #3 input pin
6
Y in
Luminance input pin
7
ADR
Address selection input pin
8
U in
-(B-Y) signal input pin
9
V in
-(R-Y) signal input pin
10
TP
Testpin, connected to ground
11
SCL
I2C-bus: clock input pin
12
n.c.
Not connected pin
13
n.c.
Not connected pin
14
SDA
I2C-bus: data input pin
15
DECDIG
Decoupling digital supply
16
V out
-(R-Y) signal output pin
17
U out
-(B-Y) signal output pin
18
V ee
Ground pin
19
Y out
Luminance output pin
20
V cc
Supply-voltage pin
21
S out
Luminance output for SCAVEM
22
CF
Cue-flash output pin
23
n.c.
Not connected pin
24
n.c.
Not connected pin
EN 90 9.7.4
9.
L04U AA
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets
The option settings allow for process of the video as per set specification. The option settings can be found in “Option 2” and “Option 6” in the SAM mode. The option settings are as follows: • Option Byte 2 – Bit 7: – Bit 6 :OP_GREEN_UI – Bit 5: OP_CHANNEL_NAMING, – Bit 4: OP_LTI, – Bit 3: OP_TILT, – Bit 2: OP_FINE_TUNING – Bit 1: OP_PIP_PHILIPS_TUNER, – Bit 0: OP_HUE, • Option Byte 6 – Bit 7: OP_PERSONAL_ZAPPING, – Bit 6: – Bit 5: OP_FMTRAP – Bit 4: OP_COMBFILTER – Bit 3: OP_ACTIVE_CONTROL – Bit 2: OP_VIDEO_TEXT – Bit 1 :OP_LIGHT_SENSOR, – Bit 0: OP_DUAL_TEXT For more details on the option settings, please refer to the chapter 8 “Alignments”.
9.8
In this chassis, the analog decoder is used in two cases: • It is used for AM Sound demodulation in the Europe SECAM LL’ transmission. • It is used for all FM demodulation in AP AV-Stereo sets.
For the case of NAFTA and LATAM, there is only one transmission standard, which is the M standard. The diversity then will be based on whether it has a dBx noise reduction or a Non-dBx (no dBx noise reduction). For the case of AP, the standard consists of BG/DK/I/M for a Multi-System set. The diversity here will then depends on the region. AP China can have a Multi-System and I/DK version. For India, it might only be BG standard.
•
9.8.2
Functionality The features available in the Hercules are as follows: • Treble and Bass Control. • Surround Sound Effect that includes: – Incredible Stereo. – Incredible Mono. – 3D Sound (not for AV Stereo). – TruSurround (not for AV Stereo). – Virtual Dolby Surround, VDS422 (not for AV Stereo). – Virtual Dolby Surround, VDS423 (not for AV Stereo). – Dolby Pro-Logic (not for AV Stereo). • Bass Feature that includes: – Dynamic Ultra-Bass. – Dynamic Bass Enhancement. – BBE (not for AV Stereo). • Auto-Volume Leveler. • 5 Band Equalizer. • Loudness Control. All the features stated are available for the Full Stereo versions and limited features for the AV Stereo
Audio Processing The audio decoding is done entirely via the Hercules. The IF output from the Tuner is fed directly to either the Video-IF or the Sound-IF input depending on the type of concept chosen. There are mainly two types of decoder in the Hercules, an analog decoder that decodes only Mono, regardless of any standards, and a digital decoder (or DEMDEC) that can decode both Mono as well as Stereo, again regardless of any standards.
9.8.1
•
Options
9.9
Audio Amplifier The audio amplifier part is very straightforward. It uses the integrated power amplifier TDA2616Q, and delivers a maximum output of 2 x 10 W_rms. The maximum operating condition for this amplifier is 21 V unloaded. Normal operating supply is from 7.5 V to 16 V. Muting is done via the VOLUME_MUTE line connected to pin 2 of the amplifier-IC and coming from the UOC. The following table shows pin functionality of the Audio Amplifier:
Diversity Table 9-13 Pinning overview TDA2616 The diversity for the Audio decoding can be broken up into two main concepts: • The Quasi Split Sound concept used in Europe and some AP sets. • The Inter Carrier concept, used in NAFTA and LATAM. The UOC-III family makes no difference anymore between QSS- and Intercarrier IF, nearly all types are softwareswitchable between the two SAW-filter constructions. Simple data settings are required for the set to determine whether it is using the Inter Carrier or the QSS concept. These settings are done via the “QSS” and “FMI” bit found in SAM mode. Due to the diversity involved, the data for the 2 bits are being placed in the NVM location and it is required to write once during startup. On top of that, it can be further broken down into various systems depending on the region. The systems or region chosen, will in turn affect the type of sound standard that is/are allowed to be decoded. • For the case of Europe, the standard consists of BG/DK/I/ LL’ for a Multi-System set. There are also versions of Eastern Europe and Western Europe set and the standard for decoding will be BG/DK and I/DK respectively. FM Radio is a feature diversity for the Europe sets. The same version can have either FM Radio or not, independent of the system (e.g. sets with BG/DK/I/LL’ can have or not have FM radio).
Pin Pin Name
Normal Operation
1
Input Left
2
Mute
Input AC signal 16 V_dc
3
Ground
0V
4
Output L Channel
AC waveform
5
Supply Voltage (negative)
-16 V_dc
6
Output R Channel
AC waveform
7
Supply Voltage (positive)
+ 16 V_dc
8
Inverting inputs L and R
0V
9
Input Right
Input AC signal
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets 9.10 Abbreviation list 2CS ACI
ADC AFC
AFT AGC
AM AP AR ATS AV AVL BCL B/G BTSC
CC CCC ComPair CRT CSM CTI
CVBS CVI DAC DBX D/K DFU DNR DSP DST
DVD EEPROM EHT EHT-INFO EPG EU EW EXT FBL FILAMENT FM H HP I I2C IF
2 Carrier (or Channel) Stereo Automatic Channel Installation: algorithm that installs TV sets directly from cable network by means of a predefined TXT page Analogue to Digital Converter Automatic Frequency Control: control signal used to tune to the correct frequency Automatic Fine Tuning Automatic Gain Control: algorithm that controls the video input of the feature box Amplitude Modulation Asia Pacific region Aspect Ratio: 4 by 3 or 16 by 9 Automatic Tuning System External Audio Video Automatic Volume Leveler Beam Current Limitation Monochrome TV system. Sound carrier distance is 5.5 MHz Broadcast Television Standard Committee. Multiplex FM stereo sound system, originating from the USA and used e.g. in LATAM and AP-NTSC countries Closed Caption Continuous Cathode Calibration Computer aided rePair Cathode Ray Tube or picture tube Customer Service Mode Color Transient Improvement: manipulates steepness of chroma transients Composite Video Blanking and Synchronization Component Video Input Digital to Analogue Converter Dynamic Bass Expander or noise reduction system in BTSC Monochrome TV system. Sound carrier distance is 6.5 MHz Direction For Use: description for the end user Dynamic Noise Reduction Digital Signal Processing Dealer Service Tool: special remote control designed for dealers to enter e.g. service mode Digital Versatile Disc Electrically Erasable and Programmable Read Only Memory Extra High Tension Extra High Tension information Electronic Programming Guide Europe East West, related to horizontal deflection of the set External (source), entering the set via SCART or Cinch Fast Blanking: DC signal accompanying RGB signals Filament of CRT Field Memory or Frequency Modulation Horizontal sync signal Headphone Monochrome TV system. Sound carrier distance is 6.0 MHz Integrated IC bus Intermediate Frequency
IIC ITV LATAM LED L/L'
LS M/N NC NICAM
NTSC
NVM OB OC OP OSD PAL
PCB PLL
POR PTP RAM RC RGB ROM SDAM SAP SC S/C SCL SDA SECAM
SIF SS STBY SVHS SW THD TXT uP UOC V V_BAT V-chip VCR WYSIWYR
XTAL YC
L04U AA
9.
EN 91
Integrated IC bus Institutional TV Latin American countries like Brazil, Argentina, etc. Light Emitting Diode Monochrome TV system. Sound carrier distance is 6.5 MHz. L' is Band I, L is all bands except for Band I Large Screen or Loudspeaker Monochrome TV system. Sound carrier distance is 4.5 MHz Not Connected Near Instantaneous Compounded Audio Multiplexing. This is a digital sound system, mainly used in Europe. National Television Standard Committee. Color system mainly used in North America and Japan. Color carrier NTSC M/N = 3.579545 MHz, NTSC 4.43 = 4.433619 MHz (this is a VCR norm, it is not transmitted off-air) Non Volatile Memory: IC containing TV related data e.g. alignments Option Bit Open Circuit Option Byte On Screen Display Phase Alternating Line. Color system mainly used in West Europe (color carrier = 4.433619 MHz) and South America (color carrier PAL M = 3.575612 MHz and PAL N = 3.582056 MHz) Printed Circuit board Phase Locked Loop. Used for e.g. FST tuning systems. The customer can give directly the desired frequency Power-On Reset Picture Tube Panel (or CRT-panel) Random Access Memory Remote Control handset Red, Green, and Blue video signals Read Only Memory Service Default / Alignment Mode Second Audio Program Sandcastle: pulse derived from sync signals Short Circuit Serial Clock Serial Data SEequence Couleur Avec Memoire. Color system mainly used in France and East Europe. Color carriers = 4.406250 MHz and 4.250000 MHz Sound Intermediate Frequency Small Screen Standby Super Video Home System Software Total Harmonic Distortion Teletext Microprocessor Ultimate One Chip Vertical sync signal Main supply voltage for the deflection stage (mostly 141 V) Violence Chip Video Cassette Recorder What You See Is What You Record: record selection that follows main picture and sound Quartz crystal Luminance (Y) and Chrominance (C) signal
EN 92
9.
Circuit Descriptions, List of Abbreviations, and IC Data Sheets
L04U AA
9.11 IC Data Sheets
9.11.1 Diagram H, TDA9178 (IC7610)
This section shows the internal block diagrams and pin layouts of ICs that are drawn as "black boxes" in the electrical diagrams (with the exception of "memory" and "logic" ICs).
BLOCK DIAGRAM Sout
spectral processing
Luminance vector processing
Yin Uin Vin
Y
inputstage
luminance processing
smart peaking LTI VDC
black stretch histogram processing gamma control
U,V
Yout +
output stage
Uout Vout
CDS colour vector processing
Vcc
CTI
colour processing
supply skin tone correction green enhancement blue stretch
ground Sandcastle
delay control
saturation correction
DECDIG
CF
window generation noise measuring
Ôcue ßashÕ
calibrate ADC
featuremode detection
I 2C
ADext1 (low frequencies) ADext2 (low frequencies) ADext3 (low frequencies)
I2C-control
PIN CONFIGURATION
Sc
1
24
Nc
Nc
2
23
Nc
ADEXT1
3
22
CF
ADEXT2
4
21
Sout
ADEXT3
5
20
Vcc
Yin
6
19
Yout
TDA9178 ADR
7
18
Vee
Uin
8
17
Uout
Vin
9
16
Vout
TP
10
15
DECDIG
SCL
11
14
SDA
Nc
12
13
Nc E_14480_075.eps 200204
Figure 9-6 Internal Block Diagram and Pin Configuration
Spare Parts List
10. Spare Parts List Not applicable
L04U AA
10.
EN 93
EN 94
11.
L04U AA
11. Revision List First release.
Revision List
Related Documents
Philips L04
October 2019 55
Philips
May 2020 42
L04 Lowpower
November 2019 9
Philips
June 2020 36
Philips
December 2019 68
Philips
November 2019 58More Documents from ""
Interesante Pensamiento Sistemico
April 2020 30
Daewoo Td-167 Dtq-2134ss
October 2019 49
Philips L01 Parte 2 De 2
October 2019 54
Lactancia Materna.docx
June 2020 28
Philips 42fd9954
October 2019 72